Full text of "International Legislation A Collection Of The Texts Of Multipartite International Instruments Of General Interest Voluem VI 1932 1934"

See other formats

(Etig

This Volume Is for
REFERENCE USE ONLY

Publications of the
Carnegie Endowment for International Peace

Division of International Law
Washington

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

VOLUME SIX
1932-1934

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

A COLLECTION OF THE TEXTS OF

MULTIPARTITE INTERNATIONAL INSTRUMENTS

OF GENERAL INTEREST

EDITED BY

MANLEY 0. HUDSON

WITH THE COLLABORATION OF

RUTH E. BACON

VOLUME VI / 1932-1934
NUMBERS 304-401

WASHINGTON

CARNEGIE ENDOWMENT FOR INTERNATIONAL PEACE

700 JACKSON PLACE, N. W.

1937

BY THE
CARNEGIE ENDOWMENT FOR INTERNATIONAL PEACE

PREFACE TO VOLUME VI

Four volumes of this series on International Legislation, for the ten years
from June 28, 1919, to June 30, 1929, were published in 1931; and a fifth
volume for the period from July I, 1929, to December 31, 1931, was pub-
lished in 1936. This sixth volume covers the period from January I, 1932,
to December 31, 1934. Its bulk is an indication of the unceasing legislative
activity which characterizes the current development of international law.
So many international agencies now exist, so many changes are occurring in
international life, and so pressing are the needs for further organization of the
international community, that the legislative content of international law
is being extended year by year; the year 1934 was particularly productive.

In this volume the texts of some 150 instruments are reproduced. In
their selection, an effort has been made to include all multipartite agreements
which were signed or otherwise brought to a stage admitting of definitive
governments during the period of three years. Mere drafts and
inrtfyWcPdrafts are not included; but this does not apply to the so-called
" draft conventions " adopted by the International Labor Conference, which
are subject to ratification though not signed. Of the instruments included,
all but 28 are indicated to have entered into force. As in previous volumes
of the series, the line has not been drawn to exclude signed instruments not
brought into force; they may have an important place in the history of legis-
lation, and some of them may yet be made effective. When the type of the
volume was closed, 91 of the instruments reproduced had been registered
with the Secretariat of the League of Nations in accordance with the provi-
sions of Article 18 of the Covenant, and, with the exception of the labor con-
ventions, these instruments had been or will be published in the League of
Nations Treaty Series.

The variety of the instruments, with respect to their legal character, seems
to merit special attention. To some extent it is indicated by the titles given
to instruments — in almost all cases the editor has endeavored to reproduce
the titles assigned by the negotiators. This volume contains 43 so-called
conventions, 30 protocols, 26 agreements, 21 sets of rules or regulations, 7
declarations, 5 arrangements, 4 treaties, 2 acts (including final acts which incor-
porate agreements), 2 pacts, 2 proc&s-verbaux, 2 statutes. Other titles em-
ployed are measures, optional clause, provisions. Why was one of these
titles used instead of another? Definite lines of demarcation cannot be laid
down. The choice is sometimes dictated by a tradition prevailing in a par-
ticular field of legislative activity, as in the work of the conferences of the
Universal Postal Union and of the conferences on the protection of industrial
property; some of the titles are intended to indicate the subsidiary character
of an instrument, as in the use, on certain occasions but not on others, of the

Viii PREFACE

title protocol; some of the titles are intended to indicate informality; in some
cases the title used may have a bearing on the competence of particular na-
tional agencies to effect a final acceptance; but in some cases the choice must
be put down to caprice. None of the names used can be said to be a term of
art; nor is any legal hierarchy established among them. In a current pub-
lication— the Chronology of International Treaties and Legislative Measures,
published bimonthly by the Secretariat of the League of Nations— a distinc-
tion is drawn between conventions and treaties, the former term being re-
served for multipartite and the latter for bipartite instruments; this volume
shows that actual usage does not altogether vindicate that distinction.

The international agencies employed in legislative activity vary greatly.
In many instances, they are international conferences meeting regularly
at more or less fixed intervals: thus, the Council of the League of Nations
meeting four times a year; the International Labor Conference meeting an-
nually or oftener; the International Conference of American States meeting
every five years; and the Universal Postal Conference meeting every five
years. Many of the international conferences are convoked ad hoc, how-
ever, and no provision is made for their reassembling. In a few iuta^ces,
by the use of established international institutions, instruments l^rc'oeen
drawn up and opened to signature without the intervention of any con-
ference. The intervention of a single government, undertaking to procure
the consent of other governments — as in the case of the modification of the
regulations annexed to the Convention on Safety of Life at Sea (No. 323) — is
perhaps more rare than in former times.

A striking feature of the international relations of our time is the ease with
which international conferences can now be assembled with a view to legis-
lative action* This is in some measure due to the influence of permanent
administrative agencies, now more numerous than in any previous period of
history. It is due, also, to a change in the attitude of governments which
has come about during the past seventy-five years ; with a few exceptions
the governments of practically all states now appreciate their interest in
welding the international community by the continuance of legislative
activity. In certain fields, traditions have come to exist, and many are the
separate leagues of nations from which states have ceased to contemplate
the possibility of withdrawal.

The subject-matter of the instruments reproduced in this volume covers a
wide range of interests. In some instances, it may clearly be said to be of a
political nature — as for example the Pact of the Balkan Entente (No. 364) ;
in others, it is distinctly technical — the Agreement concerning Statistics of
Causes of Death (No. 386) is an example. In the modern world, however,
political is an expansive term, and not infrequently its connotations find ex-
pression in formulas of a highly technical nature — as in the European Broad-
casting Convention (No. 330). The field of communications continues to
offer the most numerous opportunities for legislative effort, and modern in-

PREFACE IX

ventions in that field have had great influence in extending the bounds of
international action, as is indicated by the agreements on the use of radio
beacons (Nos. 341, 345, 378) and those on various phases of aviation (Nos.
326, 328, 329). Interest in social well-being creates persistent demands for
new legislation, also, as is indicated not only by the numerous labor conven-
tions, but also by the conventions on traffic in women (No. 348), the status
of refugees (No. 350), and the Equal Rights Treaty (No. 363). Health and
plagues of various sorts have long been the subject of international action —
this volume includes a Convention on Mutual Protection against Dengue
Fever (No. 392), an Agreement concerning the Campaign against Locusts
(No. 398), and two agreements concerning bills of health (Nos. 399, 400).
Current efforts to order the world's economy with respect to the marketing
of commodities are manifest in such instruments as the Silver Agreement
(No. 343), the Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Im-
porting Countries (No. 344), the Agreement for the International Tin Con-
trol Scheme (No. 349), and the Agreement for the Regulation of Production
and Export of Rubber (No. 379). In a few cases, however, instruments in
this volume deal with subjects rarely encountered in international legisla-
tion— fof instance, the Convention concerning the Preservation of Fauna
and Flora in their Natural State (No. 352).

A word may be said also concerning the parties to instruments. For the
purposes of this series — as explained in the preface to Volume I, p. xvi — a
multipartite instrument is one to which more than two states are parties.
The Declaration by the Kingdom of Iraq (No. 308) and the so-called Agree-
ment on Collaboration in Rumania (No. 324), may seem to be exceptions to
this criterion, as they were signed on behalf of a single state: but in both in-
stances, the instrument was accepted by the Council of the League of Na-
tions and had the effect of creating relations between the signatory and the
League of Nations or certain of its members. Nor is the so-called Ouchy
Convention (No. 313) an exception; not only were three states signatories,
but it was launched in an effort to enlist the economic cooperation of a larger
number of states. A few instruments are included to which, strictly speak-
ing, there are no parties, but which relate to the functioning of international
institutions — thus, the Rules to Facilitate the Settlement of Economic Dis-
putes (No. 304) and the Rules of Procedure of the Council of the League of
Nations (No. 327). It may also be noted that all of the parties are not al-
ways states or members of the League of Nations; in some cases the parties
include more or less dependent communities — as in the case of the Agree-
ment for the Tin Control Scheme (No. 349).

The number of parties to some of the instruments also deserves a word of
comment. Many of the agreements were designed for universal, or approxi-
mately universal, acceptance. Some of them have been ratified or ac-
ceded to by large numbers of states — thus, there are 45 parties to the
Telecommunication Convention (No. 316), and 54 to the Universal Postal

X PREFACE

Convention (No. 367). Such instruments have become, in a very true sense,
part of the world's statute law. On the other hand, some of the instruments
reproduced are local in character, regulating the relations of states which
form for the purpose a regional community; thus, the conventions on judg-
ments (No. 305), on bankruptcy (No. 351), and the Central American extra-
dition convention (No. 376). Such instruments may have more than a local
interest, however, and in some cases they may point the direction for general
effort.

To a considerable extent, the tendency appears to standardize the formal
provisions of international instruments, dealing with such topics as lan-
guages, the necessity for ratification, the deposit of ratifications, the date of
entry into force, and the possibility of accession. Yet the present situation
can hardly be said to be satisfactory in this respect, for in numerous cases
difficulty will be encountered in determining the precise status of an instru-
ment.

In most cases, the texts of instruments have been reproduced in toto in
two of the original languages, or in the original language and an English
translation. Some exceptions have been made to this general rule, however.
To save space and expense, a few of the instruments have been reproduced in
part only: thus, the labor conventions of 1933 (Nos. 334-338), in which the
formal articles and some of the substantive articles are identical. In the
Telecommunication Convention and Regulations (Nos. 316-321), and the
Postal Convention and Arrangements (Nos. 367-373), some technical, as
distinguished from administrative, provisions have been omitted. Where
the original languages include English and French, these versions have been
preferred as a rule, except in the case of inter-American instruments. With
respect to instruments in the various Scandinavian languages, translations
have been preferred to the original versions. Wherever a translation is
given, it is always taken from some reliable source, which is indicated, as
the editor has assumed no responsibility for translating.

The editor has had the valuable collaboration of Miss Ruth Bacon in the
preparation of this volume. A grant in aid for such assistance was made by
the Bureau of International Research of Harvard University and Radcliffe
College. Grateful acknowledgment must also be made of the kindness of
numerous friends in international secretariats and in the foreign offices of va-
rious governments, who have supplied the editor both with texts and with
information concerning them. Finally the editor must express appreciation
of the editing work done by Miss Ruth E. Stanton of the Carnegie Endow-
ment for International Peace, without which this volume would be far less
usable in form and attractive in appearance.

MANLEY O. HUDSON
CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS
July i, 1937

CONTENTS

PAGE

PREFACE vii

NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS xiv

CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS xxviii

SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS xxxiv

TEXTS OF INSTRUMENTS i

SUBJECT INDEX 973

LISTS OF INSTRUMENTS
IN VOLUME VI

NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

1932

No. PAGE

304. Rules of Procedure to Facilitate the Peaceful and Rapid Settlement of Economic

Disputes. Adopted by the Council of the League of Nations, Geneva,
January 28, 1932 I

305. Convention concerning the Recognition and Enforcement of Judgments.

Signed at Copenhagen, March 16, 1932 6

306. Convention concerning the Protection against Accidents of Workers Employed

in Loading and Unloading Ships (Revised 1932). Adopted at Geneva, April

27, 1932 12

307. Convention concerning the Age for Admission of Children to Non-Industrial

Employment. Adopted at Geneva, April 30, 1932 30

308. Declaration by the Kingdom of Iraq. Signed at Baghdad, May 30, 1932 39

309. Agreement concerning the Setting-Up of Special Services at the Iron Gates.

Signed at Semmering, June 28, 1932 47

309a. Final Protocol to the Agreement concerning the Setting-Up of Special

Services at the Iron Gates. Signed at Semmering, June 28, 1932 71

310. Agreement concerning Non-German Reparations. Signed at Lausanne, July 7,

1932 72

311. Agreement concerning German Reparations. Opened for signature at Lau-

sanne, July 9, 1932 73

3lia. Transitional Measures concerning German Reparations, Signed at

Lausanne, July 9, 1932 , 81

3 lib. Proems-verbal relating to the Ratification of the Agreement concerning

German Reparations. Initialled at Lausanne, July 2, 1932 83

312. Austrian Protocol. Opened for signature at Geneva, July 15, 1932 84

313. Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers, Signed at Geneva, July 18,

1932 94

3i3a. Protocol to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers.

Signed at Geneva, July 18, 1932 IOI

3i3b. Declaration annexed to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic

Barriers. Signed at Geneva, July 18, 1932 104

314. Declaration by American States. Signed at Washington, August 3, 1932 105

315. Additional Act to the Convention of October 23, 1924, on the Transport of

Goods by Rail. Opened for signature at Berne, September 2, 1932 107

316. Telecommunication Convention. Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932 109

317. General Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention.

Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932 133

3i7a. Rules of Procedure of the International Consultative Committee for
Radiocommunkations (C.C.I.R.). Appendix 14 to the General Radio
Regulations signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932 , 178

3i7b. Final Protocol to the General Radio Regulations. Signed at Madrid,

December 9, 1932 182

xiv

LISTE NUMERIQUE DES INSTRUMENTS

1932

No. PAGE

304. Reglement de procedure pour faciliter la solution pacifique et rapide des dlffe-

rends d'ordre economique. Adopte par le Conseil de la Societe des Nations,
Geneve, 28 Janvier 1932 ............................................. i

305. Convention relative a la reconnaissance et a 1'execution des jugements. Signee

a Copenhague, 16 mars 1932 ......................................... 6

306. Convention concernant la protection des trayailleurs occupes au chargement et

au dechargement des bateaux contre les accidents (revis6e en 1932). Adoptee

a Geneve, 27 avril 1932 .............................................. 12

307. Convention concernant 1'^.ge d'admission des enfants aux travaux non-indus-

triels. Adoptee a Geneve, 30 avril 1932 ............................... 30

308. Declaration du Royaume de Tlrak, Signee a Bagdad, 30 roai 1932 .......... 39

309. Accord relatif a la constitution des services speciaux aux Portes-de-Fer. Signe

au Semmering, 28 juin 1932 .......................................... 47

309a. Protocole final a 1'Accord relatif a la constitution des services spdciaux aux

Portes-de-Fer. Signe au Semmering, 28 juin 1932 ................. 71

310. Accord relatif aux reparations non-allemandes. Signe a Lausanne, 7 juillet 1932 72

311. Accord relatif aux reparations allemandes. Ouvert a la signature a Lausanne,

9 juillet 1932 ....................................................... 73

3iia. Mesures de transition relatives aux reparations allemandes. Signes &

Lausanne, 9 juillet 1932 ........................................ 81

31 ib. Prices-verbal concernant la ratification de F Accord relatif aux repara-

tions allemandes. Paraphe a Lausanne, 2 juillet 1932 ............. 83

312. Protocole autrichien. Ouvert a la signature a Geneve, 15 juillet 1932 ........ 84

313. Convention pour Fabaissement des barrieres economiques. Signee a Geneve,

18 juillet 1932 ...................................... . ............... 94

3i3a. Protocole de la Convention pour Tabaissement des barrieres economiques.

Signe & Geneve, 18 juillet 1932 .................................. 101

3i3b. Declaration annex6e a la Convention pour 1'abaissement des barrieres

economiques. Signee a Geneve, 18 juillet 1932 .................. . . 104

314. Declaration por Estados Americanos* Firmada en Washington, 3 de agosto de

1932 ............................................................... 105

315. Acte additionnel a la Convention du 23 octobre 1924 concernant le transport des

marchandises par chemins de fer. Ouvert & la signature a Berne, 2 septembre
1932 ............................................................... 107

316. Convention des telecommunications. Sign6e a Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 ---- 109

317. R&glement g6neral des radiocommunications annexe a la Convention des tele-

communications. Signe a Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 ..................... 133

3i7a. Reglement interieur du Comite Consultatif International des Radio-
communications (C.C.I.R.). Appendice 14 au R&glement general des
radiocommunications signe a Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 ............. 178

3i7b. Protocole final au Reglement general des radiocommunications.

a Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 ..................................... 182

XVI NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

No. PAGE

318. Additional Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention.

Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932 185

319. Additional Protocol (European) to the Acts of the International Radiotelegraph

Conference of Madrid. Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932 192

320. Telegraph Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention. Signed

at Madrid, December 10, 1932 200

320a. Rules of Procedure of the International Telegraph Consultative Commit-
tee (C.C.I.T.). Annex II to the Telegraph Regulations signed at
Madrid, December 10, 1932 250

32ob. Final Protocol of the Telegraph Regulations. Signed at Madrid, Decem-
ber 10, 1932 255

32 1 . Telephone Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention. Signed

at Madrid, December 10, 1932 257

32 1 a. Internal Regulations of the International Telephone Consultative Com-
mittee (C.C.I.F.). Annex to the Telephone Regulations signed at
Madrid, December 10, 1932 274

322. Convention concerning the Preservation of Plaice In the Skagerak, the Kattegat

and Sound. Signed at Stockholm, December 31, 1932 277

322a. Final Protocol to the Convention concerning the Preservation of Plaice.

Signed at Stockholm, December 31, 1932 280

1933

323. Modification of the Regulations annexed to the Convention on Safety of Life at

Sea. Certified at London, January 17, 1933 281

324. Agreement establishing an Advisory Technical Collaboration in Rumania.

Signed at Geneva, January 28, 1933 282

325. Pact of Organization of the Little Entente. Signed at Geneva, February 16,

1933 288

326. Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. Opened for signature at The

Hague, April 12, 1933 292

327. Rules of Procedure of the Council of the League of Nations. Adopted at

Geneva, May 26, 1933 321

328. Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules relating to the Precautionary

Attachment of Aircraft. Opened for signature at Rome, May 29, 1933 327

329. Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules relating to Damages Caused

by Aircraft to Third Parties on the Surface. Opened for signature at Rome,
May 29, 1933 334

330. European Broadcasting Convention. Signed at Lucerne, June 19, 1933 345

33oa. Final Protocol annexed to the European Broadcasting Convention.

Signed at Lucerne, June 19, 1933 363

331 . Agreement concerning a Modus Vivendi relating to the Jurisdiction of the Euro-

pean Commission of the Danube. Signed at Semmering, June 25, 1933 364

33ia. Declaration annexed to the Modus Vivendi relating to the Jurisdiction of the
European Commission of the Danube. Signed at Semmering, June 25,
1933 367

332. Convention concerning Fee-Charging Employment Agencies. Adopted at

Geneva, June 29, 1933 368

333. Convention concerning Compulsory Old-Age Insurance for Persons Employed

in Industrial or Commercial Undertakings, in the Liberal Professions, and for
Outworkers and Domestic Servants. Adopted at Geneva, June 29, 1933. , . 374

LISTE NUMERIQUE DES INSTRUMENTS

No. PAGE

318. Reglement additionnel des radiocommunications annexe a la Convention des

telecommunications. Signe £ Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 185

319. Prptocole additionnel (europeen) aux Actes de la Conference radiote!6graphique

Internationale de Madrid. Signe £ Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 192

320. Reglement te!6graphique annexe a la Convention des telecommunications,

Signe a Madrid, 10 decembre 1932 200

32oa. Reglement int6rieur du Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique
(C.C.I.T.). Annexe II au Reglement telegraphique signe a Madrid,
10 decembre 1932 250

32ob. Protocole final du Reglement telegraphique. Sign6 a Madrid, 10 de-
cembre 1932 255

321. Reglement telephonique annexe a la Convention des telecommunications.

Sign6 & Madrid, 10 decembre 1932 257

32 1 a, Reglement int£rieur du Comite Consultatif International Telephonique
(C.C.I.F.). Annexe au Reglement telephonique signe & Madrid,
10 decembre 1932 274

322. Convention concernant la protection de la plie dans le Skagerak, le Cattegat et

le Sund. Signee a Stockholm, 31 decembre 1932 277

322a. Protocole final de la Convention concernant la protection de la plie.

Signe a Stockholm, 31 d6cembre 1932 280

1933

323. Modification du reglement annexe a la Convention pour la sauvegarde de la vie

humaine en mer. Certifiee & Londres, 17 Janvier 1933 281

324. Accord instituant une collaboration technique consultative en Roumanie. Sign6

a Geneve, 28 Janvier 1933 282

325. Pacte df organisation de la Petite Entente. Signe a Geneve, 16 fevrier 1933 .... 288

326. Convention sanitaire pour la navigation aerienne. Ouverte & la signature & La

Haye, 12 avril 1933 292

327. Reglement interieur du Conseil de la Soci6t6 des Nations. Adopte & Geneve,

26 mai 1933 32*

328. Convention pour ['unification de certaines regies relatives £ la saisie conserva-

toire des a6ronefs. Ouverte a la signature a Rome, 29 mai 1933 327

329. Convention pour ['unification de certaines regies relatives aux dommages causes

par les aeronefs aux tiers a la surface. Ouverte & la signature a Rome, 29 mai
1933 334

330. Convention europeenne de radiodiffusion. Signee a Lucerne, 19 juin 1933 — . 345

330a. Protocole final annexe ^ la Convention europ6enne de radiodiffusion.

Sign6 & Lucerne, 19 juin 1933 363

331. Accord concernant un Modus Vivendi relatif £ la juridiction de la Commission

Europeenne du Danube, Sign6 au Semmering, 25 juin 1933 364

33 1 a. Declaration annexee au Modus Vivendi relatif a la juridiction de la Com-
mission Europeenne du Danube. Signee au Semmering, 25 juin 1933 . . 367

332. Convention concernant les bureaux de placement payants. Adoptee & Geneve,

29 juin 1933 368

333- Convention concernant 1'assurance-vieillesse obligatoire des salaries des entre-
prises industrielles et commerciales, des professions liberales, ainsi que des
travailleurs a domicile et des gens de maison. Adoptee & Greneve, 29 juin
1933 * 374

XViii NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

No.

334. Convention concerning Compulsory Old- Age Insurance for Persons Employed in

Agricultural Undertakings. Adopted at Geneva, June 29, 1933 385

335. Convention concerning Compulsory Invalidity Insurance for Persons Employed

in Industrial or Commercial Undertakings, in the Liberal Professions, and for
Outworkers and Domestic Servants. Adopted at Geneva, June 29, 1933. . . 387

336. Convention concerning Compulsory Invalidity Insurance for Persons Employed

' in Agricultural Undertakings. Adopted at Geneva, June 29, 1933 392

337. Draft Convention concerning Compulsory Widows' and Orphans' Insurance for

Persons Employed in Industrial or Commercial Undertakings, in the Liberal
Professions, and for Outworkers and Domestic Servants. Adopted at
Geneva, June 29, 1933 398

338. Draft Convention concerning Compulsory Widows' and Orphans' Insurance for

Persons Employed in Agricultural Undertakings. Adopted at Geneva, June

29, 1933 409

339. Convention defining Aggression. Signed at London, July 3, 1933 410

339a. Declaration annexed to Article 3 of the Convention defining Aggression,

Signed at London, July 3, 1933 414

339b. Protocol of Signature of the Convention defining Aggression. Signed at

London, July 3, 1933 4*5

340. Convention defining Aggression. Signed at London, July 4, 1933 416

341. Regional Arrangement concerning Maritime Radio Beacons. Signed at Paris,

July 8, 1933 419

342. Agreement of Understanding and Cooperation. Signed at Rome, July 15, 1933 426

343. Memorandum of Heads of Agreement between Holders of Large Stocks or Users

of Silver and Principal Producers of Silver. Signed at London, July 22, 1933 430

343a. Undertakings Supplementary to the Silver Agreement. London, July 24,

26, 1933 435

344. Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Importing Countries.

Opened for signature at London, August 25, 1933 437

345. Regional Arrangement concerning Maritime Radio Beacons. Stockholm,

September 20, 1933 446

346. Anti-War Treaty of Non-Aggression and Conciliation. Signed at Rio de

Janeiro, October 10, 1933 448

347. Convention for Facilitating the International Circulation of Films of an Educa-

tional Character. Opened for signature at Geneva, October II, 1933 456

347a. Proems-verbal concerning the Deposit of Ratifications of or Accessions to
the Convention for Facilitating the International Circulation of Films
of an Educational Character. Done at Geneva, October 17, 1934 468

348. Convention for the Suppression of the Traffic in Women of Full Age. Opened

for signature at Geneva, October II, 1933 , 469

349. Agreement for the International Tin Control Scheme. Signed at London, Octo-

ber 27, 1933 47<5

349a. Supplementary Agreement to the Agreement for the International Tin

Control Scheme. Signed at London, October 27, 1933 480

349b. Agreement for the Tin Buffer Stock Scheme. Signed at The Hague, July

io> 1934 481

350. Convention concerning the International Status of Refugees. Opened for sig-

nature at Geneva, October 28, 1933 , 483

LISTE NUMERIQUE DES INSTRUMENTS xix

No. PAGE

334. Convention concernant 1'assurance-vieillesse obligatoire des salaries des entre-

prises agricoles. Adoptee a Geneve, 29 juin 1933 385

335. Convention concernant rassurance-invalidite obligatoire des salaries des entre-

prises industrielles et commerciales, des professions liberates, ainsi que des
travailleurs a domicile et des gens de maison. Adoptee a Geneve, 29 juin 1933 387

336. Convention concernant 1'assurance-invalidite obligatoire des salaries des entre-

prises agricoles. Adopted & Geneve, 29 juin 1933 392

337. Projet de convention concernant Tassurance-deces obligatoire des salaries des en-

treprises industrielles et commerciales, des professions liberates, ainsi que des
travailleurs a domicile et des gens de maison. Adopte a Geneve, 29 juin 1933 398

338. Projet de^ convention concernant I'assurance-de'ces obligatoire des salaries des

entreprises agricoles. Adopte a Geneve, 29 juin 1933 409

339. Convention de definition de 1'agression. Signe"e a Londres, 3 juillet 1933 410

339a, Declaration annexee a Tarticle 3 de la Convention de definition de

Tagression. Signee a Londres, 3 juillet 1933 414

339b. Protocole de signature de la Convention de definition de 1'agression.

Signe a Londres, 3 juillet 1933 415

340. Convention de definition de 1'agression. Signee a Londres, 4 juillet 1933. .... 416

341. Arrangement regional concernant les radiophares maritimes. Signe a Paris,

8 juillet 1933 419

342. Pacte d'entente et de collaboration. Signe a Rome, 15 juillet 1933 : • 42^

343. Accord entre les pays qui detiennent d'importants stocks d'argent ou qui font

usage de ce metal et les principaux pays producteurs d'argent. Signe a
Londres, 22 juillet 1933 430

343a. Engagements supplementaires & F Accord relatif a 1'argent. Londres, 24,

26 juillet 1933 435

344. Acte final de la Conference des pays exportateurs et importateurs de bie. Ouvert

a la signature a Londres, 25 aoflt 1933 437

345. Arrangement regional concernant les radiophares maritimes. Stockholm,

20 septembre 1933 446

346. Tratadp antibeiico de no-agresi6n y de conciliaci6n. Firmado en Rio de

Janeiro, 10 de octubre de 1933 448

347. Convention pour faciliter la circulation internationale des films ayant un carac-

tere educatif. Ouverte a la signature a Geneve, n octobre 1933 456

347a. Proces-verbal constatant le dep6t des ratifications ou adhesions de la Con-
vention pour faciliter la circulation internationale des films ayant un
caractere educatif. Fait a Geneve, 17 octobre 1934 468

348. Convention relative a la repression de la traite des femmes majeures. Ouverte

a la signature a Geneve, II octobre 1933 469

349. Arrangement concernant le projet pour le contrdle international de retain.

Signe a Londres, 27 octobre 1933 476

349a. Arrangement suppiementaire a TArrangement concernant le projet pour

le contrdle international de 1'etain. Signe a Londres, 27 octobre 1933 480

349b. Arrangement concernant le projet dTun fonds de reserve detain. Signe a

La Haye, 10 juillet 1934 481

350. Convention relative au statut international des refugies. Ouverte a la signature

a Geneve, 28 octobre 1933 483

XX NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

No.

351. Convention on Bankruptcy. Signed at Copenhagen, November 7, 1933 496

352. Convention concerning the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in Their Natural

State. Opened for signature at London, November 8, 1933 504

352a. Protocol concerning the Holding of Future Conferences for the Preserva-
tion of Fauna and Flora in Their Natural State. Opened for signature
at London, November 8, 1933 52^

353. Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail. Opened for signature at Rome,

November 23, 1933 527

353a. Regulations concerning the Transport of Private Cars. Annex VII of the

Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail of November 23, 1933. . 563

353b. Regulations concerning the Transport of Express Parcels. Annex VIII
of the Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail of November 23,
1933 567

354. Convention on the Transport of Passengers and Luggage by Rail. Opened for

signature at Rome, November 23, 1933 568

355. Convention on the Nationality of Women. Signed at Montevideo, December

26, 1933 589

356. Convention on Nationality. Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 593

357. Convention on Extradition. Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 597

357a. Optional Clause of the Convention on Extradition. Opened for signature

at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 607

358* Convention on Political Asylum. Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 . . 607

359. Convention on the Teaching of History. Signed at Montevideo, December 26,

1933 612

360. Additional Protocol to the General Convention of Inter- American Conciliation.

Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 618

361. Convention on Rights and Duties of States. Signed at Montevideo, December

26, 1933 620

36ia. Additional Protocol relative to Non-intervention. Signed at Buenos

Aires, December 23, 1936 „ 626

362. Declaration concerning the Signature of Pacts for the Settlement of Interna-

tional Conflicts by Pacific Means. Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 630

363. Equal Rights Treaty. Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 632

1934
364. Pact of the Balkan Entente. Signed at Athens, February 9, 1934 634

364a. Protocol-Annex of the Pact of the Balkan Entente. Signed at Athens,

February 9, 1934 636

364b. Statute of the Balkan Entente. Signed at Ankara, November 2, 1934. . . 639

3640. Statute of the Economic Advisory Council of the Balkan Entente. Signed

at Ankara, November 2, 1934 640

LISTE NUM&RIQUE DBS INSTRUMENTS xxi

No. PAGE

351. Convention relative aux faillites. Signee a Copenhague, 7 novembre 1933 496

352. Convention relative a la conservation de la faune et de la flore a l*6tat naturel.

Ouverte a la signature & Londres, 8 novembre 1933 504

352a. Protocole concernant la convocation des conferences ulteVieures pour la
conservation de la faune et de la flore a 1'etat naturel. Ouvert £ la sig-
nature a Londres, 8 novembre 1933 526

353. Convention concernant le transport des marchandises par chemins de fer

(C.I.M.). Ouverte a la signature a Rome, 23 novembre 1933 527

353a. R&glement concernant le transport des wagons de particuliers. Annexe
VII de la Convention concernant le transport des marchandises par
chemins de fer du 23 novembre 1933 563

353b. R&glement concernant le transport des colis express* Annexe VIII de la
Convention concernant le transport des marchandises par chemins de
fer du 23 novembre 1933 567

354. Convention concernant le transport des voyageurs et des bagages par chemins

de fer (C.I.V.). Ouverte a la signature a Rome, 23 novembre 1933 568

355. Convenci6n sobre nacionalidad de la mujer. Firmada en Montevideo, 26 de

diciembre de 1933 589

356. Convenci6n sobre nacionalidad. Firmada en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de

1933 593

357- Convenci6n sobre extradici6n. Firmada en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de

1933 597

357a. Clausula opcipnal de la Convenci6n sobre extradici6n. Abierta a la firma

en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de 1933 607

358. Convention sobre asilo politico. Firmada en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de

1933 <5c-7

359. Convenci6n sobre la ensenanza de la historia. Firmada en Montevideo, 26 de

diciembre de 1933 » 612

360. Protocol© adicional a la Convenci6n general de conciliation interamericana.

Firmado en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de 1933 618

361. Convention sobre derechos y deberes de los Estados. Firmada en Montevideo,

26 de diciembre de 1933 620

36ia. Protocolo adicional relativo a no-intervenci6n. Firmado en Buenos

Aires, 23 de diciembre de 1936 626

362. Acta declaratoria relativa a la firma de los pactos tendientes a la soluci6n por

medios pacificos de los conflictos internacionales. Firmada en Montevideo,

26 de diciembre de 1933 630

363. Tratado sobre derechos iguales. Firmado en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de

1933 632

1934

364. Pacte d'Entente balkanique. Sign6 a Athenes, 9 feVrier 1934 634

364a. Protocole annexe du Pacte d'Entente balkanique. Signd a Ath&nes,

9 fevrier 1934 636

364b. Statuts de 1'organisation de TEntente balkanique. Signed a Ankara,

2 novembre 1934 639

3640. Statuts du Conseil economique consultatif de 1'Entente balkanique.

Signes a Ankara, 2 novembre 1934 640

XXli NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

No.

365. Protocol of Good Understanding and Collaboration. Signed at Rome, March

iy» 1934 64*

365a. Protocols Additional to the Rome Protocols of 1934. Signed at Rome,

March 23, 1936 643

366. Protocol for the Development of Economic Relations, Signed at Rome, March

17, 1934 644

367. Universal Postal Convention. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 646

367a. Final Protocol of the Universal Postal Convention. Opened for signature

at Cairo, March 20, 1934 690

367!). Regulations for the Execution of the Universal Postal Convention.

Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 695

367c, Provisions concerning the Transport of Regular Mails by Air. Signed at

Cairo, March 20, 1934 725

367c(i). Final Protocol of the Provisions concerning the Transport of Reg-
ular Mails by Air. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 742

368. Agreement concerning Letters and Boxes of Declared Value. Signed at Cairo,

March 20, 1934 743

368a. Final Protocol of the Agreement concerning Letters and Boxes of De-
clared Value. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 757

368b. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Letters and

Boxes of Declared Value. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 758

369. Agreement concerning Parcel Post. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 758

369a. Final^ Protocol of the Agreement concerning Parcel Post. Signed at

Cairo, March 20, 1934 ...,»,,. 780

369b. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Parcel Post.

Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 785

3690. Provisions concerning the Transport of Parcel Post by Air. Signed at

Cairo, March 20, 1934 791

3690 (i). Final Protocol of the Provisions concerning the Transport of

Parcel Post by Air. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 797

370. Agreement concerning Money Orders. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 797

37oa. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Money

Orders. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 806

371. Agreement concerning Postal Checks. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 806

37ia. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Postal Checks.

Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 8n

372. Agreement concerning Payments on Delivery. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 8l I

372a. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Payments on

Delivery. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 814

373. Agreement concerning Subscriptions to Newspapers. Signed at Cairo, March

20, 1934 815

373a. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Subscriptions

to Newspapers. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 817

818

374. Agreement concerning the Transport of Goods by Rail under Way-Bill to Order.

Signed at Rome, March 31, 1934

375. Treaty of Central American Confraternity. Signed at the City of Guatemala

April 12, 1934 824

LISTE NUMERIQUE DES INSTRUMENTS xxiii

No. PAGE

365. Protocollo d'intesa cordiale e di collaborazione. Firmato a Roma, il 17 marzo

1934 641

365a. Protocolli addizionali ai Protocolli di Roma di 1934. Firmati a Roma, il

23 marzo 1936 643

366. Protocollo per lo sviluppo dei rapporti economic*. Firmato a Roma, il 17 marzo

1934 644

367. Convention postale universelle. Sign6e au Caire, 20 mars 1934 646

367a. Protocole final de la Convention postale universelle. Ouvert a la signa-
ture au Caire, 20 mars 1934 690

367!}. Reglement d'execution de la Convention postale universelle. Signe" au

Caire, 20 mars 1934 695

3670. Dispositions concernant le transport de la poste aux lettres par voie

aerienne. Signers au Caire, 20 mars 1934 725

3670(1) . Protocole final des dispositions concernant le transport de la poste

aux lettres par voie aerienne. Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934. . 742

368. Arrangement concernant les lettres et les boites avec valeur declaree. Sign6 au

Caire, 20 mars 1934 743

368a. Protocole final de 1' Arrangement concernant les lettres et les boites avec

valeur declaree. Signe" au Caire, 20 mars 1934 757

368b. Reglement d'execution de 1'Arrangement concernant les lettres et les

boites avec valeur declaree. Sign6 au Caire, 20 mars 1934 758

369. Arrangement concernant les colis postaux. Signe" au Caire, 20 mars 1934 758

369a. Protocole final de rArrangement concernant les colis postaux. Signe" au

Caire, 20 mars 1934 780

369b. Reglement d'execution de 1'Arrangement concernant les colis postaux.

Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934 785

3690. Dispositions concernant le transport des colis postaux par voie aerienne.

Signees au Caire, 20 mars 1934 791

3690(1). Protocole final des Dispositions concernant le transport des colis

postaux par voie aerienne. Sign£ au Caire, 20 mars 1934. • • • 797

370. Arrangement concernant les mandats de poste. Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934, . 797

37oa. Reglement d'execution de 1'Arrangement concernant les mandats de poste.

Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934 , .' 806

371. Arrangement concernant les virements postaux. Signe" au Caire, 20 mars 1934 806

37ia. Reglement d'execution de 1'Arrangement concernant les virements pos-
taux. Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934 81 1

372. Arrangement concernant les recouvrements. Signe" au Caire, 20 mars 1934. . . 811

372a. Reglement d'execution de 1'Arrangement concernant les recouvrements.

Sign6 au Caire, 20 mars 1934 814

373. Arrangement concernant les abonnements aux journaux. Sign6 au Caire, 20

mars 1934 815

373a. Reglement d'exe"cution de 1'Arrangement concernant les abonnements

aux journaux. Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934 817

374. Accord concernant le transport des marchandises par chemins de f er avec lettre

de voiture a ordre. Signe & Rome, 31 mars 1934 818

375. Tratado de confraternidad centroamericana. Firmado en la ciudad de Guate-

mala, 12 de abrii de 1934 „ 824

NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

No. *>AGE

376. Central American Convention on Extradition. Signed at the City of Guate-

mala, April 12, 1934 &33

377. Convention for the Unification of the Methods of Sampling and Analysing

Cheeses. Signed at Rome, April 26, 1934 840

377a. Protocol of Signature of the Convention for the Unification of the Meth-
ods of Sampling and Analysing Cheeses. Signed at Rome, April 26,
1934 85<>

378. Regional Arrangement concerning Maritime Radio Beacons. Signed at Bor-

deaux, April 28, 1934 851

379. Agreement for the Regulation of Production and Export of Rubber. Signed at

London, May 7, 1934 856

379a. Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934. Signed at London,

June 27, 1935 865

379b. Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934. Signed at London,

May 22, 1936 866

3790. Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934. Signed at London,

February 5, 1937 867

380. Additional Protocol to the Convention of April 10, 1926, concerning the Immu-

nity of State-Owned Vessels. Signed at Brussels, May 24, 1934 868

381. Convention of the Union for the Protection of Industrial Property. Signed at

London, June 2, 1934 870

382. Agreement on the Suppression of False Indications of Origin of Goods. Signed

at London, June 2, 1934 886

383. Agreement concerning the International Registration of Trade-Marks. Signed

at London, June 2, 1934 888

3$3a. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning the Interna-
tional Registration of Trade-Marks. Adopted at London, June 2, 1934 890

384. Agreement concerning the International Registration of Industrial Designs or

Models. Signed at London, June 2, 1934 894

384a. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning the Interna-
tional Registration of Industrial Designs or Models. Adopted at Lon-
don, June 2, 1934 895

385. Convention concerning the Salvage of Torpedoes. Signed at Paris, June 12,

1934 896

386. Agreement concerning Statistics of Causes of Death. Signed at London, June

I9> 1934 899

386a. Protocol of Signature of the Agreement concerning Statistics of Causes of

Death. Signed at London, June 19, 1934 904

387. Convention concerning the Employment of Women at Night (Revised 1934).

Adopted at Geneva, June 19, 1934 907

388. Convention concerning Workmen's Compensation for Occupational Diseases

(Revised 1934). Adopted at Geneva, June 21, 1934 913

389. Convention for the Regulation of Hours of Work in Automatic Sheet-Glass

Works. Adopted at Geneva, June 21, 1934 9*7

390. Convention Ensuring Benefit or Allowances to the Involuntarily Unemployed.

Adopted at Geneva, June 23, 1934 920

391- Agreement for the Non-Application of the Most-Favored-Nation Clause to
Certain Multilateral Economic Conventions. Opened for signature at Wash-
ington, July 15, 1934 927

LISTE NUM&RIQUE DBS INSTRUMENTS XXV

No. PAGE

376. Convenci6n centroamericana de extradici6n. Firmada en la ciudad de Guate-

mala, 12 de abril de 1934 833

377. Convention pour Punification des m6thodes de pr61£vement des 6chantillons et

d'analyse des fromages. Signee a Rome, 26 avril 1934 840

377a. Protocole de signature de la Convention pour I'unification des methodes
de prelevement des 6chantillons et d'analyse des fromages. Sign£ a
Rome, 26 avril 1934 850

378. Arrangement regional concernant les radiophares maritimes. Sign£ & B ordeaux,

28 avril 1934 851

379. Arrangement pour la reglementation de la production et de Pexportation du

caoutchouc. Signe a Londres, 7 mai 1934 856

379a. Protocole con tenant des amendements de 1' Arrangement du 7 mai 1934.

Signe a Londres, 27 juin 1935 865

379b. Protocole contenant des amendements de 1'Arrangement du 7 mai 1934.

Sign6 a Londres, 22 mai 1936 866

379C. Protocole contenant des amendements de TArrangement du 7 mai 1934.

Sign6 a Londres, 5 fevrier 1937 867

380. Protocole additionnel a la Convention du 10 avril 1926 concernant les immunites

des navires d'Etat. Signe a Bruxelles, 24 mai 1934 868

381. Convention d'Union pour la Protection de la Propri£t6 Industrielle. Sign6e a

Londres, 2 juin 1934 870

382. Arrangement concernant la repression des fausses indications de provenance sur

les marchandises. Signe & Londres, 2 juin 1934 886

383. Arrangement concernant 1'enregistrement des marques de fabrique ou de com-

merce. Signe a Londres, 2 juin 1934 888

383a. Reglement pour I'ex6cution de 1'Arrangement concernant 1'enregistrement
international ^ des marques de fabrique ou de commerce. Adopte a
Londres, 2 juin 1934 890

384. Arrangement concernant le d6p6t international des dessins ou modeles indus-

triels. Sign6 a Londres, 2 juin 1934 894

384a. R&glement pour lf execution de TArrangement concernant le dep6t interna-
tional des dessins ou modeles industriels. Adopt6 a Londres, 2 juin
1934 895

385. Convention concernant les regies adoptees en matiere de sauvetage de torpilles

automobiles. Signee a Paris, 12 juin 1934 896

386. Arrangement relatif aux statistiques des causes de d6c&s. Sign6 a Londres,

19 juin 1934 899

386a. Protocole de signature de TArrangement relatif aux statistiques des causes

de deces. Signe a Londres, 19 juin 1934 904

387. Convention concernant le travail de nuit des f emmes (revisee en 1934) * Adoptee

a Geneve, 19 juin 1934 907

388. Convention concernant la reparation des maladies professionnelles (revis6e en

1934). Adoptee It Gen&ve, 21 juin 1934 913

389. Convention concernant la^duree du travail dans les verreries a vitres automa-

tiques. Adoptee a Geneve, 21 juin 1934 917

390. Convention assurant aux chdmeurs involontaires des indemnites ou des alloca-

tions. Adoptee a Geneve, 23 juin 1934 920

391. Convenio para no aplicar la clausula de la nacion mas favorecida a algunas con-

yenciones economicas multilaterales. Abierto a la fijrma a Washington, 15 de
julio de 1934 927

XXvi NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

No, PAGE

392. Convention for Mutual Protection against Dengue Fever. Signed at Athens,

July 25, 1934 930

393 . Treaty of Entente and Collaboration between the Baltic States. Signed at

Geneva, September 12, 1934 93$

393a. Declaration relating to the Treaty of Entente and Collaboration between

the Baltic States. Signed at Geneva, September 12, 1934 940

394. Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Telecommunica-

tions. Signed at Belgrade, September 24, 1934 940

394a. Amendment to the Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to

Posts and Telecommunications. Signed at Prague, February 20, 1935 . 943

395. Regional Arrangement concerning Radiotelephone Service of Ships Operating

in the North Sea. Signed at Lisbon, October 8, 1934 943

396. Protocol on Monetary Stability. Signed at Brussels, October 20, 1934 945

397. Convention concerning Inheritance and Succession. Signed at Copenhagen,

November 19, 1934 947

397a. Final Protocol of the Convention concerning Inheritance and Succession.

Signed at Copenhagen, November 19, 1934 953

398. Agreement concerning the Campaign against Locusts. Opened for signature at

Montevideo, December 13, 1934 954

399. Agreement for Dispensing with Bills of Health. Signed at Paris, December 22,

1934 958

400. Agreement for Dispensing with Consular Visas on Bills of Health. Signed at

Paris, December 22, 1934 962

401 . Agreement concerning Postal Exchanges. Signed at Copenhagen, Helsingfors,

Reykjavik, Oslo, and Stockholm, December 31, 1934 ,. „ 965

40 1 a. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Postal Ex-
changes. Signed at Copenhagen, Helsingfors, Reykjavik, Oslo, and
Stockholm, December 31, 1934 971

LISTE NUM&RIQUE DBS INSTRUMENTS XXvii

No. PAGE

392. Convention sur la protection mutuelle contre la fievre dengue. Sign£e a

Athenes, 25 juillet 1934 930

393. Traite d'entente et de collaboration entre les Etats baltiques. Sign6 a Geneve,

12 septembre 1934 936

393a. Declaration relative au Traite d'entente et de collaboration entre les

Etats baltiques. Sign£e a Geneve, 12 septembre 1934 940

394. Arrangement particulier pour la cooperation dans le domaine des postes et

telecommunications. Sign6 a Beograd, 24 septembre 1934 940

394a. Amendement a 1'Arrangement particulier pour la cooperation dans le
domaine des postes et telecommunications. Signe £ Praha, 20 fevrier
1935 943

395. Arrangement regional relatif au service radiote!6phonique des navires op6rant

dans la Mer du Nord. Signe £ Lisbonne, 8 octobre 1934 943

396. Protocole concernant la politique mon6taire. Signe a Bruxelles, 20 octobre

1934 945

397. Convention relative a I'hSritage et a la succession. Signe"e a Copenhague,

19 novembre 1934 947

397a. Protocole final de la Convention relative a I'heritage et a la succession.

Sign6 & Copenhague, 19 novembre 1934 953

398. Convenio sobre la lucha contra la langosta. Abierto a la firma a Montevideo,

13 de diciembre de 1934 954

399. Arrangement concernant la suppression des patentes de sante\ Sign6 a Paris,

22 decembre 1934 958

400. Arrangement concernant la suppression des visas consulaires sur les patentes de

sant6. Sign6 a Paris, 22 decembre 1934 962

401. Arrangement concernant les ^changes postaux. Signe a Copenhague, Helsinki,

Reikjavik, Oslo, et Stockholm, 31 decembre 1934 965

401 a. Reglement d'exScution de TArrangement concernant les ^changes postaux.
Sign£ a Copenhague, Helsinki, Reikjavik, Oslo, et Stockholm,
31 decembre 1934 971

CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

[This list includes all of the instruments reproduced in Volume VI, and certain subsidiary
instruments falling within the period from January I, 1932, to December 31, 1934, which
were reproduced in Volume V,]

193*

PAGE

Jan. 21 Protocol on Suspension of Certain Payments by Bulgaria. London.
(See Volume V, p. 289.)

Jan. 21 Protocol on Suspension of Certain Payments by Hungary. London.
(See Volume V, p. 431.)

Jan. 28 Rules of Procedure to facilitate the Settlement of Economic Disputes.

Geneva I

March 16 Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Judgments.

Copenhagen 6

April 27 Convention for the Protection against Accidents of Workers Employed

in Loading Ships (Revised 1932). Geneva 12

April 30 Convention on the Age for Admission of Children to Non-Industrial

Employment. Geneva 30

May 1 8 Regulations under Article 4 of the Convention of September 26, 1931,
to Improve the Means of Preventing War. Geneva. (See Volume
V, p. 1098.)

May 30 Declaration by the Kingdom of Iraq. Baghdad 39

June 6 Supplementary Protocol on Suspension of Payments by Germany.
Berlin, (See Volume V, p. 259.)

June 28 Agreement for the Setting-Up of Special Services at the Iron Gates.

Semmering 47

June 28 Final Protocol to the Agreement for the Setting-Up of Special Services

at the Iron Gates. Semmering 71

June 29 Supplementary Protocol on Suspension of Payments by Czechoslovakia.
Lausanne. (See Volume V, p. 302.)

July 2 Proems-verbal relating to the Ratification of the Agreement concerning

German Reparations. Lausanne 83

July 7 Agreement concerning Non-German Reparations. Lausanne 72

July 7 Supplementary Protocol on Suspension of Payments by Bulgaria.
Lausanne. (See Volume V, p. 294.)

July 7 Supplementary Protocol on Suspension of Payments by Hungary.

upplementary Protocol on Suspension of
Lausanne. (See Volume V, p. 434.)

July 9 Agreement concerning German Reparations. Lausanne 73

July 9 Transitional Measures concerning German Reparations. Lausanne... 81

July 15 Austrian Protocol. Geneva 84

July 1 8 Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers* Geneva 94

July 1 8 Protocol to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers.

Geneva 101

July 1 8 Declaration annexed to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic

Barriers. Geneva 104

xxviii

CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS XXIX

PAGE

Aug. 3 Declaration by American States. Washington 105

Sept. 2 Additional Act to the Convention of October 23, 1924, on the Transport

of Goods by Rail. Berne 107

Dec. 9 Telecommunication Convention. Madrid 109

Dec. 9 General Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Conven-
tion. Madrid 133

Dec. 9 Final Protocol to the General Radio Regulations. Madrid 182

Dec. 9 Additional Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Con-
vention. Madrid 185

Dec. 9 Additional Protocol (European) to the Acts of the International Radio-

telegraph Conference. Madrid 192

Dec. 10 Telegraph Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention.

Madrid 200

Dec. 10 Final Protocol of the Telegraph Regulations. Madrid 255

Dec. 10 Telephone Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention.

Madrid 257

Dec. 31 Convention for the Preservation of Plaice in the Skagerak, the Kattegat

and Sound. Stockholm 277

Dec. 31 Final Protocol to the Convention for the Preservation of Plaice.

Stockholm 280

1933

Jan. 17 Modification of the Regulations annexed to the Convention on Safety

of Lifeat Sea. London 281

Jan. 28 Agreement establishing an Advisory Technical Collaboration in

Rumania. Geneva 282

Feb. 1 6 Pact of Organization of the Little Entente. Geneva 288

April 12 Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. The Hague 292

May 26 Rules of Procedure of the Council of the League of Nations. Geneva. 321

May 29 Convention on the Precautionary Attachment of Aircraft. Rome. ... 327

May 29 Convention concerning Damages by Aircraft to Third Parties on the

Surface. Rome 334

June 19 European Broadcasting Convention. Lucerne 345

June 19 Final Protocol annexed to the European Broadcasting Convention.

Lucerne 3^3

June 25 Agreement concerning a Modus Vivendi on the Jurisdiction of the Euro-
pean Commission of the Danube. Semmering 364

June 25 Declaration annexed to the Modus Vivendi on the Jurisdiction of the

European Commission of the Danube. Semmering 367

June 29 Convention on Fee-Charging Employment Agencies. Geneva 368

June 29 Convention on Old- Age Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva 374

June 29 Convention on Old- Age Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva 385

June 29 Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva 387

June 29 Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Agriculture), Geneva 392

XXX CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

1933 PAGE

June 29 Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva. . 39^

June 29 Draft Convention on Survivors* Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva. . . 409

July 3 Convention defining Aggression. London 410

July 3 Protocol of Signature of the Convention denning Aggression. London 415

July 4 Convention defining Aggression. London 4l6

July 8 Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Paris 4*9

July 15 Agreement of Understanding and Cooperation. Rome 42^

July 22 Agreement between Holders of Large Stocks or Users of Silver and

Principal Producers of Silver. London 43°

July 2i } Undertakings Supplementary to the Silver Agreement. London 435

Aug. 25 Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Importing Coun-
tries. London - 437

Sept. 20 Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Stockholm 446

Oct. 10 Anti-War Treaty of Non-Aggression and Conciliation. Rio de Janeiro 448

Oct. II Convention for Facilitating the Circulation of Films of an Educational

Character. Geneva 45°

Oct. ii Convention for the Suppression of the Traffic in Women of Full Age.

Geneva 4&9

Oct. 27 Agreement for the International Tin Control Scheme. London 476

Oct. 27 Supplementary Agreement to the Agreement for the International Tin

Control Scheme. London 4&>

Oct. 28 Convention on the Status of Refugees. Geneva 4^3

Nov. 7 Convention on Bankruptcy. Copenhagen 496

Nov. 8 Convention for the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in Their Natural

State. London 5°4

Nov. 8 Protocol on Future Conferences for the Preservation of Fauna and

Flora in Their Natural State. London 5^6

Nov. 23 Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail. Rome 527

Nov. 23 Convention on the Transport of Passengers and Luggage by Rail.

Rome 568

Dec. 26 Convention on the Nationality of Women. Montevideo 589

Dec. 26 Convention on Nationality. Montevideo 593

Dec. 26 Convention on Extradition. Montevideo 597

Dec. 26 Optional Clause of the Convention on Extradition. Montevideo 607

Dec. 26 Convention on Political Asylum. Montevideo 607

Dec. 26 Convention on the Teaching of History. Montevideo 612

Dec. 26 Additional Protocol to the General Convention of Inter-American

Conciliation. Montevideo 618

Dec. 26 Convention on Rights and Duties of States. Montevideo 620

Dec. 26 Declaration concerning Pacts for the Settlement of International Con-
flicts by Pacific Means. Montevideo 630

Dec. 26 Equal Rights Treaty. Montevideo 632

CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

XXXI

1934 PAGE

Feb. 9 Pact of the Balkan Entente. Athens 634

Feb. 9 Protocol- Annex of the Pact of the Balkan Entente. Athens 636

March 17 Protocol of Good Understanding and Collaboration. Rome 641

March 17 Protocol on Economic Relations. Rome . 644

March 20 Universal Postal Convention. Cairo 646

March 20 Final Protocol of the Universal Postal Convention. Cairo 690

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Universal Postal Convention.

Cairo 695

March 20 Provisions on the Transport of Regular Mails by Air. Cairo 725

March 20 Final Protocol of the Provisions on the Transport of Regular Mails by

Air. Cairo 742

March 20 Agreement on Letters and Boxes of Declared Value. Cairo 743

March 20 Final Protocol of the Agreement on Letters and Boxes of Declared

Value. Cairo 757

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Letters and Boxes

of Declared Value. Cairo 758

March 20 Agreement on Parcel Post. Cairo 758

March 20 Final Protocol of the Agreement on Parcel Post. Cairo 780

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Parcel Post. Cairo 785

March 20 Provisions on the Transport of Parcel Post by Air. Cairo 791

March 20 Final Protocol of the Provisions on the Transport of Parcel Post by Air.

Cairo „ 797

March 20 Agreement on Money Orders. Cairo 797

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Money Orders.

Cairo 806

March 20 Agreement on Postal Checks. Cairo 806

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Postal Checks.

Cairo 811

March 20 Agreement concerning Payments on Delivery. Cairo 811

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Payments on

Delivery. Cairo 814

March 20 Agreement on Subscriptions to Newspapers. Cairo 815

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Subscriptions to

Newspapers. Cairo 817

March 31 Agreement on the Transport of Goods by Rail under Way-Bill to Order.

Rome 8x8

April 12 Treaty of Central American Confraternity. City of Guatemala 824

April 12 Central American Convention on Extradition. City of Guatemala. .. 833

April 26 Convention for the Unification of the Methods of Sampling and Analys-
ing Cheeses. Rome , * 84°

April 26 Protocol of Signature of the Convention for the Unification of the

Methods of Sampling and Analysing Cheeses. Rome 850

XXX11

CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

1934

April 28

May 7

May 24

June 2

June 12

June 19

June 21

June 23

July 10

July 15

July 25

Sept. 12

Sept. 24

Oct. 8

Oct. 17

Oct. 20

Nov. 2

PAGE

Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Bordeaux 851

Agreement for the Regulation of Production and Export of Rubber.
London 856

Additional Protocol to the Convention of April 10, 1926, on the Im-
munity of State-Owned Vessels. Brussels 868

Convention for the. Protection of Industrial Property. London 870

Agreement on the Suppression of False Indications of Origin of Goods.
London 886

Agreement on the International Registration of Trade-Marks. London 888

Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on the International
Registration of Trade-Marks. London 890

Agreement on the International Registration of Industrial Designs.
London 894

Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on the International
Registration of Industrial Designs. London 895

Convention on the Salvage of Torpedoes. Paris 896

Agreement on Statistics of Causes of Death. London 899

Protocol of Signature of the Agreement on Statistics of Causes of
Death. London 904

Convention on the Employment of Women at Night (Revised 1934).
Geneva 907

Convention on Workmen's Compensation for Occupational Diseases
(Revised 1934). Geneva 913

Convention on Hours of Work in Automatic Sheet-Glass Works.
Geneva 917

Convention Ensuring Benefit or Allowances to the Involuntarily Unem-
ployed. Geneva 920

Agreement for the Tin Buffer Stock Scheme. The Hague 481

Agreement for the Non-Application of the Most-Favored-Nation
Clause to Multilateral Economic Conventions. Washington 927

Convention for Mutual Protection against Dengue Fever. Athens. . . 930

Treaty of Entente and Collaboration between the Baltic States.
Geneva

936

Declaration relating to the Treaty of Entente and Collaboration.
Geneva 940

Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Tele-
communications. Belgrade 940

Regional Arrangement on Radiotelephone Service of Ships in the
North Sea. Lisbon 943

Proems-verbal concerning Ratifications of the Convention on the Circula-
tion of Educational Films. Geneva 468

Protocol on Monetary Stability. Brussels 945

Statute of the Balkan Entente. Ankara 639

Statute of the Economic Advisory Council of the Balkan Entente.
Ankara 640

CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS XXX111

PAGE

Nov. 19 Convention on Inheritance and Succession. Copenhagen 947

Nov. 19 Final Protocol of the Convention on Inheritance and Succession.

Copenhagen 953

Dec. 13 Agreement on the Campaign against Locusts. Montevideo 954

Dec. 22 Agreement for Dispensing with Bills of Health. Paris 958

Dec. 22 Agreement for Dispensing with Consular Visas on Bills of Health.

Paris 962

Dec. 31 Agreement on Postal Exchanges. Copenhagen, etc 965

Dec. 31 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Postal Exchanges.

Copenhagen, etc 971

I93S

Feb. 20 Amendment to the Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to

Posts and Telecommunications. Prague 943

June 27 Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934, on the Production

and Export of Rubber. London 865

1936

March 23 Protocols Additional to the Rome Protocols of March 17, 1934. Rome 643

May 22 Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934, on the Production

and Export of Rubber. London 866

Dec. 23 Additional Protocol relative to Non-intervention. Buenos Aires 626

1937

Feb. 5 Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934, on the Production

and Export of Rubber. London 867

SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

No. PAGE

Aggression

314. Declaration by American States. Washington, August 3, 1932 105

339. Convention defining Aggression. London, July 3, 1933 410

340. Convention defining Aggression. London, July 4, 1933 416

346. Anti-War Treaty of Non-Aggression and Conciliation. Rio de Janeiro,

October 10, 1933 448

Agriculture

334. Convention on Old-Age Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933. 385
336. Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933. 392

338. Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June

29, 1933 409

344. Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Importing Countries.

London, August 25, 1933 437

352. Convention for the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in Their Natural State.

London, November 8, 1933 504

352a. Protocol on Future Conferences for the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in

Their Natural State. London, November 8, 1933 526

377. Convention on the Methods of Sampling and Analysing Cheeses. Rome,

April 26, 1934 840

379. Agreement for the Regulation of Production and Export of Rubber.

London, May 7, 1934 856

398. Agreement on the Campaign against Locusts. Montevideo, December 13,

1934 954

Air Transport

326. Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. The Hague, April 12, 1933. . 292

328. Convention on the Precautionary Attachment of Aircraft. Rome, May 29,

1933 327

329. Convention on Damages by Aircraft to Third Parties on the Surface.

Rome, May 29, 1933 334

3670. Provisions on the Transport of Regular Mails by Air. Cairo, March 20,

1934 725

3690. Provisions on the Transport of Parcel Post by Air. Cairo, March 20, 1934 791

Arbitration and Conciliation

304. Rules of Procedure for the Peaceful Settlement of Economic Disputes.

Geneva, January 28, 1932 I

346. Anti-War Treaty of Non-Aggression and Conciliation. Rio de Janeiro,

October 10, 1933 448

360. Additional Protocol to the General Convention of Inter-American Concilia-
tion. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 618

362. Declaration concerning Pacts for the Settlement of International Conflicts

by Pacific Means. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 630

xxxiv

SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS XXXV

No. PAGE
Armaments

385. Convention on the Salvage of Torpedoes. Paris, June 12, 1934 896

Communications and Transit

309. Agreement on the Setting-Up of Special Services at the Iron Gates. Sem-

mering, June 28, 1932 47

315. Additional Act to the Convention of October 23, 1924, on the Transport of

Goods by Rail. Berne, September 2, 1932 107

316. Telecommunication Convention. Madrid, December 9, 1932 109

317. General Radio Regulations. Madrid, December 9, 1932 133

318. Additional Radio Regulations. Madrid, December 9, 1932 185

319. Additional Protocol (European) to the Acts of the International Radio-

telegraph Conference of Madrid. Madrid, December 9, 1932 192

320. Telegraph Regulations. Madrid, December 10, 1932 200

321. Telephone Regulations. Madrid, December 10, 1932 257

326. Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. The Hague, April 12, 1933 . . 292

328. Convention on the Precautionary Attachment of Aircraft. Rome, May 29,

1933 327

329. Convention on Damages by Aircraft to Third Parties on the Surface.

Rome, May 29, 1933 334

330. European Broadcasting Convention. Lucerne, June 19, 1933 345

33 1 . Agreement concerning a Modus Vivendi on the Jurisdiction of the European

Commission of the Danube. Semmering, June 25, 1933 364

341. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Paris, July 8, 1933 . 419

345. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Stockholm, Septem-
ber 20, 1933 446

347. Convention for Facilitating the Circulation of Films of an Educational

Character. Geneva, October 1 1, 1933 456

353- Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail. Rome, November 23, 1933 527

354. Convention on the Transport of Passengers by Rail. Rome, November 23,

1933 568

367. Universal Postal Convention. Cairo, March 20, 1934 646

3670. Provisions on the Transport of Regular Mails by Air. Cairo, March 20,

1934 725

368. Agreement on Letters and Boxes of Declared Value. Cairo, March 20, 1934 743

369. Agreement on Parcel Post. Cairo, March 20, 1934 758

3690. Provisions on the Transport of Parcel Post by Air. Cairo, March 20, 1934 791

370. Agreement on Money Orders. Cairo, March 20, 1934 797

371. Agreement on Postal Checks. Cairo, March 20, 1934 806

372. Agreement concerning Payments on Delivery. Cairo, March 20, 1934. - . 8n

373. Arrangement on Subscriptions to Newspapers. Cairo, March 20, 1934. . . 815

374. Agreement on the Transport of Goods by Rail under Way-Bill to Order.

Rome, March 31, 1934 818

XXXvi SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

No. PAGE

Communications and Transit — Continued

378. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Bordeaux, April 28,

1934 85i

394. Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Telecom-

munications. Belgrade, September 24, 1934 94°

395. Regional Arrangement on Radiotelephone Service of Ships in the North

Sea. Lisbon, October 8, 1934 943

401. Agreement on Postal Exchanges. Copenhagen, etc., December 31, 1934. . 965

Customs and Tariffs

313. Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers. Geneva, July 18, 1932 94

347. Convention for Facilitating the Circulation of Films of an Educational

Character. Geneva, October n, 1933 456

391. Agreement for the Non-Application of the Most-Favored-Nation Clause to

Multilateral Economic Conventions. Washington, July 15, 1934 927

Economic and Financial Relations

304. Rules of Procedure for the Peaceful Settlement of Economic Disputes.

Geneva, January 28, 1932 I

310. Agreement concerning Non-German Reparations. Lausanne, July 7, 1932 72

311. Agreement concerning German Reparations. Lausanne, July 9, 1932 73

312. Austrian Protocol. Geneva, July 15, 1932 84

313. Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers. Geneva, July 18, 1932 94

324. Agreement Establishing an Advisory Technical Collaboration in Rumania.

Geneva, January 28, 1933 , 282

343. Agreement between Holders of Large Stocks or Users of Silver and Principal

Producers of Silver. London, July 22, 1933 430

344. Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Importing Countries.

London, August 25, 1933 , 437

349* Agreement for the International Tin Control Scheme. London, October

27, 1933 476

349b. Agreement for the Tin Buffer Stock Scheme. The Hague, July 10, 1934. . 481

351. Convention on Bankruptcy. Copenhagen, November 7, 1933 496

366. Protocol on Economic Relations. Rome, March 17, 1934 644

379. Agreement for the Regulation of Production and Export of Rubber.

London, May 7, 1934 , 856

391. Agreement for the Non- Application of the Most-Favored-Nation Clause to

Multilateral Economic Conventions. Washington, July 15, 1934 927

396. Protocol on Monetary Stability. Brussels, October 20, 1934 945

Education

347. Convention for Facilitating the Circulation of Films of an Educational

Character. Geneva, October II, 1933 456

359. Convention on the Teaching of History. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 612

SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS XXXVii

No. PAGE

Extradition

357. Convention on Extradition. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 597

376. Central American Convention on Extradition. City of Guatemala, April

12, 1934 833

Fisheries

322. Convention for the Preservation of Plaice in the Skagerak, the Kattegat

and Sound. Stockholm, December 31, 1932 277

Food

344. Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Importing Countries.

London, August 25, 1933 437

377. Convention for the Unification of the Methods of Sampling and Analysing

Cheeses. Rome, April 26, 1934 840

Health

326. Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. The Hague, April 12, 1933. . 292

386. Agreement concerning Statistics of Causes of Death. London, June 19,

1934 899

392. Convention for Mutual Protection against Dengue Fever. Athens, July

25, 1934 930

399. Agreement for Dispensing with Bills of Health. Paris, December 22, 1934 958

400. Agreement for Dispensing with Consular Visas on Bills of Health. Paris,

December 22, 1934 962

Industrial Property

381. Convention for Protection of Industrial Property. London, June 2, 1934 870

382. Agreement on the Suppression of False Indications of Origin of Goods.

London, June 2, 1934 886

383. Agreement on the International Registration of Trade-Marks. London,

June 2, 1934 888

384. Agreement on the International Registration of Industrial Designs.

London, June 2, 1934 894

International Organization

304. Rules of Procedure for the Peaceful Settlement of Economic Disputes.

Geneva, January 28, 1932 I

3i7a. Rules of Procedure of the International Consultative Committee for

Radiocommunications (C.C.I. R.). Madrid, December 9, 1932 178

32oa. Rules of Procedure of the International Telegraph Consultative Committee

(C.C.I.T.). Madrid, December 10, 1932 250

32 la. Internal Regulations of the International Telephone Consultative Com-
mittee (C.C.I.F.). Madrid, December 10, 1932 274

324. Agreement Establishing an Advisory Technical Collaboration in Rumania.

Geneva, January 28, 1933 282

325. Pact of Organization of the Little Entente. Geneva, February 16, 1933 . , . 288

327. Rules of Procedure of the Council of the League of Nations. Geneva,

May 26, 1933 321

364. Pact of the Balkan Entente. Athens, February 9, 1934 634

XXXVU1 SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

No. PAGE

International Organization — Continued

393. Treaty of Entente and Collaboration between the Baltic States. Geneva,

September 12, 1934 936

International Rivers

309. Agreement on the Setting-Up of Special Services at the Iron Gates. Sem-

mering, June 28, 1932 47

33 1 . Agreement concerning a Modus Vivendi on the Jurisdiction of the European

Commission of the Danube. Semmering, June 25, 1933 364

Labor Conventions

306. Convention for the Protection against Accidents of Workers Employed in

Loading Ships (Revised 1932). Geneva, April 27, 1932 12

307. Convention on the Age for Admission of Children to Non-Industrial Em-

ployment. Geneva, April 30, 1932 30

332. Convention on Fee-Charging Employment Agencies. Geneva, June 29,

1933 368

333* Convention on Old-Age Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June 29, 1933 374
334. Convention on Old-Age Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933. 385

335* Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June 29,

1933 387

336. Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933 392

337. Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June

29, 1933 398

338. Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June

29, 1933 409

387. Convention on the Employment of Women at Night (Revised 1934).

Geneva, June 19, 1934 907

388. Convention on Workmen's Compensation for Occupational Diseases.

Geneva, June 21, 1934 913

389. Convention on Hours of Work in Automatic Sheet-Glass Works. Geneva,

June 21, 1934. 917

390. Convention ensuring Benefit or Allowances to the Involuntarily Unem-

ployed. Geneva, June 23, 1934 920

Legal Relations (Special)

305. Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Judgments. Copen-

hagen, March 16, 1932 6

351. Convention on Bankruptcy. Copenhagen, November 7, 1933 496

358. Convention on Political Asylum. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 607

363. Equal Rights Treaty. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 632

397. Convention on Inheritance and Succession. Copenhagen, November 19,

1934 947

Maritime Law and Regulations

306. Convention for the Protection against Accidents of Workers Employed in

Loading Ships (Revised 1932). Geneva, April 27, 1932 12

323. Modification of the Regulations annexed to the Convention on Safety of

Life at Sea. London, January 17, 1933 281

SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS XXxix

No. PAGE

Maritime Law and Regulations — Continued

341. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Paris, July 8, 1933. . 419

345. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Stockholm, Septem-
ber 20, 1933 446

378. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Bordeaux, April 28,

1934 851

380. Additional Protocol to the Convention of April 10, 1926, on the Immunity

of State-Owned Vessels. Brussels, May 24, 1934 868

395. Regional Agreement on Radiotelephone Service of Ships in the North Sea.

Lisbon, October 8, 1934 943

Minorities

308. Declaration by the Kingdom of Iraq. Baghdad, May 30, 1932 39

Nationality

355. Convention on Nationality of Women. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 589

356. Convention on Nationality. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 593

Political Relations

314. Declaration by American States. Washington, August 3, 1932 105

325. Pact of Organization of the Little Entente. Geneva, February 1 6, 1933. . 288

342. Agreement of Understanding and Cooperation. Rome, July 15, 1933 426

361. Convention on Rights and Duties of States. Montevideo, December 26,

1933 * • 620

36ia. Additional Protocol relative to Non-intervention. Buenos Aires, Decem-
ber 23, 1936 626

364. Pact of the Balkan Entente. Athens, February 9, 1934 634

365. Protocol of Good Understanding and Collaboration. Rome, March 1 7, 1934 641

375. Treaty of Central American Confraternity. City of Guatemala, April 12,

1934 • • • 824

393. Treaty of Entente and Collaboration between the Baltic States. Geneva,

September 12, 1934 93^

Postal Exchanges

367. Universal Postal Convention. Cairo, March 20, 1934. 646

367c. Provisions on the Transport of Regular Mails by Air. Cairo, March 20,

1934 725

368. Agreement on Letters and Boxes of Declared Value. Cairo, March 20, 1934 743

369. Agreement on Parcel Post. Cairo, March 20, 1934 75s

369C. Provisions on the Transport of Parcel Post by Air. Cairo, March 20, 1934 791

" 370. Agreement on Money Orders. Cairo, March 20, 1934 797

371. Agreement on Postal Checks. Cairo, March 20, 1934 806

372. Agreement concerning Payments on Delivery. Cairo, March 20, 1934 811

373. Agreement on Subscriptions to Newspapers. Cairo, March 20, 1934 815

Xl SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS

No. PAGE

Postal Exchanges — Continued

394. Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Telecom-
munications. Belgrade, September 24, 1934 940

401. Agreement on Postal Exchanges. Copenhagen, etc., December 31, 1934. . 965
Radio

316. Telecommunication Convention. Madrid, December 9, 1932 109

317. General Radio Regulations. Madrid, December 9, 1932 133

318. Additional Radio Regulations. Madrid, December 9, 1932 185

319. Additional Protocol (European) to the Acts of the International Radio-

telegraph Conference of Madrid. Madrid, December 9, 1932 192

330. European Broadcasting Convention. Lucerne, June 19, 1933 345

341. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons, Paris, July 8, 1933. . 419

345. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Stockholm, Septem-
ber 20, 1933 446

378. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Bordeaux, April 28,

1934 851

394. Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Telecom-

munications. Belgrade, September 24, 1934 940

395. Regional Agreement on Radiotelephone Service of Ships in the North Sea.

Lisbon, October 8, 1934 943

Railroads

315. Additional Act to the Convention of October 23, 1924, on the Transport of

Goods by Rail. Berne, September 2, 1932 107

3 53 - Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail. Rome, November 23, 1 933 527
354. Convention on the Transport of Passengers by Rail. Rome, November 23,

1933 568

374. Agreement on the Transport of Goods by Rail under Way-Bill to Order.

Rome, March 31, 1934 818

Refugees

350. Convention on the International Status of Refugees. Geneva, October

2 8, 1933 483

Reparations and International Payments

310. Agreement concerning Non-German Reparations. Lausanne, July 7, 1932 72

311. Agreement concerning German Reparations. Lausanne, July 9, 1932 73

31 ib. Proems-verbal relating to the Agreement concerning German Reparations.

Lausanne, July 2, 1932 83

Social and Humanitarian

306. Convention for the Protection against Accidents of Workers Employed in

Loading Ships (Revised 1932). Geneva, April 27, 1932 12

307. Convention on the Age for Admission of Children to Non-Industrial Em-

ployment. Geneva, April 30, 1932 30

323. Modification of the Regulations annexed to the Convention on Safety of

Life at Sea. London, January 17, 1933. 281

326. Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. The Hague, April 12, 1933, . 292
332. Convention on Fee-Charging Employment Agencies. Geneva, June 29,

1933 368

SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS xll

No. PAGE

333. Convention on Old-Age Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June 29, 1933 374

334. Convention on Old- Age Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933 385

335. Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June 29,

1933 387

336. Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933 392

337. Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June

29, 1933 398

338. Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June

29, 1933 409

348. Convention for the Suppression of the Traffic in Women of Full Age.

Geneva, October II, 1933 469

350. Convention on the International Status of Refugees. Geneva, October 28,

1933 483

352. Convention for the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in Their Natural State.

London, November 8, 1933 504

352a. Protocol on Future Conferences for the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in

Their Natural State. London, November 8, 1933 526

358. Convention on Political Asylum. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 607

386. Agreement concerning Statistics of Causes of Death. London, June 19,

1934 899

387. Convention on the Employment of Women at Night (Revised 1934).

Geneva, June 19, 1934 907

388. Convention on Workmen's Compensation for Occupational Diseases.

Geneva, June 21, 1934 913

389. Convention on Hours of Work in Automatic Sheet-Glass Works. Geneva,

June 21, 1934 917

390. Convention Ensuring Benefit or Allowances to the Involuntarily Unem-

ployed. Geneva, June 23, 1934 920

392. Convention for Mutual Protection against Dengue Fever. Athens, July 25,

1934 - 930

399. Agreement for Dispensing with Bills of Health. Paris, December 22, 1934 958

400. Agreement for Dispensing with Consular Visas on Bills of Health. Paris,

December 22, 1934 962

Telephone and Telegraph

316. Telecommunication Convention. Madrid, December 9, 1932 109

320. Telegraph Regulations. Madrid, December 10, 1932 200

321. Telephone Regulations. Madrid, December 10, 1932 257

394. Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Telecom-

munications. Belgrade, September 24, 1934 940

395. Regional Arrangement on Radiotelephone Service of Ships in the North

Sea. Lisbon, October 8, 1934 943

War

339. Convention defining Aggression. London, July 3, 1933 4IQ

340. Convention defining Aggression. London, July 4, 1933 4*6

346. Anti-War Treaty of Non- Aggression and Conciliation. Rio de Janeiro,

October 10, 1933 1 44$

No. 304

RULES OF PROCEDURE to facilitate the Peaceful and Rapid Set-
tlement of Economic Disputes. Adopted by the Council of the
League of Nations, Geneva, January 28, 1932.

REGLEMENT DE PROCEDURE pour faciliter la solution pacifique
et rapide des differends d'ordre economique* Adopte par le
Conseil de la Societ6 des Nations, Geneve, 28 Janvier 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. These rules were due to the initiative of the French delegation at the
Preliminary Conference with a View to Concerted Economic Action in 1930. The Protocol
concerning the Program of Future Negotiations, of March 24, 1930 (No. 248!), ante), referred
to the French proposal (Article 2, paragraph 2). By a resolution of October 2, 1930, the
Assembly of the League of Nations instructed the Economic Committee to draw up concrete
proposals (Records of Eleventh Assembly, Plenary Meetings, p. 195) ; and these rules of proce-
dure were the result. On September 23, 1932, the Council appointed the experts provided
for in Article 4 of the rules, to function as from January I, 1933. League of Nations Official
Journal, 1932, pp. 1718-19; idem, 1933, p. 194. See also the protocol on arbitration clauses,
of September 24, 1923 (No. 98, ante), and the convention on the execution of foreign arbi-
tral awards, of September 26, 1927 (No. 183, ante). The explanatory notes to the text,
reproduced here, were drawn up by the Economic Committee of the League of Nations*

BIBLIOGRAPHY. League of Nations Document, E.666 (1931); Proceedings of the Confer-
ences with a View to Concerted Economic Action, idem, C.222.M.l09.i930.II; C 149^48.1931.
II.B; C.269.M.I24.I93I.II.B. The text of the rules is also published in League of Nations
Official Journal, 1932, p. 596.

M. 0. Hudson, "The Friendly Settlement of Economic Disputes between States/' 26
Am. Jour. Int. Law (1932), pp. 35$-"7«

Text from League of Nations Document, C.57.M.32J932 JLB.

CHAPTER I CHAPITRE I

JURISDICTION COMPETENCE

Article i.1 Only Members of the Article I.1 Seuls les Membres de
League and States non-members la Soci6t6 des Nations et les Etats
may apply to the Experts for the non membres ont qualit6 pour re-
peaceful settlement of an economic courir aux experts en vue du r£gle-
dispute arising between them. ment pacifique d'un diflferend d'ordre

Economique surgi entre eux.

Art. 2. A dispute can only be Art. 2. Les experts ne sont val-
validly brought before the Experts ablement saisis que par une requite
by a joint application from the commune des parties en cause.
Parties to the case.

1 This means that only Governments can apply, and not individuals.

1 La redaction adopted a pour but d'indiquer que le recours a la procedure envisaged est
reserve" aux gouvernements, i Texclusion des particuliers.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 304

Art. 3.1 The jurisdiction of the
Experts shall extend to all disputes
concerned with matters of an eco-
nomic nature.

CHAPTER II

APPOINTMENT OF THE EXPERTS

Art. 4.2 The Experts, to the num-
ber of fourteen, shall be appointed by
the Council on the proposal of the
Economic Committee of the League.

The Experts must:
(a) Be of different nationalities;
(6) Be persons enjoying the high-
est esteem;

(d) Be familiar with the problems
involved in the regulation of eco-
nomic relations between countries,
and in particular with matters
usually forming the subject of com-
mercial treaties and other economic
agreements.

Art, 5. The Experts shall be ap-
pointed for a period of five years.
Their appointment may be renewed.

Art. 3.1 La competence des ex-
perts s'£tend & tous les differends
portant sur des matures d'ordre
6conornique.

CHAPITRE II

NOMINATION DES EXPERTS

Art. 4.2 Les experts, au nombre
de quatorze, sont nomm6s par le
Conseil, sur les propositions du
Comit6 6conomique de la Soci6te
des Nations.

Les experts devront:

a) Etre de nationality differente;

&) Jouir de la plus haute con-
sideration morale;

c) Poss6der une competence no-
toire en matiere economique au sens
le plus large;

d) Etre familiarises avec les pro-
blemes que pose 1 'ajustement des rela-
tions economiques entre les pays et
en particulier avec les matieres
faisant habituellement 1'objet des
trait6s de commerce et autres ac-
cords economiques.

Art. 5. Les experts sont nommes
pour une periode de cinq ans. Leur
mandat peut gtre renouve!6.

1 The Experts are given the widest jurisdiction, as their consultation is optional.

2 The Economic Committee experienced some difficulty in deciding the number of
Experts.

The Experts must not be too numerous, so that there may be a sort of continuity and uni-
formity in their doctrine.

The Economic Committee thought that the case-law built up by the Experts might be a
useful guide for future decisions, recommendations and opinions, though it would not neces-
sarily form a precedent in the legal sense given to the term "precedent" in Anglo-Saxon
countries.

On the other hand, the Experts must not be too few, so that they may include persons
versed in the economic conditions of the principal countries and the various branches of
national economy. States, too, should be allowed a certain latitude of choice.

1 La competence des experts est etablie de la maniere la plus large, en tenant compte du
fait que le recours aux experts est purement facultatif .

2 Le Comit& economique a eprouv& quelques difficultes dans la determination du nombre
d'experts & nommer.

II convenait que ce nombre ne nit pas trop grand, afin de pouvoir compter sur une sorte de
continuite et d'uniformite de doctrine de la part de ces experts.

Dans la pensee du Comite economique, la jurisprudence qu'ils pourront, par leur action,
arriver a constituer, pourra servir utilement de guide pour les futures d6cisions, recomman-
dations et avis, sans que 1'on doive toutefois y attacher la yaleur d'un precedent, au sens
juridique que donnent les pays anglo-saxons a cette expression.

D'autre part, le nombre de ces experts ne doit pas non plus etre trpp restfeint, afin cju'il
puisse comprendre des personnes au courant des conditions economiques des pays princi-
paux, ainsi que des differentes branches de Teconomie. Enfin, il importe que les Etats
aient une certaine latitude pour exercer leur choix.

Jan. 28, 1932 PEACEFUL SETTLEMENT OF ECONOMIC DISPUTES

They shall personally perform
their duties.

If an Expert dies or resigns, he
shall be replaced for the remainder
of his term of office by a person
appointed in accordance with the
provisions of Article 4.

On the expiry of their term of
office, the Experts shall continue to
deal with any cases that may pre-
viously have been submitted to
them and are not concluded.

CHAPTER III
PROCEDURE

Art. 6. The application provided
for in Article 2 above shall be ad-
dressed to the Secretary-General of
the League of Nations.

It shall be drawn up by common
agreement between the Parties to
the case, and must bear their signa-
tures.

The application shall state :

(a) The subject of the dispute and
the Parties to the case ;

(J) The number of Experts to be
selected;

(c) The nature of the decision the
Expert or Experts are requested to
give (advisory opinion, conciliation
or arbitration) ;

(d) The names of the Experts
chosen or the request to apply Arti-
cles 7 and 8.

Art. 7. If the Parties have chosen
the Experts themselves, the Experts
shall in turn themselves appoint
their President.

Art. 8. If the Parties themselves
have not chosen the Experts in their
application, the choice shall be made
by the Chairman of the Economic
Committee. For this purpose the
Secretary-General shall send him a
copy of the application.

Art. 9. Should the Chairman of
the Economic Committee be pre-
vented from making a choice, or be
a national of one of the Parties, the

Us doivent exercer personnelle-
ment leurs fonctions.

En cas de d£c£s ou de demission
d'un expert, celui-ci est, pour la
dur6e du mandat inachev6, remplac£
par une personne nomm6e conform6-
ment aux dispositions de Tarticle 4.

A Texpiration de leur mandat, les
experts continueront & singer dans les
affaires dont ils pourraient £tre
saisis.

CHAPITRE III

PROCEDURE

Art. 6. La requite pr£vue & Far-
ticle 2 ci-dessus sera adress6e au
Secretaire g6n6ral de la Soci6t6 des
Nations.

Elle doit §tre r£dig6e de commun
accord entre les parties en cause et
porter leur signature.

La requite doit obligatoirement
indiquer:

a) L'objet du difKrend et les
parties en cause;

b) Le nombre des experts &
choisir;

c) La t&che du ou des experts
(avis consultatif, conciliation ou
arbitrage) ;

d) Les noms des experts choisis ou
la demande d'appliquer les articles 7
et8.

Art. 7. Lorsque les parties ont
choisi elles-m^mes les experts, ceux-
ci d£signent parmi eux leur president.

Art. 8. Lorsque les parties n'ont
pas elles-rn£mes fait choix des ex-
perts dans leur requite, ce choix est
effectu6 par le president du Comit6
6conomique. A cet effet, le Secr6-
taire g£n£ral adresse & ce dernier
copie de la requite.

Art. 9. Lorsque le president du
Comit6 6conomique est enip£ch6 ou
qu'il est ressortissant de Tune des
parties, le choix sera fait par son

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 304

choice shall be made by his predeces-
sor, provided the latter is still a
member of the Committee.

Should the predecessor of the
Chairman also be unable, for one of
the above reasons, to make a choice,
the choice shall be made by the oldest
member who is not a national of any
Party to the case.

Art. lo.1 The person called upon
to make the choice in accordance
with Articles 7 and 8 shall do so
within 15 days after receiving the
communication from the Secretary-
General of the League of Nations.
If several Experts have to be chosen,
he shall also appoint their President.

The choice shall be made exclu-
sively from among the persons re-
ferred to in Article 4.

Moreover, the Experts must be of
a different nationality from that of
the Parties.

Art. u. Any recourse to the Ex-
perts shall imply that the Parties
accept the provisions of the present
Rules.

If the Parties have requested an
arbitral award, that fact shall in-
volve the obligation on their part to
submit to the award to be given and
to carry it out in good faith.

Art. 12. The Experts shall be
entirely free to follow the procedure
they deem best in each particular
case.

Art. 13.2 ^ The Parties shall be
informed without delay of the re-
sults of the Experts' work.

These results shall be published by
the Secretary-General of the League
of Nations, if the Parties consent.

predecesseur, pour autant que ce
dernier soit encore membre du
Comite.

Si le predecesseur du president ne
peut, £ son tour, et pour Tun de ces
motifs, proceder au choix, ce soin
incombera au membre le plus &g6
qui n'est ressortissant d'aucune par-
tie en cause.

Art. lo.1 La personne appe!6e &
faire le choix, conform6ment aux
articles 7 et 8, devra s'acquitter de
cette t&che dans un delai de quinze
jours apr£s avoir regu la communica-
tion du Secretaire general de la So-
ciete des Nations. Si le choix doit
porter sur plusieurs experts, elle
designera egalement leur president.

Le choix doit Itre fait exclusive-
ment parmi les personnes vis£es £
1'article 4.

Les experts choisis devront £tre
d'une nationality differente de celle
des parties.

Art. ii Tout recours aux ex-
perts implique Tacceptation par les
parties des dispositions du present
reglement.

Le fait que les parties ont demand^
une sentence arbitrale entratne de
leur part 1'obligation de se soumettre
£ ladite sentence et de l'ex£cuter de
bonne foi.

Art. 12. Les experts sont enti&re-
ment libres de determiner la proce-
dure qu'ils estiment la mieux ap-
propriee & chaque cas particulier.

Art. 13. 2 Les r£sultats des tra-
vaux des experts seront port6s sans
delai £ la connaissance des parties.

Us seront publics par le Secretaire
general de la Soci6te des Nations, si
les parties y consentent.

1 The last provision of Article 10 naturally does not exclude the right of the Parties to have
themselves represented by agents instructed to defend their interests.

2 In principle, the Economic Committee favours the publication of such results, but the
results can only be published when the Parties agree, because, if publication were compulsory
in every instance, Governments might hesitate to resort to the proposed procedure.

*La derniere disposition de 1'article 10 n'exclut naturellement pas le droit des parties de
se faire representer par des agents charges de d6fendre leurs interns.

2 En principe, le Comite" economique est favorable a la publication des r6sultats des tra-
vaux des experts^ mais cette publication ne peut etre envisagee que lorsque les parties y
consentent, car si elle etait obligatoire dans tous les cas, les gouvernements pourraient
hesiter a utiliser la procedure prevue.

Jan. 28, 1932 PEACEFUL SETTLEMENT OF ECONOMIC DISPUTES

CHAPTER IV

GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. — Secretariat

Art. 14. The Secretariat shall be
provided by the Secretary-General
of the League of Nations.

B. — Expenses

Art 15. Each of the Parties shall
bear its own expenses for procedure.
The joint expenditure decided upon
by the President of the Experts shall
be borne by the Parties in equal
parts.

Art. 16. The expenses referred to
in the above article shall include
remuneration to be granted to the
Experts, witnesses and other per-
sons whose co-operation is required.

Art. I7.1 At the beginning of the
procedure the President of the Ex-
perts shall fix the amount to be ad-
vanced by each of the Parties in
order to cover the above-mentioned
expenses, and shall draw up an ac-
count on the conclusion of the work.

C— Seat

Art. 18. In principle, the Experts
shall sit at Geneva in the Secretariat
of the League of Nations. Their
President may, however, decide that
they shall sit elsewhere.

CHAPITRE IV

DISPOSITIONS GENERATES

A. — Secretariat

Art. 14. Le Secretariat est assur6
par le Secretaire general de la So-
ci£t6 des Nations.

R.— Frais

Art, 15. Chacune des parties sup-
porte ses propres frais de procedure.
Les frais communs determines par le
president des experts sont, en parties
egales, supports par les parties.

Art. 16. Dans les frais communs
dont il est question £ Particle pre-
cedent sont comprises les indemnitfe
£ allouer aux experts, aux t&noins et
autres personnes dont la collabora-
tion serait requise.

Art. I7.1 Au debut de la proc6-
dure, le president des experts d6-
terminera le montant de la somme
dont 1'avance devra 6tre faite par
chacune des parties, de maniere &
couvrir les frais ci-dessus vises et
pour lesquels le compte sera arrSte
par lui & la conclusion des travaux.

C.— Silge

Art. 18. Les experts si£gent en
principe & Geneve, au Secretariat de
la Societe des Nations. Leur presi-
dent peut toutefois decider qu'ils
siegeront en un autre lieu.

1 This rule is intended to ensure that the League shall not incur expenditure for which no
provision has been made in its budget, and which ought, after all, to be borne by the Parties.
It also ensures that there shall be no delay in the procedure.

1 La regie posee a cet article a pour but d'eviter de faire engager par la Societe des Nations
des depenses qui ne seraient pas prevues a son budget et qu'en fin de compte il est normal de
faire supporter par les parties. Elle permet egalement de ne pas apporter de retard a
raccomplissement des difT6rents actes de procedure.

6 INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 305

No. 305

CONVENTION concerning the Recognition and Enforcement of
Judgments. Signed at Copenhagen, March 16, 1932.

CONVENTION relative £ la reconnaissance et a P execution des jtige-
ments. Signee a Copenhague, 16 mars 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. A draft convention on this subject was drawn up by the Conference on
Private International Law, at its fifth session at The Hague, October 12-November 7, 1925
(Actes de la Cinguieme Session, p. 344) ; but it seems to have exercised little influence on the
drafting of this convention. See also the convention between Norway and Sweden, and
Denmark, of April 25, 1861 (i I Sverges Traktater med frammande Magter p. 396) ; and Articles
423-437 of the Bustamante Code annexed to the Habana Convention of February 20, 1928
(No. i86a, ante}. The text of this convention consists of versions in the language of each of
the five states.

RATIFICATIONS. Ratifications of this convention were deposited by all the signatories
at Copenhagen, March. 18, 1933.

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of this convention is also published in Lovtidende for Kongeriget
Danmark, 1933, p. 868; the Danish and Swedish versions are published in 27 Martens, N.R.G.
(3d ser.), p. 352.

V. Bentzon, "Fern Nordiske Rets-Konventioner," 47 Tidsskrift for Rettsvidenskap (1934),
pp. 336-83; Bentzon and K. Hammerich, "La recente Union scandinave de droit interna-
tional prive/' 29 Revue critique de droit international (1934), pp. 855-72; L. Uddgren, " Die
nordische Konvention iiber Anerkennung und Vollstrechung von Urteilen/' 9 Zeitschrift fur
auslandisches und international Privatrecht (1935), pp. 513-5.

Entered into force July i, IQ33.1

Translations from 139 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. 181.

[Translation] [Traduction]

His Majesty the King of Denmark Sa Majest6 le Roi de Danemark et
and Iceland, the President of the d'Islande, le President de la Re-
Republic of Finland, His Majesty publique de Finlande, Sa Majest6
the King of Norway and His Majesty le Roi de Norvege et sa Majest6 le
the King of Sweden, having agreed Roi de Su£de, ayant decid6 de con-
to conclude a convention relating to clure une convention relative a la
the recognition and enforcement of reconnaissance et & l'ex£cution des
judgments, have appointed as their decisions judiciaires, ont nomm6 pour
Plenipotentiaries: 2 leurs pl£nipotentiaires, savoir: 2

His Majesty the King of Denmark Sa Majest6 le Roi de Danemark

and Iceland: et d'Islande:

For Denmark: Peter Rochegune Pour le Danemark: Peter Roche-
Munch ; gune Munch ;

For Iceland: Sveinn Bjdrnsson; Pour Tlslande: Sveinn Bjornsson;

The President of the Republic of Le President de la Republique de

Finland : Onni Talas ; Finlande : Onni Talas ;

His Majesty the King of Norway: Sa Majest6 le Roi de Norv&ge:

Hans Emil Huitfeldt; Hans Emil Huitfeldt;

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3209, July I, 1933.

2 The titles of plenipotentiaries are omitted. — ED.

March 16, 1932

RECOGNITION OF JUDGMENTS

His Majesty the King of Sweden :
Oskar Anton Herman Ewerlof;

Who, being duly authorised for
the purpose, have agreed on the
following articles:

Article i. Valid judgments ren-
dered in civil matters in one of the
Contracting States shall have bind-
ing effect also in the other States.
The same shall apply to judgments
in criminal matters in so far as they
relate to compensation or damages
for injury sustained.

The term "judgment" shall be
understood to mean the Court's de-
cision in respect of the claim or legal
position which forms the subject of
the case.

Art. 2. The following shall be
assimilated to valid judgments for
the purpose of the present Con-
vention :

(1) Decisions by which the Over-
exekutor in Finland or in Sweden has
fixed a time-limit for payment in
actions for the recovery of debt
(lagsokningsm&l) when the period of
appeal (besvar) against the decisions
has expired ;

(2) Compromises reached before
a conciliation commission or a court
of justice;

(3) Valid decisions reached in
civil matters either by means of the
judgment or out of court with regard
to compensation for legal costs or
payments to witnesses or experts.

Art. 3. Judgments by default
rendered in Denmark, Iceland or
Norway in first instance against a
defendant and judgments by default
(Tredskodom) or other judgments
rendered in Finland or Sweden in
first instance against a defaulting
defendant shall not have binding
effect in the other States unless:

Sa Majest6 le Roi de Suede: Oskar
Anton Herman Ewerlof;

Lesquels, dfiment habilites a cet
effet, sont convenus des dispositions
suivantes :

Article i. Les decisions judiciaires
ayant Tautorite de la chose jug6e,
qui seront rendues en mati&re civile
dans Tun des Etats contractants,
auront aussi effet obligatoire dans
les autres Etats. II en sera de m£me
pour les decisions rendues en mati£re
p&nale, s'il s'agit de dommages-
inter^ts ou de reparations con-
cernant un acte prejudiciable.

Le terme "decisions judiciaires"
s'entend de la decision par laquelle
le tribunal r&gle la demande ou la
situation de droit qui forme Fobjet
de Taffaire.

Art. 2. Aux fins de la pr6sente
convention sont assimil£es aux d6-
cisions judiciaires ayant Tautorit6
de la chose jug6e :

1° Les decisions par lesquelles
I* Over exekutor, en Finlande ou en
Su&de, a fix6 un d61ai de paiement
dans les actions en recouvrement de
cr6ances, lorsque le d61ai de recours
contre la decision est expir& ;

2° Les transactions conclues de-
vant une commission de conciliation
ou un tribunal;

3° Les decisions ayant force de
chose jug£e qui, en mati&re civile,
soit par la voie du jugement, soit au
cours de la proc6dure sont inter-
venues au sujet du remboursement
des d6pens ou de Tindemnit^ vers£e
& des t6moins ou experts.

Art. 3. Les jugements par d£faut
qui, en Danemark, en Islande ou en
Norv£ge auront 6t6 rendus en pre-
mi&re instance contre le d£fendeur,
ainsi que les jugements par d6faut
(Tredskodom) et les autres jugements
qui, en Finlande ou en Suede, auront
et6 rendus en premiere instance
contre un defendeur d6faillant, n'au-
ront pas effet obligatoire dans les
autres Etats, sauf :

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 305

(1) The defendant at the time
when the writ or the summons to a
conciliation commission or to the
overexekutor was issued had his
domicile or his registered business
address in the State in which the
judgment was rendered or unless
the Board of Directors which
represented the defendant had its
seat in that State or the notice
was given to a representative
whom the defendant was com-
pelled by law to have in that
State; or

(2) A binding agreement has
been reached to the effect that
the case be dealt with by the
Court which rendered the judg-
ment; or

(3) The judgment relates to
compensation or damages for in-
jury done in the State in which the
judgment is rendered and the
summons has been notified to the
defendant personally during his
stay in that State.

The same rules shall apply to
judgments by default rendered in
appeal cases against the defendant
when the judgment in the first in-
stance, was also given by default.

Art. 4. Decisions and compro-
mises which, in accordance with
Articles I to 3, have a binding effect
outside the State in which the deci-
sion has been rendered or the com-
promise has been entered into and are
enforceable in that State, shall, on de-
mand, be enforced in the other States.

Art. 5. The request for enforce-
ment shall be addressed:

In Denmark and Iceland, to the
Sheriff (Foged) ;

In Finland and Sweden, to the
Overexekutor;

In Norway, to the competent
Court for enforcement (Namsret).

Art. 6. The request for enforce-
ment of a decision shall be accom-
panied by:

i° Lorsque le defendeur, au
moment OTJL a £t6 signifi£e Tassig-
nation, la citation en conciliation
ou la citation devant I' Overexe-
kutor, avait son domicile ou sa
raison sociale declare dans 1'Etat
oft a 6t6 rendu le jugement, ou bien
lorsque le conseil d 'administration
qui representait le d6fendeur avait
son siege dans cet Etat, ou encore
lorsque la signification a 6te faite
& un representant que le defendeur
6tait tenu, en vertu de la loi, d 'avoir
dans cet Etat ; ou

2° Lorsqu'est intervenu un ar-
rangement obligatoire par lequel
Taffaire devait £tre port£e devant
le tribunal qui a rendu le juge-
ment; ou

3a Lorsque le jugement a trait
£ des dommages-interSts ou £
des reparations concernant un acte
pr£judiciable commis dans 1'Etat
oil il a £t6 rendu, et que 1'assigna-
tion a 6t6 signifi£e personnellement
au defendeur, pendant son sejour
dans cet Etat.

Les m&nes regies sont applicables
aux arrSts par defaut rendus en appel
contre le defendeur, lorsque le juge-
ment prononc6 en premiere instance
1'avait 6galement £t6 par d6faut.

Art. 4. S'il s'agit de decisions ou
de transactions qui, en vertu des
articles 1-3, ont effet obligatoire en
dehors de 1'Etat ou elles sont inter-
venues, et qui sont susceptiblesd'ex6-
cution dans cet Etat, Tex6cution
pourra en gtre demand6e dans les
autres Etats contractants.

Art. 5. La demande d 'exequatur
sera adress6e:

En Danemark et en Islande, £
Thuissier public (Foged) ;

En Finlande et en SuMe, d
V Overexekutor;

En Norv&ge, au tribunal comp£-
tent en mati&re d'ex6cution (Nams-
ref).

Art. 6. La demande d'ex6cution
d'une decision devra §tre accom-
pagn6e:

March 16, 1932

RECOGNITION OF JUDGMENTS

(1) The decision in the original
or a copy certified correct by the
competent authority;

(2) A certificate to the effect
that the decision is of the kind
mentioned in Article I or 2 and
that it has acquired force of law
and is enforceable in the State in
which it is rendered ;

(3) In the case of judgments of
the kind mentioned in Article 3,
a certificate to the effect that the
judgment is valid in accordance
with that article.

The request for enforcement of a
compromise shall be accompanied by
a copy of the text of the compromise
certified correct by the competent
authority and a certificate to the
effect that the compromise has been
rendered before a conciliation com-
mission or a court of justice and is
enforceable in the State in which it
has been reached.

Documents drawn up in Finnish
or Icelandic shall be accompanied by
a certified translation into Danish,
Norwegian or Swedish.

Art. 7. The certificates men-
tioned in Article 6 shall be drawn up :

In Denmark, Finland and Iceland,
by the Ministry of Justice;

In Norway, by the Department of
Justice;

In Sweden, by the Administration
of a province.

Art. 8. The decision relating to
enforcement under the present Con-
vention shall be taken without
consultation of the other Party.
Nevertheless in special circum-
stances that Party may be allowed
to express its opinions.

Art. 9. The enforcement shall
take place in each State in accord-
ance with the laws in force therein
without regard to any coercive
measures which may be provided for
in the decision or compromise.

i° De I'original de la decision
ou d'une expedition certifi6e con-
forme par I'autorit6 comp6tente;

2° D'une piece attestant que la
decision rentre dans la cat6gorie
mentionn£e aux articles I ou 2,
qu'elle a l'autorit£ de la chose j ug6e,
et qu'elle est susceptible d'ex<§cu-
tion dans TEtatou ellea6te rendue ;

3° Pour les jugements de la
cat£gorie vis6e & Particle 3, d'une
pi£ce attestant que le jugement
est valide, conformement audit
article.

La demande d 'execution visant
une transaction devra £tre accom-
pagnee d'une expedition du proces-
verbal de transaction, certifi6e con-
forme par Tautorite competente, et
d'une pi£ce attestant que la trans-
action est intervenue devant une
commission de conciliation ou un
tribunal, et qu'elle est susceptible
d'ex£cution dans TEtat ou elle est
intervenue.

Les actes redig£s en finnois ou en
islandais devront 6tre accompagn6s
d'une traduction danoise, norvegi-
enne ou su6doise, certifi£e conforme.

Art. 7. Les attestations mention-
n£es £ 1'article 6 seront <§tablies:

En Danemark, en Finlande et en
Islande, par le Minis t^re de la Justice ;

En Norvege, par le d&partement
de la justice;

En Su&de, par une prefecture.

Art. 8. La decision relative &
Tex^cution d'une decision, conform6-
ment & la pr£sente convention, sera
prise sans que la Partie adverse ait
6t6 entendue; dans des cas sp&ciaux,
cependant, cette Partie aura la
possibility de d£poser.

Art. 9. L'ex6cution s'effectuera,
dans chaque Etat, d'apres la 16gis-
lation en vigueur dans cet Etat,
quelles que soient les dispositions
eventuellement £nonc£es dans la
decision ou dans le proems-verbal de
transaction, au sujet de mesures de
contrainte.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 305

Art. 10. The provisions of the
present Convention regarding the
binding effect of judgments shall not
affect Article 22 of the Convention of
February 6, 1931, containing rules
of international private law regard-
ing marriage, adoption and guardian-
ship,1 nor shall they have the effect
of rendering a decision in such mat-
ters valid in circumstances other
than those provided for in that
article. The enforcement of judg-
ments which are valid under that
article may be demanded under
Articles 4-9 of the present Conven-
tion.

If a judgment has been given in
Denmark, Iceland or Norway in
application of the laws regarding
marriage settlements, the present
Convention shall not apply to such
judgment in Finland or Sweden in
cases where the dispute has been
judged in accordance with the for-
mer marriage laws of the country.

Further, the present Convention
shall not apply to decisions or com-
promises regarding the duty of
maintenance in accordance with the
law relating to families and shall not
affect the Convention of February
10, 1931, regarding the collection of
maintenance contributions.2

The present Convention shall also
not affect the provisions contained
in other conventions regarding the
validity or enforcement of judg-
ments or other decisions.

Art. ir. The present Convention
shall not apply to decisions and
compromises relating to:

(i) Relationship, the right of
succession, the responsibility of
heirs for debts, death settlements,
bankruptcies, compulsory com-
position without bankruptcy
(Tvangsakkord tidenfor Konkurs)
or the invalidity of judicial acts
or other measures in case of
bankruptcy.

1 No. 281, ante. — ED.

Art. 10. Les stipulations de la
presente convention concernant 1'ef-
fet obligatoire des decisions judi-
ciaires n'op£reront pas derogation a
1'article 22 de la Convention du 6
fevrier 1931 institnant des regies
de droit international prive con-
cernant le manage, 1'adoption et la
tutelle;1 elles n'auront pas pour effet
de rendre une decision en cette
matiere valable dans d 'autres cas que
ceux qui sont prevus au susdit article.
L 'execution de decisions judiciaires
valables d'apres ledit article pourra
£tre demandee, en vertu des articles
4-9 de la presente convention.

Lorsqu'une decision judiciaire aura
et6 rendue en Danemark, en Islande
ou en Norvege, en application de la
legislation sur le regime des biens
matrimoniaux, la presente conven-
tion ne sera pas applicable a cette
decision en Finlande ou en Su&de, si,
dans ces derniers pays, le litige efit dft
£tre juge d'apres Tancienne legisla-
tion du pays sur le mariage.

La presente convention ne s'ap-
pliquera pas aux decisions ou tran-
sactions relatives a Tobligation ali-
mentaire institute par le droit de
famille et n'operera pas derogation a
la Convention du 10 fevrier 1931 sur
le recouvrement des pensions ali-
mentaires.2

La presente convention n'operera
pas non plus derogation aux dis-
positions d'autres conventions con-
cernant rautorite ou Texecution de
decisions judiciaires et autres.

Art. ii. La presente convention
ne sera pas applicable aux decisions
et transactions concernant les ma-
tieres suivantes :

i° La parente, le droit de suc-
c6der, la responsabilit6 des heri-
tiers a l'6gard des dettes du de-
funt, la devolution des successions,
radministration des faillites, le con-
cordat sans faillite (Tvangsakkord
udenfor Konkurs) ou Tin validation
d'actes judiciaires ou d 'autres
mesures, en cas de faillite.
2 No. 282, ante. — ED.

March 16, 1932

RECOGNITION OF JUDGMENTS

(2) Property rights or other
rights relating to immovable prop-
erty in one of the other States, the
obligation to take steps relating
to such rights or the consequences
of neglecting such obligation;

(3) Taxes or dues to the State
or commune or other questions of
public law, even if the decision
has been rendered in the forms
applicable to civil matters.

The Convention shall also not
apply to awards of the special courts
for labour disputes.

Art. 12. The Convention shall
not involve any obligation to recog-
nise or enforce a decision or a
compromise which would manifestly
be incompatible with the laws of the
country.

Art. 13. The Convention shall
not apply to decisions rendered or
compromises reached before the
coming into force of the Convention.

Art. 14. The Convention shall be
ratified and the instruments of ratifi-
cation shall be deposited in the
archives of the Danish Ministry of
Foreign Affairs as soon as possible.

The Convention shall come into
force between the ratifying States on
January ist or July ist following the
expiry of a period of three months
after at least three of the States have
deposited their instruments of ratifi-
cation. As regards States deposit-
ing their ratifications at a later date,
the Convention shall come into force
on January ist or on July ist fol-
lowing the expiry of a period of
three months after the deposit of
the instrument of ratification.

Any of the States may denounce
the Convention to any of the other
States at one year's notice terminat-
ing on January ist or July 1st.

IN FAITH WHEREOF the respective
Plenipotentiaries have signed the

2° Le droit de propriete, ou
tout autre droit sur des imnieubles
dans Tun des autres Etats, 1'obli-
gation de prendre des dispositions
relatives & ces droits, ou les con-
s£quences resultant de la n6gli-
gence de cette obligation ;

3° Les impdts ou droits pergus
par TEtat ou la commune, ou
toutes autres questions de droit
public, lors m£me que la decision
aurait ete rendue dans les formes
applicables en matiere civile.

La convention ne sera pas appli-
cable aux decisions rendues par les
tribunaux sp6ciaux comp£tents en
matiere de confiits du travail.

Art. 12. La convention n'en-
trainera pas Fobligation de recon-
naitre ou d'ex£cuter une decision ou
une transaction qui serait 6videm-
ment incompatible avec Tordre pu-
blic du pays.

Art. 13. La convention ne sera
pas applicable aux decisions rendues
ou aux transactions intervenues
avant son entr6e en vigueur.

Art. 14. La convention devra £tre
ratifiee et les instruments de ratifica-
tion seront d£pos£s aux archives du
Ministere des Affaires £trang6res
danois aussitdt que possible.

La convention entrera en vigueur
entre les Etats qui 1'aurpnt ratifiee le
ier Janvier ou le ier juillet qui suivra
Texpiration d'un d&lai de trois mois
& partir du d£p6t des instruments de
ratification par trois des Etats, au
moins. Pour les Etats qui la rati-
fieront ulterieurement, la convention
entrera en vigueur le ier Janvier ou
le ier juillet qui suivra 1'expiration
d'un d£lai de trois mois & partir du
d6p6t de Tinstrument de ratification.

Chacun des Etats pourra d6-
noncer la convention avec effet pour
chacun des autres Etats, moyennant
pr6avis d'un an prenant fin tin IOT
Janvier ou un ier juillet.

EN FOI DE QUOI les p!6nipoten-
tiaires des divers Etats ont sign6

12 INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 306

present Convention and have thereto la presente convention et Font

affixed their seals. revltue de leurs cachets.

Done at Copenhagen in one copy Fait & Copenhague, en un exem-

in each of the following languages: plaire r£dig£ dans chacune des

Danish, Finnish, Icelandic, Nor- langues suivantes: danois, finnois,

wegian and Swedish, there being islandais, norvegien et su£dois, avec

two texts in Swedish, one for Finland deux textes pour la langue su&Ioise

and one for Sweden, on March 16, dont un pour la Finlande et un pour

1932. la SuMe, le 16 mars 1932.

[Signed:] P. MUNCH, ONNI TALAS, SVEINN BJORNSSON, EMIL HUITFELDT,
O. EWERLOF (Subject to the ratification of His Majesty with the consent of
the Riksdag).

No. 306

CONVENTION concerning the Protection against Accidents of
Workers Employed in Loading and Unloading Ships (Revised
1932). Adopted at Geneva, April 27, 1932.

CONVENTION concernant la protection des travaiUeurs occupes au
chargement et au dechargement des bateaux centre les acci-
dents (revisee en 1932). Adoptee H Geneve, 27 avril 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. A draft convention on this subject was adopted at Geneva, June 21, 1929
(No. 220, ante), and came into force as a convention, April I, 1932; it provided (Article 23)
that it might be superseded by a revising convention. To facilitate action by Germany and
Great Britain, the 1929 convention was revised by this convention in 1932. The short title
of this convention is " Protection against Accidents (Dockers) Convention (Revised), 1932,"

RATIFICATIONS. Ratifications of this convention were communicated to the Secretary-
General of the League of Nations by Uruguay, June 6, 1933 ; Italy, October 30, 1933 ; Mexico,
May 12, 1934; Spain, July 28, 1934; Great Britain, January 10, 1935; Chile, October 18,
1935; China, November 30, 1935.

BIBLIOGRAPHY. International Labour Conference, Sixteenth Session, Geneva, 1932, Record
of Proceedings (Geneva: International Labour Office, 1932). See also the preparatory docu-
ments of the sixteenth session of the conference.

Anon., "The Sixteenth Session of the International Labour Conference," 26 Int. Labour
Rev. (1932), pp. 151-98.

Entered into force October 30, I934-1

Text from the collection of authentic texts published by the Secretariat of the
League of Nations.

The General Conference of the In- La Conference g£n£rale de TOr-.
ternational Labour Organisation of ganisation Internationale du Travail
the League of Nations, de la Soci6t6 des Nations,

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, in a separate register of labor
conventions, October 30, 1934.

April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS

Having been convened at Ge-
neva by the Governing Body of the
International Labour Office, and
having met in its Sixteenth Ses-
sion on 12 April 1932, and

Having decided upon the adop-
tion of certain proposals with
regard to the partial revision of the
Convention concerning the protec-
tion against accidents of workers
employed in loading or unloading
ships adopted by the Conference
at its Twelfth Session, which is the
fourth item on the Agenda of the
Session, and

< Considering that these proposals
*V must take the form of a Draft
«L International Convention,

adopts, this twenty-seventh day of

O April of the year one thousand nine

^—hundred and thirty-two, the following

^ Draft Convention for ratification by

the Members of the International

Labour Organisation, in accordance

with the provisions of Part XIII of

the Treaty of Versailles and of the

corresponding Parts of the other

Treaties of Peace:

V§ Article i. For the purpose of this

* Convention:

V (i) the term "processes" means

and includes all or any part of the

work performed on shore or on board

ship of loading or unloading any

COship whether engaged in maritime or

w\ inland navigation, excluding ships of

^ war, in, on, or at any maritime or

^inland port, harbour, dock, wharf,

quay or similar place at which such

work is carried on; and

(2) the term "worker" means any
person employed in the processes.

* Art. 2. Any regular approach
-pover a dock, wharf, quay or similar
'sHpremises which workers have to use
My for going to or from a working place

at which the processes are carried on
and every such working place on

Convoquee & Geneve par le
Conseil d 'administration du Bu-
reau international du Travail, et
s'y 6tant reunie le 12 avril 1932 en
sa seizieme session,

Apr£s avoir decide d 'adopter
diverses propositions relatives &
la revision partielle de la conven-
tion concernant la protection des
travailleurs occupes au charge-
ment et au d£chargement des
bateaux contre les accidents
adopt6e par la Conference £ sa
douzi&me session, question qui
constitue le quatrieme point de
Fordre du jour de la session, et

Consid£rant que ces proposi-
tions doivent prendre la forme
d'un projet de convention inter-
nationale,

adopte, ce vingt-septi£me jour d'a-
vril mil neuf cent trente deux, le
projet de convention ci-apr£s, & rati-
fier par les Membres de {'Organisa-
tion internationale du Travail, con-
formement aux dispositions de la
Partie XIII du Traite de Versailles
et des Parties correspondantes des
autres Trait6s de Paix:

Article i. Aux fins de la pr6sente
convention:

1) le terme "operations" signifie
et comprend tout ou partie du
travail effectu6, £ terre ou & bord,
pour le chargement ou le decharge-
ment de tout bateau affecte i la
navigation maritime ou interieure,
& 1'exclusion des bitiments de guerre,
dans tout port maritime ou interieur,
sur tout dock, wharf, quai ou autre
endroit analogue ou ce travail est
effectu6; et

2) le terme "travailleur" com-
prend toute personne employee aux
dites operations.

Art. 2. Toutes voies d'acc£s r6-
gulteres passant par un bassin, wharf,
quai ou autre lieu semblable et que
les travailleurs ont & utiliser pour se
rendre £ Femplacement de travail
oil sont effectu6es les operations ou

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 306

shore shall be maintained with due

regard to the safety of the workers
using them.

In particular,

(1) every said working place on
shore and any dangerous parts of any
said approach thereto from the
nearest highway shall be safely and
efficiently lighted;

(2) wharves and quays shall be
kept sufficiently clear of goods to
maintain a clear passage to the
means of access referred to in Arti-
cle 3 ;

(3) where any space is left along
the edge of any wharf or quay, it
shall be at least 3 feet (90 cm.) wide
and clear of all obstructions other
than fixed structures, plant and ap-
pliances in use; and

(4) so far as is practicable having
regard to the traffic and working,

(a) all dangerous parts of the said
approaches and working places (e.g.
dangerous breaks, corners and edges)
shall be adequately fenced to a
height of not less than 2 feet 6 inches
(75 cm.) ;

(b) dangerous footways over
bridges, caissons and dock gates shall
be fenced to a height of not less than
2 feet 6 inches (75 cm.) on each side,
and the said fencing shall be con-
tinued at both ends to a sufficient
distance which shall not be required
to exceed 5 yards (4 m. 50) .

(5) The measurement require-
ments of paragraph (4) of this Ar-
ticle shall be deemed to be complied
with, in respect of appliances in use
at the date of the ratification of this
Convention, if the actual measure-
ments are not more than 10 per cent,
less than the measurements specified
in the said paragraph (4),

Art 3. — (i) When a ship is lying

pour en revenir, ainsi que tons em-
placements de travail situes ;\ terre,
devront fitre main ten us clans un

6 tat propre & assurer la securitr dt\s
travailleurs qui les utilisent.
En par lieu Her,

1) tous lieux do travail & terre et
toutes parties dangereuses des voitw
d'acc&s prtcitees y conduisunt ft
partir du cheinin public le phis
proche, devront fitre pourvus d'un
6clairage efficace et sans danger;

2) les wharfs et les quab seront
suffisamment d£barrass£s de mar-
chandises pour maintenir un lihre
passage vers les moycns d'accds
vis&s i 1'article 3;

3) lorsqu'un passage est Iaiss6 le
long du bard du quai ou du wharf, il
devra avoir au inoins 90 centimetres
de large (3 pieds) et fitre libre de
tous obstacles autres que les con-
structions fixes, les appareils et les
engins en usage;

4) dans la mesure o& ce sera prati-
cable, eu 6gard au trafic et au service,

a) toutes parties dangereuses de
ces voies d'aecte et lieux de travail
(par exemple: ouvertures, tournants
et bords dangereux) devront ?tre
munis de garde-corps appropri^s
d'une hauteur d'au mo ins 75 centi-
metres (2 pieds 6 pouces) ;

b) les passages dangereux sur les
ponts, caissons et vannes de bassist
devront 6tre munis de chaque cAt6,
jusqu'i une hauteur d'au moins 75
centimetres (2 pieds 6 pouces) de
garde-corps continues 4 chaque ex-
trdmitfi, sur une longueur suffisante
qui n'aura pas £ d6passer 4 m. 50
(5 yards).

5) Les conditions de dimensions
prlvues par le paragraphe 4 du pr feetit
article seront oonsid£r£es commc «i-
tisfaites, en ce qui concerne les engins
en usage 4 la date de la ratification
de^ la prfeente convention, «I les
chiffres des mesures effectivenient
r6alis6es ne sont pas inftVIeurs de
plus de 10 pour cent aux chiffres
mentionn^s dans ledit paragraphe 4*

Art. 3.— i) Lorsqu*un bateau est

April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS

alongside a quay or some other ves-
sel for the purpose of the processes,
there shall be safe means of access for
the use of the workers at such times
as they have to pass to or from the
ship, unless the conditions are such
that they would not be exposed to
undue risk if no special appliance
were provided.

(2) The said means of access shall
be:

(a) where reasonably practicable,
the ship's accommodation ladder, a
gangway or a similar construction ;

(b) in other cases a ladder.

(3) The appliances specified in
paragraph (2) (a) of this article
shall be at least 22 inches (55 cm.)
wide, properly secured to prevent
their displacement, not inclined at
too steep an angle, constructed of
materials of good quality and in
good condition, and securely fenced
throughout to a clear height of not
less than 2 feet 9 inches (82 cm.) on
both sides, or in the case of the
ship's accommodation ladder se-
curely fenced to the same height on
one side, provided that the other
side is properly protected by the
ship's side.

Provided that any appliances as
aforesaid in use at the date of the
ratification of this Convention shall
be allowed to remain in use;

(a) until the fencing is renewed if
they are fenced on both sides to a
clear height of at least 2 feet 6 inches
(80 cm*) ;

(b) for two years from the date of

ratification if they are fenced on both

sides to a clear height of at least 2
feet 6 inches (75 cm.)-

mouill£ pr&s d'un quai on d'un autre
b&timent en vue des operations &
effectuer, des moyens d'acc£s off rant
des garanties de s6curit6 devront
Ctre & la disposition des travailleurs
pour se rendre sur le bateau ou en
reyenir, 4 moins que les circonstances
soient telles qu'ils puissent le faire,
en 1'absence de dispositifs sp^ciaux,
sans gtre exposes inutilement & des
risques d 'accidents.

2) Ces moyens d*acc£s devront
consister:

a) lorsque ce sera raisonnablement
praticable, en P6chelle de couple du
bateau, en une passerelle ou un
dispositif analogue;

b) dans les autres cas, en une 6chelle.

3) Les dispositifs sp6cifi6s & la
lettre a) du paragraphe 2) du present
article devront avoir une largeur d'au
moins 55 centimetres (22 pouces) ; ils
devront 8tre solidement fix£$ de
fagon & ne pouvoir se d&placer; leur
inclinaison ne devra pas 8tre trop
forte et les mat6riaux employes pour
leur construction devront Stre de
bonne qualit6 et en bon 6tat; ils
devront gtre munis des deux c6t6s
sur toute leur longueur d'un garde-
corps efficace d'une hauteur nette
d'au moins 82 centimetres (2 pieds
9 pouces) ou, s'il s'agit de l'6chelle
de couple, munis d'un garde-corps
efficace de la m£me hauteur d'un
seul c6t6 & la condition que 1 'autre
cdt6 soit efficacement prot6g& par le
flanc du bateau.

Toutefois, tous dispositifs de cette
nature en usage 4 la date de la ratifi-
cation de la pr6sente convention
pourront rester en service:

a) pour ceux qui sont munis sur
les deux c6t£s de garde-corps d'une
hauteur nette d'au moins 80 centi-
litres (2 pieds 8 pouces), jusqu'&
ce que ceux-ci soient renouve!6s ;

6) pour ceux qui sont munis sur
les deux cdt^s de garde-corps d'une
hauteur nette d'au moins 75 centi-
m&tres (2 pieds 6 pouces), pendant
deux anuses & dater de la ratification
de la pr6sente convention.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No- 306

(4) The ladders specified in para-
graph (2) (6) of this Article shall be

of adequate length and strength, and
properly secured.

(5) 00 Exceptions to the provi-
sions of this Article may be allowed
by the competent authorities when
they are satisfied that the appliances
specified in the Article are not re-
quired for the safety of the workers.

(6) The provisions of this Article
shall not apply to cargo stages or
cargo gangways when exclusively
used for the processes.

(6) Workers shall not use, or be
required to use, any other means of
access than the means specified or
allowed by this Article.

Art. 4. When the workers have to
proceed to or from a ship by water
for the processes, appropriate meas-
ures shall be prescribed to ensure
their safe transport, including the
conditions to be complied with by
the vessels used for this purpose.

Art. 5.— (i) When the workers
have to carry on the processes in a
hold the depth of which from the
level of the deck to the bottom of the
hold exceeds 5 feet (i m. 50), there
shall be safe means of access from the
deck to the hold for their use.

(2) The said means of access shall
ordinarily be by ladder, which shall
not be deemed to be safe unless it
complies with the following condi-
tions :

(a) provides foothold of a
depth, including any space behind
the ladder, of not less than 4^
inches (n^ cm.) for a width of
not less than 10 inches (25 cm.)
and a firm handhold;

(V) is not recessed under the
deck more than is reasonably

4) Les 6chelles sptcifii^es A la
lettre b) du paragraphe 2) du present
article seront drune longueur et
d'une solklit6 suffisantes et con*
venablement assu jetties,

5) a) Des derogations aux dis-
positions du present article pourront
Itre accordtes par les autoritfts
comp6tentes chaque fois^ qu'elies
estimeront que les dispositifs sp&~
cifife ne sont pas indispensables &
la s^curite des travailleurs*

b) Les dispositions du present
article ne s'appliqueront pas aux
plate-formes ou passerelles de manu-
tentlon lorsqu'elles sont exclusive-
ment employees pour les operations.

6) Les travailleurs ne dcvront
pas utiliser et ne pourront litre ten us
d'utiliser d'autres moyens d'acc&s
que ceux qui sont specifics ou au-
toris^s par le present article.

Art. 4* Pour le cas ofi les travail-
leurs doivent se rendre par eau sur
un bateau ou en revenir & Foccaslon
des operations, des mesures ap-
propriles devront fitre pr6vues pour
assurer la s6curite de leur tiransport
y compris la determination des
conditions auxquelles doivent satis-
faire les embarcations utilis6es pour
ce transport.

Art, 5.— i) Lorsque les travail-
leurs ont & effectuer les operations
dans des cales dont le fond est
situ6 4 plus de l m. 50 (5 pieds) du
niveau du pont, des moyens d*accfes
offrant des garanties de s^curit^
devront 6tre mis i leur disposition*

2) Ces moyens d*acc^s consiste-
ront ordinairement en une 6chelle et
celle-ci ne sera consid6r6e comme
pr6sentant des garanties de s6curit6
que:

a) si elle offre aux pieds un
appui dont la profondeur augmen-
tie de Tespace derridre F6chelle
est d'au moins n cm* }4 (4 pouces
,K) pour une largeur d'au moins
25 cm. (10 pouces) et aux mains
un apjHii solide;

i) si elle n*est pas plac^e en
retrait sous le pont plus qu'il n'est

April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS

necessary to keep it clear of the
hatchway;

coamings (e*g* cleats or cups) ;

(d) the said arrangements on
the coamings provide foothold of a
depth, including any space behind
the said arrangements, of not less
than 4}4 inches (n^4 cm.) for a
width of not less than 10 inches
(25 cm.) ;

(e) if separate ladders are pro-
vided between the lower decks, the
said ladders are as far as prac-
ticable in line with the ladder from
the top deck.

Where, however, owing to the con-
struction of the ship, the provision
of a ladder would not be reasonably
practicable, it shall be open to the
competent authorities to allow other
means of access, provided that they
comply with the conditions laid
down in this Article for ladders so
far as they are applicable.

In the case of ships existing at the
date of the ratification of this Con-
vention the measurement require-
ments of subparagraphs (a) and (d)
of this paragraph shall be deemed to
be complied withf until the ladders
and arrangements are replaced, if the
actual measurements are not more
than 10 per cent less than the meas-
urements specified in the said sub-
paragraphs (a) and (d).

(3) Sufficient free passage to the
means of access shall be left at the
coamings.

(4) Shaft tunnels shall be equipped
with adequate handhold and foot-
hold on both sides.

raisonnablement n6cessaire pour
qu'elle n'empi^te pas sur les
&coutilles;

c) si elle est continu^e par et
est dans la m8me ligne que des
dispositifs offrant un appui solide
aux pieds et aux mains, places sur
les surbaux des 6coutilles (par
exemple des taquets ou tasseaux) ;

d) si les dispositifs vis^s &
Falin^a pr£c6dent off rent aux pieds
un appui dont la profondeur
augment^e de Fespace derri&re ces
dispositifs est d'au moms n cm.
}4 (4 pouces >£) pour une largeur
d'au moins 25 cm. (10 pouces) ;

e) si, au cas oft il existe des
6chelles distinctes entre les ponts
inf^rieurs, ces 6chelles sont, dans
la mesure du possible, dans la
m6nie ligne que F&chelle partant
du pont sup6rieur.

Toutefois, lorsqu'en raison de la
construction du bateau, on ne pour-
rait raisonnablement exiger I'instal-
lation d'une £chelle, les autorit6s
comp^tentes auront la facult6 d'au-
toriser d'autres moyens d'acc&s, &
la condition que ces moyens d'acc&s
remplissent, dans la mesure oft elles
sont applicables, les conditions pres-
crites pour les 6chelles par le present
article.

Dans le cas des bateaux existant
i la date de la ratification de la
pr6sente convention et jusqu'au
reinplacement des £chelles et dis-
positifs, les conditions de dimensions
pr&vues par les alin6as a) et d) du
present paragraphs seront consi-
d6r6es comine satisfaites si les
chiffres des mesures effectivement
r6alis6es ne sont pas inf^rieurs de
plus de 10 pour cent aux chiffres
mentionn6s dans lesdits alinfeas a)
etd).

3) Un espace suffisant pour per-
mettre d'atteindre les moyens d'ac-
cfes devra fetre Iaiss6 libre prfes des
surbaux des 6coutilks.

4) Les tunnels des arbres devront
Stre munis des deux c6t6s de poi-
gntes et d^ppuie-pieds appropri6s.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 306

(5) When a ladder is to he used in
the hold of a vessel which is not
decked it shall be the duty of the
contractor undertaking the proc-
esses to provide such ladder. It
shall be equipped at the top with
hooks or with other means for firmly
securing it.

(6) The workers shall not use, or
be required to use, other means of
access than the means specified or
allowed by this Article,

(7) Ships existing at the date of
ratification of this Convention shall
be exempt from compliance with the
measurements in paragraph (2) (a)
and (d) and from the provisions of
paragraph (4) of this Article for a
period not exceeding four years from
the date of ratification of this
Convention.

Art. 6. — (i) While the workers
are on a ship for the purpose of the
processes, every hatchway of a cargo
hold accessible to the workers which
exceeds 5 feet (i m. 50) in depth
from the level of the deck to the bot-
tom of the hold, and which is not
protected to a clear height of 2 feet 6
inches (75 cm.) by the coamings,
shall, when not in use for the passage
of goods, coal or other material,
either be securely fenced to a height
of 3 feet (90 cm.) or be securely cov-
ered. National laws or regulations
shall determine whether the require-
ments of this paragraph shall be
enforced during meal times and other
short interruptions of work.

(2) Similar measures shall be
taken when necessary to protect all
other openings in a deck which
might be dangerous to the workers.

Art. 7- When the processes have
to be carried on on a ship, the means
of access thereto and all places on

5) Lorsqu'une fechelle devra (ft re

utilises dans la cale d'un bateau non
pont6, il appartienclra *\ 1 'entre-
preneur des operations de fournir
cette 6chelle. Kile devra Stre munie
k sa partie supferieure de crochets <>u
d'autres dispositifs permettant de la
fixer solidement.

6) Les travailleurs ne pourront
utiliser ni 8tre tenus d'utiliser des
moyens d'acc&s autres que ceux qui
sont sp6cifi6s ou autori$£s dans le
present article*

7) Les bateaux existant 4 la date
de la ratification de la pr^sentc con-
vention seront exempts des condi-
tions de dimensions imposf es par les
dispositions du paragraphs 2 (alintfas
a et d) et des prescriptions du
paragraphe 4 du present article,
pendant un d61ai n'excMant pas
quatre ans & partir de la date de
cette ratification.

Art* 6.' — i) Pendant que les tra-
vailleurs sont & bord du bateau pour
effectuer les op6rations, toute 6cou-
tille de cale de marchandises acces-
sible aux travailleurs, dont la pro-
fondeur, mesurfie depuis le niveau
du pent jusqu'au fond de la cale,
d^passe i m. 50 (5 pieds) et qui n'est
pas prot6g£e jusqu'ci une hauteur
nette d'au moins 75 cm. (2 pieds 6
pouces) par les surbaux, devra,
lorsqu'elle n'est pas utilisfie pour le
passage de marchandises, de charbon
ou d'autres mat6riaux, §tre entour£e
d'un garde-corps efficace jusqu'4 une
hauteur de 90 cm. (3 pieds) pu fitre
efficacement ferm6e. La legislation
nationale d^cidera si les dispositions
du present paragraphe doivent 6tre
appliqu^es pendant la dur^e des
repas et d'autres courtes interrup-
tions de travail.

2) Des mesures semblables seront
prises en cas de besoin pour prot^ger
toutes autres ouvertures dans le
pont qui pourraient presenter un
danger pour les travailleurs.

Art. 7. Lorsque les op6rations
doivent gtre effectives k bord d'un
bateau, les moyens d'acc^s k ce

April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS

board at which the workers are em-
ployed or to which they may be re-
quired to proceed in the course of
their employment shall be efficiently
lighted.

The means of lighting shall be
such as not to endanger the safety of
the workers nor to interfere with the
navigation of other vessels,

Art. 8* In order to ensure the
safety of the workers when engaged
in removing or replacing hatch cov-
erings and beams used for hatch
coverings,

(1) hatch coverings and beams
used for hatch coverings shall be
maintained in good condition;

(2) hatch coverings shall be fitted
with adequate hand grips, having
regard to their size and weight, un-
less the construction of the hatch or
the hatch coverings is of a character
rendering the provision of hand grips
unnecessary;

(3) beams used for hatch cover-
ings shall have suitable gear for re-
moving and replacing them of such a
character as to render it unnecessary
for workers to go upon them for the
purpose of adjusting such gear;

(4) all hatch coverings and fore
and aft and thwart-ship beams shall,
in so far as they are not interchange-
able, be kept plainly marked to in-
dicate the deck and hatch to which
they belong and their position
therein ;

(5) hatch coverings shall not be
used in the construction of cargo
stages or for any other purpose
which may expose them to damage.

Art. 9. Appropriate measures
shall be prescribed to ensure that no
hoisting machine, or gear, whether
fixed or loose, used in connection
therewith, is employed in the proc-

bateau ainsi que tous les endroits
du bord oil les travailleurs sont
occup6s ou peuvent 6tre appel^s &
se rendre au cours de leur occupation
devront gtre efficacement 6clair6s.

Les moyens d'^clairage utilises
devront Stre tels qu'ils ne puissent
mettre en danger la s<§curit6 des
travailleurs, ni g^ner la navigation
d'autres bateaux.

Art 8, En vue d 'assurer la s6-
curit6 des travailleurs lorsqu'ils sont
occup6s & en lever ou & mettre en
place les panneaux d'&coutilles ainsi
que les barrots et galiotes servant
& couvrir les 6coutilles,

1) les panneaux d'<§coutilles ainsi
que les barrots et galiotes servant &
couvrir les 6coutilles seront entre-
tenus en bon &tat;

2) les panneaux d'£coutilles se-
ront munis de poign^es appropri^es
& leur dimension et & leur poids, &
moins que la construction de T6cou-
tille ou des panneaux d'6coutilles
soit telle qu'elle rende des poign6es
inutiles;

3) les barrots et galiotes servant
£ couvrir les 6coutilles seront munis,
pour leur enl&vement et remise en
place, de dispositifs tels que les
travailleurs n'aient pas besoin de
monter sur ces barrots et galiotes
pour y fixer les dispositifs dont il
s'agit;

4) tous les panneaux d'6coutilles,
barrots et galiotes devront, pour
autant qu'ils ne sont pas inter-
changeables, §tre marques claire-
ment pour indiquer le pont et
Tteoutille auxquels ils appartiennent
ainsi que leur position sur ceux-ci;

5) les panneaux d'6coutilles ne
pourront Stre employes pour la
construction de plate-formes servant
i la manutention de la cargaison,
ni pour tout autre but qui les ex-
poserait & gtre endommag^s.

Art. 9. Des mesures appropri&es
seront prises pour que les appareils
de levage ainsi que tous engins ac-
cessoires, fixes ou mobiles, ne soient
employes pour les operations, £ terre

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 306

esses on shore or on board ship unless
it Is in a safe xvorking condition.

In particular,

(i) before being taken into use,
the said machines, fixed gear on
board ship accessory thereto as de-
fined by national laws or regulations,
and chains and wire ropes used in
connection therewith, shall be ade-
quately examined and tested, and
the safe working load thereof certi-
fied, in the manner prescribed and by
a competent person acceptable to the
national authorities;

(2) after being taken into use,
every hoisting machine, whether
used on shore or on board ship, and
all fixed gear on board ship accessory
thereto as defined by national laws
or regulations shall be thoroughly
examined or inspected as follows:

(a) to be thoroughly examined
every four years and inspected
every twelve months: derricks,
goose necks, mast bands, derrick
bands, eyebolts, spans and any
other fixed gear the dismantling of
which is specially difficult;

(b) to be thoroughly examined
every twelve months: all hoisting
machines (e.g. cranes, winches),
blocks, shackles and all other
accessory gear not included in (a).

All loose gear (e.g. chains, wire
ropes, rings, hooks) shall be inspected
on each occasion before use unless
they have been inspected within the
previous three months.

Chains shall not be shortened by
tying knots in them and precautions
shall be taken to prevent injury to
them from sharp edges.

A thimble or loop splice made in

ou & bord d'un bateau, que s'ils se
trouvent en fetat de fonctionner sans
danger.

En particulier,

1) avant leur mise en service,
lesdits appareils et les engins fixes i
bord consid6r&s comme leurs acces-
soires par les legislations nationales
ainsi que les chatnes et c&bles
m6talliques dont 1 'usage est H6 i
leur fonctionnement, devront, par
les spins d'une personne compdtente
admise par les autorit6s nationales
et dans les conditions prescrites,
litre dftment v6rifi6s et essayfo et
leur maximum de charge etre attestC*
par un certificat;

2) apr&s sa mise en service, tout
appareil de levage utilisfi i terre ou
& bord, et tous engins fixes i bord
consid6r6s comme ses accessoires par
les legislations nationales, sera ex-
amin6 4 fond ou inspect! dans les
conditions suivantes:

a) seront examin6s & fond> tons
les quatre ans et inspects tous
les douze mois: les mUts de
charge, pivots et colliers de m&ts
et de rn^ts de charge, oeillets,
pantoires, et tous autres engins
fixes dont le d^montage est par-
ticuli&rement difficile;

b) seront examines 4 fond tons
les douze mois; tous appareils de
levage (tels que les grues, treuils),
moufles, manilles et tous autres
engins accessoires qui ne seront
pas vis6s sous la lettre a).

Tous engins mobiles (par exemple
les chaJnes, cables m6talliques» an-
neaux, crochets) feront Fobjet dfune
inspection pr6alable, chaque fois
qu'ils seront mis en usage,— sauf
dans le cas oil ils auraient 4t6 in-
spects depuis moins de trois rnois.

Les chafnes ne devront pas 6tre
raccourcies au moyen de noeuds, et
des precautions seront prises pour
£viter qu'elles ne soient endom-
mag^es par frottement contre des
aretes vives.

Les oeillets ou ^pissures des cables

April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS

any wire rope shall have at least
three tucks with a whole strand of
rope and two tucks with one half of
the wires cut out of each strand;
provided that this requirement shall
not operate to prevent the use of
another form of splice which can be
shown to be as efficient as the form
hereby prescribed.

(3) Chains and such similar gear
as is specified by national laws or
regulations (e.g. hooks, rings, shack-
les, swivels) shall, unless they have
been subjected to such other suffi-
cient treatment as may be pre-
scribed by national laws or regula-
tions, be annealed as follows under
the supervision of a competent per-
son acceptable to the national au-
thorities:

(a) In the case of chains and the
said gear carried on board ship:

(i) half inch (i2$4 mm.) and
smaller chains or gear in general
use once at least in every six
months;

(ii) all other chains or gear
(including span chains but exclud-
ing bridle chains attached to der-
ricks or masts) in general use once
at least in every twelve months;

Provided that in the case of such
gear used solely on cranes and other
hoisting appliances worked by hand,
twelve months shall be substituted
for six months in sub-paragraph (i)
and two years for twelve months in
sub-paragraph (ii);

Provided also that, if the compe-
tent authority is of opinion that
owing to the size, design, material
or infrequency of use of any of the
said gear the requirements of this
paragraph as to annealing are not
necessary for the protection of the
workers, it may, by certificate in
writing (which it may at its discre-
tion revoke), exempt such gear from

m<§talliques devront comporter au
moins trois tours avec un toron
entier du cable et deux tours avec
la moiti6 des fils coupes dans chaque
toron, Toutefois, cette prescription
ne devra pas avoir pour effet d'em-
p&cher Tusage d'une autre forme
d'6pissure d'une efficacit6 aussi 6vi-
dente que celle qui est stipu!6e par
la pr^sente disposition.

3) Les chaines et tels engins simi-
laires que sp&ifient les legislations
nationales (par exemple les crochets,
anneaux, boucles, Imerillons) de-
vront, & moins qu'ils n'aient £t£
soumis £ tel autre traitement suffi-
sant que peuvent prescrire ces 16gis-
lations nationales, £tre recuits dans
les conditions ci-apr&s, sous le con-
tr61e d'une personne comp6tente
admise par les autorit6s nationales:

a) Chaines et engins pr6cit6s qui
sont & bord du bateau :

1° chaines et engins r6guli&re-
ment utilises de 12 millimetres et
demi (un demi-pouce) ou moins,
une f ois tous les six mois ;

2° tous autres chafnes et engins
(y compris les chaines de pantoire,
mais & Texclusion des chalnes-
brides attaches aux mlits de
charge ou aux milts) r6guli£re-
ment utilises, une fois tous les
douze mois;

Toutefois, dans le cas des engins
de cette nature utilises exclusive-
ment sur les grues et autres appareils
de levage & main, Tintervalle pr6vu
au sous-paragraphe i° sera de douze
mois au lieu de six et I'intervalle
pr6vu au sous-paragraphe 2° sera de
deux ans au lieu de douze mois;

De m&rne, dans le cas oil 1'au-
torit6 comp6tente estime, en raison
des dimensions, de la structure, des
mat£riaux ou de la raret6 d'utilisa-
tion de tous engins pr6cit6s, que
1'observation des prescriptions du
present paragraphe concernant les
recuissons n'est pas n6cessaire pour
la protection des travailleurs, cette
autorit6 peut, au moyen d'un certi-

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 306

the said requirements subject to such
conditions as may be specified in the

said certificate*

(6) In the case of chains and the
said gear not carried on board ship :

Measures shall be prescribed to se-
cure the annealing of the said chains
and gear.

(c) In the case of the said chains
and gear whether carried on board
ship or not, which have been length-
ened, altered or repaired by weld-
ing, they shall thereupon be tested
and re-examined.

(4) Such duly authenticated rec-
ords as will provide sufficient prima
facie evidence of the safe condition
of the machines and gear concerned
shall be kept, on shore or on the ship
as the case may be, specifying the
safe working load and the dates and
results of the tests and examinations
referred to in paragraphs (i) and (2)
of this Article and of the annealings
or other treatment referred to in
paragraph (3),

Such records shall, on the appli-
cation of any person authorised for
the purpose, be produced by the
person in charge thereof.

(5) The safe working load shall
be kept plainly marked on all cranes,
derricks and chain slings and on any
similar hoisting gear used on board
ship as specified by national laws or
regulations, The safe working load
marked on chain slings shall either
be in plain figures or letters upon the
chains or upon a tablet or ring of
durable material attached securely
thereto.

(6) All motors, cogwheels, chain
and friction gearing, shafting, live
electric conductors and steam pipes
shall (unless it can be shown that by
their position and construction they
are equally safe to every worker em-

ficat ecrit (qu'elle peut revoquer &
son gr6), exempter ces engins de
Tapplication desdites^ prescriptions,
sous reserve des conditions qui peu-
vent &tre fixfies dans le certihcat.

b) Chaines et engins pr6cit£s qui
ne sont pas & bord ;

Des mesures seront prtvues pour
assurer la recuisson de ces chalnes
et engins.

c) Chaines et engins prficitfs qui
sont ou non £, bord :

Les chafnes et engins qui auront
6t6 rallongfis, modifies ou rfiparfis par
soudure devront 6tre essay£s et
v6rifi6s de nouveau.

4) On censer vera & terre ou 4 bord ,
suivant les cas» des proc&s-verbaux
ddment authentiques qui constitu-
eront une pr&somption suffisante
de la s6curit6 du fonctionnement des
appareils et des engins dont il s'agit;
ces procds-verbaux devront indiquer
le maximum de charge autoris6, ainsi
que la date et le r&sultat des essais et
verifications vis6s aux paragraphes
i) et 2) du present article et des
recuissons ou autres traitements
vis6s au paragraphe 3).

Ces proems- verbaux devront 6tre
pr6sent6s par la personne qui en est
charg^e & la demande de toute per-
sonne qualifi^e & cet effet,

5) On devra marquer et maintenir
sur toutes les grues, milts de charge
et chaines d^lingues, ainsi que sur
tous engins de levage similaires uti~
Iis6s ^ bord, tels qu'ils sont sp€cij&6s
par les legislations nationales, I'm*
dication distincte du maximum de
charge autoris6, Le maximum de
charge indiqu6 sur les chaines df61in**
gues sera marqu6 en chiffres ou en
lettres apparents sur les chalnes
elles-mtotes ou bien sur une plaque
ou anneau en mati&re durable solide-
ment attach6 ^ ces dtialnes.

6) Tous les moteurs, roues den-
t&es, appareils de transmission 4
chafne ou k frottement, conducteurs
dectriques sous tension et tuyaujc de
vapeur devront (i moins quTil ne
soit prouv6 que par leur position ou

April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS

ployed as they would be if securely
fenced) be securely fenced so far as
is practicable without impeding the
safe working of the ship.

(7) Cranes and winches shall be
provided with such means as will
reduce to a minimum the risk of the
accidental descent of a load while in
process of being lifted or lowered.

(8) Appropriate measures shall be
taken to prevent exhaust steam from
and, so far as practicable, live steam
to any crane or winch obscuring any
part of the working place at which a
worker is employed.

(9) Appropriate measures shall be
taken to prevent the foot of a derrick
being accidentally lifted out of its
socket or support,

Art 10. Only sufficiently com-
petent and reliable persons shall be
employed to operate lifting or trans-
porting machinery whether driven
by mechanical power or otherwise,
or to give signals to a driver of such
machinery, or to attend to cargo
falls on winch ends or winch drums.

Art ii.— (i) No load shall be left
suspended from any hoisting ma-
chine unless there is a competent
person actually in charge of the
machine while the load is so left.

(2) Appropriate measures shall be
prescribed to provide for the em-
ployment of a signaller where this
is necessary for the safety of the
workers,

(3) Appropriate measures shall be
prescribed with the object of pre-
venting dangerous methods of work-
ing in the stacking, unstacking,
stowing and unstowing of cargo, or
handling in connection therewith.

leur construction ils presentent, du
point de vue de la s£curite de tous
les travailieurs employes, les mgmes
garanties que s'ils <§taient efficace-
ment proteges) etre munis de dispo-
sitifs de protection dans la mesure
oil cela est pratiquement realisable
sans nuire & la securit6 de la ma-
noeuvre du bateau.

7) Les grues et les treuils devront
Stre pourvus de moyens propres & r£-
duire au minimum le risque de la chute
accidentelle de la charge pendant
qu'ils Fenl&ventou qu'ils Tabaissent.

8) Des mesures appropriates de-
vront Stre prises pour emp^cher la
vapeur d'6chappement et, dans la
mesure du possible, la vapeur vive
de tout treuil ou grue de g&ner la
visibility en tout lieu de travail oil
un travailleur est occup6.

9) Des mesures appropri6s de-
vront 8tre prises pour empgcher Fen-
l&vement involontaire du pied d'un
melt de charge de son support.

Art. 10. Seules les personnes
suffisamment comp^tentes et dignes
de confiance devront Stre employees
& la conduite des appareils de levage
ou de transport, qu'ils soient mus
m^caniquement ou d'une autre fagon,
ou & faire des signaux aux conduc-
teurs de ces appareils, ou encore £
surveiller le cartahu actionn6 par
les tambours ou poup^es de treuils.

Art. n. — i) Aucune charge ne
devra rester suspendue & un appareil
de levage si la marche de cet appareil
n'est pas sous le contrdle effectif
d'une personne comp&tente pendant
que la charge est ainsi suspendue.

2) Des mesures appropri6es de-
vront Stre pr^vues pour qu'une per-
sonne soit charg&e de faire des
signaux si sa presence est n^cessaire
& la s&curit& des travailieurs.

3) Des mesures appropri6es de-
vront 6tre prfrvues pour 6viter qu'on
emploie des m6thodes de travail
dangereuses dans Tempilement ou
le d^sentassement, Farrimage ou le
d6sarrimage de la cargaison, ou la
manutention qui s'y rapporte.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 306

(4) Before work is begun at a hatch
the beams thereof shall either be
removed or be securely fastened to
prevent their displacement.

(5) Precautions shall be taken to
facilitate the escape of the workers
when employed in a hold or on 'tween
decks in dealing with coal or other
bulk cargo.

(6) No stage shall be used in the
processes unless it is substantially
and firmly constructed, adequately
supported and where necessary se-
curely fastened.

No truck shall be used for carry-
ing cargo between ship and shore
on a stage so steep as to be unsafe.

Stages shall where necessary be
treated with suitable material to
prevent the workers slipping.

(7) When the working space in a
hold is confined to the square of the
hatch, and except for the purpose of
breaking out or making up slings.

(a) hooks shall not be made fast
in the bands or fastenings of bales of
cotton, wool, cork, gunny-bags, or
other similar goods;

(6) can-hooks shall not be used for
raising or lowering a barrel when,
owing to the construction or condi-
tion of the barrel or of the hooks,
their use is likely to be unsafe.

(8) No gear of any description
shall be loaded beyond the safe
working load save in exceptional
cases and then only in so far as may
be allowed by national laws or
regulations.

4) Avan t de mettre en usage une
£coutille, on devra en lever tous les

barrots et galiotes ou les assujettir
solidement pour 6viler qu'ils se
tleplaeent.

5) Toutes precautions devront
Ctre prises pour que les travailleurs
puissent facilement fivacuer les cales
ou les entreponts lorsqu'ils y sont
occup6s & charger ou d6charger du
charbon ou d'autres cargaisons en
vrac.

6) Aucune plate-forme ne sera
utilisfie pour les operations si elle
n'est pas fortement et solidement
construite, convenablement $tayee
et, dans les cas oft c'est n6cessaire,
solidement fixtfe.

-Pour le transport de la charge
entre le navire et la terre, on ne
pourra faire usage d'un charriot &
bras dans le cas oft la plate-forme
est inclin£e au point de presenter un
clanger.

Les plate-formes devront, si cela
est n6cessaire, 6tre recouvertes d'une
mati&re appropri£e pour empccher
les travailleurs de glisser.

7) Lorsque Tespace de travail
dans une cale est Iimit6 au carr6 de
l'6coutille, on ne devra pas, sauf
dans le but d'amorcer le dfisarrimage
ou pour rassembler la charge dans

a) fixer des crochets aux liens ou
autres attaches entourant les balles
de coton, laine, U6ge, sacs de jute ou
autres marchandises similaires;

b) employer des griffes 4 tonneaux
lors du chargement et du dteharge-
ment des tonneaux, It moms que la
construction et la nature des ton-
neaux ainsi que la disposition et
1'fitat des griffes permettent de le
faire sans danger probable.

8) Aucun engin de levage quel
qu'il soit ne devra Stre chargd au
deli du maximum de charge autoris6,
sauf dans des cas exceptionnels et,
dans ces cas, seulement dans la
mesure autoris^e par la 16gislation
nationale.

April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS

(9) In the case of shore cranes
with varying capacity (e.g. raising
and lowering jib with load capacity
varying according to the angle) an
automatic indicator or a table show-
ing the safe working loads at the
corresponding inclinations of the jib
shall be provided on the crane.

Art 12. National laws or regula-
tions shall prescribe such precau-
tions as may be deemed necessary
to ensure the proper protection of
the workers, having regard to the cir-
cumstances of each case, when they
have to deal with or work in proxim-
ity to goods which are in themselves
dangerous to life or health by reason
either of their inherent nature or of
their condition at the time, or work
where such goods have been stowed.

Art, 13. At docks, wharves, quays
and similar places which are in fre-
quent use for the processes, such
facilities as having regard to local
circumstances shall be prescribed
by national laws or regulations shall
be available for rapidly securing the
rendering of first-aid and in serious
cases of accident removal to the
nearest place of treatment. Suffi-
cient supplies of first-aid equipment
shall be kept permanently on the
premises in such a condition and in
such positions as to be fit and readily
accessible for immediate use during
working hours. The said supplies
shall be in charge of a responsible
person or persons, who shall include
one or more persons competent to
render first-aid, and whose services
shall also be readily available during
working hours.

9) Les grues utilises & terre et &
puissance variable (par exemple par
rel&vernent ou abaissement de la
fl&che, la capacite de charge variant
suivant Tangle) devront 8tre munies
d'un indicateur automatique ou d'un
tableau indiquant les maximums de
charge correspondant aux inclinai-
sons de la fl&che.

Art. 12. Les legislations natio-
nales devront pr6voir les precautions
consid6r6es comme indispensables
pour assurer convenablement la pro-
tection des travailleurs, en tenant
compte des circonstances de chaque
cas particulier, quand ils ont & tra-
vailler au contact ou & proximit6 de
mati&res qui sont dangereuses pour
leur vie ou leur sant6, soit par leur
nature m£me, soit £ cause de l'6tat
dans lequel elles se trouvent & ce
moment, ou quand ils ont & travailler
dans des endroits oil de telles ma-
ti&res ont s6journ6.

Art. 13. Sur les docks, wharfs,
quais et autres lieux semblables fr6-
quemment utilises pour les op6ra-
tions, les moyens de secours que
les legislations nationales devront
pr6voir, en tenant compte des cir-
constances locales, seront am6nag6s
de telle fagon que les premiers soins
puissent Stre rapidement assures
et pour que, dans les cas d'accident
s6rieux, rint6ress6 puisse £tre rapide-
ment transport^ £ I'hdpital le plus
proche. Une provision suffisante de
materiel de premier secours devra
£tre conserve en permanence sur
les lieux dont il s'agit, dans un 6tat et
dans des endroits tels qu'elle soit
facilement accessible et puisse §tre
utilis6e imm&liatement au cours des
heures de travail Ces provisions de
mat6riel de premier secours devront
Stre plac6es sous la surveillance
d'une ou de plusieurs personnes re-
sponsables, comprenant une ou plu-
sieurs personnes aptes & donner les
premiers soins et prStes & assurer
imm6diatement leur service pendant
les heures de travail.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 306

At such docks, wharves, quays
and similar places as aforesaid ap-
propriate provision shall also be
made for the rescue of immersed
workers from drowning.

Art. 14. An}?* fencing, gangway,
gear, ladder, lifesaving means or
appliance, light, mark, stage or other
thing whatsoever required to be
provided under this Convention shall
not be removed or interfered with
by any person except when duly
authorised or in case of necessity,
and if removed shall be restored at
the end of the period for which its
removal was necessary.

Art 15. It shall be open to each
Member to grant exemptions from or
exceptions to the provisions of this
Convention in respect of any dock,
wharf, quay or similar place at which
the processes are only occasionally
carried on or the traffic is small and
confined to small ships, or in respect
of certain special ships or special
classes of ships or ships below a
certain small tonnage, or in cases
where as a result of climatic con-
ditions it would be impracticable to
require the provisions of this Conven-
tion to be carried out.

The International Labour Office
shall be kept informed of the provi-
sions in virtue of which any exemp-
tions and exceptions as aforesaid are
allowed.

Art. 1 6. Except as herein other-
wise provided, the provisions of this
Convention which affect the con-
struction or permanent equipment
of the ship shall apply to ships the
building of which is commenced after
the date of ratification of the Con-
vention, and to all other ships within
four years after that date, provided
that in the meantime the said provi-
sions shall be applied so far as rea-

Des mesures appropriates dcvront

£galement 6tre prises sur les docks,
wharfs, quais et autres lieux sem-
blables, ci-dessus mentionn6s, pour
porter secours aux travailleurs qui
tomberaient *t 1'eau.

Art. 14. Aucune personne n'aura
le droit d'enlever ni de d£placer des
garde-corps, passerelles, dispositifs,
6chelles, appareils ou xnoyens de
sauvetage, lumi&res, inscriptions,
plate-formes ou tous autres objets
pr^vus par les dispositions de la
prfeente convention, sauf si elle y
est dflment autoris£e ou en cas de
n6cessit6; les objets dont il s'agit
devront etre remis en place & Fex-
piration du delai pour lequel leur
enlfcvement a et£ nficessaire.

Art. 15, Chaque Membre pourra
accorder des derogations to tales ou
partielles aux dispositions de la
prcisente convention en ce qui con-
cerne tout dock, wharf, quai ou autre
lieu semblable oH les operations nt
sont effectu6es qu'occasionnellement,
ou dans lequel le trafic est restraint
et Hmit6 & de petits bateaux, ou bien
en ce qui concerne certains bateaux
sp^ciaux ou certaines categories spfr-
ciales de bateaux, ou les bateaux
n'atteignant pas un certain tonnage,
de mSme que dans les cas oil, par
suite des conditions climatiques, on
ne pourrait exiger pratiquement
Tobservation des dispositions de la
pr&sente convention.

Le Bureau international du Tra-
vail devra &tre informd des disposi-
tions en vertu desqucllcs les d6roga*
tions totalcs ou partielles mention-
n6es ci-dessus seront accord£es.

Art. 16. Sous reserve des excep-
tions stipules dans d'autres articles,
les mesures pr&vues par la prfesente
convention qui affectent la construc-
tion ou l^quipement permanent du
bateau devront s'appliquer sans
d^lai aux bateaux dont la construc-
tion aura 6t6 commenc^e apr^s la
date de la ratification de la prdsente
convention et elles devront s'ap-
pliquer 4 tous les autres bateaux

April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS

sonable and practicable to such other
ships.

Art. 17. In order to ensure the
due enforcement of any regulations
prescribed for the protection of the

workers against accidents,

(1) The regulations shall clearly
define the persons or bodies who are
to be responsible for compliance

with the respective regulations;

(2) Provision shall be made for an
efficient system of inspection and for
penalties for breaches of the regula-
tions;

(3) Copies or summaries of the
regulations shall be posted up in
prominent positions at docks,
wharves, quays and similar places
which are in frequent use for the
processes.

Art. 1 8, Each Member under-
takes to enter into reciprocal ar-
rangements on the basis of this Con-
vention with the otJier Members
which have ratified this Convention,
including more particularly the mu-
tual recognition of the arrangements
made in their respective countries
for testing, exaniining and annealing
and of certificates and records relat-
ing thereto ;

Provided that, as regards the con-
struction of ships and as regards
plant used on ships and the records
and other matters to be observed on
board under the terms of this Con-
vention, each Member is satisfied
that the arrangements adopted by
the other Member secure a general
standard of safety for the workers
equally effective as the standard
required under its own laws and
regulations ;

dans un d6Iai de quatre ans H partir
de cette date, Toutefois, avant
Texpiration de ce delai les dites
mesures devront etre appliqu£es
& ces autres bateaux pour autant
que cela sera raisonnable et pratique-
ment realisable.

Art. 17. Afin d'assurer Fapplica-
tion effective de tous r&glements
^tablis en vue de la protection des
travailleurs contre les accidents,

1) les dits rdglements devront
determiner clairement les personnes
ou prganismes auxquels incombe
Pobligation d'en observer les pre-
scriptions;

2) des dispositions devront gtre
prises pour instituer un syst^me d 'in-
spection efficace et pour fixer les sanc-
tions applicables en cas de violation
des r^glements;

3) les textes ou des r6sum<§s des
r&glements devront £tre affich^s &
des endroits bien visibles des docks,
wharfs, quais et autres lieux sem-
blables fr^quernment utilises pour
les op6rations.

Art. 18. Chaque Membre s'en-
gage & conclure avec les autres
Membres ayant ratifi6 la pr&sente
convention des accords de r6cipro-
cit6 sur la base de cette convention,
en comprenant plus particuli&rement
dans ces accords la reconnaissance
mutuelle des dispositions prises dans
leurs pays respectifs pour les essais,
v6rifications et recuissons et la re-
connaissance mutuelle des certificats
et proc£s-verbaux y relatifs.

Cet engagement est pris sous
reserve que, pour ce qui concerne la
construction des bateaux et Toutil-
lage utilis6 & bord et pour ce qui
concerne les proc^s-verbaux ainsi
que les diverses prescriptions qui
doivent 6tre observes & bord aux
termes de la pr6sente convention,
chaque Membre soit assur6 que les
dispositions adoptees par Tautre
Membre garantissent, pour les tra-
vailleurs, un niveau g6n6ral de s6-
curit€ d'une efficacit& £gale au niveau
prescrit par sa propre legislation.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 306

Provided also that the Govern-
ments shall have due regard to the
obligations of paragraph (n) of
Article 405 of the Treaty of Ver-
sailles and of the corresponding Arti-
cles of the other Treaties of Peace.

Art. 19. The formal ratifications
of this Convention under the condi-
tions set forth in Part XIII of the
Treaty of Versailles and in the cor-
responding Parts of the other Treaties
of Peace shall be communicated to
the Secretary-General of the League
of Nations for registration.

Art, 20. This Convention shall
be binding only upon those Mem-
bers whose ratifications have been
registered with the Secretariat.

It shall come into force twelve
months after the date on which the
ratifications of two Members of the
International Labour Organisation
have been registered with the Secre-
tary-General.

Thereafter, this Convention shall
come into force for any Member
twelve months after the date on which
its ratification has been registered.

Art* 21. As soon as the ratifica-
tions of two Members of the Inter-
national Labour Organisation have
been registered with the Secretariat,
the Secretary-General of the League
of Nations shall so notify all the
Members of the International La-
bour Organisation. He shall like**
wise notify them of the registration
of ratifications which may be com*
municated subsequently by other
Members of the Organisation*

Art. 22. A Member which has
ratified this Convention may de-
nounce it after the expiration of ten
years from the date on which the
Convention first comes into force, by
an act communicated to the Secre-
tary-General of the League of Na-
tions for registration* Such denun-
ciation shall not take effect until
one year after the date on which it
is registered with the Secretariat.

Each Member which has ratified

En outre, les Gouvernements tien-
dront dflment compte cles obliga-
tions qui rfsultent du paragraphs 1 1
tie Tarticle 405 du Traite cle Ver-
sailles et des articles correspondants
des autres Trait.es cle Puix.

Art. 19. Les ratifications oflicielles
de la prfisente convention dans les
conditions pr^vues & la Partie XIII
du Trait6 de Versailles et aux Parties
correspondantes des autres Trait6s
de Paix seront communiques au
Secretaire g6n6ral de la Soci6t6 des
Nations et par lui enregistrtfes.

Art, 20, La pr6sente convention
ne Hera que les Membres de TOr-
ganisation Internationale du Travail ,
dont la ratification aura £tfi en-
registrde au Secretariat.

Elle entrera en vigueur douze mois
aprds que les ratifications de deux
Membres auront 6t6 enregistrtfes par
le Secr6taire

Par la suite, cette convention en-
trera en vigueur pour chaque Mem-
bra douze mois aprfes la date oii sa
ratification aura 6t6 enregistrte.

Art. 21. Aussitdt que les ratifi-
cations de deux Membres de 1 'Or-
ganisation Internationale du Travail
auront 6t6 enregistr&es au Secr6*
tariat, le Secretaire g(m£ral de la
Soci6t£ des Nations notifiera ce fait
& tous les Membres de reorganisation
Internationale du Travail. II leur
notifiera 6galement Tenregistrement
des ratifications qui lui seront ult(>
rieurement communiques par tons
autres Membres de FOrganisation*

Art 22* Tout Membre ayant
ratifi6 la pr£aente convention pent
la ^d6noncer 4 Fexpiration dfune
pMode de dix annte aprds la date
de la mise en vigueur initiale de la
convention, par un acte communique
au Secretaire g6n6ral de la Sociit6
des Nations, et par lui enregistrt*
La d6nonciation ne prendra effet
qu*une ann6e apr^s avoir 6t6 en-
registr6e au Secretariat.

Tout Membre ayant ratifi^ la

April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS

this Convention and which does not,
within the year following the expira-
tion of the period of ten years men-
tioned in the preceding paragraph,
exercise the right of denunciation
provided for in this Article, will be
bound for another period of five
years and, thereafter, may denounce
this Convention at the expiration of
each period of five years under the
terms provided for in this Article.

Art. 23, At the expiration of each
period of ten years after the coming
Into force of this Convention, the
Governing Body of the International
Labour Office shall present to the
General Conference a report on the
working of this Convention and shall
consider the desirability of placing
on the Agenda of the Conference the
question of its revision in whole or
in part.

Art. 24. Should the Conference
adopt a new Convention revising this
Convention in whole or in part, the
ratification by a Member of the new
revising Convention shall ipso jure
involve denunciation of this Con-
vention without any requirement of
delay , notwithstanding the provisions
of Article 22 above, if and when the
new revising Convention shall have
come into force.

As from the date of the coming into
force of the new revising Conven-
tion, the present Convention shall
cease to be open to ratification by
the Members.

Nevertheless, this Convention shall
remain in force in its actual form and
content for those Members which
have ratified it but have not ratified
the revising Convention.

Art. 25. The French and English
texts of this Convention shall both
be authentic.

The foregoing is the authentic
text of the Draft Convention duly
adopted by the General Conference

prfisente convention qui, dans le
d£lai d'une ann&e aprds F expiration
de la p6riode de dix ann<§es me'n-
tionn^e au paragraphs pr6c6dent,
ne fera pas usage de la facult<§ de
d^nonciation pr<§vue par le present
article, sera H6 pour une nouvelle
p6riode de cinq ann6es et, par la suite,
pourra ddnoncer la pr£sente con-
vention & 1'expiration de chaque
p^riode de cinq ann£es dans les con-
ditions pr6vues au present article.

Art. 23* A Texpiration de chaque
p6riode de dix ann£es £ compter de
rentrfe en vigueur de la pr<§sente
convention, le Conseil d'adminis-
tration du Bureau international du
Travail devra presenter & la Conf6-
rence g6n6rale un rapport sur Tap-
plication de la pr&sente convention et
d6cidera s'il y a lieu d'inscrire & 1'ordre
du jour de la Conference la question
de sa revision totale ou partielle.

Art. 24. Au cas oft la Conference
internationale adopterait une nou-
velle convention portant revision
totale ou partielle de la pr6sente
convention, la ratification par un
Membre de la nouvelle convention
portant revision entratnerait de plein
droit d^nonciation de la pr^sente
convention sans condition de d61ai
nonobstant Particle 22 ci-dessus,
sous reserve que la nouvelle conven-
tion portant revision soit entree en
vigueur,

A partir de la date de Tentr^e en
vigueur de la nouvelle convention
portant revision, la pr6sente con-
vention cesserait d'etre ouverte &
la ratification des Membres.

La prfeente convention demeure-
rait toutefois en vigueur dans sa
forme et teneur pour les Membres
qui Tauraient ratifi^e et qui ne
ratifieraient pas la nouvelle con-
vention portant revision.

Art. 25. Les textes frangais^et
anglais de la pr6sente convention
feront foi Tun et 1'autre.

Le texte qui pr£c&de est le texte
authentique du projet de convention
dftment adopt6 par la Conf6rence

30 INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 3C>7

of the International Labour Organisa- gtfnfrale de 1 Organisation intema-

tion during its Sixteenth Session tionale du Travail dans sa seiz&mc

which was held at Geneva and de- session qui s'est tenue & Genfeve et

clared closed the joth day of April qui a 6t6 d£clar6e close le 30 avril

1932. 1932.

IN FAITH WHEREOF we have ap- EN FOI DE QUOI ont apposfi leurs

pended our signatures this fifth clay signatures, le cinq mai 1932,

of May 1932.

For the President of the Conference, Bo HAMMARSKJOLD, Vice-president
The Director of the International Labour Office, ALBERT THOMAS

No. 307

CONVENTION concerning the Age for Admission of Children to
Non-Industrial Employment. Adopted at Geneva, April 30,
1932.

CONVENTION concernant Page d'adrnission des enfants atu;
travatix non-indtistriels. Adoptee a Geneve, 30 avril 1932,

EDITOR'S NOTE. A draft convention on the minimum age for admission of children to
industrial employment was adopted by the International Labor Conference at Washington,
November 28, 1919 (No. 14, ante)*, a draft convention on the minimum age for admission of
children to employment at sea was adopted at Genoa, July 9, 1920 (No. 23, ante)*, and a
draft convention on the age for admission of children to employment in agriculture was
adopted at Geneva, November 16, 1921 (No. 60, ante). This convention was adopted as a
draft convention by the International Labor Conference at its sixteenth session ; its short
title is "Minimum Age (Non-Industrial Employment) Convention, 1932,"

RATIFICATIONS, Ratifications of this convention were communicated to the Secretary-
General of the League of Nations by Uruguay, June 6, 1933; Belgium, June 6, 1934; Spain,
June 22, 1934; Netherlands, July 12, 1935; Cuba, February 24, 1936; Austria, February
26, 1936.

BIBLIOGRAPHY. International Labour Conference, Fifteenth Session, Geneva, zp^jr ( Rec-
ords) t 2 vols, (Geneva: International Labour Office, 1931); idem, sixteenth session, Geneva,
1932 (1932). See also the preparatory documents of the fifteenth and sixteenth sessions of
the conference.

Anon., "The Fifteenth Session of the International Labour Conference," 24 InL Labour
Rev, (1931), pp. 135-75; "The Sixteenth Session of the International Labour Conference/'
26 idem (1932), pp. 151-98.

Entered into force June 6, 1935.*

Text from the collection of authentic texts published by the Secretariat of the

League of Nations,

The General Conference of the La Conference g6n^rale de rOr-
International Labour Organisation ganisation Internationale du Travail
of the League of Nations, de la Society des Nations,

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, in a separate register of labor
conventions, June 6, 1935.

April SO, 1932 MINIMUM AGE (NON-INDUSTRIAL EMPLOYMENT)

Having been convened at Ge-
neva by the Governing Body of
the International Labour Office,
and having met in its Sixteenth
Session on 12 April 1932, and

Having decided upon the adop-
tion of certain proposals with re-
gard to the age for admission of
children to employment in non-
industrial occupations, which is
the third item on the Agenda of
the Session, and

Having determined that these
proposals shall take the form of a
draft international convention,

adopts, this thirtieth day of April
of the year one thousand nine
hundred and thirty-two the follow-
ing Draft Convention for ratification
by the Members of the International
Labour Organisation, in accordance
with the provisions of Part XIII
of the Treaty of Versailles and of the
corresponding Parts of the other
Treaties of Peace:

Article I.— (i) This Convention
shall apply to any employment not
dealt with in the following Con-
ventions adopted by the Interna-
tional Labour Conference at its First,
Second and Third Sessions respec-
tively:

Convention fixing the minimum
age for admission of children to in-
dustrial employment (Washington,
1919);

Convention fixing the minimum
age for admission of children to em-
ployment at sea (Genoa, 1920) ;

Convention concerning the age for
admission of children to employment
in agriculture (Geneva, 1921).

The competent authority in each
country shall, after consultation
with the principal organisations of
employers and workers concerned,
define the line of division which
separates the employments covered
by this Convention from those dealt
with in the three aforesaid Conven-
tions,

Convoqu6e & Geneve par le
Conseil d 'administration du Bu-
reau international du Travail, et
s'y 6tant r6unie le 12 avril 1932,
en sa seizi&me session,

Aprds avoir d6cid6 d 'adopter
diverses propositions relatives &
I'&ge d 'admission des enfants au
travail dans les professions non
industrielles, question qui con-
stitue le troisifeme point de 1'ordre
du jour de la session, et

Apr&s avoir d6cid6 que ces
propositions prendraient la forme
d'un projet de convention inter-
nationale,

adopte, ce trenti&me jour d'avril mil
neuf cent trente deux, le projet de
convention ci-apr&s & ratifier par
les Membres de 1 'Organisation Inter-
nationale du Travail conform6ment
aux dispositions de la Partie XIII
du Trait6 de Versailles et des Parties
correspondantes des autres Trait6s
de Paix:

Article i. — i) La pr6sente con-
vention s'applique & tout travail ne
faisant pas 1'objet de la r6glementa-
tion pr^vue par les conventions
suivantes adopt6es respectivement
par la Conf6rence Internationale du
Travail & ses premiere, deuxi^me et
troisi&me sessions :

Convention fixant I'&ge minimum
d'admission des enfants aux travaux
industriels (Washington, 1919);

Convention fixant I'&ge minimum
d'admission des enfants au travail
maritime (G6nes, 1920) ;

Convention concernant F&ge d'ad-
mission des enfants au travail dans
1'agriculture (Gen&ve, 1921).

Dans chaque pays, l'autorit£ com-
pos ten te, apr&s consultation des
principales organisations patroriales
et ouvri&res int<§ress£es, dlterminera
la ligne de demarcation entre le
champ d'application de la pr6sente
convention et celui des trois con-
ventions susmentionn6es.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 307

(2) This Convention shall not
apply to :

(a) employment in sea-fishing;

(b) work clone In technical and
professional schools, provided that
such work is essentially of an educa-
tive character, is not intended for
commercial profit, and is restricted,
approved and supervised by public
authority,

(3) It shall be open to the com-
petent authority in each country to
exempt from the application of this
Convention :

(a) employment in establishments
in which only members of the em-
ployer's family are employed, except
employment which is harmful, preju-
dicial or dangerous within the
meaning of Articles 3 and 5 of this
Convention ;

(&) domestic work in the family
performed by members of that
family.

Art. 2. Children under four-
teen years of age, or children over
fourteen years who are still required
by national laws or regulations to
attend primary school, shall not be
employed in any employment to
which this Convention applies except
as hereinafter otherwise provided.

Art. 3. — (i) Children over twelve
years of age may, outside the hours
fixed for school attendance, be em-
ployed on light work:

(a) which is not harmful to their
health or normal development;

(b) which is not such as to preju-
dice their attendance at school or
their capacity to benefit from the
instruction there given ; and

(c) the duration of which does not
exceed two hours per day on either
school days or holidays, the total
number of hours spent at school and
on light work in no case to exceed
seven per day.

(2) Light work shall be pro-
hibited :

2) La prfisente convention ne
s'appliquera pas :

a) <L la pfiche maritime;

b) au travail dans les 6coles tech-
niques et prof essionnel les, & la
condition qu'il pr6sente un caractfrre
essentiellement fiducatif, n'ait pas
pour objet un bfinfifice commercial
et qu'il soit Iimit6, approuv6 et con-
tr616 par I'autoritfi publique,

3) Dans chaque pays, Tautorit6
comp£tente aura la facult6 d'exclure
de 1'application de la pr6sente con-
vention ;

a) Temploi dans les 6tablissements
o& sont seuls occup6s les membres
de la famille de Temployeur, 4 la
condition que cet emploi ne soit pas
nuisible, pr^judiciable ou dangereux
au sens des articles 3 et 5 ci-dessous ;

b) le travail domestique dans la
famille par les membres de cette
famille.

Art. 2. Les enfants de moins de
quatorze ans ou ceux qui, ayant
depassfi cet Hge, sont encore sounus
& 1'obligation scolaire primaire en
vertu de la legislation nationale, ne
pourront Stre occup6s & aucun des
travaux auxquels s'applique la pr6-
sente convention, sous reserve des
dispositions ci-apr&s.

Art. 3.—!) Les enfants igfe de
douze ans accomplis pourront, en
dehors des heures fix6es pour la
fr^quentation scolaire, litre occup^s
& des travaux 16gers, sous reserve
que ces travaux;

a) ne soient pas nuisibles JSi leur
sant6 ou & leur d6veloppement
normal ;

b) ne soient pas de nature 4 porter
prejudice ^t leur assiduit6 &, 1'^cole
ou & leur facult6 de b6n6ficier de
Tinstruction qui y est donn^e;

c) n'excfedent pas deux heures par
jour, aussi bien les jours de classe
que les jours de vacances, le nombre
total quotidien des heures consacr^es
& l'<§cole et aux travaux 16gers ne
devant en aucun cas d6passer sept,

2) Les travaux 16gers seront pro-
hib6s:

April 30, 1932 MINIMUM AGE (NON-INDUSTRIAL EMPLOYMENT)

(a) on Sundays and legal public
holidays ;

(b) during the night, that is to
say during a period of at least twelve
consecutive hours comprising the
interval between 8 p.m. and 8 a.m.

(3) After the principal organisa-
tions of employers and workers
concerned have been consulted, na-
tional laws or regulations shall:

(a) specify what forms of employ-
ment may be considered to be light
work for the purpose of this article;

(b) prescribe the preliminary con-
ditions to be complied with as safe-
guards before children may be em-
ployed in light work.

(4) Subject to the provisions of
sub-paragraph (a) of paragraph (i)
above,

(a) national laws or regulations
may determine work to be allowed
and the number of hours per day to
be worked during the holiday time
of children referred to in Article 2
who are over fourteen years of age;

(b) in countries where no provi-
sion exists relating to compulsory
school attendance, the time spent on
light work shall not exceed four and
a half hours per day*

Art. 4. In the interests of art,
science or education, national laws
or regulations may, by permits
granted in individual cases, allow
exceptions to the provisions of Arti-
cles 2 and 3 of this Convention in
order to enable children to appear in
any public entertainment or as
actors or supernumeraries in the
making of cinematographic films;

Provided that:

(a) no such exception, shall be
allowed in respect of employment
which is dangerous within the mean-
ing of Article 5, such as employment
in circuses, variety shows or cab-
arets ;

(£>) strict safeguards shall be pre-

a) les dimanches et jours de ftte
publique 16gale ;

b) pendant la nuit, c'est~&-dire
pendant un intervalle d'au moins
douze heures cons£cutives compre-
nant la periode entre huit heures du
soir et huit heures du matin.

3) Apr&s consultation des prin-
cipales organisations patronales et
ouvri^res int£ress6es, la legislation
nationale:

a) determinera quels sont les
genres de travaux qui peuvent £tre
considers comme travaux legers au
sens du present article;

b) prescrira les garanties preiimi-
naires £ remplir avant que les
enfants ne puissent gtre employes &
des travaux legers.

4) Sous reserve des dispositions
de raiinea a) du paragraphe I ci-
dessus :

a) la legislation nationale pourra
determiner les travaux permis et
leur dur6e journali&re, pour la p6riode
des vacances des enfants ayant
depasse quatorze ans, vises & Parti-
cle 2;

6) dans les pays ou n'existe au-
cune disposition relative £ la fr6-
quentation scolaire obligatoire, la
duree des travaux lagers ne devra
pas depasser quatre heures et demie
par jour.

Art. 4. Dans rint&rfit de Tart,
de la science ou de Fenseignement,
la legislation nationale pourra, par
le moyen d'autorisations individu-
elles, accorder des derogations aux
dispositions des articles 2 et 3 de la
pr6sente convention, afin de per-
mettre 4 des enfants de paraitre dans
tous spectacles publics, ainsi que
de participer comme acteurs ou
figurants dans des prises de vue
cinematographiques.

Toutefois,

a) aucune derogation ne sera ac-
cord6e dans le cas d'un emploi
dangereux au sens de Tarticle 5 ci-
dessous, notamment pour des spec-'
tacles de cirque, varietes et caba-
rets;

&) des garanties strictes seront

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 307

scribed for the health, physical
development and morals of the
children , for ensuring kind treatment
of them, adequate rest, and the

continuation of their education ;

Art. 5. A higher age or ages than
those referred to in Article 2 of this
Convention shall be fixed by na-
tional laws or regulations for admis-
sion of young persons and adolescents
to any employment which, by its
nature, or the circumstances in
which it is to be carried on, is
dangerous to the life, health or
morals of the persons employed in it.

Art. 6. A higher age or ages than
those referred to in Article 2 of this
Convention shall be fixed by national
laws or regulations for admission of
young persons and adolescents to
employment for purposes of itiner-
ant trading in the streets or in places
to which the public have access, to
regular employment at stalls outside
shops or to employment in itinerant
occupations, in cases where the con-
ditions of such employment require
that a higher age should be fixed.

Art. 7. In order to ensure the due
enforcement of the provisions of this
Convention, national laws or regu-
lations shall :

(a) provide for an adequate sys-
tem of public inspection and super-
vision ;

(&) provide suitable means for
facilitating the identification and
supervision of persons under a
specified age engaged in the em-
ployments and occupations covered
by Article 6 ;

(s) provide penalties for breaches
of the laws or regulations by which
effect is given to the provisions of
this Convention.

Art. 8. There shall be included in
the annual reports to be submitted

6tablies en vue de sauvegarder la
sant6, le d6veloppement physique et

la moralitfi des enfants, de leur as-
surer de bons traitements, un repos
convenable et la continuation de leur
instruction ;

c) les enfants autorisfis i travailler
dans les conditions pr6vues au pre-
sent article ne devront pas travailler
aprds minuit.

Art. 5* La legislation nationale
fixera un &ge ou des %es sup6rieurs &
ceux qui sent mentionnds & 1 'article
2 de la prfisente convention pour
radmission des jeunes gens et adoles-
cents & tout emplpi qui, par sa
nature ou les conditions clans les-
quelles il est rempli, est dangereux
pour la vie, la sant6 ou la moralit6
des personnes qui y sont affect6es.

Art. 6. La legislation nationale
fixera un &ge ou des %es superieurs
4 ceux qui sont mentionntfs & Particle
2 de la prison te convention pour
radmission des jeunes gens et adoles-
cents aux emplois dans le commerce
ambulant sur la voie publique ou
dans les 6tablissements et lieux
publics, aux emplois permanents £
des <§talages ext6rieurs, ou aux em-
plois dans les professions ambulantes,
lorsque ces emplois sont exerc(xs dans
des conditions qui justifient qu'un
&ge plus 61ev6 soit fix6.

Art. 7. En vue d 'assurer 1 'appli-
cation effective des dispositions de la
pr6sente convention, la legislation
nationale:

a) pr^voira un systfeme appropri6
d 'inspection et cle contrOle officials;

6) pr6voira des mesures appro-
prides pour faciliter Tidentification
et le contrdle des personnes au-
dessous d'un &ge d6termin6 occupies
dans les emplois et professions visfes
il'article6;

c) 6tablira des p6nalit6s pour r6~
primer les infractions & la 16gislation
donnant effet aux dispositions de la
pr<§sente convention.

Art 8, Les rapports annuels pr^-
vus par Particle 408 du Trait6 de

April 30, X932 MINIMUM AGE (NON-INDUSTRIAL EMPLOYMENT)

under Article 408 of the Treaty of
Versailles and the corresponding
Articles of the other Treaties of Peace
full information concerning all laws
and regulations by which effect is
given to the provisions of this Con-
vention, including:

(a) a list of the forms of em-
ployment which national laws or
regulations specify to be light work
for the purpose of Article 3 ;

(&) a list of the forms of em-
ployment for which, in accordance
with Articles 5 and 6, national laws
or regulations have fixed ages for
admission higher than those laid
down in Article 2 ;

(c) full information concerning the
circumstances in which exceptions to
the provisions of Articles 2 and 3
are permitted in accordance with
the provisions of Article 4.

Art, 9. The provisions of Articles
2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 of this Convention
shall not apply to India, but in
India:

(1) the employment of children
under ten shall be prohibited :

Provided that in the interests of
art, science or education, national
laws or regulations may, by per-
mits, granted in individual cases,
allow exceptions to the above
provision in order to enable chil-
dren to appear in any public enter-
tainment or as actors or super-
numeraries in the making of
cinematographic films.

Provided also that should the
age for the admission of children
to factories not using power
which are not subject to the
Indian Factories Act be fixed by
national laws or regulations at an
age exceeding ten, the age so pre-
scribed for admission to such
factories shall be substituted for
the age of ten for the purpose of
this paragraph.

(2) Persons under fourteen
years of age shall not be employed

Versailles et les articles corres-
pondants des autres Traites de Paix
donneront des renseignements com-
plets sur la legislation donnant
effet aux dispositions de la pr6sente
convention. Ces renseignements
contiendront notamment :

a) une liste des genres d'emplois
que la legislation nationale qualifie
de travaux legers au sens de I1 article

b) une liste des genres d'emplois
pour lesquels, conformement aux
articles 5 et 6, la legislation nationale
a fix6 des <iges d 'admission plus
eieves que ceux etablis par Particle
2;

c) des renseignements complets
sur les conditions dans lesquelles les
derogations aux articles 2 et 3sont
autorisees en vertu de Tarticle 4.

Art. 9. Les dispositions des arti-
cles 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 et 7 de la pr6sente
convention ne s'appliqueront pas £
I'lnde. Mais dans 1'Inde:

1) L'emploi des enfants de
moins de dix ans sera interdit.

Toutefois, dans I'int6r6t de Tart,
de la science ou de Tenseignement,
la legislation nationale pourra, au
moyen d'autorisations individu-
elles, accorder des derogations £
la disposition ci-dessus, afin de per-
mettre & des enfants de parattre
dans tous spectacles publics ainsi
que de participer comme acteurs
ou figurants dans des prises de vue
cinematographiques.

En outre, au cas oil I'Uge d'ad-
mission des enfants dans les manu-
factures n'employant pas de force
motrice et qui ne sont pas regies
par la loi indienne sur les manu-
factures viendrait & §tre fixe par la
legislation nationale au-dessus de
dix ans, I'&ge ainsi present pour
Tadrnission au travail dans ces
manufactures sera substitue £
rage de dix ans aux fins de Tap-
plication du present paragraphs.

2) Les personnes de moins de
quatorze ans ne pourront £tre

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No* 307

In any non-industrial employment
which the competent authority,
after consultation with the prin-
cipal organisations of employers
and workers concerned, may de-
clare to involve danger to life,
health or morals,

(3) An age above ten shall be
fixed by national laws or regula-
tions for admission of young per-
sons and adolescents to employ-
ment for purposes of itinerant
trading in the streets or in places
to which the public have access,
to regular employment at stalls
outside shops or to employment
m itinerant occupations, in cases
where the conditions of such em-
ployment require that a higher
age should be fixed.

(4) National laws or regulations
shall provide for the due enforce-
ment of the provisions of this
Article and in particular shall
provide penalties for breaches of
the laws or regulations by which
effect is given to the provisions
of this Article.

(5) The competent authority
shall, after a period of five years
from the date of passing of legisla-
tion giving effect to the provisions
of this Convention, review the
whole position with a view to
Increasing the minimum age pre-
scribed in this Convention* such
review to cover the whole of the
provisions of this Article*

Should legislation be enacted in
India making attendance at school
compulsory until the age of fourteen
this Article shall cease to apply, and
Articles 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 shall
thenceforth be applicable to India.

Art. 10. The formal ratifications
of this Convention tinder the condi-
tions set forth in Part XIII of the
Treaty of Versailles and in the cor-
responding Parts of the other Trea-
ties of Peace shall be communicated
to the Secretary-General of the
League of Nations for registration.

occupies fit aucun des travaux non
industriels que Fautorite comp6-
tente, apris consultation des prin-
cipales organisations d'employeum
et de travailleurs interessees, pour-
rait declarer dangereux pour la
vie, la sante ou la morality*

3) La legislation rationale fixe-
ra un §ge sup6rieur 4 dix ans pour
{'admission des jeunes gens et
adolescents aux emplois dans le
commerce ambulant sur la voie
publique ou dans les etablissements
et lieux publics, aux emplois per-
manents & des etalages ext6rieurs,
ou aux emplois dans les profes-
sions ambulantes, lorsque ces
emplois sont exerc6s dans des
conditions qui justifient qu'un
§ge plus 61ey6 soit fixe.

4) La legislation nationale pr6-
voira des mesures pour 1'applica-
tion des dispositions du present
article et, en particulier, etablira
des p6nalit6s pour r6primer les
infractions & la legislation donnant
effet aux dispositions du present
article.

5) L'autoritecompetentedevra,
apr&s une periode de cinq ans &
compter de la promulgation des lois
donnant effet aux dispositions de la
pr^sente convention, r£examiner
complement la situation en vue
de relever les iges minima presents
& la presents convention, nouvel
examen qui s*appliquera & toutes
les dispositions du present article.

S'il 6tait 6tabli, dans 1'Inde, une
legislation rendant la fr^quentation
scolaire obligatoire jusqu*& 1'Sge de
quatorze ane, le present article ces*
serait d'etre applicable et les articles
2» 3» 4» 5> 6 et 7 deviendraient alors
applicables 4 1'lAde*

Att* xo. Les ratifications offi-
cielles de la prtsente convention dans
les conditions prevues It la Partie
XIII du Traite de Versailles et aux
Parties correspondantes des autres
Trait^s de Paix seront communiquees
au Secretaire general de la Soci6t6
des Nations et par lui enregistrees.

April 30, 1932 MINIMUM AGE (NON-INDUSTRIAL EMPLOYMENT)

Art. n. This Convention shall be
binding only upon those Members

whose ratifications have been regis-
tered with the Secretariat.

It shall come into force twelve
months after the date on which the
ratifications of two Members of the
International Labour Organisation
have been registered with the Secre-
tary-General.

Thereafter, this Convention shall
come into force for any Member
twelve months after the date on
which its ratification has been regis-
tered*

Art. 12, As soon as the ratifica-
tions of two Members of the Interna-
tional Labour Organisation have
been registered with the Secretariat,
the Secretary-General of the League
of Nations shall so notify all the
Members of the International La-
bour Organisation. He shall like-
wise notify them of the registration
of ratifications which may be com-
municated subsequently by other
Members of the Organisation.

Art* 13* A Member which has
ratified this Convention may de-
nounce it after the expiration of ten
years from the date on which the
Convention first comes into force, by
an act communicated to the Secre-
tary-General of the League of Na-
tions for registration. Such denun-
ciation shall not take effect until one
year after the date on which it is
registered with the Secretariat,

Each Member which has ratified
this Convention and which does not,
within the year following the expira-
tion of the period of ten years
mentioned in the preceding para-
graph, exercise the right of denunci-
ation provided for in this Article,
will be bound for another period of
five years and, thereafter, may
denounce this Convention at the
expiration of each period of five
years under the terms provided for in
this Article,

Art ii. La presente convention
ne Hera que les Membres de TOr-
ganisation Internationale du Travail
dont la ratification aura ete en-
registr£e au Secretariat*

Elle entrera en vigueur douze mois
apr&s que les ratifications de deux
Membres auront ete enregistr^es
par le Secretaire general.

Par la suite, cette convention
entrera en vigueur pour chaque
Membre douze mois apr&s la date
oti sa ratification aura ete enregistr^e.

Art. 12. Aussitdt que les ratifi-
cations de deux Membres de 1'Or-
ganisation Internationale du Travail
auront ete enregistr6es au Secretariat,
le Secretaire general de la Societe des
Nations notifiera ce fait & tous les
Membres de TOrganisation inter-
nationale du Travail. II leur noti-
fiera egalement Tenregistrement des
ratifications qui lui seront ult6-
rieurernent communiqu^es par tous
les autres Membres de TOrganisa*
tion.

Art. 13. Tout Membre ayant
ratifie la presente convention peut
la denoncer & Texpiration d'une
periode de dix annees apr&s la date
de la mise en vigueur initiale de la
convention, par un acte communique
au Secretaire general de la Societe
des Nations, et par lui enregistre.
La denonciation ne prendra effet
qu'une annee apr&s avoir ete enre-
gistree au Secretariat.

Tout Membre ayant ratifie la
pr6sente convention qui, dans le
delai d'une ann6e aprds Texpiration
de la periode de dix annees men-
tionnee au paragraphe precedent, ne
fera pas usage de la faculte de denon-
ciation prevue par le present article
sera lie pour une nouvelle periode de
cinq annees, et, par la suite, pourra
denoncer la presente convention a
Texpiration de chaque period^ de
cinq annees dans les conditions
prevues au present article.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 307

Art. 14, At the expiration of each
period of ten years after the coming
into force of this Convention, the
(Governing Body of the International
Labour Office shall present to the
General Conference a report on the
working of this Convention and shall
consider the desirability of placing
on the Agenda of the Conference the
question of its revision in whole or
in part.

Art. 15. Should the Conference
adopt a new Convention revising
this Convention in whole or in part,
the ratification by a Member of the
new revising Convention shall ipso
jure involve denunciation of this
"Convention without any require-
ment of delay, notwithstanding the
provisions of Article 13 above if and
when the new revising Convention
shall have come into force.

As from the date of the coming
into force of the new revising Con-
vention, the present Convention
shall cease to be open to ratification
by the Members.

Nevertheless, this Convention
shall remain in force in its actual
form and content for those Members
which have ratified it but have not
ratified the revising Convention.

Art. 16* The French and English
texts of this Convention shall both
be authentic.

The foregoing is the authentic
text of the Draft Convention duly
adopted by the General Conference
of the International Labour Organi-
sation during its Sixteenth Session
which was held at Geneva and de-
clared closed the 30 th day of April
1932.

IN FAITH WHEREOF we have ap-
pended our signatures this fifth day
of May 1932.

Art. 14* A Pexpiration de chaque
p^riode de dix anntes It compter de
Tentr6e en vigueur de la prfeente
convention, le Conseil d*administra«*
tion du Bureau international du
Travail devra presenter & la Conf6-
rence g6n6rale un rapport sur Fappli-
cation de la pr6sente convention et
d<§cidera s'il y a lieu d'inscrire £
1'ordre du jour de la Conference la
question de sa revision totale ou
partielle.

Art. 15. Au cas oft la Conference
gfinfirale adopterait une nouvelle
convention portant revision totale ou
partielle de la pr6sente convention,
la ratification par un Membre de la
nouvelle convention portant revision
entrainerait de plcin droit d6noncia-
tion de la prdsente convention sans
condition de dfilai nonobstant Par-
ticle 13 ci-dessus, sous r6serve que la
nouvelle convention portant revision
soit entr6e en vigueur.

A partir de la date de I'entrfie en
vigueur de la nouvelle convention
portant revision, la pr6sente conven-
tion cesserait d'fitre ouverte £ la
ratification des Membres.

La pr6sente convention demeure-
rait toutefois en vigueur dans sa
forme et teneur pour les Membres
qui 1'auraient ratifife et qui ne
ratifieraient pas la nouvelle conven-
tion portant revision.

Art, 1 6* Les textes fran^ais et
anglais de la pr6sente convention
feront foi Tun et I'autre.

Le texte qui prtcMe est le texte
authentique du projet de convention
dflment adopts par la Conference
g£n6rale de TOrganlsation Interna-
tionale du Travail dans sa seizidme
session qui s'est tenue & Geneve et
qui a 6t6 d£clar£e close le 30 avril
1932.

EN FOI BE QUOI ont appos6 leurs
signatures, le cinq mai 1932.

For the President of the Conference, Bo HAMMARSKjdLD, Vice-president
The Director of the International Labour Office, ALBERT THOMAS

May 3D, 1932 DECLARATION BY IRAQ 39

No. 308

DECLARATION by the Kingdom of Iraq. Signed at Baghdad, May

30, 1932.

DECLARATION dti Royaume de PIrak. Signee a Bagdad, 30 mai

1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. The occasion of this declaration was the termination of the mandatory
r%ime in Iraq (see No. ib xv, ante), and the request of the Kingdom of Iraq for admission to
membership in the League of Nations. On January 28, 1932, the Council of the League of
Nations adopted a resolution calling for such a declaration as a condition precedent to the
termination of the mandate (League of Nations Official Journal, 1932, p. 474); and on May
*9» *93^» it approved the text of this declaration (idem, pp. 1213, 1347). Iraq became a
member of the League of Nations on October 3, 1932. Though it is a unilateral declaration,
it places Iraq under various "obligations of international concern " vis-a-vis the members of
the League of Nations, Its language is largely borrowed from the various treaties for the
protection of minorities (Nos. 3, 4, 5, 16, 26, ante), and its form follows that of declarations
previously made by Albania (No* 52, ante), and Lithuania (No. 73, ante). For an explana-
tion of its terms, see the report of the committee set up by the Council of the League of
Nations, League of Nations Official Journal, 1932, p. 1342. The Council resolution of May
19, 1932 recommended the renunciation of the capitulations in Iraq, and such action was
taken by various states in 1932. Idem, 1932, pp. 1850 ff.

RATIFICATIONS. The ratification of this declaration by Iraq was deposited with the Secre-
tariat of the League of Nations, June 29, 1932.

BIBLIOGRAPHY. Permanent Mandates Commission, Minutes of the Twenty-first Session,
League of Nations Document, C. 830. M. 4 1 1. 193 1. VI; Minutes of the Sixty-sixth and Sixty-
seventh Sessions of the Council, League of Nations Official Journal , 1932, pp. 471—79, 606—10,
1212-16, 1342-50.

A. H. el Gammal, La fin des mandats internationaux et I1 experience irakienne (Dijon: Berni-
gand, 1932), 182 pp.; E. Main, /rag; From Mandate to Independence (London: Allen and
Unwin, 1935), Ch. V; W. H. Ritsher, Criteria of Capacity for Independence (Jerusalem:
Syrian Orphanage Press, 1934), 152 pp.; A. J. Toynbee (Ed.)» "The Admission of the King-
dom of Iraq to Membership in the League of Nations," Survey of International Affairs, 1934
(London: Humphrey Milford), pp. 194-211; Anon., "Die allgemeinen Voraussetzungen fur
die Aufhebung der Mandatsordnung in einem Mandatsgebiet und die Beendigung des
Mandats tiber Iraq," 4 Zeitschrift fUr ausldndisches offentliches Recht und Volkerrecht (1934),
PP- 155-9*

Entered into force June 29, 1932^
Text from League of Nations Document, A. 17. 1932. VII.

CHAPTER I CHAPITRE I

Protection of Minorities Protection des minority's

Article I. The stipulations con- Article i. Les stipulations con-
tained in the present chapter are tenues dans le present chapitre
recognised as fundamental laws of seront reconnues comme lois fon-
Iraq, and no law, regulation or offi- damentales en Irak. Aucune loi,

1 Not registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations. (July i, 1937)-

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 308

da! action shall conflict or interfere

with these stipulations, nor shall

any law, regulation or official action
now or in the future prevail over
them.

Art* 2*— i. Full and complete pro-
tection of life and liberty will be
assured to all inhabitants of Iraq
without distinction of birth, nation-
ality, language, race or religion.

2. All inhabitants of Iraq will be
entitled to the free exercise, whether
public or private, of any creed, reli-
gion or belief, whose practices are not
inconsistent with public order or
public morals,

Art, 3, Ottoman subjects habitu-
ally resident in the territory of Iraq
on August 6th, 1924, shall be deemed
to have acquired on that date Iraqi
nationality to the exclusion of Otto-
man nationality in accordance with
Article 30 of the Lausanne Peace
Treaty1 and under the conditions laid
down in the Iraqi Nationality Law
of October 9th, 1924.^

Art, 4.— i. All Iraqi nationals
shall be equal before the law and
shall enjoy the same civil and politi-
cal rights without distinction as to
race, language or religion,

2. The electoral system shall guar-
antee equitable representation to
racial, religious and linguistic minor-
ities in Iraq.

3. Differences of race, language or
religion shall not prejudice any Iraqi
national in matters relating to the
enjoyment of civil or political rights,
as, for instance, admission to public
employments, functions and hon-
ours, or the exercise of professions or
industries.

4. No restriction will be imposed
on the free use by any Iraqi national
of any language, in private inter-
course, in commerce, in religion, in

aucun rdglement ni aucune action
officielle ne seront en contradiction
ou en opposition avec ces stipula-
tions, et aucune loi, aucun rdglement
ni aucune action officielle ne pr6-
vaudront centre elles, ni main tenant
ni 4 1'avenir.

Art. 2.— i. II sera accord^ & tous
les ^ habitants de 1'Irak pleine et
entidre protection de leur vie et de
leur libert^, sans distinction cle
naissance, cle nationality, de langage,
de race ou de religion-

2. Tous les habitants de 1*1 rak
auront droit au libre exercice, taut
public que priv6, de toute foi, religion
ou croyance, dont la pratique ne sera
pas incompatible avec 1'ordre public
et les bonnes mceurs.

Art. 3. Les ressortissants otto-
mans <§tablis sur le territoire de 1'Irak
& la date du 6 aoflt 1924 seront con-
sidfir6s comme ayant acquis, i cette
date, la nationality irakierme, 4 Tex-
elusion de la nationalitfi ottomane,
sur la base de Particle 30 du Traitfi de
paix de Lausanne,1 et dans les condi-
tions pr6vues dans la loi irakienne du
9 octobre 1924 sur la nationality.2

Art. 4.— i. Tous les ressortissants
irakiens seront 6gaux devant la loi et
jouirpnt des mfimes droits civils et
politiques sans distinction de race, de
langue ou de religion.

2. Le syst&me Electoral assurera
une representation Equitable aux
minoritfis de race, de religion ou de
langue en Irak.

3. La difference de race, de langue
ou de religion ne devra nuire & aucun
ressortissant irakien en ce qui con-
cerne la jouissance des droits civils
et^ politiques, notamment pour Tad-
mission aux emplois publics, fonc-
tions et honneurs, et pour Texercke
des diff6rentes professions et indus-
tries.

4. II ne sera 6dict6 aucune restric-
tion au libre usage par tous les res-
sortissants irakiens d'une langue

quelconque, soit dans les relations

1 28 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. it.— -ED.

2 Flournoy and Hudson, Nationality Laws, p. 348.— En.

May 30, 1932

DECLARATION BY IRAQ

the Press or in publications of any
kind, or at public meetings.

5. Notwithstanding the establish-
ment by the Iraqi Government of
Arabic as the official language, and
notwithstanding the special arrange-
ments to be made by the Iraqi Gov-
ernment, under Article 9 of the
present Declaration, regarding the
use of the Kurdish and Turkish
languages, adequate facilities will be
given to all Iraqi nationals whose
mother tongue is not the official
language, for the use of their lan-
guage, either orally or in writing, be-
fore the courts,

Art. 5. Iraqi nationals who be-
long to racial, religious or linguistic
minorities will enjoy the same treat-
ment and security in law and in fact
as other Iraqi nationals. In par-
ticular, they shall have an equal
right to maintain, manage and con-
trol at their own expense, or to estab-
lish in the future, charitable, relig-
ious and social institutions, schools
and other educational establish-
ments, with the right to use their
own language and to exercise their
religion freely therein.

Art. 6. The Iraqi Government
undertakes to take, as regards non-
Moslem minorities, in so far as con-
cerns their family law and personal
status, measures permitting the set-
tlement of these questions in accord-
ance with the customs and usage of
the communities to which those
minorities belong*

The Iraqi Government will com-
municate to the Council of the
League of Nations information re-
garding the manner in which these
measures have been executed,

Art. 7. — i. The Iraqi Government
undertakes to grant full protection,
facilities and authorisation to the
churches, synagogues, cemeteries and
other religious establishments, char-
itable works and pious foundations

privies ou de commerce, soit en
rnati&re de religion, de presse ou de
publications de toute nature, soit
dans les reunions publiques*

5, Nonobstant l^tablissement par
le Gouvernement irakien de la langue
arabe comme langue officielle, et
nonobstant les dispositions sp6ciales
que le Gouvernement irakien prendra
en ce qui concerne Pemploi des
langues kurde et turque, dispositions
pr^vues & Particle 9 de la pr^sente
Declaration, des facilit6s appropri£es
seront donn6es & tous les ressortis-
sants irakiens de langue autre que la
langue officielle, pour Fusage de leur
langue, soit oralement, soit par
6crit, devant les tribunaux.

Art. 5. Les ressortissants irakiens
appartenant & des minorit6s de race,
de religion ou de langue jouiront du
m^rne traitement et des m6mes
garanties en droit et en fait que les
autres ressortissants irakiens » I Is
auront notamment un droit 6gal £
maintenir, diriger et contrdler &
leurs frais ou & cr6er £ Tavenir des
institutions chari tables , religieuses
ou spciales, des 6coles et autres
^tablissements d Education, avec le
droit d'y faire librement usage de
leur propre langue et d'y exercer
librement leur religion.

Art. 6. Le Gouvernement irakien
s'engage & prendre & T6gard des
minorit6s non musulmanes, en ce qui
concerne leur statut familial et per-
sonnel, toutes dispositions permet-
tant de r&gler ces questions selon le
droit coutumier des communaut6s
auxquelles ces minorit^s appartien-
nent.

Le Gouvernement irakien enverra
au Conseil de la Soci6t6 des Nations
des renseignertients sur la fapon dont
ont 6t& ex6cut6es ces dispositions.

Art. 7*— I. Le Gouvernement
irakien s'engage & accorder toutes
protection, facilit^s et autprisations
aux &glises, synagogues, cimeti&res,
autres <§tablissements religieux,
ceuvres charitables et fondations

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 308

of minority religious communities
existing in Iraq,

2. Each of these communities
shall have the right of establishing
councils, in important administra-
tive districts, competent to adminis-
ter pious foundations and charitable
bequests. These councils shall be
competent to deal with the collection
of income derived therefrom, and the
expenditure thereof in accordance
with the wishes of the donor or with
the custom in use among the com-
munity* These communities shall
also undertake the supervision of
the property of orphans, in accord-
ance with law. The councils re-
ferred to above shall be under the
supervision of the Government.

3, The Iraqi Government will not
refuse, for the formation of new reli-
gious or charitable institutions, any
of the necessary facilities which may
be guaranteed to existing institutions
of that nature.

Art. 8,— -i. In the public educa-
tional system in towns and districts
in which are resident a considerable
proportion of Iraqi nationals whose
mother tongue is not the official
language, the Iraqi Government will
make provision for adequate facili-
ties for ensuring that in the primary
schools instruction shall be given
to the children of such nationals
through the medium of their own
language; it being understood that
this provision does not prevent the
Iraqi Government from making the
teaching of Arabic obligatory in the
said schools.

2. In towns and districts where
there is a considerable proportion of
Iraqi nationals belonging to racial,
religious or linguistic minorities,
these minorities will be assured an
equitable share in the enjoyment and
application of sums which may be
provided out of public funds under
the State, municipal or other budgets
for educational, religious or chari-
table purposes.

pieuses des communautte religieuses
des minoritfe existant en Irak.

2. Toutes ces communauttfs au-
ront le droit de constituer, dans
les divisions admin istratives impor-
tantes, des conseils qui auront qualit6
pour administrer les fondations
pieuses ainsi que les legs charitables.
Ces conseils auront qualit6 pour per-
cevoir les revenue produits par ces
biens, pour les utiliser conform6ment
aux voeux du donateur ou £ 1 'usage
6tabli dans la communautt. Ces
communaut6s devront £galement
veiller sur les biens des orphelins,
conform6ment 4 la loL Les conseils
susmentionn6s seront places sous le
contr61e du Gouvernement.

3. Le Gouvernement irakien ne re-
fusera, pour la creation de nouveaux
6tablissements religieux ou charita-
bles, aucune des facilit6s n6cessaires
qui seront garanties aux 6tablisse-
ments de cette nature d&fa existants.

Art. 8.— i. En matidre d 'en soigne-
ment public, le Gouvernement irakien
accordera, dans les villes et dis-
tricts Q& reside une proportion con-
sid6rable de ressortissants irakiens de
langue autre que la langue officielle,
des facilitfis appropriates pour assurer
que instruction dans les £coles
primaires sera donnC4ef dans leur
propre langue, aux enfants de ces res-
sortissants irakiens. Cette stipula-
tion n'empMiera pas le Gouverne-
ment irakien de rendre obligatoire
1'enseignement de la langue arabe
dans lesdites 6coles.

2, Dans les villes et districts oii
reside une proportion consid6rable de
ressortissants irakiens appar tenant
& des mmorit&s de race, de religion ou
de langue, ces minorit6s se verront
assurer une part 6quitable dans le
b6n6fice et Taffectation des sommes
qui pourraient Stre attributes sur les
fonds publics par le budget de 1'Etat,
les budgets municipaux ou autres,
dans un but d Education, de religion
ou de charit^.

May 30, 1932

DECLARATION BY IRAQ

Art. 9. — I, Iraq undertakes that
in the liwas of Mosul, Arbil, Kirkuk
and Sulairnaniya, the official lan-
guage, side by side with Arabic, shall
be Kurdish in the qadhas in which
the population is predominantly of
Kurdish race.

In the qadhas of Kifri and Kirkuk,
however, in the liwa of Kirkuk,
where a considerable part of the pop-
ulation is of Turcoman race, the
official language, side by side with
Arabic, shall be either Kurdish or
Turkish.

2. Iraq undertakes that in the
said qadhas the officials shall, subject
to justifiable exceptions, have a
competent knowledge of Kurdish or
Turkish as the case may be.

3, Although in these qadhas the
criterion for the choice of officials
will be, as in the rest of Iraq,
efficiency and knowledge of the
language, rather than race, Iraq un-
dertakes that the officials shall, as
hitherto, be selected, so far as
possible, from among Iraqis from one
or other of these qadhas.

Art. 10. The stipulations of the
foregoing articles of this Declaration,
so far as they affect persons belong-
ing to racial, religious or linguistic
minorities, are declared to constitute
obligations of international concern
and will be placed under the guaran-
tee of the League of Nations. No
modification will be made in them
without the assent of a majority of
the Council of the League of Nations.

Any Member of the League repre-
sented on the Council shall have the
right to bring to the attention of the
Council any infraction or danger of
infraction of any of these stipula-
tions, and the Council may there-
upon take such measures and give
such directions as it may deem proper
and effective in the circumstances.

Any difference of opinion as to
questions of law or fact arising out of
these articles between Iraq and any

Art 9. — i. L'Irak s'engage, en ce
qui concerne les liwas de Mossoul,
Arbil, Kirkuk et Soulairnani6, £ ce
que la langue officielle, & c6t6 de
1'arabe, soit le kurde dans les qadhas
oft la population pr&dominante est de
race kurde.

Toutefois, dans les qadhas de
Kifri et de Kirkuk du liwa de
Kirkuk, oil une partie considerable
de la population est de race tur-
comane, la langue officielle sera, £
c6t6 de 1'arabe, soit le kurde, soit le
turc.

2. L'Irak prend 1'engagernent que
dans lesdits qadhas, les fonction-
naires devront, sauf exception justi-
fi<§e, poss^der la langue kurde ou, le
cas £ch<£ant, la langue turque.

3. Bien que dans lesdits qadhas,
le critdre pour le choix des fonction-
naires soit, comme dans le reste de
1'Irak, la capacity et la connaissance
de la langue plutdt que la race, 1'Irak
s 'engage & ce que les fonctionnaires
soient choisis, comme jusqu'& pr6-
sent, autant que possible parmi les
ressortissants irakiens originaires de
ces qadhas.

Art. 10. Dans la mesure oil les
stipulations des articles precedents
de la presente Declaration affectent
des personnes appar tenant & des
minorit^s de race, de religion ou de
langue, ces stipulations constituent
des obligations d'int6r£t interna-
tional et seront plac6es sous la
garantie de la Societe des Nations.
Elles ne pourront £tre modifies sans
1'assentiment de la majority du Con-
seil de la Societe des Nations.

Tout Membre de la Societe repr6-
sente au Conseil aura le droit de
signaler & Tattention du Conseil
toute infraction ou danger d'infrac-
tion £ Tune quelconque de ces obliga-
tions, et le Conseil pourra prendre
telles mesures et donner telles in-
structions qui paraltront appropri6es
et efficaces dans la circonstance.

En cas de divergence d'opinions
sur des questions de droit ou de fait
concernant ces articles, entre 1'Irak

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 308

Member of the League represented
on the Council shall be held to be a
dispute of an international character
under Article 14 of the Covenant of
the League of Nations. Any such dis-
pute shall, if the other party thereto
demands, be referred to the Perma-
nent Court of International Justice.
The decision of the Permanent Court
shall be final and shall have the
same force and effect as an award
under Article 13 of the Covenant.

CHAPTER II
Most-favoured^nation Clause

Art. ii. — i. Subject to reciproc-
ity, Iraq undertakes to grant to
Members of the League most-fav-
oured-nation treatment for a period
of ten years from the date of its ad-
mission to membership of the League
of Nations.

Nevertheless, should measures
taken by any Member of the League
of Nations, whether such measures
are in force at the above-mentioned
date or are taken during the period
contemplated in the preceding para-
graph, be of such a nature as to dis-
turb to the detriment of Iraq the
balance of trade between Iraq and
the Member of the League of Nations
in question, by seriously affecting
the chief exports of Iraq, the latter,
in view of its special situation, re-
serves to itself the right to request
the Member of the League of Na-
tions concerned to open negotiations
immediately for the purpose of re-
storing the balance.

Should an agreement not be
reached by negotiation within three
months from its request, Iraq de-
clares that it will consider itself as
freed, w-d-w of the Member of the
League in question, from the obliga-
tion laid down in the first sub-
paragraph above.

et Fun quelconque des Mernbres de
la Soci6t6 repr6sent6s au Conseil,
cette divergence sera consid£r£e
comme un diflfcrend ay ant un carae-
tdre international selon les termes de
Particle 14 du Pacte de la Socifite des
Nations. Tout diff 6rend de ce gen re
sera, si Tautre partie le demande,
d$f6r6 & la Cour permanente de
Justice Internationale. La decision
de la Cour permanente sera sans
appel et aura la mOme force et valeur
qu'une decision rendue en vertu de
1'article 13 du Pacte.

CHAPITRE II
Clause de la nation la plus fcworisee

Art. ii.— i. L'Irak s'engage i ac-
corder, sous reserve de reciprocity
aux Etats membres de la Soc&(t6, le
traitement de la nation la plus
favorisfie, pendant une periods de
dix ans & compter de la date de son
admission comme Membre de la
Soci6t6 des Nations.

Toutefois, si des mesures prises par
Tun quelconque des Membres de la
Soci6t6 des Nations, qu'elles soient
en vigueur & cette date susmention-
n6e ou qu'ellea soient prises au cours
de la p£riode vis6e 4 Talin^a ci-
dessus, ^taient de nature & com**
promettre, au detriment de 1'Irak,
r^quilibre des ^changes entre ce
dernier et le Membre de la Soci6t6
des Nations en question, en aflfectant
s6rieusement les principales exporta-
tions de 1'Irak, ce dernier, en con-
sid^ration de sa situation $p6ciale,
se r6serve la facult6 de demander au
Membre de la Soci6t6 des Nations
dont il s'agit 1'ouverture imm6diate
de n^gociations en vue de r^tablir
T6quilibre ainsi rompu,

Au cas oii, dans un d61ai de trois
mois 4 dater de la demande de Flrak,
ces n^gociations n'auraient pas
abouti i un accord, 1'Irak d6clare
qu'il pourra se consid^rer comme
Iib6r6, vis-i-vis du Membre de la
Soci6t4 en question, de I'obligation
stipu!6e au premier alin^a ci-dessus-

May 30, 1932

DECLARATION BY IRAQ

2, The undertaking contained in
paragraph i above shall not apply to
any advantages which are, or may in
the future be, accorded by Iraq to
any adjacent country in order to
facilitate frontier traffic, or to those
resulting from a Customs union con-
cluded by Iraq. Nor shall the under-
taking apply to any special advan-
tages in Customs matters which
Iraq may grant to goods the produce
or manufacture of Turkey or of any
country whose territory was in 1914
wholly included in the Ottoman
Empire in Asia.

Judicial Organisation

Art. 12. A uniform system of
justice shall be applicable to all,
Iraqis and foreigners alike. It shall
be such as effectively to ensure the
protection and full exercise of their
rights both to foreigners and to
nationals.

The judicial system at present in
force, and based on Articles 2, 3 and
4 of the Agreement between the
Mandatory Power and Iraq,1 signed
on March 4th, 1931, shall be main-
tained for a period of 10 years from
the date of the admission of Iraq to
membership of the League of Na-
tions.

Appointments to the posts re*
served for foreign jurists by Article
2 of the said Agreement shall be
made by the Iraqi Government.
Their holders shall be foreigners, but
selected without distinction of na-
tionality; they must be fully quali-
fied.2

International Conventions

Art. 13. Iraq considers itself
bound by all the international agree-

2. Sont except^s de Tengagement
formul^ au premier alinea ci-dessus
les avantages accord^s ou qui pour-
raient 6tre accordes ult^rieurement
par Tlrak & un pays limitrophe pour
faciliter le trafic-fronti^re, ainsi que
ceux resultant d'une union douani&re
qui pourrait 8tre conclue par 1'Irak.
II en sera de m£me en ce qui conceme
les avantages sp6ciaux qu'en mature
douani^re, 1'Irak pourrait consentir
aux produits naturels ou fabriqutes,
originaires de la Turquie ou d'un
pays quelconque dont le territoire,
en 1914, faisait int&gralement partie
de 1'Empire ottoman en Asie.

Organisation judiciaire

Art. 12. Un syst&tne de justice
uniforme sera applicable 6galement &
tous les ressortissants de 1'Irak et £
tous les Strangers. Ce syst&me sera
de nature & assurer efficacement, tant
aux Strangers qu'aux nationaux, la
sauvegarde et le plein exercice de
leurs droits.

Le syst&me judiciaire en vigueur et
resultant des articles 2, 3 et 4 de
TAccord entre la Puissance manda-
taire et 1'Irak,1 sign& Ie4mars 1931,
sera maintenu pour une p6riode de
dix ann^es, ^ compter de Tadmission
de Tlrak coinme Membre de la
Soci6t<§ des Nations.

Les postes r6serv6s 4 des juristes
Strangers en vertu de 1'article 2 dudit
Accord sont pourvus par les soins de
1'Irak. Les titulaires, bien qu'toan-
gers, sont choisis sans distinction de
nationality ils doivent r6unir les
qualifications utiles.2

Conventions international

Art» 13, L'Irak se considfere
comme H6 par tous les accords et

1 123 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. 77. — ED.

2 On June 15, 19556, the Iraqi Government, acting under Article 16 of this declaration, re-
quested the Council of the League of Nations to agree to a modification of this provision so
as to allow the appointment of eight foreign jurists, instead of nine as required by the Anglo-
Iraq Agreement. The Council gave its consent, September 25, 1936. League of Nations
Official Journal, 1936, pp. 1161, 13?!,-*- ED.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 308

ments and conventions, both general

and special , to which it has become a
party, whether by its own action or
by that of the Mandatory Power
acting on its behalf. Subject to any
right of denunciation provided for
therein, such agreements and con-
ventions shall be respected by Iraq
throughout the period for which they
were concluded.

Acquired Rights and Financial
Obligations

Art* 14. Iraq, taking note of the
resolution of the Council of the
League of Nations of September
15th, 1925 :l

1 . Declares that all rights of what-
ever nature acquired before the
termination of the mandatory regime
by individuals, associations or juri-
dical persons shall be respected.

2. Undertakes to respect and fulfil
all financial obligations of whatever
nature assumed on Iraq's behalf by
the Mandatory Power during the
period of the Mandate,

Freedom of Conscience

Art* 15. Sub j ect to such measures
as may be essential for the main-
tenance of public order and morality,
Iraq undertakes to ensure and guar-
antee throughout its territory free-
dom of conscience and worship and
the free exercise of the religious,
educational and medical activities of
religious missions of all denomina-
tions, whatever the nationality of
those missions or of their members.

Final Clause

Art. 16. The provisions of the
present chapter constitute obliga-
tions of international concern. Any
Member of the League of Nations
may call the attention of the Council
to any infraction of these provisions.

conventions internationaux, tant g6-
ncraux que sp6ciaux, auxquels il est
devenu partie, soit qu'il ait agi
lui-meme directement, soit quo la
Puissance mandataire ait agi pour
son compte. Sous r6serve du droit
de d6nonciation qu'ils pourraient
prfivoir, ces accords et conventions
seront respectfis par 1'Irak pendant
toute la dur6e pour laquelle ils ont
6t<§ conclus,

Drotts acquis et obligations
financiers

Art 14. En prenant acte de la
r6solution du Conseil de la Soci6t6
des Nations du 15 septembre 1925,*
rirak:

1. Declare que les droits de toute
nature acquis avant I'extinction du
regime mandataire par des particu-
liers, des soci6t6s ou des personnes
juridiques, seront respectfis;

2. S'engage £ respecter et & ex6-
cuter les obligations financifcres de
toute nature assum£es pour son
compte par la Puissance mandataire
pendant la dur<§e du rnandat.

LibertS de conscience

Art* 15, Sous reserve des mesures
indispensables au maintien des
bonnes mceurs et de Tordre public,
Flrak s'engage & assurer et 4 garan-
tir, sur toute l'6tendue de son terri-
toire, la libert^ de conscience et le
libre exercice des cultes, ainsi que les
activities des missions religieuses de
toutes les confessions en mature
religieuse scolaire et d'assistance
m6dicale, quelle que soit la nationa-
Ht6 de ces missions ou de leurs
membres.

Clause finale

Art. 16* Les dispositions con-
tenues dans le present chapitre con-
stituent des obligations d'int^rSt
international. Tout Membre de la
Soci^tfi des Nations pourra signaler &
Tattention du Conseil les infractions

1 League of Nations Official Journal, 1925, p. 1511. — ED.

June 28, 1932

They may not be modified except by
agreement between Iraq and the
Council of the League of Nations
acting by a majority vote,

Any difference of opinion which
may arise between Iraq and any
Member of the League of Nations
represented on the Council, with re-
gard to the interpretation or the
execution of the said provisions,
shall, by an application by such
Member, be submitted for decision
to the Permanent Court of Inter-
national Justice.

The undersigned, duly authorised,
accepts on behalf of Iraq, subject to
ratification, the above provisions,
being the declaration provided for by
the resolution of the Council of the
League of Nations of May igth,
1932.

DONE at Baghdad on this thirtieth
day of May 1932 in a single copy
which shall be deposited in the
archives of the Secretariat of the
League of Nations.

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

& ces dispositions. Ces derni&res ne
pourront §tre modifies que par
1'accord entre 1'Irak et le Conseil de
la Soci6t6 des Nations statuant & la
majorit6 des voix.

Toute divergence d'opinions qui
viendrait & s'61ever entre 1'Irak et
Tun quelconque des Membres de la
Soci£t& des Nations repr6sent6s au
Conseil au sujet de Tinterpr6tation
ou de Tex6cution desdites disposi-
tions sera, £ la requite de ce Membre,
soumise pour decision & la Cour
permanente de Justice internatio-
nale.

Le soussign6, dfiment autoris^, ac-
cepte, au nom de 1'Irak et sous r6-
serve de ratification, les dispositions
ci-dessus, qui constituent la d£clara-
tion pr6vue par la resolution du
Conseil de la Soci6t<§ des Nations en
date du 19 mai 1932.

FAIT & Bagdad, le 30 mai 1932, en
un seul exemplaire qui sera d6pos6
aux archives du Secretariat de la
Soci6t6 des Nations.

NOURY SA'ID, Prime Minister of Iraq

No. 309

AGREEMENT concerning the Setting-Up of Special Services at the
Iron Gates. Signed at Semmering, June 28, 1932.

ACCORD relatif & la constitution des services speciaux aux Fortes-
de-Fer. Signe an Semmering, 28 juin 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE, This agreement was drawn up pursuant to Article 32 of the convention
instituting the definitive statute of the Danube of July 23, 1921 (No. 47, ante). Improve-
ment of navigation at the Iron Gates has long been a matter of international concern. See,
for example, Article 6 of the Treaty of London of March 13, 1871 (61 Br, and For. St. Papers,
p. 7); Article 57 of the Treaty of Berlin of July 13, 1878 (69 idem, p. 749) ; Article 3 of the
convention between Austria-Hungary and Serbia of June 26/July 8, 1878 (idem, p. 612);
Article 350 of the Treaty of Versailles; Articles 288-9 of the Treaty of Trianon; Article 305
of the Treaty of St. Germain; Article 233 of the Treaty of Neuilly. See also the agreements
between Rumania and Yugoslavia of June 19, 1930, and June 24, 1930 (140 League of Nations
Treaty Series, pp. 229, 235).

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 309

RATIFICATIONS* Ratifications of this agreement were deposited at Vienna by Yugoslavia
and Rumania, June 6, 1933.

BIBLIOGRAPHY* L Soubbotitcht " Le nouvcau regime jurklique du sect cur du Danube," 2
Annuaire de I* Association yougoslave de Droit international (1934), pp. 77-114,

Entered into force July i, 1933.*

Text and translation from 140 League of Nations Treaty Scries, p. 191.

[Translation]

In execution of the provisions of
the Convention, signed at Paris on
July 23, 1921, establishing the defin-
itive Statute of the Danube and in
order to set up by joint agreement
the special technical and administra-
tive Services provided for in Article
32 of the said Convention, for the
purpose of maintaining and improv-
ing conditions of navigation on the
Section of the Danube between
Turnu-Severin and Moldova- Veche,
known as the Iron Gates and
Cataracts Section,

Have decided to conclude an
agreement for that purpose and have
appointed as their Plenipotentiaries:2

His Majesty the King of Yugo-
slavia: Douchan Pantitch;

His Majesty the King of Rou-
mania: Constantin Contzesco;

The International Commission of
the Danube, by unanimous decision
of June 27, 1932: Dietrich de Sachs-
enfels;

Who, having exchanged their pow-
ers, found in good and due form,
have agreed on the following pro-
visions:

CHAPTER I

SERVICES CONSTITUTING THE AD-
MINISTRATION OF THE IRON GATES
AND CATARACTS

Article I, In execution of the pro-
visions of Article 32 of the Statute
of the Danube, the technical and
administrative Services hereinafter
mentioned are hereby constituted in

En execution dcs dispositions de
la Convention 6tablissant le Statut
d6finitif du Danube sign^e & Paris le
23 juillet 1921 et pour constitutor, dc
commun accord > les Services tech-
niques et administratifs sptViaux
pr^vus & 1' article 32 de ladite^ con-
vention aux fins de maintenir et
d'am61iorer les conditions de la
navigation dans le secteur compris
entre Turnu-Severin et Moldova-
Veche dit des Portes-de-Fcr et des
Cataractes,

Ont dficid6 de conclure un accord

It cet effet et ont dtfsignfi pour leurs
pl&nipotentialres, savoir:2

Sa Majesty le Rol de Yougo-
slavie: Douchan Pantitch;

Sa Majest6 le Roi de Roumanie:
Constantin Contzesco;

La Commission Internationale du
Danube, par decision unanime du
27 juin 1932: Dietrich de Sachscn-
fels;

Lesquels, apr&s avoir £chang6
leurs pouvoirs trouvfis en bonne et
due forme, ont arr&tfi les stipula-
tions suivantes :

CHAPITRE I

SERVICES CONSTITUANT L^ADMINIS-
TRATION DES PORTES-DE-FKR ET
DES CATARACTES

Article x. En ex6cution des dis-
positions de 1'article 32 du Statut
du Danube, sont constitute les
Services sp^ciaux techniques et ad-
ministratifs ci-apr&s dfisignis, k 1'ef-

3 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3237, August 8, 1933.
2 The titles of oleniootentiaries are omitted. — ED.

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

order to maintain and Improve con-
ditions of navigation on the Section
of the Danube between Turnu-
Severin and Moldova- Veche known
as the Iron Gates and Cataracts
Section ;

(1) A Public Works Service;

(2) A Navigation Service.
These Services shall be completed

by:

An Accountancy Office;
A Treasury.

Art. 2. This organisation shall
be called the "Administration of the
Iron Gates and Cataracts". It shall
have its headquarters at Orsova,
without prejudice to any auxiliary
services which if necessary may be
established at other points of the
Section.

Art. 3, A chief directly respon*
sible for the affairs of his department
shall be placed at the head of each of
the above-mentioned four organs of
the Administration.

CHAPTER II

COMPETENCE OF THE ORGANS OF THE
ADMINISTRATION

Art 4, The Chief of the Public

Works Service shall be in charge of
the management or supervision of
conservancy work and in general,
the management or supervision of
all work for maintaining and im-
proving the navigability of the
Section, in so far as the execution of
new public works is not provided for
by special measures decided on by
joint agreement between the riparian
States of the Section and the Com-
mission.

The Chief of the Public Works
Service shall further be in charge of
the buoyage service and the techni-
cal management of the premises and
floating or other material placed at
the disposal of the Administration.

Art. 5. The Chief of the Naviga-
tion Service shall, subject to the
provisions of Chapter VII of the

fet de maintenir et cTam<§liorer les
conditions de la navigation dans le
secteur compris entre Turnu-Severin
et Moldova- Veche, dit des Portes-
de-Fer et des Cataractes :

i° Un Service des Travaux;
2° Un Service de la Navigation.

Ces services sent compl6t6s par:

Un bureau de la comptabilit6;
Une caisse.

Art. 2. Cette organisation est
d6nornm6e "Administration des
Portes-de-Fer et des Cataractes."
Elle a son si&ge central & Orsova,
sans prejudice des services auxiliaires
qui pourraient 6tre, en cas de besoin,
instali6s sur d'autres points du
secteur.

Art. 3. A la t6te de chacun des
quatre organes de I7 administration
6num6r6s ci-dessus, est plac6 un
chef directement responsable des
affaires de son ressort.

CHAPITRE II

COMPETENCE DES ORGANES DE
L* ADMINISTRATION

Art, 4, Le chef du Service des
Travaux est charg6 de la direction
ou du contrdle des travaux ayant
pour but la conservation des ou-
vrages, ainsi qu'en g<§n£ral de la
direction ou du contrdle de tous les
travaux destines & 1'entretien et k
ramfelioration de la navigabilit6 du
secteur, pour autant que Tex6cution
des nouveaux travaux ne fera pas
I'objet de dispositions sp6ciales ar-
r§t6es de concert entre les Etats
riverains du secteur et la commis-
sion.

II est, en outre, charg<§ du service
de balisage, ainsi que de la gestion
technique des immeubles et du mat6~
riel flottant ou autre mis & la disposi-
tion de P administration.

Art. 5. Le chef du Service de la
Navigation est charg£, sous reserve
des dispositions du chapitre VII du

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 309

present Agreement concerning; nav-
igation police services, be In charge
of the supervision of navigation and
the management of pilotage and all
other services intended to ensure or
facilitate the technical exercise of
navigation.

Art, 6. The Chief of the Ac-
countancy Office shall be In charge
of the accounts of the Administra-
tion and the movement of funds,

Art. 7, f The Chief of the Treasury
shall be in charge of the receipt of
navigation dues and other revenue
of the Administration and all other
Treasury transactions.

Art. 8, The Working Regulations
shall define in detail the competence
of the organs of the Administration
as above defined, and any additional
functions that may be given them.

Art, 9. The competence of the
organs of the Administration as
above defined shall not cover, in
ports and on the banks of the Sec-
tion, any measures concerning the
policing, In the strict sense of the
word, of the ports and banks, or
measures concerning the working of
ports, or any public "works of local
interest not concerning or affecting
the general interests of navigation f
or works necessary for the economic
development of the riparian States of
the ^ Section, as referred to In the
Article 14, first paragraph, of the
Statute of the Danube.

CHAPTER III

RELATIONS OF THE ORGANS OF THE
ADMINISTRATION WITH THE COM-
MISSION AND WITH EACH OTHER

Art. 10. The Commission shall
decide, on proposals made by the
Chiefs of the competent organs of
the Administration, what measures
may be desirable for the mainte-
nance and improvement of the nav-
igability and for the administration
of the Section.

present accord relatives «\ la police
de la navigation, do la surveillance
de la navigation, de la direction du
service de pilotage et de tons autres
services ayant pour but d 'assurer ou
de faciliter I'exercice technique de la
navigation.

Art. 6. Le chef du Bureau de la
comptabllit6 est charg£ de la comp-
tabilit6 de Fadministration et clu
mouvement des fonds.

Art, 7, Le chef de la caisse est
chargfi de I'encaissement des taxes
de navigation et autres recettes de
radministration, ainsi que cle toutes
autres op6rations de caisse.
^ Art, 8. Le R&glement de fono
tionnement fixera les details de la
competence des organes de radmin-
istration telle qu'elle est dffinie
ci-dessus, ainsi que les attributions
supplementaires qui pourraient leur
fitre confines.

Art, 9. La competence des or-
ganes de radministration telle qu'elle
est dfifinie ci-dessus, cesse dans les
ports et sur les rives du secteur dfrs
qu'il s'agit de mesures concernant la
police proprement dite des ports et
rives ou de mesures relatives it Fex-
plojtation des ports et, enfin, lors-
qu'il s'agit, solt de travaux <Tint6rSt
local ne concernant pas et n'afiectant
pas les int6rSts g6niraux de la navi-
gation, solt des travaux n6cessalres
au d6veloppement ^conomlque des
Etats riverains du secteur tels qu'ils
sont vis6s par le premier alinfia de
Farticle 14 du Statut du Danube.

CHAMTRB III

RAPPORT DES ORGANES DE L'AD-
MINISTRATION AVEC LA COMMIS-
SION ET ENTRK EUX

Art. 10. La commission d6cider

sur les propositions des chefs des
organes comp&ents de radministra-
tion, les mesures utiles & Tentretien
et 4 I'amfilioration de la navigability
et d. radministration du secteur.

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

The Commission may also ask the
said Chiefs to make proposals.

Art. n. The proposals mentioned
in Article 10 above may be put into
force only if previously approved
by the Commission. Nevertheless,
in matters in which immediate ac-
tion is necessary, such action may
be taken, subject to the subsequent
approval of the Commission.

Art, 12. The execution of the
Commission's decisions shall devolve
upon the competent organs of the
Administration, the chiefs of which
shall be directly responsible to the
Commission for the affairs of their
respective departments.

The Commission shall supervise
the carrying out of its decisions and
the working of the Administration
in general. For that purpose the
Commission shall keep a representa-
tive on the spot whenever and for
such time as it may deem necessary.

Such representative shall act as
the agent through whom all com-
munications between the Commis-
sion and the Administration must
be sent.

Art. 13, The Special Regulations
provided for in Article 33 of the
Statute of the Danube shall govern
the working of the organs of the
Administration, and their relations
with the Commission, so that:

Their chiefs shall keep each other
acquainted with the affairs of their
respective departments;

They shall communicate their
proposals to each other before for-
warding them to the Commission ;

They shall ask for the competent
opinion of the other chiefs concerned
on the proposals which they submit
to the Commission.

CHAPTER IV

STAFF OF THE ADMINISTRATION

Art. 14. Without prejudice to
the provisions of Article 18, the staff
of the Administration, including the

Elle peut aussi provoquer des
propositions de leur part.

Art. ii. Les propositions vis6es
& 1' article 10 ci-dessus, ne peuvent
6tre d'ex6cution qu'apr^s avoir ob-
tenu Tapprobation pr6alable de la
commission. Toutefois, pour les af-
faires r^clamant une intervention
immediate, il peut £tre proc6d6 It
celle-ci, sous reserve d 'approbation
ult6rieure de la commission.

Art. 12. L 'execution des decisions
de la commission incombe aux or-
ganes comp^tents de 1'administra-
tion dont les chefs sont directement
responsables devant la commission,
chacun pour les affaires de son
ressort.

La commission contrdle Tex6cu-
tion de ses decisions, ainsi que, en
g6n6ral, le fonctionnement de I1 ad-
ministration. A cet effet, elle main-
tient sur place quand et aussi
longtemps qu'elle le jugera n6ces~
saire un repr£sentant.

Ce repr^sentant sert obligatoire-
rnent d'agent de transmission entre
la commission et 1' administration.

Art. 13. Le r&glement special
pr6vu par Tarticle 33 du Statut du
Danube r£glera le fonctionnement
des organ es de Tadministration, ainsi
que les rapports avec la commission,
de f agon :

Que leurs chefs se tiennent mutuel-
lement au courant des affaires de
leurs ressorts respectif s ;

Qu'ils se communiquent leurs
propositions avant de les adresser &
la commission ;

Qu'ils provoquent 1'avis comp<§-
tent des autres chefs int6ress6s pour
les propositions qu'ils soumettent &
la commission.

CHAPITRE IV

PERSONNEL DE L' ADMINISTRATION

Art. 14. Sans prejudice des dis-
positions de 1'article 18, le personnel
de Tadrninistration, y compris le

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 309

permanent staff of workshops, build-
ing yards and other similar technical
establishments, shall be supplied
and appointed by the two riparian
States of the Section, so that within
these services the officials appointed
by each of them are equal in number
and equal in the importance of the
posts which they hold.

It is understood, however, that
should new posts be created or
existing posts be abolished on ac-
count of the requirements of the
service, the Commission shall see
that in the application of the said
measures the principle of equality as
between the two riparian States of
the Section shall only temporarily be
disregarded.

The chiefs of the Works and
Navigation Services shall be placed
on a footing of complete equality in
respect of their rank and financial
position.

The same shall apply to the Chief
of the Accountancy Office and the
Chief of the Treasury.

Art. 15. The Commission shall
arrange the composition of the
permanent staff. It shall fix the
salaries of the said staff and shall
determine either, on the basis of
their length of service with the Iron
Gates Administration, the lump
sums to be given to employees leav-
ing the service of that Administra-
tion at the end of a minimum number
of years of service or the procedure
by which certain categories of the
staff could be insured with a pensions
fund,

Art 1 6. The appointment by
each of the two riparian States of
the Section of the chiefs appointed
by it as enumerated in Article 14
above shall be subject to previous
approval by the Commission.

Art. 17. When choosing the hold-
ers of the various posts on the per-
manent staff of the Administration,
the Governments of the two States
shall take account solely of the per-

personnel permanent des ateliers,
chantiers de construction ou autres
installations techniques semblables,
est fourni et nomm6 par les deux
Etats riverains du secteur, de fa^on
que, dans les cadres de ces services,
les agents nomm6s par chacun d*eux
soient 6gaux en nombre et quant *\
1'importance des emplois qu'ils oc-
cupent.

II est toutefois entendu qu'en cas
de cr6ation ou de suppression de
postes n6cessit6es par les besoins du
service, la commission veillera k ce
que, dans son application, le principe
d'6galit6 entre les deux Etats rive-
rains du secteur ne souffre que des
6carts temporaires.

Les chefs des Services des Travatix
et de la Navigation spnt mis, quant
& leur grade et situation budgStaire,
sur un pied de parfaite 6galit6.

II en est de m^me en ce qui con-
cerne le chef du Bureau de la
comptabilitd et le chef de la caisse.

Art. 15. La commission fitablit
le cadre du personnel Bile fixe la
retribution dudit personnel et d6ter-
mine, soit en raison de leur temps de
service prfes de F Administration des
Portes-de-Fer les sommes forfaitaires
& allouer aux employes quittant le
service de cette administration au
bout d'un nornbre minimum d'an*
n^es de service, soit les modalit6s par
lesquelles certaines categories de
personnel pourraient 6ventuellement
6tre assumes aupr^s d'une caisse de
retraite.

Art* 1 6. La nomination par cha-
cun des deux Etats riverains du
secteur des chefs fournis par lui,
<§num6r^s & 1'article 14 ci-dessue, est
soumise £ Tagr^ment pr6alable de la
commission.

Art. 17* En proc6dant au choix
des titulaires des diff^rents postes
inscrits au cadre du personnel de
radministration, les gouvernements
des deux Etats se guideront unique-

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

sonal capacity of the candidates, en-
suring them at the same time ail
possible stability in their duties free

from any influences unconnected
with navigation*

Once appointed by the Govern-
ment of either of the riparian States
of the Section, all officials without
exception belonging to the Services
are placed exclusively at the disposal
of the Administration, and shall be
free, in respect of the exercise of their
duties under the Administration,
from any interference, either direct
or indirect, from the territorial
authorities of the riparian States of
the Section.

The right to dismiss such employ-
ees shall be vested in the Govern-
ment of the riparian State of the
Section which has appointed them.
Dismissal shall be decided upon by
the Government, either on its own
initiative or in response to a reasoned
request submitted by the Commis-
sion, if necessary after enquiry. In
the first case the Commission shall be
previously notified of the reason for
dismissal.

Art. 1 8. Pilots on probation, and
pilots belonging to the official pilot-
age service, arid the chief pilot, shall
form part of the staff of the Ad-
ministration.

The post of chief pilot shall be
awarded by the Commission, after
having examined the reasoned pro-
posals of the Administration, without
distinction being made on the ground
of nationality, to the best qualified
candidate, who shall be chosen on the
result of a competition open both to
official and private pilots and to
river and maritime navigators, pref-
erence being given as between can-
didates with equal qualifications, to
pilots belonging to the official pilot-
age service, and among them to the
senior candidate.

The documents appointing such
officials shall be an employment con-
tract for pilots on probation, a pilot's

merit d'apr&s la capacite personnelle
des candidats, en leur assurant en
mgme temps, dans toute la rnesure
du possible, une stability de fonc-
tions & 1'abri de toute influence
etrang&re & la navigation.

Une fois nommes par le gouverne-
ment de Tun ou de Fautre des deux
Etats riverains du secteur, tous les
agents sans exception, composant
les services, sont exclusivement mis
& la disposition de radrninistration
et soustraits, en ce qui concerne
Fexercice de leurs fonctions auprfes
d'elle, & toute inference, soit directe,
soit indirecte, de la part des auto-
rites territoriales des Etats riverains
du secteur.

Le droit de revocation de ces
agents appartient au gouvernement
de 1'Etat riverain du secteur qui les
a nommes. La revocation est pro-
nonc6e par le gouvernement, soit de
sa propre initiative, soit sur la de-
mande motiv^e de la commission,
formulae, en cas de besoin, apr£s
enqugte. Dans le premier cas, la
commission est pr6alablement in-
formee du motif de la revocation.

Art, 18. Les ei&ves-pilotes et les
pilotes, pour autant qu'ils appartien-
nent au corps officiel de pilotage,
ainsi que le chef-pilote, font partie
du personnel de 1'administration.

L'emploi de chef-pilote est at-
tribue par la commission, apr£s
examen des propositions rnotiv6es
formuiees par T administration, sans
distinction de nationality, au candi-
dat le mieux qualifie choisi par voie
de concours, ouvert en m£me temps
qu'aux pilotes officiels, aux pilotes
particuliers et aux navigateurs flu-
viaux et maritimes, une preference
etant accordee, & qualifications
egales, aux pilotes du corps officiel
de pilotage, et, parmi ces derniers,
aux plus anciens.

Les certificats d 'engagement pour
les ei&ves-pilotes, le brevet pour les
pilotes, la lettre de service pour le

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 309

certificate for pilots and a letter of
appointment for the chief pilot, such
documents being issued by the Ad-
ministration under the conditions
laid down by the Working Regula-
tions referred to in Article 13 above*
Art, 19. The Working Regula-
tions shall lay down in detail the
qualifications to be required from
candidates for the examination for
appointment to posts of pilots on
probation, to be promoted later to
posts of certificated pilots.

Persons of any nationality shall be
eligible for appointment as pilots on
probation and certified pilots. Never-
theless the recruiting of pilots on pro-
bation shall be so regulated that as
far as possible half the number of
posts of pilots, account being taken
of the post of chief pilot, shall be re-
served equally for nationals of each
of the two riparian States of the
Section.

Ignorance of the official languages
of the Administration shall not in-
validate any person for admission to
the examination either for the post
of pilot on probation or to test his
capacity as a pilot. No candidate
applying for admission to the exam-
ination for pilot on probation and
complying with the conditions laid
down by the Working Regulations
may be debarred from taking the
said examination unless a decision to
the contrary be taken by the
Commission.

The Working Regulations shall lay
down the penalties applicable for
neglect of the duties of pilots belong-
ing to the official pilotage service and
shall also determine in what circum-
stances a pilot's certificate may be
withdrawn.

A representative of the Commis-
sion shall be present at the proceed-
ings of the examining committees*

Art. 20* Subject to the conditions
laid down below, shipowners shall be
allowed the option of having their
vessels piloted by private pilots in

chef-pilote, d61ivr£s par radminis-

tration dans les conditions pr&vues
par le R&glement de fonctionnement
dont 11 est fait mention & 1'article
13 ci-dessus, constitueront Tacte de
la nomination de ces agents.

Art 19* Le R&glernent de fonc-
tionnement fixera, dans leurs d6-
tails, les conditions que doivent
remplir les candidats pour fitre ad-
mis, par voie de concours, aux postes
d'616ves-pilotes pour 6tre promus
ensuite aux postes de pilotes bre-
vet6s.

Les 61&ves-pilotes et pilotes seront
choisis parmi toutes les nationality,
Toutefois, le recrutement des 616ves-
pilot.es devra 6tre r£g!6 de fagon que,
autant que possible, la moiti& du
nombre des postes de pilotes, compte
tenu du poste de chef-pilote, soit
r6serv6e & parts figales aux ressortis-
sants des deux Etats riverains du
secteur.

L' ignorance des langues officielles
de 1' administration ne saurait con-
stituer une raison de refus, soit au
concours au poste d'£16ve-pilote>
soit k r admission It Texamen de
capacit6 de pilote. Aucun candidat
se pr6sentant au concours d'6I£ve-
pilote et remplissant les conditions
Stabiles par le R&glement de fonc-
tionnement ne pcut en gtre exclu,
sauf decision contraire de la com-
mission.

Ce r&g!ement d6terminera les sanc-
tions auxquelles donnera lieu rjnob-
servation des obligations des pilotes
appartenant au corps officiel de
pilotage, ainsi que les conditions du
retrait de leur brevet.

Les operations des comitfe
d'examen auront lieu en presence
d'un repr6sentant de la commission.

Art* 20* Dans les conditions fix-
6es ci-dessous, les armateurs auront
la facult6 de faire piloter leurs
bateaux par des pilotes particuliers

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

their pay. Such pilots shall be al-
lowed to pilot only the vessels of the
undertaking or group of undertak-
ings by which they are employed.

Candidates for the post of private
pilot must show that they have the
good character and physical fitness
and the qualifications required of
official pilots.

The Working Regulations shall
prescribe by what procedure the Ad-
ministration shall issue the certificate
for a private pilot to persons having
the necessary qualifications.

The Regulations shall state the
duties of private pilots towards the
Administration and the penalties to
which they are liable for neglect of
such duties, and also the circum-
stances in which their certificate may
be withdrawn.

Once they have received their cer-
tificate, private pilots shall receive
from the Administration all facilities
and all information necessary for the
exercise of pilotage in the Iron Gates
and Cataracts Section.

Art. 21. The Chiefs of the Navi-
gation Service, the Public Works
Service, the Accountancy Office and
the Treasury shall, when entering
their service, give in writing, in the
terms of Form I hereto annexed, an
undertaking on their honour to carry
out their duties in accordance with
the decisions of the Commission and
in a spirit of strict impartiality.

The Commission hereby entitles
each of the Delegates of the riparian
States of the Section to receive and
transmit to the Commission the
undertakings of such of its officials as
his Government shall appoint.

The same undertaking shall be
given by all officials. Each of the
chiefs mentioned in the first para-
graph of the present Article shall be
empowered to receive, in the terms
laid down in Form II, hereto an-
nexed, an undertaking from the offi-
cials placed under his orders 3-nd to
transmit it to the Commission.

& leurs gages. Ces pilotes ne seront
admis qu'& piloter les bateaux de
Tentreprise ou de groupe d'entre-
prises dont ils sont les employes.

Les candidats & 1'emploi de pilotes
particuliers doivent pr6senter les
garanties morales et physiques et
ppss^der les capacitfe exig6es des
pilotes officiels.

Le R&glement de fonctionnement
fixera les modalit6s d'apr^s lesquelles
Tadministration d<§livrera le brevet
de pilote particulier aux personnes
poss&Iant les qualifications n6ces-
saires.

Ce r&glement d^terminera les ob-
ligationg auxquelles sont soumis les
pilotes particuliers & regard de
P administration et les sanctions aux-
quelles donnera lieu Finobservation
de ces obligations, ainsi que les
conditions du retrait de leur brevet,

Une fois brevet6s, les pilotes
particuliers obtiendront de 1'admin-
istration toutes facilit6s et tous
renseignements n^cessaires £ 1'exer-
cice du pilotage dans le secteur des
Portes-de-Fer et des Cataractes.

Art. 21. Les chefs du Service de
la Navigation, du Service des Tra-
vaux, du Bureau de la comptabilit6 et
de la caisse prennent par 6crit, lors
de leur entree en service et dans les
termes du formulaire I ci-annex6,
1'engagement d'honneur d'accomplir
leurs fonctions conform^ment aux
decisions de la commission et dans
un esprit de stricte impartiality

La commission donne mandat £
chacun des d£16gu6s des pays rive-
rains du secteur de recevoir et de lui
transmettre 1'engagement de ceux de
ses agents que son gouvernement
aura nomm£s.

Le mgme engagement d'honneur
est pris par tous les employes.
Chacun des chefs mentionn6s au
premier alin6a du present article a
pouvoir pour recevoir, dans les termes
du formulaire II ci~annex6, 1'engage-
ment des employ6s places sous ses
ordres et pour le transmettre & la
commission.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 309

Art. 12, Order and discipline
within the Administration shall be
maintained in accordance with the
Working Regulations provided for In
Article 13,

Art. 23* During his service no
official shall by reason of his official
duties be exempt from the military
obligations Imposed by the laws of
his country.

Art. 24. In so far as its duties
permit, the staff of the Administra-
tion may reside on either bank of the
Section.

Nevertheless, save in the case of
service requirements, of which the
Commission shall be sole judge, this
privilege shall not be granted to
officials carrying out their duties in
the territory of the State of which
they are nationals.

CHAPTER V

FLANS AND EXECUTION OF WORKS

Art. 25. The study of the hydro-
logical regime of the Section shall be
carried out by the Administration
without prejudice to the functions of
the national hydraulic services.

Information collected from both
sides shall be exchanged between the
Administration and the competent
authorities of the riparian States of
the Section.

The Working Regulations shall
determine by what procedure this
exchange shall take place.

Art. 26, The Administration
shall be responsible for the technical
study and the preparation of schemes
of work for maintenance and current
work for the improvement of the
navigability of the Section.

The technical study and the prep-
aration of schemes of large-scale
improvement work for the purpose
of modifying or perfecting the pres-
ent conservancy system of the Sec-
tion, where such schemes require a
fresh capital outlay, may be under-

Art 22. L'ordre et la discipline
de Fadministration serpnt mamtenus
conform&nent aux dispositions du
Reglenient de fonctionnement pr6vu
& Farticle 13.

Art 23. Pendant la dur6e de son
service, aucun employ^ n'est, du fait
de ses fonctions, exempt^ des obli-
gations militaires imposfies par les
lois de son pays.

Art. 24, Autant que ses fonctions
le permettent, le personnel de Fad-
ministration a la faculty de rfisider
sur Fune ou sur Fautre des deux rives
du secteur.

Sauf le cas de n6cessit6 de service
dont la commission sera seule juge,
ne pourront cependant se pr6valoir
de cette facult6 les employes exer^ant
leurs fonctions sur le tcrritoire de
FEtat dont ils sont ressortissants.

CHAPITRE V

ETUDES— PROJETS— -EXECUTION

DBS TRAVAUX

Art, 25, L'6tude du regime hy-
drologique du secteur incombe &
lfadministration, sans prejudice des
attributions des services hydrau-
liques natlonaux.

Les donntes recueillies de part et
d'autre sont mutuellement 6chang£es
entre Fadministration et les autorit6s
competences des Etats riverains du
secteur.

Le R^glement de fonctionnement
d^terminera les modalit£s de cet
^change.

Art 26* L'^tude technique et
F6tablissement des projets de tra*
vaux d'entretien et des travaux
courants d 'amelioration de la navi-
gabilit^ du secteur incombent &
Fadministration.

L'6tude technique et l*6tablisse-
ment des projets de grands travaux
d'am^lioration ayant pour but la
modification ou le perfectionnement
du syst&me actuel d'amfinagernent
du secteur et n6cessitant un apport
de nouveaux capitaux peuvent 6tre

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

taken either by the two riparian
States of the Section, or by the Ad-
ministration, or on the initiative of
the Commission. Studies under-
taken on the initiative of the Com-
mission or by persons not belonging
to the Administration may be carried
out on the spot, subject to the ob-
servance of the general police regu-
lations and of special provisions
affecting the security of the countries
concerned.

Schemes prepared by the riparian
States of the Section under the pre-
vious paragraph, including plans,
estimates and all other details con-
nected with the technical and finan-
cial procedure for their execution,
shall be jointly submitted by the
two riparian States of the Section for
approval by the Commission.

Should an agreement between the
riparian States of the Section for the
submission of joint proposals not be
reached, each State may submit a
separate scheme. In such cases the
Commission, before taking a deci-
sion, should ask the opinion of the
other riparian State of the Section.

The Commission shall ask the
opinion of the two riparian States of
the Section in the case of public
works schemes not emanating from
those States. In all its decisions
concerning public works the Com-
mission shall take into account the
technical, economic and financial
interests of the two riparian States
of the Section.

Art* 27. In cases in which, for the
purpose of carrying out new public
works intended either to complete or
to modify the present system of
public works, it is necessary to make
use of portions of the territory of
either or both of the riparian States
of the Section, the Commission shall
reach agreement with the State con-
cerned, or with both States, as the
case may be, on the conditions under
which this territory will be so utilised.

Art. 28, The execution of the
maintenance and current iniprove-

entrepris, soit par les deux Etats
riverains du secteur, soit par Fad-
ministration, solt enfin sur Finitia-
tive de la commission. Les 6tudes
entreprises sur Finitiative de la
commission par des personnes n'ap-
partenant pas £ F administration, ne
peuvent 6tre poursurvies sur place
que sous reserve de F observation des
lois de police g6n6rale et des disposi-
tions sp6ciales int£ressant la s<§curit6
des pays.

Les pro jets 6tablis par les Etats
riverains du secteur, conform6ment
& Falin6a pr6c6dant, comprenant
plans, devis et tous autres details
relatifs aux modalit6s techniques et
financi&res de leur execution, sont
soumis en commun par les deux
Etats riverains du secteur & V ap-
probation de la commission.

Dans le cas oft un accord ne s'6ta-
blirait pas entre les Etats riverains du
secteur pour presenter des proposi-
tions communes, chacun d'eux pour-
rait en presenter s6par6ment. Dans
ce cas, la commission, avant de
statuer, provoquerait Favis de Fautre
Etat riverain du secteur.

La commission provoque 1'avis
des deux Etats riverains du secteur
s'il s'agit de projets de travaux
n'&manant pas d'eux. Dans toutes
ses decisions relatives aux travaux,
la commission tiendra compte des
int6r£ts techniques, 6conomiques et
financiers des deux Etats riverains
du secteur.

Art. 27. Lorsque pour des tra-
vaux neufs destines, soit £ computer
soit £ modifier le syst£me technique
actuel des travaux, il est n^cessaire
d'utiliser des portions du territoire
de Fun ou de Fautre des deux Etats
riverains du secteur ou des deux, la
commission s'entend avec FEtat
int£ress6 ou avec les deux sur les
conditions dans lesquelles s'effec-
tuera cette utilisation de territoire.

Art. 28. L 'execution des travaux
d'entretien et des travaux courants

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 309

men! works referred to in Article 26,
paragraph i» above, shall devolve
upon the Administration, Should
the Administration not be able to
carry out such work, the Commis-
sion may make other arrangements.
The execution shall then be en-
trusted to the riparian States of the
Section > jointly or separately as cir-
cumstances may require, unless the
terms they offer be less advantageous
than any that may be offered from
other quarters,

In the case of large-scale improve-
ment works, as provided for in
Article 26, paragraph 2, the Com-
mission shall decide in each indi-
vidual case by whom and how such
work shall be carried out. Never-
theless it is hereby understood that:

(1) The two riparian States of the
Section shall have right of priority
should they desire to undertake such
work;

(2) In such cases a special agree-
ment shall be concluded between
them and the Commission stipulat-
ing the material and financial condi-
tions for the execution of the work,
including the procedure by which
exemption from Customs duties may
be granted;

(3) Neither of the riparian States
of the Section, nor any other State,
may be entrusted with the execution
of such work without the assent of
the State in whose territory the work
is to be carried out*

Art. 29. The gangs of workmen
employed on hydraulic or other work
shall, unless otherwise specially
agreed between the Governments of
the two riparian States of the Sec-
tion, be recruited In accordance with
the laws in force in the State in whose
territory the work in question Is
carried out.

Nevertheless, if such work is
carried out on the river, simultane-
ously in the territory of the two
riparian States of the Section, near
the frontier, and if for practical and
technical reasons the work cannot be

d 'amelioration vis&s 4 l*aHn£a pre-
mier de Particle 26, incombe & Tad-
ministration. Si celle-ci n'est pas
4 m&me d'exficuter ces travaux, la
commission peut prendre d'autres
dispositions. L'ex&cution sera alors
confine aux Etats riverains du sec-
teur en commun ou s^parement
sulvant le cas, & moins que les condi-
tions qu'ils prfisentent ne soient
moms avantageuses que d'autres
off res ^ventuelles d 'execution.

En ce qul concern e les grands
travaux d 'amelioration pr£vus £
l'alin£a 2 de Tarticle 26, la commis-
sion decide, dans chaque cas par-
ticulier, par qui et comment ils seront
executes. N6anmoins, il est d'ores
et d6j£ entendu que:

i° Les deux Etats riverains du
secteur b£n£ficieront d'un droit de
priority au cas oft Ils voudraiont se
charger de ces travaux;

2° Dans ce cas, un accord sp6dal
£ inter vexiir entre eux et la com-
mission stipulera les conditions ma-
t&rielles et fmanci&res de I'ex&m-
tion, y comprls les modalit&s par
lesquelles la franchise douani&re
pourrait Stre accord£e;

3° Ni Fun des Etats riverains du
secteur, ni aucun autre Etat, ne
pourra, le cas 6ch£ant, &tre charg6
de cette execution, sans Fassentl-
ment de celui sur le territoire duquel
les travaux doivent Stre ex6cut£s.

Art 29, Les 6quipes ouvrldres
employees aux travaux hydrauliques
ou autres sent, sauf accord special
entre les gouveraements des deux
Etats riverains du secteur, recrut^es
conform^ment aux lois en vlgueur
dans 1'Etat sur le territoire duquel
s'efiectuent lesdlts travaux,

Toutefois, dans le cas oft ces

travaux seraient ex^cutte sur le
fleuve, ^ la fois sur le territoire des
deux Etats riverains du secteur, au
voisinage de la fronti&re, et que pour
des motifs d'ordre pratique et tech-

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

divided up according to the frontier,
the gangs of workmen shall be re-
cruited as far as possible equally
from both riparian States of the
Section.

CHAPTER VI

EXEMPTION FROM CUSTOMS DUTIES —
SUPPLIES

Art 30. The two riparian States
of the Section shall allow entry free
of duty into their territory in respect
of materials and plant which are
necessary either for the requirements
of the Administration or for the
execution of public works or parts of
public works which are paid for
solely out of navigation dues.

Should the works be carried out by
a contractor, an agreement shall be
concluded between the Governments
of the riparian States of the Section
and the Commission in order to
determine the procedure for ^ the
importation free of duty of machines,
tools, materials or plant which the
contractor may notify to the Ad-
ministration as requiring to be im-
ported into the territory of either
State.

The above provisions shall not
affect those of Article 28.

Art. 31* Contracts for supplies of
all kinds necessary for the purposes
mentioned in Article 30, first para-
graph above, shall, as a general rule,
be placed with the contractors who
make the most advantageous offers
when the contract is put up to public
tender*

Nevertheless, a right of preference
shall be accorded to contractors who
are nationals of either of the riparian
States of the Section, on condition
that the difference between their
tenders and the most advantageous
tenders does not exceed ip per cent
for work of the same quality.

If supplies are offered on the same
terms by contractors nationals of

nique le partage d'un travail suivant
la fronti&re ne saurait intervenir,
les 6quipes ouvri&res seront recrutees
autant que possible, & parts 6gales,
dans chacun des deux Etats riverains
du secteur.

CHAPITRE VI

FRANCHISE BE DOUANE —
FOURNITURES

Art. 30. Les deux Etats riverains
du secteur accordent Tentr£e en
franchise sur leur territoire respectif
aux mat^riaux et au materiel n<§ces-
saires, soit aux besoms de F adminis-
tration, soit & I'ex6cution de travaux
ou parties de travaux dont les frais
seraient converts uniquement par
les taxes de navigation.

Au cas oft les travaux seraient
ex^cut^s par entreprise, un accord
interviendra entre les gouverne-
ments des Etats riverains du secteur
et la commission pour fixer les
modalit6s de Fentr6e en franchise des
machines, outils, mat6riaux ou ma-
t6riel que 1'entreprise indiquerait &
Fadmmistration comme devant £tre
imports sur le territoire de Tun ou
de Tautre Etat.

Les dispositions ci-dessus ne por-
tent pas prejudice aux dispositions
de 1'article 28.

Art. 31. Les fouraitures de tout
genre n&cessaires aux fins indiqu6es
au premier alin<§a de Tarticle 30 ci-
dessus, seront, en r&gle g6n£rale, at-
tributes aux fournisseurs pr^sentant
les offres les plus avantageuses en
adjudication rlguli&re.

Toutefois, un droit de pr6f6rence
est reconnu aux fournisseurs ressor-
tissants des deux Etats riverains du
secteur, & condition que Tdcart eatre
leurs offres et les offres les plus avan-
tageuses ne d^passe pas, £ qualit<§
<§gale, 10%.

En ce qui concerne les fournitures
offertes & conditions 6gales par les

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 309

either of the riparian States of the
Section, the contracts shall as far as
possible he divided equally between

the contractors in question*

CHAPTER VII

SUPERVISION AND POLICING OF

NAVIGATION

Art. 32. The special provisions
concerning navigation in the Iron
Gates and Cataracts Section shall
be drawn up by the Commission on
the proposal of the Administration.
They shall be promulgated by the
riparian States in their respective
territories, and shall form part of the
Annex to the Regulations for the
Policing of Navigation.

Art, 33. The Administration
which, under Article 5 of the present
Agreement, is in charge of the super-
vision of navigation shall notify to
the riparian authorities in charge of
the policing of navigation any con-
traventions of which it may take
cognisance through its own organs,
placing at the disposal of the said
authorities any information which it
has been able to obtain.

The Administration shall further
report to the said authorities any
irregularity requiring action on their
part, and any damage caused to the
equipment, buildings or installations
placed at its disposal.

The competent officials of the
Administration shall be solely re-
sponsible for seeing that navigators
carry out the obligations imposed by
the Annex to the Regulations for
Policing of Navigation and regulat-
ing the passage of vessels through
the Section, and the said employees
shall for that purpose have the right
to take action on board vessels.

Art* 34, The riparian authorities
responsible for the policing of naviga-
tion shall take action on board ves-
sels only when they themselves find
that a contravention has been com-
mitted, or when they are summoned

fournisseurs ressortissants des deux
Etats riverains du secteur, une
repartition, autant que possible &
parts 6gales, en sera faite entre eux*

CUAPZTRB VII

SURVEILLANCE EX POLICE BE LA

NAVIGATION

Art. 32. Les dispositions sp6ciales
concernant la navigation dans le
Secteur des Portes-de-Fer et des
Cataractes seront 6tablies par la
commission sur la proposition de
I'administration. Biles seront pro-
mulgutes par les Etats riverains sur
leurs territoires respectifs et feront
partie de 1'annexe au R&glement de
police de la navigation.

Art, 33, L 'administration charg6e
comme il est dit & 1'article 5 du
present accord, de la surveillance de
la navigation, signalera aux autorit^s
riveraines chargles de la police de la
navigation les contraventions dont
elle pourrait prendre connaissance
par 1'entremise de ses propres or-
ganes, en mettant & la disposition
desdites autorit&s tous les 616ments
deformation qu'elle aura pu re-
cueillir.

L 'administration leur signalera, en
outre, toute irr6gularit6 r6clamant
leur intervention, ainsi que tout
dommage caus& aux ^quipements,
Edifices et installations mis 4 sa
disposition*

Le contrdle de Taccomplissement
par les navigateurs des obligations
impos6es par 1'annexe au Rdglement
de police de la navigation et rfiglant
la traversfe du secteur sera exclusive-
ment r6serv6 aux agents compfitents
de Padministration, lesquels auront &
cet effet le droit d'intervention 4
bord des bUtiments.

Art* 34. Les autorit^s riveraines
chargles de la police de la navigation
n'interviendront & bord des bUti-
ments que lorsqu'elles constateront
elles-mgmes une contravention ou
lorsqu'elles seront requises par les

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

by the organs of the Administration
to note the facts and report them.

The official instructed to do so
shall confine himself to making out
the report, which he shall forward to
the competent riparian authority to
be used for the opening of an enquiry,

In the report he shall, before any
other facts which may have come to
his notice, set forth the facts ascer-
tained by the official of the Adminis-
tration.

Should no report have been made
out, the riparian authorities shall
open the enquiry into the case as
soon as they receive the information
collected by the official of the Ad-
ministration who reported the con-
travention.

Such official shall if necessary be
heard by the said authorities.

Art. 35. The enquiry into and
prosecution In respect of contraven-
tions reported to the competent
riparian authorities, whether by the
Administration or by the river police
services or in any other manner,
direct or indirect, and the settlement
of legal cases, whether civil or crim-
inal, arising out of the exercise of
navigation, shall devolve exclusively
upon the said authorities of the
riparian States of the Section.

The authorities shall communicate
monthly to the Administration a
table showing all legal decisions
which have become final and cases
dismissed by them.

Art. 36. The competent ripa-
rian authorities shall take action on
their own initiative or render assist-
ance to the organs of the Adminis-
tration, at their request, whenever an
irregularity has to be stopped.

Within the limits of the sovereignty
of the respective States, the compe-
tent riparian authorities and the
vessels commissioned by each of the
riparian States of the Section for the
policing of navigation shall take
action in case of need, either at the

organes de Tadministration pour
constater les faits par un proc&s-
verbal.

L 'agent verbalisateur se bornera £
dresser proems-verbal qu'il trans-
mettra & I'autorit6 riveraine compd-
tente pour servir & 1'ouverture de
Tinstruction.

Dans ce proems-verbal il consig-
nera, avant tous autres faits parvenus
& sa connaissance, les constatations
faites par Tagent de radministration,

Au cas oft aucun proems-verbal ne
serait intervenu, les autorit&s rive-
raines ouvriront Finstruction de 1'af-
faire d&s reception des 616ments d 'in-
formation recueillis par 1'agent de
Tadministration qui a signal 6 la
contravention.

Get agent sera entendu par lesdites
autorit£s, s'il y a lieu.

Art. 35. L 'instruction et la pour-
suite des contraventions dont les
autoritfe riveraines comp<§tentes se-
raient saisies, soit par radministra-
tion, soit par les organes de la police
fluviale, soit de toute autre manure,
directe ou indirecte, ainsi que le
rtglement des affaires judiciaires
civiles ou p&nales issues de 1'exercice
de la navigation, incombent ex-
clusivement auxdites autorit£s des
Etats riverains du secteur.

Les autorit&s communiqueront
mensuellement £ Tadministration un
tableau indiquant tous les jugements
demeur^s d^finitifs et les ordonnances
de non-lieu rendues par elles.

Art. 36. Les autorit6s riveraines
comp^tentes interviendront de leur
propre initiative ou prlteront leur
assistance aux organes de Tadminis-
tration, sur leur demande, toutes les
fois qu'il s'agirait de faire cesser une
irregular! t6.

Dans la limite de la souverainet6
de chaque Etat, les autorit6s rive-
raines comp^tentes et les bateaux
affect6s par chacun des Etats rive-
rains du secteur & la police de la
navigation interviendront, en cas de
besoin, soit £ la demande de 1'admi-

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 309

request of the Administration or on
their own initiative, should the cir-
cumstances require immediate ac-
tion.

Art. 37. The officials of the Sec-
tion shall not be vested with any of
the powers held by the officers of the
judicial police.

Pilots may act only in their ca-
pacity as officials of the river police.

Art. 38. The two riparian States
of the Section shall inform the Com-
mission of the procedure by which,
on the basis of the Commission's
views, they will settle the allocation
of their competence to prosecute for
contraventions and the action to be
taken by their authorities.

CHAPTER VIII

FINANCIAL CLAUSES (NAVIGATION
DUES)

Art. 39, The Commission shall
prepare the yearly budget of the
Administration.

It shall take decisions as to any
dues or other sources of revenue in-
tended to provide for measures to
promote the maintenance or im-
provement of navigability or the
administration of the Section, with-
out the Governments represented
being thereby rendered liable to
make financial contributions.

Art. 40. The Commission shall
determine the method of levying dues,
the proceeds of which shall be utilised
first for the payment of the expenses
of the Administration and for main-
tenance and improvement work, and
secondly for meeting such financial
obligations as have been or may
hereafter be contracted by the Com-
mission for carrying out the said
work, such as that resulting from the
Agreement signed by the Commission
at Paris on April 27, 1927.

Art. 41. The funds of the Ad-
ministration shall as a general rule be
placed in the financial establishments
of the two riparian States of the

nistration, soit de leur propre initia-
tive au ens ou les divon stances exi-
geraient urn* intervention immediate.

Art. 37. Les agents do Fa dm in is-
tration ne sont in vest is d'aucune at-
tribution appartenant aux officiers cle
la police judiciaire.

Les pilotes ne peuvent agir en
qualit6 d 'agents cle la police fluviale.

Art, 38. Les deux Etats riverains
du secteur fcront connaftre i\ la com-
mission les moduli tos suivunt les-
quelles ils regleront, en s'inspirant
des points de vtie do la, commission,
la repartition cle leur competence en
ce qui concerne la poursuite des con-
traventions et les interventions de
leurs autoritfis,

CHAPITRE VIII

DISPOSITIONS FINANCIERS (TAXES
BE NAVIGATION)

Art. 39* La commission 6tablit le
budget annual de ^administration.

Bile d6cide les taxes et 6ventuellc-
ment toutes autres ressources des-
tin6es k faire face aux mesures utilos

i Tentretien et & Pametioration de la
navigability et & F administration du
secteur, sans qu'il puisse en rfisulter
1'obligation d'un concours financier
de la part des gouvernements reprfi-
sent^s.

Art. 40. La commission fixe le
mode de perception des taxes dont le
revenu est affect^, en premier lieu,
au paiement des frais de Tadminis-
tration et des travaux d'entretien et
d 'amelioration, et, en second lieu,
au service des obligations financi&res
contract^es ou & contracter ^ven-
tuellement par la commission en vue
de faire face auxdits travaux, telles
que celle rfisultant de 1'accord sign6
^, Paris par elle le 27 avril 1927,

Art. 41. Le placement des fonds

de 1 'administration est fait, en r&gle
g6n6rale, dans les institute financiers
des deux Etats riverains du secteur,

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

Section, shall be controlled by the

State, and, as far as possible, equally
in the two riparian States of the
Section.

Deposits shall in all cases be re-
ceived in the currency fixed by the
Commission, and interest shall be
payable in the currency in which the
deposit is made.

CHAPTER IX

RECOURSE TO LAW

Art. 42. The Administration shall
have competence to be a party to
legal proceedings either as plaintiff
or as defendant in all suits connected
with movable or immovable prop-
erty under its management.

In the case of legal proceedings in
connection with immovable property,
the courts of law within whose area
the immovable property is situated
shall have jurisdiction.

Legal proceedings connected with
movable property brought against
the Administration shall, in the
absence of contractual provisions to
the contrary, be brought, when the
plaintiff is domiciled in Roumanian
or Yugoslav territory, before the
competent authorities of the State
in question, and when the plaintiff is
domiciled in another State, before
the competent authorities of the
headquarters of the Administration.

Art, 43. The Commission, to
which the Administration shall com-
municate without delay legal deci-
sions concerning it, shall make pro-
vision for the financial consequences
of the said decisions out of the
normal budgetary resources of the
Administration .

Art. 44. The Administration's
equipment, buildings and installa-
tions, material and supplies, the
debts due to it and its cash in hand
or at the bank, shall not be liable to
seizure.

Art. 45. No legal proceedings
may be brought against the Admin-
istration in respect of any damage

contr616s par 1'Etat, et, autant que
possible, & parts figales, dans les deux

Etats riverains du secteun

Les d6p6ts seront, en tous cas,
re^us dans la monnaie fix6e par la
Commission et les int6r§ts seront
servis dans la monnaie du d6p6t.

CHAPITRE IX

RECOURS EN" JUSTICE

Art. 42. L 'administration a qua-
Iit6 pour ester en justice, comme de-
manderesse ou comme d6fenderesse,
dans toutes les actions mobilifores ou
immobili&res se r6f6rant aux actes
de sa gestion.

Pour les actions immobili&res, la
competence appartient aux juridic-
tipns dans le ressort desquelles
rimmeuble se trouve situ6.

Quant aux actions mobilises di-
rig6es contre 1'administration, elles
sont in ten ties, sauf stipulations con-
tractuelles contraires: lorsque le
demandeur est dornicilie en terri-
toire roumain ou yougoslave, devant
les autoritfes comp6tentes de I'Etat
respectif; lorsque le demandeur est
domicile dans un autre Etat, devant
les autorit^s comp6tentes du si&ge
central de Tadministration,

Art 43. La Commission & qui
Tadministration communique sans
retard les decisions de justice la con-
cernant, fait face aux consequences
financi&res desdites decisions au
moyen des ressources budg^taires
normales de 1 'administration.

Art. 44, Les ^quipements, 6di-
fices et installations, les mat^riaux et
approvisionnements, les cr^ances,
fonds en caisse ou en banque dont
1'administration dispose, sont in-
saisissables.

Art, 45. Auqun recours ne peut
8tre exerc^ contre 1 'administra-
tion pour un dommage quelconque

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 309

suffered by vessels while passing
through the Iron Gates and Cata-
racts Section.

Art. 46. Each of the two riparian
States of the Section shall, through
its authorities and in accordance
with its laws, render assistance and
protection to ensure the verification
and recovery of damage caused to
equipment, buildings or installa-
tions, supplies, material or funds at
the disposal of the Administration,

The Commission shall, if neces-
sary, take action to obtain for this
purpose the assistance of the com-
petent authorities of other States.

CHAPTER X

FACILITIES GRANTED BY THE RIPA-
RIAN STATES OF THE SECTION

Art. 47. Suitable measures de-
termined by agreement between the
Commission and the two riparian
States of the Section shall be taken
by each of the two riparian States
of the Section in its own territory in
order that both in the case of resi-
dence and for passage and free
movement on the river banks the
necessary facilities shall be granted
to the staff of the Administration
and to private pilots in the exercise
of their duties.

The two riparian States of the
Section agree to grant to the staff
of the Administration in their ter-
ritories any other facilities which
may be desirable for the exercise of
their duties.

These facilities shall also be de-
termined by agreement between the
two riparian States of the Section
and the Commission,

Art. 48. The Governments of
the two riparian States of the Sec-
tion shall grant all possible facilities
to the Administration for the use of
their telegraph and telephone serv-
ices for the requirements of the
Section, each retaining control
thereof in its own territory.

6prouv6 par la navigation au passage
par la Section des Portes-de-Fer et
des Cataractes.

Art 46. Chacun des deux Etats
riverains du secteur pr£te, par Pen-
tremise de ses autorit6s, et conformfi-
ment & ses lois, aide et protection
pour assurer la constatation et le
recouvrement des dommages caus6s
aux 6quipements, Edifices et instal-
lations, approvisionnements, mat6-
riaux et fonds dont Tadministration
dispose.

La commission, le cas 6ch6ant,
agit pour obtenir aux m6mes fins le
concours des autorit^s conip6tente$
d'autres Etats.

CHAPITRE X

FACILIT&S ACCGRD&ES PAR LES fiTATS
RIVERAINS DU SECTEUR

Art. 47. Des mesures appropri6es,
6tablies de concert entre la commis-
sion et les deux Etats riverains du
secteur, sont prises par chacun des
deux Etats riverains du secteur sur
son territoire, afin que, tant pour le
s^jour que pour le passage et la libre
circulation sur la rive, les facilit^s
n6cessaires soient accordtes au per-
sonnel de Tadministration, ainsi
qu'aux pilotes particuliers, pour
1'exercice de leurs fonctions.

Les deux Etats riverains du sec-
teur conviennent d Recorder au per-
sonnel de Tadministration sur leurs
territoires respectifs, toutes autres
facilit6s utiles pour 1'exercice de ses
fonctions.

Ces faciiit6s seront 6galement
d£termin6es, de concert entre les
deux Etats riverains du secteur de
la commission.

Art. 48. Les gouvernements des
deux Etats riverains du secteur ac~
corderont toutes les facilit^s possibles
& Tadministration pour I'utilisation
de leurs rfeeaux t&lfegraphiques et
t616phoniques en vue des besoins du
secteur, tout en gardant le contrdle
chacun sur son territoire respectif ,

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

CHAPTER XI

FLAG AND OFFICIAL LANGUAGES

Art. 49. The Administration
shall display on its buildings, and
on the vessels constituting the fleet
placed at its disposal, only a distinc-
tive sign consisting of a rectangular
or triangular pennant composed of
the colours of the Commission and
of the two riparian States of the
Section and bearing in the centre
the letters A P F, in accordance
with the models hereto annexed.

The seal of the Administration shall
bear the inscription "Administration
of the Iron Gates and Cataracts".

The badge to be worn by the officials
of the Administration and in particu-
lar by the official pilots shall be pre-
scribed by the Working Regulations.

Art. 50. The official languages of
the Administration shall be Rou-
manian, Serb-Croat and French.

The use of other languages shall
not be excluded.

The Working Regulations shall
settle details connected with the use
of languages.

CHAPTER XII

MANAGEMENT OF MATTERS CON-
NECTED WITH THE IRON GATES
AND CATARACTS SECTION

Art. 51. In order to ensure the
speedy settlement of matters falling
within the competence of the Ad-
ministration, there shall be set up
within the Commission a Special
Committee composed of three or at
most of four delegates, among whom
the representatives of the riparian
States of the Section must be in-
cluded, the other member or mem-
bers being appointed by the Com-
mission under the conditions laid
down by its Rules of Procedure.

Art 52. The duties of the Com-
mittee provided for in Article 51
shall be, in all matters relating to
the management of the Iron Gates
and Cataracts Section :

CHAPITRE XI

PA VILLON ET LANGUES OFFICIELLES

Art. 49. L 'administration arbore
sur les Edifices et les unites consti-
tuant le pare flottant mis & sa disposi-
tion, uniquement un signe distinctif
consistant en un guidon rectangu-
laire ou triangulaire compost des
couleurs de la commission et des deux
Etats riverains du secteur et portant
au centre les lettres A. P. F. (con-
form^ment aux modules ci-annex6s).

Le cachet de radministration por-
tera 1 'inscription : ' * Administration
des Portes-de-Fer et des Cataractes".

L'insigne It porter par ses agents,
et notamment par les pilotes officiels,
sera d6termin6 par le R&glement de
fonctionnement.

Art 50. Les langues officielles de
l?administration sont le roumain, le
serbe-croate et le fran^ais.

L'usage d'autres langues n'est pas
exclu.

Le R^glement de fonctionnement
r6glera les details en ce qui concerne
Fusage des langues.

CHAPITRE XII

GESTION DES AFFAIRES RELATIVES AU
SECTEUR DES PORTES-DE-FER ET
DES CATARACTES

Art 51. Pour assurer le r&gle-
ment rapide des affaires rentrant
dans la competence de radministra-
tion, il est constitu6 au sein de la
commission, un Comit6 special com-
post de trois ou au maximum de
quatre d&16gu6s, dont les repr6sen-
tants des Etats riverains du secteur
font obligatoirement partie, le ou
les autres rnembres 6tant d6sign6s
par la commission dans les condi-
tions fix6es par son R^glement
int6rieur.

Art 52. Le comit6 vis6 & Tarticle
51 est charg6, dans toutes les affaires
relatives & la gestion du Secteur des
Portes-de-Fer et des Cataractes :

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 309

(1) To conduct an enquiry Into
the said affairs;

(2) To take a decision :

(a) In matters relating to current
administration ;

(6) In cases requiring urgent set-
tlement.

Art. S3- The decisions of the
Special Committee must be unani-
mous.

Should it be impossible to obtain
unanimity, the question must be
brought before the Executive Com-
mittee, which, if necessary, will be
convened for an urgent meeting.

Art. 54, The Rules of Procedure
of the Commission shall govern the
working of the Special Committee
and its relations with the Executive
Committee. All the decisions of
the Special Committee shall be
communicated to the Executive Com-
mittee.

Art. 55- Before a decision is taken
in the Executive Committee or in
plenary session with regard to the
administration of the Section and
the work to be carried out on the
Section, the two Delegates of the
riparian States of the Section shall
be given an opportunity of stating
their views.

CHAPTER XIII

EMBARKATION STATIONS OF PILOTS

Art. 56, The stations at which
pilots embark and land shall be
maintained, established or abolished
by the Commission by arrangement
with the riparian State concerned
and in accordance with the require-
ments of traffic, so as to afford possi-
bilities of embarkation and landing
on both banks.

CHAPTER XIV

EQUIPMENT, BUILDINGS AND
INSTALLATIONS

Art. 57, As soon as the present
Agreement comes into force, the

i° De procMer £ Instruction
desdites affaires;

2° De prendre une decision :

a) Dans les affaires d 'administra-
tion courante ;

6) Dans les cas qui n^cessitent
une solution urgente.

Art 53. Les decisions du Comit6
sp6cial sont prises & I'unanimit6.

Si Funanimit6 ne peut Stre r6unie»
Taffaire doit n6cessairement fitre
port6e devant le Comit6 ex^cutif
qui, s'il y a lieu, est convoqu6
d'urgence.

Art. 54. Le r&glement int6rieur
de la commission determine le fonc-
tionnement du Comit<§ special et ses
rapports avec le Coniit6 ex6cutif.
Toutes Iesd6cisions du Comit6 special
seront port6es & la connaissance du
Comit6 ex6cutif.

Art. 55. Avant qu'une decision
soit prise en Comit€ ex6cutif ou en
session p!6nidre au sujet de Tadmi-
nistration du secteur et des travaux
& y exficuter, les deux d616gu6s des
Etats riverains du secteur sont mis
en mesure de formuler leur avis.

CHAPITRE XIII

POSTES D'EMBARQUEMENT DES
PILOTES

Art* 56. Les postes d'embarque-
ment et de d6barquement des pilotes
seront maintenus, ^tablis ou sup-
primps par la commission, d 'accord
avec TEtat riverain int6ress6, aelon
les besoins du trafic, de mani&re i
offrir des possibilMs d'embarque-
ment et de d^barquement sur chaque

ve.

CHAPITRE XIV

EQUIPEMENTS, ^DIFICES ET
INSTALLATIONS

Art* 57* D&s la mise en vlgueur
du present accord, il est mis fin au

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

provisional control exercised by the
International Commission of the
Danube under Article 288 of the
Treaty of Trianon over the use of
equipment, buildings and installa-
tions provided for in that Article
shall come to an end.

The equipment, buildings and in-
stallations shall immediately be
placed at the disposal of the Adminis-
tration in accordance with Article 33
of the Statute of the Danube.

An official record of this operation
shall be drawn up and there shall be
annexed thereto a detailed inventory
made out on the spot in three origi-
nals in the presence of the members
of the Special Committee provided
for in Article 51.

The inventory shall also indicate
the amount of cash in hand and at
the bank, the vouchers and books re-
lating to financial management, and
the archives and all furniture and
material in the offices, workshops
and buildings.

Art* 58. The equipment, build-
ings and installations placed at the
disposal of the Administration shall
continue as in the past to be used
exclusively for the benefit of naviga-
tion, and may not be diverted from
their original purpose for the in-
dividual use of either of the riparian
States of the Section. They shall be
exempt from any tax on real prop-
erty and from all other fiscal taxes
or dues.

Art. 59. The new property, mov-
able and immovable, acquired by the
Administration from the proceeds of
dues shall be entered in the inven-
tory and shall be subject to the same
legal regime as the property pre-
viously acquired.

Art. 60. Should any property,
movable or immovable, placed at the
disposal of the Administration be
sold, it shall be struck out of the
inventory, and the proceeds of the
sale of such property shall be placed
to the credit of the Administration.

contrSle provisoire qu'exerce la Corn-
mission internationale du Danube,
en vertu de Particle 288 du Trait<§ de
Trianon, sur Femploi des 6quipe-
menxs, Edifices et installations vis£s
par cet article.

Les 6quipements, Minces et in-
stallations sont mis imm&iiatement
& la disposition de Fadministration,
conform^ment £ Farticle 33 du
Statut du Danube.

II est dress6 un proems- verbal de
cette operation auquel sera annex£
un inventaire d6tail!6 dress6 sur les
lieux en trois originaux, en presence
des membres du Cornit<§ special
pr6vu & 1'article 51.

Devront 6galement §tre men-
tionn6s dans Finventaire le nuni£-
raire en caisse et en banque, les
pieces justificatives et les livres
concernant la gestion financi&re,
ainsi que les archives et tout le
mobilier et le materiel se trouvant
dans les bureaux, ateliers et Edifices.

Art. 58. Les 6quipements, 6difices
et installations mis 4 la disposition
de 1 'administration, continueront &
gtre utilises, comme par le pass6, ex-
clusivement au b£n6fice de la naviga-
tion et ne pourront 6tre d6tourn£s
de leur destination primitive par Tun
ou Fautre des deux Etats riverains
du secteur & son b6n£fice personnel.
Us seront exempts de tout irnpdt
foncier et de tous autres impdts et
taxes de caract&re fiscal.

Art 59* Les nouveaux biens,
meubles ou imrneubles, acquis par
radministration sur le produit des
taxes, seront passes dans Finventaire
et soumis au m&me r6gime juridique
que les anciens.

Art. 60. Si Fun des biens, meubles
ou immeubles, se trouvant & la dis-
position de Fadmimstration, venait
& ®tre vendu, il serait ray6 de Fin-
ventaire et le montant r6alis6 en
serait vers6 4 Factif de Fadministra-
tion*

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 309

CHAPTER XV

CONTROL AND SUPERVISION BY TUB:
COMMISSION

Art. 61. In addition to the rights
mentioned in the present Agreement
and acknowledged as appertaining to
the Commission under Articles 32
and 33 of the Statute of the Danube,
the Commission shall exercise in the
Iron Gates and Cataracts Section to
the same extent as at all other points
of the river system under its control
all rights of supervision and control
conferred upon it by the other
provisions of the Statute.

CHAPTER XVI

TRANSITIONAL CLAUSES

Art. 62. In so far as the existing
staff is replaced, the new staff shall
succeed the former staff gradually so
as not to impair the normal working
of the various Services of the Ad-
ministration. This gradual replace-
ment shall be spread over a period of
eighteen months from the seventh
month following the coming into
force of the present Agreement.
The procedure by which this opera-
tion is to be carried out shall be de-
termined as soon as this coming into
force takes place by the Special
Committee provided for in Article 51
on the suggestions of the Govern-
ments of the riparian States of the
Section.

Art. 63. The provisions of the
previous Article shall not apply to
pilots, who need not be replaced un-
less they do not comply with the
conditions laid down in the Working
Regulations of the Administration,

Art. 64. Any employee of the
former Iron Gates Navigation Serv-
ice having to resign his post shall
be given not less than six months'
notice to that effect by the Special
Committee provided for in Article 51.

Any official of the former Service
whose replacement has not been pro-

CHAPITRE XV

CONTR&LB ET SURVEILLANCE PAR LA
COMMISSION

Art 61. Outre les droits men-
tionnes au present Accord et qui lui
sont reconnus en vertu des articles
32 et 33 du Statut du Danube, la
commission exerce sur le Secteur des
Portes-de-Fer et des Cataractes,
dans la mgme mesure que sur tous
les autres points du rfiseau fluvial
soumis & sa competence, tous les
droits de surveillance ou de contr61e
qui lui sont conf6r6s par les autres
dispositions du Statut.

CHAPITRE XVI

DISPOSITIONS TRANSITOIRES

Art. 62. Dans la mesure oil le
personnel existant sera renouveI6, la
substitution de personnel nouveau 4
du personnel ancien se fera par
6chelonnement, de mani&re & ne pas
nuire au fonctionnement normal des
diff&rents services de Fadministra-
tion, Cet 6chelonnement s'6tendra
sur une p£riode de dix-huit mois
compt6s depuis le septi&me mois qui
suit la mise en vigueur du present
accord, Les modalitfe de cette op6-
ration seront fix^es d&s cette mise
en vigueur par le Comit6 special
prfivu & 1 'article 51, sur les sugges-
tions des gouvernements des Etats
riverains du secteur.

Art. 63, Les dispositions de Tarti-
cle pr6c6dent ne sont pas applicables
aux pilotes au remplacement des-
quels il n'y aura lieu de pouryoir que
dans le cas oil ils ne rernpliraient pas
les conditions fix£es au R&glement de
fonctionnement de Tadministration*

Art. 64. Tout agent de Pancien
service de la navigation aux Portes-
de-Fer qui devra r&igner ses fonc-
tions, en sera pr6venu par le comit6
special pr6vu & Particle 51, au moins
six mois & Favance*

Tout agent de Tancien service
dont le remplacement ne serait pas

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

vided for and who does not resign his
post on the entry into force of the
present Agreement must give at least
two months' notice should he later
desire to resign.

Art. 65. The pensions system of
officials of the former Hungarian
State Service shall continue under
the conditions laid down in the Com-
mission's resolution dated June 22,
1929, as modified on June 28, 1932.

CHAPTER XVII

SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES

Art. 66. The competent juris-
diction for the settlement of disputes
as to the interpretation and applica-
tion of the present Agreement shall
be the special tribunal set up for that
purpose by the League of Nations
and mentioned in Article 38 of the
Statute of the Danube.

CHAPTER XVIII

REVISION

Art. 67. No change in the present
Agreement may be made otherwise
than under the conditions provided
for in Article 32 of the Statute of the
Danube providing for the conclusion
of the present Agreement.

Any request for a modification
made by one of the Parties must
specify what clauses it considers
require revision and may not be
examined until six months after it
has been communicated to the other
two Parties.

On the expiry of a period of five
years from the coming into force of
the present Agreement its text must
be reconsidered with a view to
revision.

CHAPTER XIX

RATIFICATION AND COMING INTO
FORCE

Art. 68. The present Agreement
shall be ratified by the two riparian

pr<§vu et qui ne r6signera pas ses
fonctions d&s la mise en vigueur du
present accord devra donner un
preavis d'au moins deux mois s'il
voulait le faire ulterieurement.

Art 65. Le regime des pensions
des agents de Tancien service de
1'Etat hpngrois sera maintenu dans
les conditions fix&es par la resolution
de la commission en date du 22 juin
1929 et modifiee le 28 juin 1932.

CHAPITRE XVII

R^GLEMENT DES DIFF&RENDS

Art. 66. La juridiction comp6-
tente pour le r&glement des diSi-
rends sur Interpretation et 1'applica-
tion du present accord est la juridic-
tion speciale organis6e par la Societe
des Nations, mentionn^e £ Tarticle
38 du Statut du Danube.

CHAPITRE XVIII
REVISION

Art. 67. Toute modification au
present accord ne pourra gtre ap-
portee que dans les conditions pr6-
vues & 1'article 32 du Statut du
Danube pour retablissement de cet
accord.

Toute demande de modification
introduite par une des parties devra
specifier les dispositions qui lui
paraissent susceptibles de revision
et ne pourra £tre prise en considera-
tion que six mois apr&s avoir ete
communiquee aux deux autres Par-
ties.

A 1'expiration d'un deiai de cinq
ans, & dater de la mise en vigueur
du present accord, son texte sera
remis obligatoirement & l'6tude en
vue d'une revision eventuelle.

CHAPITRE XIX

RATIFICATION— MISE EN VIGUEUR

Art. 68. Le present accord sera
ratifie par les deux Etats riverains

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 309

States of the Section and the ratifi-
cations shall be deposited with the
Office of the International Commis-
sion of the Danube as soon as possible
and not later than February I, 1933.

The official record of the deposit
of ratifications shall be forwarded to
the Government of the French Re-
public to be deposited in its archives.

Art. 69, The present Agreement
and the regulations and agreements
provided for In Articles 8, 13, 38 and
47 shall come into force as from
July i, 1933.

IN FAITH WHEREOF the under-
mentioned Plenipotentiaries have
signed the present Agreement, made
out in a single original copy, which
shall be deposited in the archives of
the French Republic; a certified
copy shall be given to each of the
two signatory Powers and to the
International Commission of the
Danube.

Done at Semmering, June 28,
1932.

du secteur et les ratifications seront
d6pos£es au Bureau de la Commis-
sion Internationale clu Danube dans
le plus bref el£lai possible et au plus
tard le Ior f6vrier 1933.

Le procfis- verbal de d6p6t des
ratifications sera transmis au Gou-
vernementdela R^publique frangaise
pour gtre conserv6 dans ses archives.

Art. 69. Le present accord, ainsi
que les r^glements et arrangements
vis6s aux articles 8, 13, 38 et 47
entreront en vigueur & la date du
IOT juillet 1933.

EN FOI DE QUOI les plfinipoten-
tiaires susnomm6s ont sign^ le pr6-
sent accord r6dig6 en un seul exem-
plaire qui sera d6pos6 dans les
archives de la R^publique frangaise;
une expedition authentique sera
remise & chacune des deux Puissances
signataires et & la Commission Inter-
nationale du Danube.

Fait au Semmering, le 28 juin
1932.

D. PANTITCH CONST. CONTZESCO DE DIETRICH

ANNEX I

FORM FOR UNDERTAKING ON WORD
OF HONOUR

FORM I
I, the undersigned

ANNEXE I

PORMULAIRES D'ENGAGEMENT
D'HGNNBUR

FORMULATE 1

Je soussign6. *

undertake on my honour, In the presence
of M

m'engage sur 1'honneur devant M.

Delegate of

on the International Commission of the
Danube, authorised for that purpose by
the said Commission, to carry out the

duties of .'

in accordance with the decisions of the
International Commission of the Danube
and in a spirit of strict impartiality,

FORM II
I, the undersigned

de.

a la Commission Internationale du Da-
nube, mandate & cet effet par ellc, d'ac-
complir les fonctions de ..... . ..... ....

conformtoent aux decisions de la Com-
mission Internationale du Danube et dans
un esprit de stricte impartiality

FORMULAIRE II
Je soussign6 ...»

undertake on my honour, in the presence

of M

Chief of

mf engage sur Thonneur devant M..

June 28, 1932

SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES

of the Iron Gates and Cataracts Adminis-
tration, empowered for that purpose, to
carry out the duties of

de FAdministration des Portes-de-Fer et
des Cataractes, ayant pouvoir a cet effet,
cTaccomplir les fonctions de

in accordance with the decisions of the
Internationa! Commission of the Danube
and In a spirit of strict impartiality.

conform6ment aux decisions de la Com-
mission Internationale du Danube et dans
un esprit de stricte impartiality.

ANNEX II

[This annex, which sets forth two distinctive marks (flags) for the Iron Gates and Cataracts
Administration, is not reproduced here.]

No. 309a

Final Protocol to the Agreement concerning the Setting-Up of
Special Services at the Iron Gates. Signed at Semmering, June
28, 1932.

Protocole final & P Accord relatif a la constitution des services spe-
ciaux aux Portes-de-Fer. Signe au Semmering, 28 juin 1932.

Text and translation from 140 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. 226.

[Translation]

When proceeding to the signature
of the present Agreement, the under-
signed Plenipotentiaries have agreed
on the following provisions:

Ad Art 2. The headquarters of
the Administration shall remain at
Orsova, and the Public Works Serv-
ice shall be established at Tekija
in a building which the Yugoslav
Government shall cause to be con-
structed at its own expense and
which it shall place at the disposal of
the said Service free of charge.

Such building shall be granted the
same rights, privileges, and fiscal
exemptions as those which at present
apply or may hereafter apply to the
Orsova premises, and it may not be
used for any other purpose. The
new building shall display under the
same conditions as the Orsova build-
ing the distinctive insignia of the
Administration, which shall be in
charge of the maintenance thereof.

The Public Works Service sihall
be established in the new building

Au moment de proc6der & la
signature du pr&ent accord, les
pl&nipotentiaires soussign^s sont con-
venus de ce qui suit:

Ad Art. 2, Le sifege central de
Tadministration restant fix6 & Or-
sova, le Service des Travaux sera
install^ <t Tekija dans Timmeuble
que le Gouvernement yougoslave
fera* b&tir & ses frais et mettra
gratuitement & la disposition dudit
service.

Cet immeuble jouira des m&mes
droits, prerogatives et exemptions
fiscales dont b&n&ficie ou b6n6ficiera
& Tavenir le local d'Orsova et ne
pourra 6tre affect6 & un autre emploi.
II arborera dans les m^mes condi-
tions que ce dernier les insignes dis-
tinctifs de Tadministration, qui en
aura la charge de Tentretien.

L'installation du Service des Tra-
vaux sera effectu6e d&s que le

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 310

as soon as the Yugoslav Govern-
ment has notified the Administra-
tion that the building, which shall
be constructed as soon as possible,
is ready for occupation.

Ad Art 12. It is understood that
the post of the representative pro-
vided for in Article 12 shall be filled
in turn by the Councillors (r&fSren-
daires) of the General Secretariat of
the Commission during the first
five years after the coming into force
of the present Agreement. The
situation shall be examined afresh
on the expiry of that period when
the text of the Agreement is recon-
sidered as provided in Article 67.

IN FAITH WHEREOF the Under-
signed have drawn up the present
Protocol, which shall have the same
force and duration as the Agreement
to which it refers.

Done at Semmering, June 28,
1932.

Gouveraement yougpslave aura fait
connaitre &, Tadministration que
1'immeuble dont la construction aura
lieu aussitOt que possible, est pr€t
& 6tre habit6.

Ad Art 12. II est entendu que
les fonctions du repr6sentant pr€vu
& Tarticle 12 seront assumes &. tour
de r61e par les r6f£rendaires du
secretariat g&n6ral de la commission
pendant les cinq premieres ann6es
qui suivront la mise en vigueur du
present accord. La situation sera
examinee de nouveau £ 1 'expiration de
cette p6riode & Foccasion de la remise
& F6tude du texte de Faccord prescrite
par les dispositions de Tarticle 67,

EN FOI DE QUOI les soussignfe ont
dress6 !e present protocole qui aura
la m6me force et durfee que Taccord
auquel il se rapporte.

Fait au Semmering, le 28 juin
1932.

D. PANTITCH CONST. CONTZESCO DE DIETRICH

No. 310

AGREEMENT concerning Non-German Reparations. Signed at
Lausanne, July 7, 1932.

ACCORD relatif aux r6parations non-allemancles. Sign$ i
Lausanne, 7 juillet 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE* The Conference at Lausanne, at which this agreement was drawn up,
was principally concerned with German reparations. See No, 311, post. This agreement
applied, inter alia, to Bulgarian reparations (see No. 243, ante) and to Hungarian reparation®
(see No. 254, ante). The committee envisaged has not met.

RATIFICATIONS. This agreement was not subject to ratification,

BIBLIOGRAPHY. (See the bibliography under No. 311, post.)

Entered into force July 7, 1933.*

Text from publication by the German Ministry for Foreign Affairs.

The undersigned Governments, Les Gouveraements soussign6s,

Animated by the same spirit as Agissant dans Tesprit qui a inspirfe
inspired the Declaration signed on la dlclaration signte le 16 juin par
1 Not registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations (July I, 1937).

July 9, 1932

GERMAN REPARATIONS

the 1 6th June by the Five Inviting
Creditor Powers,1

Are agreed and recommend to the
Conference that a Committee con-
sisting of one representative of each
of the Governments concerned shall
be set up to consider the group of
questions known as "non -German
Reparations" and cognate ques-
tions viewing them within the frame-
work of a general settlement,

Are of opinion that, in order to
permit the work of the said Commit-
tee to proceed undisturbed, without
prejudice to any question of principle
or to the solutions which may ulti-
mately be reached, the execution of
the payments due in respect of the
above-mentioned questions should
be reserved until the 15th December
next failing a settlement before that
date.

SIGNED at Lausanne the yth July,
1932, for the Governments of

les cinq Puissances cr£anci£res in-
vitantes,1

Sont d 'accord pour recommander
& la Conference de nomrner un
Comit6 qui devrait 6tre compost
d'un represent tan t de chacun des
Gouvernements int&ress6s et qui
serait charg6 d'examiner Tensernble
des questions groupies sous le terme
de 1 * Reparations non-allemandes ' '
et de celles qui s'y rattachent en les
envisageant dans le cadre d'un
r&glement universel,

Sont d'avis, afin de permettre au
Comit6 susmentionn& de mener £
bien sa t&che, que, sans pr^juger
aucune question de principe, ni les
solutions susceptibles d'etre atteintes
ult6rieurement, Tex6cution des paie-
ments aff6rents aux questions sus-
mentionn^es soit r&erv^e jusqu'au
15 d6cembre & d6faut d'un r^glernent
ant^rieurement obtenu.

SIGN& & Lausanne, le 7 juillet 1932,
pour les Gouvernements de

Australia: GRANVILLE RYRIE; Belgium: PAUL HYMANS; Bulgaria: N.
MOUCHANOFF ; Canada : THOMAS A* STONE ; Czechoslovakia : STEFAN OSUSKY ;
France: CHARLES RIST; Hungary: L, GAJZAGO; Italy: ANTONIO MOSCONI;
Japan: SHIGERU YOSHIDA; New Zealand: T. M. WILFORD; Portugal: TOMAZ
FERNANDES; Roumania: SAVEL RADULESCO; South Africa: C. T. TE WATER;
United Kingdom: N. CHAMBERLAIN; Yugoslavia: CONSTANTIN FOTITCH;
India: N. CHAMBERLAIN.

No. 311

AGREEMENT concerning German Reparations. Opened for signa-
ture at Lausanne, July 9, 1932.

ACCORD relatif aux reparations allemandes. Ouvert a la signature
a Lausanne, 9 juillet 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. A Special Advisory Committee convoked by the Bank for Interna-
tional Settlements in accordance with a request of the German Government made under a
provision in the Experts' Plan of June 7, 1929, and Annex III, V, 10, of the Hague Agree-

1 This declaration related to the suspension of payments on reparations and war debts
falling due during the period of the Lausanne Conference. The text was incorporated m the
Final Act of the Conference. Br. ParL Papers, Cmd. 4126 (1932); 27 Martens, N.R.G.
(3d sen), p. 19,— ED.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 311

ment of January 20, 1930 (No, 238, ante), met at Basle, December 8-23, 1931; Its report of
December 23, 1931, urged immediate decisions as to the general problem of reparations.
Br. Parl. Papers, Cmd, 3995 (1932). At Geneva, on February 13, 1932, a decision was taken
by states principally interested which led to the Lausanne Conference, June i6-July 9, 1932,
This agreement of July 9, 1932, was designed to supersede the reparation regime provided
for in the agreement of January 20 > 1930.

RATIFICATIONS, While no ratification has been deposited at Paris, this agreement has
had the result that German reparations have ceased to be the subject of active negotiations,

BIBLIOGRAPHY, The text of this agreement is also published in Br. Parl. Papers, Misc.
Mo. 7 (1930), Cmd. 4126; Materialien sur Reparations/rage (Lausanner Konferenz 1932)
(Berlin: Foreign Office, 1932); 27 Martens, N.R.G. (3d ser.)» P- 23.

C de Armenteros, "La Conferencia de Lausanne sobre las reparaciones de la gran guerra,"
22 Rev. de der. int. (1932), pp. 291-326; G. W. J. Bruins, " De overeenkomst van Lausanne/'
7 Volk&nbond (1931), pp. 357-63; M. Liais, "La Conference de Lausanne," 40 Rev. gin. d®
dr* int. pub, (1933)* pp. 71-89; Pereira da Silva, A Conferencia de Lausana (Lisboa, 1933),
pp. 19-132; W. Rftpke, " Vor Lausanne/' 22 Zeitschriftf&rPotitife (1933), pp. 145-54; R6pke»
"Nach Lausanne/' identt pp. 297-306; K, Strupp, Der Vertrag von Lausanne (Berlin; Roth,
1932), 67 pp.; H* Wehberg, " Die Lausanner Konferenz/' 32 Fried&nswart® (1932), pp. 225-7;
M. S. Wertheimer, "The Lausanne Reparation Settlement," 8 Foreign Policy Association
Reports (1932), pp. 220-30; J. W. Wheeler-Bennett, The Wreck of Reparations (New York:
Morrow, 1932), pp. 210-54.

Not entered into force (January i, 1937).
Text from publication by the German Ministry for Foreign Affairs.

The Government of His Majesty
the King of the Belgians* the Gov-
ernment of the United Kingdom of
Great Britain and Northern Ireland,
the Government of Canada, the
Government of the Commonwealth
of Australia, the Government of New
Zealand, the Government of the
Union of South Africa, the Govern-
ment of India, the Government of
the French Republic, the Govern-
ment of the Greek Republic, the
Government of His Majesty the
King of Italy, the Government of
His Majesty the Emperor of Japan,
the Government of the Republic of
Poland, the Government of the Re-
public of Portugal, the Government
of His Majesty the King of Roumania,
the Government of the Czecho-
slovak Republic and the Govern-
ment of His Majesty the King of
Yugoslavia (hereinafter described as
the creditor Governments), and the
Government of the German Reich,

Recognising that the legal validity
of the Agreements signed at The

Le Gouvernement de Sa Majest4 le
Roi des Beiges, le Gouvernement du
Royaume-Uni de Grande-Bretagne
et de rirlande du Nordr le Gouverne-
ment du Canada, le Gouveraement
du Commonwealth d'Australie, le
Gouvernement de la Nouvelle-Z6-
lande, le Gouvernement de I1 Union
Sud-Africaine, le Gouvernement de
1'Inde, le Gouvernement de la R6-
publique frangaise, le Gouvernement
de la R6publique grecque, le Gou-
vernement de Sa Majest6 le Roi
d'ltalie, le Gouvernement de Sa
Majest6 TEmpereur du Japon, le
Gouvernement de la R6publique de
Pologne, le Gouvernement de la
R6publique du Portugal , le Gouverne-
ment de Sa Majestfe le Roi de
Roumanie, le Gouvernement de la
R&publique tch6coslovaque, le Gou-
vernement de Sa Majest^ le Roi de
Yougoslavie (ci-apr&s d6sign6s comme
les Gouvernements cr6anciers)» et le
Gouvernement du Reich allemand,

Reconnaissant que la validM
juridique des accords signfe & La

July 9, 1932

GERMAN REPARATIONS

Hague on the 2Oth January, 1930,* is
not in question ,

But concerned by the economic
difficulties resulting from the present
crisis,

And being desirous to make, so far
as they are concerned, the necessary
efforts to ensure the confidence which
is indispensable to the development
of normal economic and financial re-
lations between the nations,

The undersigned, duly authorised
to that effect by their respective
Governments,

Have agreed as follows:

Declaration

The Powers signatory of the pres-
ent Agreement have assembled at
Lausanne to deal with one of the
problems resulting from the war,
with the firm intention of helping to
create a new order, permitting the
establishment and development of
confidence between the nations in a
mutual spirit of reconciliation, col-
laboration and justice.

They do not claim that the task
accomplished at Lausanne, which will
completely put an end to Repara-
tions, can alone assure that peace
which all the nations desire. But
they hope that an achievement of
such significance and so arduously
attained will be understood and ap-
preciated by all the pacific elements
in Europe and the world, and that it
will be followed by fresh achieve-
ments.

These further successes will be
more readily won if the nations will
rally to this new effort in the cause of
real peace, which can only be com-
plete if it is applied both in the
economic and in the political sphere
and rejects all possibility of resort to
arms or to violence.

The signatory Powers will make
every effort to resolve the problems
which exist at the present moment
or may arise subsequently ia the

Haye le 20 Janvier 1930 * n'est pas
en cause,

Mais, 6tant pr6occup£s des diffi-
cult£s 6conomiques provoqu^es par
la crise actuelle,

Et d^sireux, en ce qui les concerne,
de faire les efforts n6cessaires pour
assurer la confiance indispensable au
d6veloppement de relations 6co-
nomiques et financiSres normales
entre les peuples,

Les soussign^s, dfiment autoris6s &
cet effet par leurs Gouvernements
respectifs,

Sont convenus de ce qui suit:

Declaration

Les Puissances signataires du pr6-
sent accord se sont r^unies 4 Lau-
sanne pour traiter un des probl&mes
issus de la guerre avec le plus sincere
d&sir de contribuer 4 la formation
d'un ordre nouveau qui permettrait
l^tablissement et le d<§veloppement
de la confiance entre les peuples dans
un esprit r6ciproque de rlconcilia-
tion, de collaboration et de justice.

Elles ne consid^rent pas que
Foeuvre r&alis&e & Lausanne, qui doit
mettre fin compl&tement aux r6para~
tions, soit suffisante pour obtenir
cette paix que souhaitent tous les
peuples. Mais elles esp&rent que ce
r^sultat, en Iui-m6me si important et
qui a exig& de tous un rude effort,
sera compris et appr£ci6 par tous les
^Mments pacifiques de TEurope et
du monde et qu'il sera suivi d'oeuvres
nouvelles.

Ces oeuvres seront d'autant plus
faciles It r6aliser que les peuples
soutiendront mieux cette nouvelle
consecration d'une paix r6elle qui,
pour gtre complete, doit s'appliquer
4 la fois & Tordre 6conomique et &
Tordre politique comme elle doit
r6pudier tout appel aux armes et
toute violence.

Les Puissances signataires du pr6-
sent accord s'efforceront de r6soudre
les probl^mes actuellement pos6s ou
qui se poseront ult£rieurement dans

1 Nos, 238-246,

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 311

spirit which has inspired the present
Agreement.

Article i. The German Govern-
ment shall deliver to the Bank for
International Settlements German
Government 5 per cent redeemable
bonds, to the amount of three mil-
Hard reichsmarks gold of the present
standard of weight and fineness, to
be negotiated under the following
arrangements:

(1) The Bank for International
Settlements shall hold the bonds as
trustee.

(2) The Bonds shall not be nego-
tiated by the Bank for International
Settlements before the expiry of
three years from the signature of the
present Agreement. Fifteen years
after the date of the said signature
the Bonds which the Bank for Inter-
national Settlements has not been
able to negotiate shall be cancelled.

(3) After the above period of
three years the Bank for Interna-
tional Settlements shall negotiate
the Bonds by means of public issues
on the markets as and when possible,
in such amounts as it thinks fit, pro-
vided that no issue shall be made at a
rate below 90 per cent.

The German Government shall
have the right at any time to redeem
at par, in whole or in part, the Bonds
not yet issued by the Bank for Inter-
national Settlements. In determin-
ing the terms of issue of the Bonds,
the Bank for International Settle-
ments shall take into account the
desirability of giving to the German
Government the right to redeem the
Bonds after a reasonable period.

(4) The Bonds shall carry interest
at 5 per cent and sinking fund at I
per cent as from the date on which
they are negotiated. They shall be
free of all German taxes, present and
future.

(5) The proceeds of the Bonds, as

le mSme esprit qui a inspir6 cet
accord.

Article i. Le Gouvernement alle-
mand d61ivrera & la Banque des
Rdglements Internationaux des bons
du Gouvernement allemand 5 pour
cent rachetables, pour un montant
de 3 milliards de reichsmarks-or de la
valeur, du poids et du titre actuelle-
ment en vigueur, & n6gocier dans les
conditions qui suivent:

(1) La Banque des R&glements
Inteniationaux d6tiendra les bons
comme trustee.

(2) Les bons ne seront pas n6-
goci6s par la Banque des Rdglements
Internationaux avant i 'expiration
d'une pfiriode de trois ans & dater de
la signature du present accord.
Quinze ans apr&s la date de cette
signature les bons qui n'auraient pu
etre places par la Banque des
R&glements Internationaux seront
annu!6s.

(3) Apr&s Texpiration du d61ai de
trois ans ci-dessus vis6, la Banque
des R&glements Internationaux n6-
gociera les bons par voie demissions
publiques sur les marches au fur et &.
rnesure des possibility, en tels mon-
tants qu'elle jugera opportun, sous
reserve qu'aucune Emission n'aura
lieu & un taux inf6rieur & 90 pour
cent.

Le Gouvernement allemand aura,
& tout moment, le droit de racheter au
pair tout ou partie des bons non en-
core 6mis par la Banque des R&gle-
ments Internationaux. En fixantles
conditions demission des bons, la
Banque des R&glements Internatio-
naux devra tenir compte du fait qu'il
est d6sirable de donner au Gouverne-
ment allemand le droit de racheter
les bons 6mis dans un d^lai raison-
nable.

(4) Les bons porteront int6rHt & 5
pour cent avec I pour cent d'amor-
tissement & partir de la date de leur
Emission. Us seront exempts de
tous impdts allemands presents et
futurs.

(5) Le produit des bons, au fur et

July 9. 1932

and when Issued, shall be placed to a
special account, the allocation of
which shall be settled by a further
agreement in due course between the
Governments, other than Germany,
signatory to the present Agreement.

(6) If any foreign loan is issued by
the German Government, or with its
guarantee, at any time after the
coming into force of the present
Agreement, the German Govern-
ment shall offer to apply up to the
equivalent of one-third of the net
cash proceeds of the loan raised to
the purchase of Bonds held by the
Bank for International Settlements,
The purchase price shall be such that
the net yield on the Bonds so pur-
chased would be the same as the net
yield of the loan so raised. This para-
graph does not refer to loans for a
period of not more than twelve
months.

(7) If, after five years from the
signature of the present Agreement,
the Bank for International Settle-
ments considers that the credit of the
German Government is restored, but
the quotations of its loans remain
none the less below the minimum
price of issue fixed under paragraph
(3) above, the minimum price may
be varied by a decision of the Board
of the Bank for International Settle-
ments, which decision shall require a
two-thirds majority.

Further, at the request of the
German Government, the rate of
interest may be reduced below 5 per
cent if issues can be made at par.

(8) The Bank for International
Settlements shall have power to
settle all questions as to the currency
and denomination of bonds issued,
and also all questions as to charges
and costs of issue, which it shall have
the right to deduct from the pro-
ceeds of the issue. In considering
any questions relating to the issue of

GERMAN REPARATIONS

& mesure de leur 6mission, sera plac6
& un compte special, dont 1'affecta-
tion sera r6gl£e par un accord ul-
t6rieur, le moment venu, entre les
Gouvernements, autres que FAlle-
magne, signataires du present Ac-
cord.

(6) Au cas oil, i tout moment
apr6s la mise en vigueur du present
accord, des emprunts seraient 6mis &
l'6tranger par le Gouvernernentalle-
mand, ou avec sa garantie, ledit
Gouvernement offrira d'appliquer, &
concurrence d'un tiers, le produitnet
effectif en esp&ces des emprunts 6mis
au rachat de bons d6tenus par la
Banque des R&glements Interna-
tionaux. Le prix du rachat sera tel
que le rendement net des bons
rachet6s soit le m6me que le rende-
ment net de Temprunt 6mis. Ne
sont pas vis<§es par le present para-
graphe les avances consenties pour
une dur^e 6gale ou inf^rieure & un an.

(7) Si, cinq ann6es <§cou!6es aprds
la signature du present accord, la
Banque des R^glements Interna-
tionaux consid^re que le credit du
Gouvernement allemand est restaur£,
mais si les cours de ses emprunts
demeurent n6anmois au-dessous du
prix minimum d Emission fix6 en
vertu du paragraphs 3 ci-dessus, le
prix minimum pourra 6tre modifi6
par une decision du Conseil de la
Banque des R^glements Interna-
tionaux prise & une majorit6 des
deux tiers.

D'autre part, & la demande du
Gouvernement allemand, le taux
d'int£r€t des bons pourra litre abaiss6
au-dessous de 5 pour cent si des
Emissions & un nouveau taux peuvent
gtre faites au pair.

(8) La Banque des R&glements
Internationaux aura le pouvoir de
r6gler toutes questions relatives & la
monnaie et aux denominations des
bons &mis, ainsi que les questions
relatives aux charges et frais d'<§mis-
sion qurelle aura le droit de d6duire
des produits de remission. Pour
toutes questions relatives 4 remission

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 31 1

Bonds, the Board of the Bank for
International Settlements shall take
the advice of the President of the
Reichsbank, but decisions may be
made by a majority vote.

Art* 2. On its coming into force
the present Agreement will put to an
end and be substituted for the
reparation regime provided for in the
agreement with Germany, signed at
The Hague on the 2Oth January,
1930, and the agreements signed at
London on the nth August, 1931,*
and at Berlin on the 6th June, 1932 ; 2
the obligations resulting from the
present Agreement will completely
replace the former obligations of
Germany comprised in the annuities
of the "New Plan."

Art. 3* Consequently, Articles I,
2» 4» 5» 7» &» 9 Md 12 and Annexes I,
III, IV, V, Va, VI, Via, VII, IX, X
and Xa of the said agreement with
Germany are definitely abrogated.

Art. 4. The Protocol signed at
London on the nth August, 1931,
and the Protocol supplementary
thereto signed at Berlin on the 6th
June, 1932, are abrogated. Conse-
quently, the provisional receipts
handed to the Bank for International
Settlements by the German Railway
Company under the said Protocol of
the nth August, 1931, will be re-
turned to it.

Art, 5. The debt certificate of the
German Government and the certif-
icate of the German Railway Com-
pany referred to in Article 7 and in
Annexes III and IV of the Hague
Agreement shall, with the coupons
attached, be returned to the German
Government and to the German

Company respectively,
6. Nothing in the present
ent alters or affects Article 3
uidation of the past), Article 6
far as concerns the corporate
Ustence of the Bank for Interna-
jfonal Settlements), or Article 10
(Immunities of the Bank for Inter-

1 No. 238af antes—Ev.

des bons, le Conseil d* Administration
de la Banque des Rfcglements Inter-
nationaux prendra 1'avis du Prisi-
dent de la Reichsbank, mais les
d6cisions seront prises & la majority.
Art, 2- D6s sa mise en vigueur le
pr6sent accord mettra fin et se sub-
stituera au regime des reparations
pr^vu & 1 'accord avec TAllemagne
sign& & La Haye le 20 Janvier 1930
et aux accords sign6s £ Londres le
ii aotit 1931 3 et & Berlin le 6 juin
*93^»2 les obligations du present ac-
cord rempla^ant complement les
obligations ant^rieures de I'AUe-
magne comprises dans les annuitte
du "Nouveau Plan",

Art. 3* En consequence, les Ar-
ticles i«% 2, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9 et 12 ainsi
que les Annexes I, II I , IV, V, V bis,
VI, VI Ms, VII, IX, X et X &w de
1'accord de La Haye avec TAlle-
magne sont dfifinitivement abrogfis.

Art. 4. Le Protocole sign6 £
Londres le II aoflt 1931 et le Proto-
cole compl^mentaire sign6 4 Berlin le
6 juin 1932 sont abrogfe. En cons6-*
quence, lea re^us provisoires d61ivr6s
^L la Banque des R^glements Inter-
nationaux par la Reichsbahngesell-
schaft en execution du premier
d*entre eux lui seront restituls.

Art. 5* Le certificat de dette du
Gouvernement allemand et le cer-
tificat de la Reichsbahngeseltechafty
tous deux vis6s It 1* Article 7 de
1'accord de La Haye et aux Annexes
III et IV, ainsi que les coupons
attaches, seront restitu6s respective-
ment au Gouvernement allemand et
& la Reichsbahngesellschaft.

Art* 6» Rien dans le present ac-
cord ne modifie ou n'affecte I' Article
3 (Liquidation du pass6)» r Article 6,
pour autant qull vise la personnalit6
juridique de la Banque des R^gle-
ments Internationaux, et FArticle 10
(Iramunit6a de la Banque des

2 No.

July 9, 1932

GERMAN REPARATIONS

national Settlements) of the Hague
Agreement.

Art. 7. The Signatory Govern-
ments declare that nothing in the
present Agreement diminishes or
varies or shall be deemed to diminish
or vary the rights of the bondholders
of the German External Loan, 1924,
or of the German Government Inter-
national 5^4 per cent Loan, 1930,*

Any necessary adaptation of the
machinery relating to the manner in
which the obligations of the German
Government with respect to the Ger-
man External Loan, 1924, and with
respect to the German Government
International s}4 per cent Loan,
1930, will be discharged will be sub-
ject to mutual arrangement be-
tween the German Government, on
the one hand, and the Bank for Inter-
national Settlements, Fiscal Agent
of the Trustees of the German Ex-
ternal Loan, 1924, and Trustee of the
German Government International
55^ per cent Loan, 1930, on the
other hand.

Art. 8. The present Agreement
will, on Its coming into force, be
notified by the Government of the
French Republic to the Bank for
International Settlements with a
view to the application by the Bank
of the provisions which affect it; the
said Government will also inform the
Bank, for the purposes of its Stat-
utes, that the "New Plan" is no
longer in effect.

Art, 9* Any disputes, whether
between the Governments signatory
of the present Agreement, or between
one or more of those Governments
and the Bank for International
Settlements, as to the interpretation
or application of this Agreement
shall be referred to the Arbitration
Tribunal set up under Article 15 of
the Hague Agreement with Germany.
The relevant provisions of that Arti-
cle and of Annex XII of the said

ments Internationaux) de 1 'accord de
La Haye.

Art* 7. Les Gouvernements sig-
nataires declarent que rien dans le
present accord ne rMuit, ou ne modi-
fie, ou ne pourra Otre consid6r6
comma rMuisant ou modifiant les
droits des porteurs d 'obligations de
FEmprunt ext6rieur allemand 1924
ou de FEmprunt international s}4
1930 du Gouvernement allemand.1

Toute adaptation n6cessaire des
modalit£s d'ex6cution des obligations
du Gouvernement allemand con-
cemant FEmprunt exttrieur alle-
mand 1924 et FEmprunt interna-
tional 5)4 1930 du Gouvernement
allemand fera Fob jet d'un arrange-
ment entre ce Gouvernement, d'une
part, et, d'autre part, la Banque des
R&glements Internationaux, agent
financier des trustees de FEmprunt
ext&rieur allemand 1924 et trustee de
FEmprunt international 5}4 1930
du Gouvernement allemand.

Art. 8. D&s sa mise en vigueur, le
present accord sera notifi6 par les
soins du Gouvernement de la R6-
publique fran^aise & la Banque des
Rdglements Internationaux en yue
de Fapplication par cette derni&re
des dispositions qui la concernent;
ledit Gouvernernent signifiera 6gale-
ment &, la Banque des R&glements
Internationaux, aux fins de ses
statuts, que le "Nouveau Plan" a
cess6 d'etre en vigueur.

Art g. Tout diff6rend, soit entre
les Gouvernements signataires du
present accord, soit entre un ou
plusieurs d 'entre eux et la Banque
des R^glements Internationaux, au
sujet de Interpretation et de Fap-
plication du present accord, sera
soumis au Tribunal Arbitral con-
stitu6 en vertu de V Article 15 de
Faccord de La Haye avec FAlle-
magne, Toutes dispositions appro-
prides de cet Article et de F Annexe

* No. 261, ante. — ED.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 311

Agreement will for this purpose be
applicable,

Art. 10. The present Agreement,
of which the English and French
texts are both authentic, shall be
ratified, and the ratifications shall
be deposited at Paris.

The Governments whose seat is
outside Europe will be entitled
merely to notify the French Govern-
ment, through their diplomatic rep-
resentatives in Paris, that their
ratification has been given; in that
case they must transmit the instru-
ment of ratification as soon as pos-
sible.

As soon as the present Agreement
has been ratified by the Govern-
ments of Germany, Belgium, France,
Great Britain and Northern Ireland,
Italy and Japan, it shall come into
force between those Governments
whose ratifications have been de-
posited or notified at that date. It
shall come into force in respect of
every other signatory Government
on the date of notification or deposit
of ratification.

The French Government will
transmit to all the signatory Govern-
ments and to the Bank for Inter-
national Settlements a certified copy
of the Proems-verbal of the deposit of
each ratification, and a certified copy
of each notification.

Art. ii. The present Agreement
may be signed at any time up to the
date on which it first comes into
force in accordance with Article 10,
by any Government signatory to the
Agreement signed at The Hague on
the 20th January, 1930.

After that date any of the said
Governments may accede to the
present Agreement by means of a
notification addressed to the Gov-
ernment of the French Republic,
which will transmit to the other
Contracting Governments and to the
Bank for International Settlements a
certified copy of such notification.
In that case the Agreement will come

XII de 1' accord recevront £ cet
effet application.

Art. 10. Le prdsent accord, dont
les textes frangais et anglais feront
6galement foi, sera ratifi6, et le d6pdt
des ratifications sera fait & Paris,

Les Gouvernernents qui ont leur
si&ge hors d'Europe pourront se
contenter de notifier au Gouveme-
ment frangais leur ratification par
leurs repr6sentants diplomatiques &
Paris; en pareil cas, ils transmettront
le plus t6t possible rinstrument de
leur ratification.

D£s que le present accord aura
6t6 ratifi6 par les Gouvernements
d'Allernagne, de Belgique, de France,
de Grande-Bretagne et de Tlrlande
du Nord, d'ltalie et du Japon, ii
entrera en vigueur entre les Gou-
vernements dont les ratifications
auront 6t6 d6pos6es ou notifies &
cette date. II entrera en vigueur
pour chacun des autres Gouverne-
rnents signataires & la date de la
notification ou du d6p6t de sa
ratification.

Le Gouvernement fran^ais remet-
tra 4 tous les Gouvernements signa-
taires et & la Banque des Rfeglements
Internatkmaux une copie certififie
con forme des proc&s-verbaux du
d6p6t de chaque ratification, ainsi
que de chaque notification.

Art. ii. A tout moment avant la
date de sa mise en vigueur initiate,
telle qu'elle est pr^vue & F Article io»
le present accord pourra gtre sign!
par tel des Gouvernements signa-
taires de Taccord de La Haye avec
TAllemagne du 20 Janvier 1930,

Postincrement & cette date, cha*
cun desdits Gouvernements pourra
adherer au present accord par voie
d'une notification faite au Gouverne-
ment de la R^publique franchise, qui
communiquera aux autres Gouverne-
ments contractants et & la Banque
des R^glements Internationaux copie
certifi6e conforme de cette notifica-
tion. En ce cas, Taccord entrera en

July 9, 1932 GERMAN REPARATIONS 8 1

into force for the Government con- vigueur, pour le Gouvernement in-
cerned on the date of such acces- t6ress6, & la date de cette adhesion,
sion.

DONE at Lausanne, the 9th day of FAIT & Lausanne, le 9 julllet 1932,
July, 1932, In a single copy which will en un seul exemplaire qui sera d6-
remain deposited in the archives of pos6 aux archives du Gouvernement
the Government of the French Re* de la R&publique frangaise, qui en
public, which will transmit certified remettra une copie certifi^e con-
copies to each of the signatory forme & chacun des autres Gouverne-
Governments. ments signataires.

[Signed :] For the Belgian Government; RENKIN, PAUL HYMANS, E. FRANC-
QUI ; for the Government of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and North-
ern Ireland: J. RAMSAY MACDQNALD, N. CHAMBERLAIN, JOHN SIMON,
WALTER RUNCIMAN; for the Government of Canada: G. H. FERGUSON; for
the Government of the Commonwealth of Australia: GRANVILLE RYRIE; for
the Government of New Zealand: THOMAS M. WILFORD; for the Govern-
ment of the Union of South Africa: C. T. TE WATER; for the Government of
India: JOHN SIMON; for the French Government: E. HERRIOT, GERMAIN
MARTIN, JULIEN DURAND, JOSEPH PAGANON, GEORGES BONNET; for the
Italian Government: ANTONIO MOSCONI, ALBERTO BENEDUCE; for the
Japanese Government: SHIGERU YOSHIDA, S. KURIYAMA, J. TSUSHIMA; for
the Polish Government: AUGUSTE ZALESKI, JAN MROZOWSKI; for the Ger-
man Government: F. VON PAPEN, C. VON NEURATH, Graf SCHWERIN VON
KROSIGK, WARMBOLD.

No. 311a

Transitional Measures concerning German Reparations. Signed
at Lausanne, July 9, 1932*

Mesures de transition relatives aux reparations allemandes. Signes
3. Lausanne, 9 juiilet 1932,

EDITOR'S NOTE. The declaration of June 16, 1932, which is referred to in Article i of this
instrument, provided that " the execution of the payments due to the Powers participating
in the Conference in respect of reparations and war debts should be reserved during the
period of the [Lausanne) Conference"; it did not affect the service of market loans however.
Br* ParL Papers, Misc. No. 7 (1932), Cmd. 4126, p, 3.

RATIFICATIONS. This instrument was not subject to ratification.

Entered into force July 9, X932.1

Text from publication by the German Ministry for Foreign Affairs.

The duly authorised representa- Les repr^sentants dflment auto-
tives of the Governments signatories ris6s des Gouvernements signataires
of the Agreement concluded this day de 1'accord conclu ce jour avec 1'Alle-

1 Not registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations (July I, 1937).

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 31 ia

with Germany have agreed as fol-
lows:

Article I. As from to-day's date
the effects of the Declaration of the
i6th June, 1932, will be prolonged
as regards the payments due by
Germany under the Hague Agree-
ment of the 2Oth January, 1930, the
London Protocol of the nth Au-
gust, 1931, and the Berlin Protocol of
the 6th June, 1932.

This prolongation will terminate
on the coming into force of the
Agreement with Germany signed to-
day at Lausanne, or, failing this,
on any one of the Governments of
the following countries, Germany,
Belgium, United Kingdom, France,
Italy and Japan, notifying the Gov-
ernments concerned that it has de-
cided not to ratify.

Art, 2. Negotiations will be en-
tered into without delay between the
German Government and the Bank
for International Settlements in or-
der that the arrangements contem-
plated in Article 7 (2) of the Agree-
ment with Germany signed to-day
may be prepared before its coming
into force.

Art* 3, As regards the execution,
by means of deliveries In kind, of
contracts and works in course of
execution, a Committee, consisting
of representatives of the German
Government and the Governments
concerned, shall be appointed to
draw up such proposals as may be
desirable in regard to such contracts
and works.

SIGNED at Lausanne, the 9th day
of July, 1932.

For the Belgian Government: RENKIN, PAUL HYMANS, E. FRANCQUI; for
the Government of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ire-
land; J. RAMSAY MACDONALD, N. CHAMBERLAIN, JOHN SIMON, WALTER
RUNCIMAN; for the Government of Canada: G. H. FERGUSON; for the Gov~
ernment of the Commonwealth of Australia: GRANVILLE RYRIE; for the
Government of New Zealand: THOMAS M. WJLFOED; for the Government of
the Union of South Africa: C T. TE WALTER; for the Government of India:
JOHN SIMON; for the French Government: E. Herriot, GERMAIN MARTIN,
JULIEN DURAND, JOSEPH PAGANON, GEORGES BONNET; for the Italian
Government: ANTONIO MOSCONI, ALBERTO BENEDXJCE; for the Japanese

magne, sont convenus de ce qui
suit:

Article i, A dater de ce jour, les
effets de la declaration du 16 juin
1932 seront prorog6s en ce qui con-
cerne les paiements dus par TAlle-
magne en vertu de Faccord de La
Haye du 20 Janvier 1930, du proto-
cole de Londres du II aoflt 1931 et
du protocole de Berlin du 6 juin

1932.

Cette prorogation prendra fin par
la mise en vigueur de Taccord avec
TAllemagne conclu £t Lausanne en
date de ce jour, pu, & d6faut, par une
declaration notifi6e aux Puissances
int6ress&es par Tun quelconque des
six Gouvernements suivants: Alle-
magne, Belgique, Royaume-Uni,
France, Italie et Japon, qu'il a d6-
cid6 de ne pas ratifier.

Art. 2. Des negotiations seront
entam6es sans d^lai entre le Gou-
vernement allemand et la Banque
des R&glements Internationaux afin
que les adaptations pr6vues 4 TAr-
ticle 7 (2) de Taccord avec FAile-
magne, sign 6 en date de ce jour,
puissent Stre pr6par6es avant son
entrfe en vigueur.

Art. 3. Concernant rex6cution»
au moyen des prestations en nature,
de contrats et de travaux en cours,
il sera procM6 & la nomination d'un
Comlt6 comprenant des repr6sen-
tants du Gouvernement allemand et
des Gouvernements intferessfis, Ce
Comit6 pr6sentera toutes proposi-
tions utiles relatives & ces contrats et
& ces travaux,

SIGN& It Lausanne le 9 juillet 1932.

July 2, 1932 GERMAN REPARATIONS 83

Government: SHIGERU YOSHIDA, S. KURIYAMA (ad referendum), J. TSU-
SHIMA; for the Polish Government: AUGUSTE ZALESKI, JAN MROZOWSKI;
for the German Government: F. VON PAPBN, C, VON NEURATH, Graf

SCHWERIN VON KROSIGK, WARMBOLD.

No. 311b

Proces-verbal relating to the Ratification of the Agreement concern-
ing German Reparations. Initialled at Lausanne^ Jtdy 2, 1932.

Proces-verbal concemant la ratification de PAccord relatif atut repara-
tions aHemandes. Paraph6 & Lausanne, 2 juillet 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. This prods-herbal is frequently referred to as a "Gentlemen's Agree-
ment." 27 Martens, N.R.G* (sd ser.)> p. 41, The text was communicated to the German
Chancellor at Lausanne, July 9, 1932. On the previous day, the President of the Lausanne
Conference had stated, in reply to a question by the German representative, that "in the
event of any inability to fulfil this [the Lausanne] Agreement and its Annexes, a further
Conference will be held." The text of the proems-verbal is in English only.

Text from Br. Parl. Papers, Misc. No. 8 (1932), Cmd. 4129.

The Lausanne Agreement will not Into full effect. But if no such

come into final effect until after rati- settlement can be obtained, the

fication as provided for in the Agree- agreement with Germany will not

ment. So far as the Creditor Gov- be ratified; a new situation will

ernments on whose behalf this have arisen and the Governments

Proces- Verbal is initialled are con- interested will have to consult to-

cerned, ratification will not be ef- gether as to what should be done,

fected until a satisfactory settlement In that event, the legal position, as

has been reached between them and between all the Governments, would

their own creditors. It will be open revert to that which existed before

to them to explain the position to the Hoover Moratorium,

their respective Parliaments, but no The German Government will be

specific reference to it will appear in notified of this arrangement,

the text of the agreement with Ger- On behalf of Belgium: j. R.

many. Subsequently, if a . satis- Qn behalf of Great Britain . N c

factory settlement about their own Qn behalf of France: E, H.

debts is reached, the aforesaid Cred- Qn behalf f Jtal A M
itor Governments will ratify and the

agreement with Germany will come July 2, 1932*

84 INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 312

No. 312

AUSTRIAN Protocol. Opened for signature at Geneva, Jtily 15,

1932,

PROTOCOLE autrichien. Ouvert a la signature a Geneve, 15

juillet 1932,

EDITOR'S NOTE. The adoption of an earlier plan for the financial and economic recon-
struction of Austria led to the signature of three protocols at Geneva, October 4, 1922 (No.
76, ante). This protocol was approved by the Council of the League of Nations, July 15,
1932. League of Nations Official Journal, 1932, p. 1280. It is to be noted that the preamble
incorporates by reference Protocol No. I of October 4, 1922, which was interpreted by the
Permanent Court of International Justice in an opinion given on September 5, 1931. Publi-
cations of the Court, Series A/B, No. 41.

RATIFICATIONS. Ratifications of this protocol were deposited on or before December 31,
I932» by Austria, France, Great Britain, and Italy; ratifications were later deposited by
Belgium (September 23, 1933) and the Netherlands (February 20, 1934).

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of this protocol is also published in British Treaty Series, No. 5
(I933)i Cmd. 4247; Bundesgesetsblatt, 1933, p. 29; 27 Martens, N.R.G. (3d ser,)» p. 643.

A. Antonucci, La liguidation financiere de la guerre et la reconstruction en Europe central®
(Paris: Giard, 1933), 463 pp.; J. Basdevant, La condition international® de VAutriche (Paris:
Sirey, 1935), 299 pp.; C. Cosoiu, Le rdle de la SociM des Nations en mature d'emprunts d'Etat
(Paris: Domat-Montchrestien, 1934)* 430 pp.; A. A. Poortenaar, L'muvre de la restauration
financier e sous les auspices de la SociU& des Nations (Amsterdam, 1933), pp. 118-27.

Entered into force December 31, 1932.*

Text from 135 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. 285.

PREAMBLE PR^AMBULE

Considering Consid^rant

That the Government of the Aus- Que le Gouvernement de la R6-

trian Federal Republic has addressed publique £6d6rale d'Autriche a

to the League of Nations a request adress6 une demande de secours &. la

to be assisted in maintaining the Soci6t6 des Nations, & Teffet d'fitre

work of economic and financial re- aid6&mamtenirlrGeuvrede restaura-

construction undertaken in conse- tion 6conomique et finanoi&re entre-

quence of the decision of the Council prise & la suite de la decision du Con-

of the League of Nations of October seil de la Soci6t6 des Nations du 4

4th, I922,2 and of the signature of octobre 1922 2 et de la signature des

the three Protocols of the same date; trois protocoles de la mUnie date;

That the Austrian Government Que le Gouvernement autrichien

reaffirms its intention of meeting affirme 4 nouveau sa volontfi de faire

punctually all its foreign obligations; face ppnctuellement & toutes ses

obligations ext^rieures;

That the Governments of Belgium, Que les Gouvernements de la

the United Kingdom of Great Brit- Belgique, du Royaume-Uni de

ain and Northern Ireland, France, Grande-Bretagne et d'Irlande du

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3118, December 31, 1932.
* League of Nations Official Journal, 1922, p. 1455.-— ED.

July 15* 1932

Italy, are ready to grant further as-
sistance to Austria for this purpose;

That the above Governments, in-
cluding the Austrian Government,
declare that such assistance is given
on the basis of Protocol No. I signed
at Geneva on October 4th, 1922, a.nd
of all the undertakings resulting
therefrom; the provisions of which
Protocol are to be considered as here
reproduced;

The Governments of Belgium, the
United Kingdom of Great Britain
and Northern Ireland, France, Italy,
the Netherlands, on the one hand,
and the Government of the Austrian
Federal Republic, on the other,

Have by common consent drawn
up the following provisions:

Article i» In order to assist the
Austrian Government to borrow a
sum in foreign currencies, freely and
immediately ^available, the net
amount of which shall be equivalent
to a maximum of approximately
three hundred million Austrian schill-
ings, at the present legal gold parity,
the Governments of Belgium, the
United Kingdom of Great Britain
and Northern Ireland, France, Italy,
the Netherlands, undertake to apply
without delay for such authority
as may be required under their
municipal law to enable them either
to guarantee, as hereinafter pro-
vided, the principal and interest of
part of such loan or to furnish the
amount to the Austrian Government
in another manner. In case of an
issue on their markets, they will
grant facilities for the issue of the
amount which they have guaranteed.

Art. 2. — (i) There will be no
joint guarantee as between the Gov-
ernments. Each Government shall
be responsible solely for the share in
the total operation which it is to
guarantee or to provide. No guar-
antor Government will be liable for
the service or the repayment of a

AUSTRIAN PROTOCOL

Nord, de la France, de 1'Italie sont
prSts & apporter une nouvelle aide
& TAutriche k cet effet;

Que les Gouvernements susdits, y
compris le Gouvernement autrichien,
d&clarent fonder cette aide sur le
Protocole N° I, sign 6 & Geneve le 4
octobre 1922, avec tous les engage-
ments qu'il comporte; Protocole
dont les dispositions sont consid6-
r6es comme 6tant reproduites ici;

Les Gouvernements de la Bel-
gique, du Royaume-Uni de Grande-
Bretagne et d'Irlande du Nord, de la
France, de PItalie, des Pays-Bas,
d'une part, et le Gouvernement de
la R&publique frkl^rale d'Autriche,
d'autre part,

Ont arr8t6 d'un commun accord
les dispositions suivantes:

Article i. Afin de faciliter au
Gouvernement autrichien Fobten-
tion & F6tranger d'une sonime en
monnaies 6trang6res librement et
imm<§diatement disponibles, dont le
montant net pourra atteindre la
contre-valeur de trois cents millions
de schillings autrichiens, calculus £
la parit6-or 16gale actuelle, les Gou-
vernements de la Belgique, du
Royaurne-Uni de Grande-Bretagne
et dlrlande du Nord, de la France,
de Tltalie, des Pays-Bas, s'engagent
& demander sans d61ai les autorisa-
tions exig6es 6ventuellement par leur
droit interne, soit pour pouvoir
garantir, dans les conditions ci-apr&s
denies, en principal ou en int6rgts,
une part de cet emprunt, soit pour
en fournir le montant au Gouverne-
ment autrichien par une autre m6-
thode. En cas demission sur leur
marchfe, ils faciliteront remission
du montant qu'ils auront garanti.

Art. 2. — i) Aucune solidarity ne
Hera les gouvernements garants.
L/engagement de chacun d'eux por-
tera exclusivement sur la part i
garantir ou 4 fournir par lui sur le
total de Top6ration. Aucun gou-
vernement garant ne pourra £tre
actionn^ pour le service ou le rem-

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 312

bond of the loan not included in the
portion guaranteed by it.

As regards the public issues, the
Austrian Government will prepare
separate bonds for the portions of
the loan issued in each country,
specifically stating which Govern-
ment is the guarantor.

The various national issues shall,
however, form parts of one single
loan. No discrimination may be
made by the Austrian Government
in carrying out its obligations as re-
gards these different issues of the
loan. The service and the repay-
ment of the whole of the loan shall be
carried out on conditions to be laid
down in the General Bond, under the
control of one or more trustees ap-
pointed by the Council of the League
of Nations, acting jointly.1

(li) The participating Govern-
ments shall, at the moment of sign-
ing, state the amounts which they
undertake to guarantee or to provide,

(m) The expenses of issue, nego-
tiation and delivery of each issue
shall be added to the capital of the
issue,

(iv) The loan shall be for a term
of twenty years. The Austrian Gov*
emment reserves the right to repay
the loan before the expiration of that
period, after ten years, on conditions
which will be fixed by the Commit-
tee of Guarantor States at the time
the operation is concluded. Subject
to the priorities attached to the Loan
of 1923-1943, the Relief Credits and
the 1930 Loan, the system of pledged
assets by which the 1923-1943 Loan
is secured shall be made to apply to
the present loan. The manner in
which this shall be done shall be set-
tled in detail in the General Bond.
The service of the interest and the

boursement d'un titre de 1'emprunt
non cornpris dans la tranche garantie
par lui.

En ce qui concerne les tranches
6mises dans le public, le Gouverne-
ment autrichien sera tenu d'6tablir,
en representation de chaque tranche
nationale, des titres distincts por-
tant nomm^ment la mention du
gouvernement garant.

Toutefois, les diff&rentes tranches
nationales ne constituent que les
parties d'un seul et m6me emprunt,
II ne saurait y avoir aucune dis-
crimination de la part du Gouverne-
ment autrichien dans 1 'execution de
ses obligations au titre des diverses
tranches. Le service et le rembourse-
ment de Fensenible de Femprunt
devront &tre effectu£s dans des condi-
tions & d6terminer par Fobligation
g&n6rale entre les mains dfun ou
plusieurs mandataires d6sign6s par
le Conseil de la Soci6t6 des Nations,
et agissant solidairement.1

n) Les gouvernements partici-
pants ddclareront, au moment de
signer le present protocole, les mon*
tants qu'ils s'engagent & garantir ou
i founiir.

in) Les frais aff£rents & F&nission,
4 la nfigociation et & la remise de
chaque emprunt seront ajout6s au
capital de cet emprunt.

iv) L'emprunt sera conclu pour
vingt annles. Le Gouvernement
autrichien se reserve la facult£ de
rembourser cet emprunt par antici-
pation, apr&s dix ans» aux conditions
qui seront d^termin^es par le Comit6
des Etats garants au moment de la
conclusion de Fop^ration. Abstrac-
tion faite des rangs de priority at-
tribu^s & remprunt de 19^3-1943,
aux credits de rel&vement et & Fem-
prunt de 1930, le syst&me de gages
affect^s & Femprunt de 1923-1943
est 6tendu au present emprunt. Les
rnodalit^s de cette extension seront
r£gl£es dans Fobligation gfe^rale,
Le service des int6r€ts du present

1 The trustees were appointed on July 8r 1933. League of Nations Official Journal, 1933,
p. looo.— ED.

July 15, 1932

AUSTRIAN PROTOCOL

repayment of the present loan shall
be free of all taxes, dues or charges,
present or future, for the benefit of
the Austrian State or of any other
Austrian authority.

(v) The terms of issue (rates of
interest, expenses, issue prices, the
form of guarantee, etc.) shall be
submitted for approval to the Com-
mittee of Guarantor States created
by the Austrian Protocol No. II of
October 4th, 1922, or to persons ap-
pointed by that Committee; and any
reference to the League of Nations
in the prospectus of issue shall simi-
larly be approved by the Chairman
of the Financial Committee. Those
Governments which have signed the
present Protocol without being par-
ties to the Austrian Protocol No. II
of October 4th, 1922, shall be invited
to send representatives to the Com-
mittee of the Guarantor States.

Art. 3. The proceeds of the oper-
ation shall be utilised by the Aus-
trian Government for the objects set
out in Annex I, in agreement, as the
case may be, with the representative
of the League of Nations or the
Adviser to the National Bank re-
ferred to in Article 7.

Art. 4. The Austrian Govern-
ment undertakes to take the neces-
sary steps to restore without delay
and to maintain complete equilibrium
between the revenue and expenditure
of the State ; it similarly undertakes
to take all steps necessary to re-
establish without delay the financial
equilibrium of the Austrian State
Railways and, in particular, to carry
out the programme of budgetary and
financial reforms set out in Annex II.

Art. 5* Austrian monetary policy
will aim at the abolition as soon as
possible, subject to the necessary
safeguards, of the difference between
the internal and external value of
the schilling, and, in consequence,
at the progressive removal of the
existing control over exchange trans-

emprunt et son remboursement en
principal seront exempts de tous
imp6ts, droits ou charges, presents
ou futurs, institu6s au profit de
PEtat autrichien ou de toute autre
autorit6 autrichienne.

v) Les conditions de remission
(taux d'intfirfit, frais, prix d Emission,
la forme que rev^tira la garantie, etc.)
seront soumises, pour approbation,
au Comit6 des Etats garants institu6
par le Protocole autrichien N° II
du 4 octobre 1922 ou aux personnes
d£sign6es par ce Cpmit6; le president
du Comit6 financier approuvera de
m€me les termes de toute r6f£rence
& la Soci6t6 des Nations dans les
prospectus demission. Les gouver-
nements qui ont sign 6 le present
protocole sans 6tre parties au Proto-
cole autrichien N° II du 4 octobre
1922 seront invites & envoyer des
repr<§sentants au Comit6 des Etats
garants.

Art 3. Le produit de Pop6ration
sera utilis6 par le Gouvernement
autrichien aux fins d6finies & Pan-
nexe I, d 'accord, suivant le cas,
avec le repr6sentant de la Soci6t6
des Nations ou le conseiller aupr^s
de la Banque nationale vis^s &
Particle 7.

Art* 4. Le Gouvernement au-
trichien s'engage £ prendre les me-
sures n6cessaires pour r^tablir sans
d<§lai et maintenir un coinplet &qui-
libre entre les recettes et les d6penses
de PEtat; il s'engage de m6me &
prendre toutes les mesures n6ces-
saires pour r<§tablir sans d^lai P6qui-
libre financier des Chemins de fer
de PEtat autrichien et, notamment,
& ex^cuter le programme de reformes
budg^taires et financi&res arr§t6 &
Pannexe II.

Art. 5. La politique mon6taire
de PAutriche se proposera d'abolir,
dans un d61ai aussi bref que possible
et sous les sauvegardes n^cessaires,
P6cart existaxit entre la valeur du
schilling & Pint&ieur et & P6tranger
et sera, par consequent, orient£e vers
la suppression progressive du con-

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 312

actions and the resulting obstruc-
tions to international trade.

Art. 6.— (i) It is agreed that the
settlement of the question of the
Creditanstalt must form part of the
programme of financial reforms which
are the object of the present Protocol.

(n) The Austrian Government
will take all possible steps without
delay to conclude an agreement with
the foreign creditors of the Credit-
anstalt, This agreement will take
account of the necessity for avoiding
excessive pressure on the schilling.

(in) The Austrian Government
undertakes to effect a settlement of
the debt of the Creditanstalt to the
National Bank and to issue as soon
as possible one or more internal loans
of a total amount of not less than 200
million schillings for the partial
reimbursement of the debt due by
the State to the National Bank.

Art. 7. The Austrian Government
will request the Council of the League
of Nations to appoint a representa-
tive of the League of Nations, and to
nominate an Adviser to the National
Bank of Austria,1 with the object of
continuing the collaboration con-
templated in the declarations made
in September 1931 by the Austrian
Federal Chancellor and in the pro-
visions of the present Protocol and
its Annexes.

Art. 8. The Committee of Guar-
antor States shall continue to per-
form its functions until the loan
provided for in the present Protocol
has been entirely repaid.

Art 9.— (i) All decisions to be
taken by the Council of the League
of Nations in virtue of the present
Protocol shall be taken by a majority
vote.

(IT) Any dispute as to the interpre-
tation of the present Protocol shall

trOleactuellement impose aux opera-
tions de change et, partunl, des
entraves aux ^changes internatio-
naux.

Art. 6.— i) II est convenu quo le
r&glement de la question de la Credit-
anstalt doit faire parlie du pro-
gramme de r6formes rinancieres qui
font Tobjet du present protocole.

li) Le Gouvernement autrichien
fera sans dfilai tous ses efforts pour
conclure un accord avec les crean-
ciers etrangers de la Creditanstalt,
accord qui devra tenir compte de la
necessity d'eviter qu'une pression
excessive ne s'exerce sur le schilling.

nr) Le Gouvernement autrichien
s'engage & r6gler la dettc de la Credit-
anstalt envers la Banque nationnle
et & 6mettre dans un d&lai aussi bref
que possible un ou plusicurs em-
prunts int6rieurs dont le procluit
total ne sera pas inf6rieur & 200 mil-
lions de schillings et sera affect6
au remboursement partiel de la dette
de TEtat & la Banque nationale.

Art. 7. Le Gouvernement au-
trichien demandera au Con soil cle la
Socitfte des Nations de nommer un
reprc'vsentant de la Soci6te des Na-
tions et de cosigner un conseiller
auprtis de la Banque nationale d'Au-
triche,1 en vue de continuer la collabo-
ration envisagfie par les declarations
que le chancelier fM6ral d'Autriche
a faites en septernbre 1931, ainsi
que par les dispositions du present
protocole et de ses annexes,

Art 8. Le Comitfi des Etats
garants continuera 4 exercer ses
fonctions jusqu'au remboursement
integral de Pemprunt pr6vu par le
present protocole.

Art. 9.— i) Toutes les decisions
que le Conseil de la Sociotfi des
Nations pourrait avoir & prendre en
vertu du prfisent protocole seront
prises & la majorit6 des voix.

11) Tout diff^rend portant sur 1'in-
terpr^tation du present protocole sera

1 On the* appointment of those officials, sec League of Nations Official Journal, 1932,
p. 1280. On the termination of these posts as from November r, 1936, see idem, 1936,
p. 1171.— Eo.

July 15,

AUSTRIAN PROTOCOL

be settled by the Council by a
majority vote.

Art io.— (i) The present Protocol,
of which the English and French
texts are equally authentic, shall
remain open to signature by all Gov-
ernments which desire to accede
thereto. The Protocol shall be rati-
fied, and the ratifications shall be
deposited with the Secretariat of the
League of Nations.

(n) The present Protocol shall be
approved by the Council of the
League of Nations. It shall enter
into force as regards the Govern-
ments which have ratified it as soon
as the ratifications of Austria, the
United Kingdom, France and Italy
have been deposited. In order to
enable the Protocol to enter into
force, the ratifications of the above-
mentioned States must be deposited
not later than December 3ist, 1932.
The Protocol shall enter into force
as regards each of the other signatory
Governments on the date of deposit
of that Government's ratification.

IN FAITH WHEREOF, the under-
signed, duly authorised, have signed
the present Protocol.

Done at Geneva, the fifteenth day
of July, nineteen hundred and thirty-
two, in a single copy, which shall be
deposited at the Secretariat of the
League of Nations.

r£g!6 par le Conseil statuant & la
majorit6 des voix.

Art. 10. — i) Le pr6sent protocole,
dont le texte frangais et le texte
anglais font figalement foi, restera
ouvert A la signature de tous les
gouvernements qui voudront y ad-
h6rer. Le protocole sera ratifi6,
et les instruments de ratification
seront d6posfis au Secr6tariat de la
Soci6t£ des Nations.

n) Le prisent protocole sera ap-
prouv6 par le Conseil de la Soci6t6
des Nations. II entrera en vigueur
pour les gouvernements qui 1'auront
ratifi6 d£s que les instruments de
ratification de FAutriche, du Roy-
aume-Uni, de la France et de Tltalie
auront 6t6 d£pos£s. Pour que le
pr6sent protocole puisse entrer en
vigueur, les ratifications des Etats
ci-dessus mentionn6s devront ^tre
d6pos6es au plus tard le 31 d<§cembre
1932. II entrera en vigueur pour
chacun des autres gouvernements
signataires & la date du d6p6t de la
ratification,

EN FOI DE QUOI les soussign^s,
dfiment autoris^s & cet effet, ont
sign6 le present protocole.

Fait & Geneve, le quinze juillet mil
neuf cent trente-deux, en un seul
exemplaire, qui sera d6pos6 au
Secretariat de la Soci6t6 des Nations.

[Signed:] Austria (Pour le Gouvernement autridbien:), E. PFLtteL; Belgium
(Pour le Gouvernement beige: Cinq millons de schillings autrichiens,), JULES LE
JEUNE DE M toss ACH; United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern
Ireland (For the Government of Great Britain and Northern Ireland: One hundred
million [100,000,000] schillings), JOHN SlMON; France (Pour le Gouvernement de
la R^publique fran^aise et en me r6f6rant & la declaration faite par moi au Conseil le
15 juillet 1932: Cent millions [100,000.000] de schillings. R. M.)> R* MASSIGLT;
Italy (Pour le Gouvernement d'ltalie: Trente millions [30.000.000] de schillings),
VlTTQWQ SCIALOJA; The Netherlands (Pour le Gouvernement des Pays-Bas:
Trois millions de schillings autrichiens), W. DOUDE VAN TROOSTWIJK. [The pro-
tocol was signed on behalf of Czechoslovakia on January 20, 1934, for four million
Austrian schillings.]

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 312

ANNEX I

UTILISATION OP THE PROCEEDS OF THE

OPERATION PROVIDED FOR BY THE

PROTOCOL

1. The proceeds in foreign exchange
shall be credited to a special account or
accounts as directed by the Austrian
Government in agreement with the repre-
sentative of the League of Nations.

2. The advance of 100 million schillings
made by the Bank of England to the
Austrian Government shall be repaid out
of the proceeds of the loan.

3. The Austrian Government shall sell
the remaining foreign exchange to the
Austrian National Bank on conditions to
be fixed in agreement with the representa-
tive of the League of Nations.

4. The use to be made of the foreign
exchange thus sold by the Austrian Gov-
ernment to the Austrian National Bank
shall be decided in agreement with the
Adviser to the Bank.

5. The amount in schillings resulting
from such sales shall be credited to a
special account of the Austrian Govern-
ment at the National Bank; this amount
in schillings—- with the exception, if neces-
sary, of a sum to be determined in agree-
ment with the representative of the
League of Nations — shall be used to repay
part of the internal floating debt of the
State and of the Railways, on condition
that the creditors who thus obtain repay-
ment shall simultaneously reduce their
indebtedness to the Austrian National
Bank by corresponding amounts. The
Government may only draw on the sums
standing to the credit of this account in
agreement with the representative of the
League of Nations.

ANNEXE I

UTILISATION DU PRODUIT DBS OPERATIONS
PR&VTJBS PAR LE PROTOCOLE

1 . Le produit en devises 6trangeres sera
verse" au credit d'un ou plusieurs comptes
sp6ciaux suivant les^ instructions du
Gouvernement autrichien donnfe? avec
1'accord du repr&sentant de la Social 6
des Nations.

2. L'avance de 100 millions cle schil-
lings, consentie par la Banque d'Angle-
terre au Gouvernement autrichien, sera
remboursee sur le produit de Top6ration,

3. Le Gouvernement autrichien vcndra
& la Banque nationale d'Autriche le re-
liquat des devises e'trangeres dans des
conditions qui seront fix6es d'accord avec
le repre"sentant cle la Soci&te' des Nations.

4. L'utilisation des devises 6trangeres
que le Gouvernement autrichien aura ainsi
vendues a la Banque nationale d'Autriche
sera d£termin6e en accord avec le con-
seiller aupr&s de la Banque.

5. La contre-valeur en schillings sera
port6e au credit d'un compte special ou-
vert par la Banque nationale au Gouverne-
ment autrichien; sauf, dventuellcmcnt, un
montant a determiner d'accord avec le
repr6sentant cle la Soci6t6 des Nations,
ces schillings serviront au rembourcemcnt
d'une partie de la dette flottante inte'rieure
de I'Etat et des Chemins de fer, et ce,
a la condition que les cr6anciers, ainsi
rembourseX r6duisent en m$me temps et
pour un montant Equivalent, leur dettc
envers la Banque nationale d'Autriche.
Le Gouvernement ne pourra disposer des
sommes inscrites a ce compte qu'en accord
avec le reprfeentant de la Soci£t£ des
Nations.

ANNEX II

PROGRAMME OF BUDGETARY AND
FINANCIAL REFORMS

i. In conformity with the declaration
made before the Financial Committee by
the Austrian Chancellor in September
I93i>* the Austrian Government will take
every step necessary to restore without
delay and to maintain equilibrium be-
tween its revenue and expenditure.

In order to ensure the application of Aim d'assurer Implication cle ce prin-
this principle from 1932 onwards, further cipe dfcs 1932, de nou voiles Economies
* See League of Nations Official Journal, 1931, p. 2408.— ED.

ANNEXE II
PROGRAMME BE RJ-CFORMBS BUDGET AIRES

ET FlNANCI&RKS

I. Conformenient a la declaration que
le Chancelier de la Confederation au-
trichienne a faite en septembre 1931 de-
vant le comlte" financier,3- le Gouvernement
autrichien prendra toutes mesures n6ces-
saires pour re"tablir sans d6Iai et pour
niaintenir r6quilibre de ses recettcs et ses

July 15, 1932

AUSTRIAN PROTOCOL

permanent economies sufficient to secure
the balancing of the budget for the current
financial year, estimated on the basis of
present figures at: 45 million schillings,
must be made during the second half of
the current year, in addition to those
provided for in the supplementary budget
which has been submitted to the Council
of Ministers.

In view of the special circumstances
and having regard to the arrangements
contemplated in Annex I for reducing the
short-term debt of the State, the roo-
million-schilling surplus provided in the
present budget for the repayment of short-
term obligations may be applied to cur-
rent needs such as the deficit on the
Railways.

2, The Austrian Government under-
takes to carry out without delay the
general programme of economies and re-
organisation contained in the report of
Dr. Herold, the railway expert who was
entrusted with the enquiry into the ad-
ministration and policy of the Railway
system, in conformity with the declara-
tion made by the Chancellor last Septem-
ber.

An expert appointed by the Council of
the League of Nations shall be invited by
the Austrian Government to decide to
what extent the capital outlays ("Investi-
tionen") of the Railways are really indis-
pensable and to what extent they could , in
view of the present financial difficulties,
be postponed.

3* All borrowing operations of the
Austrian State, whether external or in-
ternal (other than those under the stand-
ing authority to issue Treasury Bills up to
75 million schillings), remain subject to
the approval of the Committee of Guar-
antor States. The Austrian State Rail-
ways shall for this purpose be regarded as
a part of the Austrian State and shall not
be authorised to contract any loan unless
the Minister of Finance certifies that the
approval of the Committee of Guarantor
States has been duly obtained.

As regards contracts on a credit basis
for supplies or works which involve a
substantial charge on future budgets, in-
cluding the budget of the Railways, the
representative of the League of Nations
shall determine whether these operations
present an exceptional character warrant-

durables, suffisantes pour pbtenir l'£qui-
libre du budget de Fexercice courant et
dont le montant sur la base des chiffres
actuels est 6valu6 a. 45 millions de schil-
lings, devront £tre realisees pendant le
second semestre de Fannee cpurante, in-
dependamment des economies preVues
par le budget supplementaire, qui a 6t6
soumis au Conseil des ministres.

Vu les circonstances speaales et compte
tenu des arrangements envisages & 1 'an-
nexe I pour la reduction de la dette 4
court ternie de 1'Etat, la marge de 100
millions de schillings qui avait 6t6
rn6nag6e dans le present budget en vue du
remboursement des obligations 4 court
terme, pourra 8tre aflectee a des besoins
courants tels que la couverture du deficit
des Chemins de fer.

2. Le Gouvernement autrichien s'en-
gage a mettre a execution sans delai le
programme general d 'economies et de
reorganisation contenu dans le rapport du
Dr Herold, Fexpert ferroviaire qui a 6t6
charg6 de proceder a une enqueue sur
1 'administration et la politique des
chemins de fer, conformement a la decla-
ration faite par le chancelier en septembre
dernier.

tin expert design^ par le Conseil de la
Societ6 des Nations sera invit& par le
Gouvernement autrichien a d6terminer
dans quelle mesure les d6penses d'eta-
blissement ("Investitionen") des chemins
de fer sont reellement indispensables et
dans quelle mesure elles pourraient @tre
ajournees, 6tant donn6 les difficult6s
fmancieres du moment.

3. Toutes les operations d'emprunt de
1'Etat autrichien, tant exterieures qu'in-
teiieures (a 1'exception des op6rations
visees par 1'autorisation permanente
d'emettre des bons du Tresor jusqu'& con-
currence de 75 millions de schillings)
demeurent subordonnees a Fapprobation
du Comit6 des Etats garants, Les chemins
de fer de 1'Etat autrichien seront & cet
eflfet consid&res comme faisant partie de
1'Etat autrichien et ne devront tee
autorises a contracter aucun emprunt que
si le ministre des Finances certifie que
I'op^ration a 6t^ dument approuvee par
le Comit6 des Etats garants.

En ce qui concerne les marches & credit
de fournitures ou de travaux comportant
une charge importante pour les budgets
futurs, y compris les budgets des chemins
de fer, le repr6sentant de la Societ6 des
Nations jugera si ces operations pr6sen-
tent un caractere exceptionnel justifiant

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 312

ing recourse to the procedure provided for
in the preceding paragraph.

Having regard to the provisions of
Annex I, no issue of Treasury Bills or
other similar short-term operation shall be
carried out by the Austrian Government
on the home market unless the prior con-
sent of the representative of the League
has been given,

4. In conformity with the declaration
of the Chancellor made last September,
the Austrian Government will use its ex-
isting powers in order to secure that the
budgets of the "Lander" and of the Com-
munes are balanced. It will come to an
agreement with these local authorities
with a view to obtaining such extension of
its powers of control as may be necessary,
particularly as regards borrowing; all such
borrowing operations must in future be
approved by the Austrian Government,
which will give its consent on the motion
of the Minister of Finance after previous
consultation with the National Bank and
the representative of the League of
Nations.

5. Every proposed credit operation,
either by a private individual or by a
public or private corporation, which in-
volves foreign indebtedness of more than
one million schillings, must be brought to
the knowledge of the Austrian National
Bank before being carried out.

6. The Austrian Government will revise
the general legislation on banks in con-
formity with the September declaration,

7. In conformity with the declaration
made in September, and in view of the
responsibility assumed by the Austrian
Government in regard to the Creditan-
stalt, the Government will take the neces-
sary steps to secure a reduction in the
administrative expenses of that bank and
of the other banks operating in Austria.

le recours a la procedure prevue <\
1'alinea pr6c6dent.

Vu les dispositions cle {'annexe I» Io
Gouvernement autrichien ne procederu <\
aucune emission de bons du Trcsor ni ;\
d'autres operations analogues a court
terme sur le marche mterieur sans s'etro
assurd au prealable Fassentiment du repre-
sentant de la Societ6 des Nations.

4. Conforniement a la declaration faite
en septembre dernier par le chancelier, le
Gouvernement autrichien fera usage des
pouvoirs qu'il possede pour assurer
requilibre ties budgets des "Lander" et
des communes. II conclura avec cos
autorites locales un arrangement en vue
de toute extension de ses pouvoirs de
contrCle qui pourra 8tre nccessaire, not am-
ment en ce qui concerne les emprunts;
toutes ces operations d'emprunt devront
& 1'avenir toe approuvees par le Gouverne-
ment autrichien, qui donnera son assenli-
nient sur la proposition du ministre des
Finances, qui aura consult^ au prealable
la Banque nationale et le reprfeentant de
la Society des Nations.

5. Toute opdration de credit projetee,
soit par un particulier, soit par une per-
sonne morale de droit public ou de droit
prive, devra, avant d'etre rcalisee, etre
portee a la connaissance de la Banque
nationale d'Autriche, si elle comport e
vis-tVvis de If6tranger un endettement
sup6rieur a un million de schillings.

6. Le Gouvernement revisera la legisla-
tion generale sur les banquesconform6ment
a la declaration faite en septembre dernier.

7. Conform6ment & la declaration faite
en septembre dernier, le gouvernement ,
6tant donn6 la responsabilit6 <iu*il a
assumee pour la Creditanstalt, prendra les
mesures necessaires pour obtenir une
reduction des frais g£n6raux de cette
banque et des autres banquos travaillant
en Autriche.

ANNEX III

LEAGUE OF NATIONS REPRESENTATIVE
AND BANK ADVISER

i. The representative of the League of
Nations and the Adviser to the Austrian
National Bank appointed under Article 7
of the Protocol shall carry out the func-
tions assigned to them in the present
Protocol and its Annexes, They shall be
responsible to the Council and removable
by it

ANNEXE III

REPRllSBNTANT DE LA SocrtT§ DES NA-
TIONS ET CONSEILLE& AUPR&S DE LA
BANQUE

i. Le repr€sentant de la Soci6t6 des
Nations et le conseiller aupres de la
Banque nationale d'Autriche, nommes
aux termes de 1 'article 7 du ptotocole,
s'acquitteront des fonctions qui leur sont
attributes par le present protocole et ses
annexes. Ils seront responsables vis-a-
vis du Conseil et revocables par lui»

July 15, 1932

AUSTRIAN PROTOCOL

2. The Austrian Government under-
takes to collaborate with the representa-
tive of the League of Nations with regard
to the execution of the programme of
reforms contained in the declaration of
September 1931 and in the present Proto-
col, and further to furnish him with all
the information which he may require for
the execution of his mission,

3. The representative of the League of
Nations will report to the League of
Nations every three months on the execu-
tion of the programme of reforms* He
will further address supplementary reports
to the League of Nations whenever he
thinks it desirable to bring any fact as a
matter of urgency to the knowledge of the
League.

4. The provisions concerning the func-
tions of the Adviser, which formerly con-
stituted Articles 124 to 129 of the Statutes
of the Austrian National Bank as enacted
by the Federal Law of November I4th,
1922 ("Bundesgcsetzblatt" No. 823),
shall be re-incorporated in the Statutes,
except that the words "Commissioner-
General of the League of Nations*' shall
be replaced by the words ** Council of the
League of Nations",

5. The representative of the League of
Nations shall provide himself with the
necessary staff. His expenses and those
of his office shall be approved by the
Council and defrayed by Austria. The
representative of the League of Nations
shall enjoy diplomatic privileges; he and
his staff shall enjoy fiscal immunities.

6. The Adviser to the Austrian Na-
tional Bank shall enjoy fiscal immunities.

7. If the Austrian Government consid-
ers that the representative of the League
of Nations, or the Adviser to the National
Bank, has abused his authority, it may
appeal to the Council of the League of
Nations.

8. The Council shall terminate the
appointment of the representative of the
League of Nations and of the Adviser to
the Bank when it decides that their
services are no longer required.1

9. The Council shall have the right, if it
considers it necessary having regard to the
financial situation, to reappoint the repre-
sentative of the League of Nations or the
Bank Adviser, or both; but such a measure

2. Le Gouvernement autrichien s'en-
gage a collaborer avec le repr6sentant de
la Societ6 des Nations en ce qui concerne
Pexecution du programme de reformes
contenu dans la declaration faite en
septembre 1931 et dans le present proto-
cole; il s'engage, en outre, a fournir & ce
repr6sentant toutes les informations dont il
pourra avoir besom pour remplir sa mission.

3. Le representant de la Soclet£ des
Nations adressera tous les trois mois un
rapport £ la Societ6 des Nations sur Tap-
plication du programme de reformes, II
adressera, en outre, & la Societe, des
Nations des rapports supplementaires
chaque fois qu'il jugera utile de porter
d'urgence un fait a la connaissance de
cette derniere.

4. Les dispositions concernant les fonc-
tions du conseiller qui constituaient au-
trefois les articles 124 jusqu'a 129 des
Statuts de la Banque nationale autri-
chienne tels qu'ils etaient arr&tes par la loi
fed6rale du 14 novembre 1922 ("Bundes-
gesetzblatt" n° 823), seront reincorporees
a ces Statuts, sauf toutefois qu'aux mots
"Commissaire general de la Society des
Nations" il faudra substituer les mots
"Conseil de la Societ6 des Nations".

5% Le representant de la Societ& des
Nations s'adjoindra le personnel neces-
saire. Ces depenses, ainsi que celles de
son service, seront approuvees par le
Conseil et seront & la charge de FAutriche.
Le representant de la Societ6 des Nations
jouira des privileges diplomatiques ; il
jouira en outre de rimmunit6 fiscale,
ainsi que son personnel.

6. Le conseiller auprds de la Banque
nationale d'Autriche jouira de I'immunit6
fiscale.

7. Si le Gouvernement autrichien es-
time que le repr6sentant de la Societ6 des
Nations ou le conseiller aupres de la
Banque nationale ont abuse, de leur
autorit^, il pourra adresser un recours au
Conseil de la Spciet6 des Nations.

8. Le Conseil mettra fin aux fonctions
du representant de la Societe. des Nations et
du conseiller aupres de la Banque lorsqu'il
jugera qu'il n'est plus necessaire de con-
server les services de ces fonctionnaires, *

9. Le Conseil aura le droit, s'il le juge
n6cessaire, en egard a la situation finan-
ciere, de retablir les fonctions, soit du
repr6sentant de la Societe. des Nations,
soit du conseiller aupres de la Banque, soit
de ces deux fonctionnaires; toutefois, une

may only be taken if the funds borrowed

i By a resolution of the Council of September 25, 1936, these posts were terminated as from
November i, 1936. League of Nations Official Journal, 1936, p. 1171. — ED.

94 INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 313

either in virtue of the present Protocol or telle mesure ne pourra £tre prise que si les

through the Guaranteed Loan of 1923- fonds emprunte's, soit en vertu du present

1943 have not been entirely repaid. protocole, soit au moyen de 1'emprunt

garanti 1923-1943, n'ont pas et6 int£grale-

ment rembourses.

10. After the termination of the ap- 10. Apres la cessation des fonctions du

pointment of the representative of the repr£sentant de la Societe des Nations, un

League of Nations, contact shall be main- contact sera maintenu entre le Gouverne-

tained between the Austrian Government mentautrichienetrOrgamsationfinanci&re

and the Financial Organisation of the de la Societe" des Nations, en ce sens que

League of Nations by the preparation and 1'Organisation financi&re de la Soci6t6 des

publication of periodical statements on Nations preparera p£riodiquement et

Austrian public finances by the Financial publiera des releves de la situation des

Organisation of the League of Nations, finances publiques autrichiennes. Le

The Austrian Government agrees to send Gouvernement autrichien convient d'en-

a Treasury representative to discuss the voyer un repre*sentant du Ministere des

statements so prepared with the Financial Finances pour discuter les relev6s ainsi

Organisation. pr6par6s avec 1'Organisation financi£re.

No. 313

CONVENTION for the Lowering of Economic Barriers. Signed at

Geneva, July 18, 1932.

CONVENTION pour Fabaissement des barrieres economiques.
Signee a Geneve, 18 juillet 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. This convention, commonly known as the "Ouchy Convention," was
opened for the accession of all states. It is in line with recommendations made by the World
Economic Conference of 1927. League of Nations Document, C.356.M. 129.1927. II, pp.
39-43. See also the commercial convention of March 24, 1930 (No. 248, ante), and the con-
vention of economic rapprochement of December 22, 1930 (No. 279, ante).

RATIFICATIONS. On January I, 1937, no ratification of this convention had been de-
posited at The Hague.

BIBLIOGRAPHY. H. Bech, "Ouchy-konventionen," 3 Nor disk Tidsskrift for international
Ret (1932), pp. 212-15; H. V. Hodson, "The Belgo-Dutch Convention," Survey of Inter-
national Affairs, 1932, pp. 34-40; J. Hostie, "Du libre echange & la rationalisation des
echanges," 25 Revue iconomigue inter nationale (1933), II, pp. 219-58; S. de Meeus, "La clause
de la nation la plus favoris6e et la crise economique," 25 idem (1933), IV, pp. 61-80; J. A.
Nederbragt, " Autour de la Convention d'Ouchy," Grotius Annuaire ipjj, pp. 55-92; Anon.,
"La convention belgo-hollandaise d'Ouchy et la clause de la nation la plus favorisee," 3
Affaires etrangeres (1933), pp. 490-5.

Not entered into force (January i, 1937).

Text supplied by the Netherlands Ministry for Foreign Affairs; translation from U. S.
Treaty Information Bulletin, No. 37.

[Translation]

His Majesty the King of the Bel- Sa Majest6 le Roi des Beiges, Son
gians, Her Royal Highness the Altesse Royale la Grande-Duchesse

July 1 8, 1932 OUCHY CONVENTION ON ECONOMIC BARRIERS

Grand Duchess of Luxembourg and
Her Majesty the Queen of the
Netherlands,

Taking their inspiration from the
resolutions of the Assembly of the
League of Nations and the concor-
dant recommendations of the best
qualified economic experts as to the
necessity for ameliorating the re-
gime of production and exchanges
and expanding markets ;

Convinced that economic activity
is seriously endangered by the more
and more numerous obstacles en-
countered by international com-
merce;

Considering that it is urgent that
the states renounce a policy which
is injurious both to their private in-
terest and the general interest;

Persuaded that the progressive
realization of a greater liberty of ex-
changes is one of the essential con-
ditions for the restoration of world
prosperity;

Desirous of undertaking in this
sense a concerted action, in which all
states will have the privilege of par-
ticipating, and of contributing, by
this means, to the correction of the
general economic situation ;

Have resolved to conclude a con-
vention for the lowering of economic
barriers and to this end have desig-
nated as their Plenipotentiaries the
following, namely:1

His Majesty the King of the Bel-
gians, Paul Hymans ;

Her Royal Highness the Grand
Duchess of Luxembourg, Joseph
Bech;

Her Majesty the Queen of the
Netherlands, Frans Beelaerts van
Blokland;

Who, after having communicated
to each other their full powers, found
in good and due form, have agreed
upon the following articles:

Article I. The High Contracting
Parties undertake, in their reciprocal
relations, not to make any increases

de Luxembourg et Sa Majest6 la
Reine des Pays-Bas,

S'inspirant des resolutions de TAs-
semblee de la Societ<§ des Nations et
des recommandations concordantes
des experts 6conomiques les plus
qualifies sur la n6cessit6 d'am£liorer
le regime de la production et des
^changes et d'elargir les marches;

Convaincus que Tactivit6 6co-
nomique est gravement mise en peril
par les obstacles de plus en plus
nombreux que rencontre le com-
merce international ;

Consid6rant qu'il est urgent que
les Etats renoncent a une politique
nuisible aussi bien a leur int6rgt
particulier qu'a rint<§r§t g6n6ral;

Persuades que la realisation pro-
gressive d'une plus grande Hbert6 des
echanges est Tune des conditions es-
sentielles du r6tablissement de la
prosp6rit6 mondiale;

D6sireux d'entreprendre dans ce
sens une action concertee, a laquelle
tous les Etats auront la facult£ de
participer, et de contribuer, par ce
moyen, au redressement de la situa-
tion 6conomique g£n6rale;

Ont r6solu de conclure une conven-
tion pour 1'abaissement des barrieres
6conomiques et ont d6sign6 a cette
fin pour Leurs P16nipotentiaires,
savoir : l

Sa Majest6 le Roi des Beiges,
Paul Hymans;

Son Altesse Royale la Grande-
Duchesse de Luxembourg, Joseph
Bech;

Sa Majest6 la Reine des Pays-Bas,
Frans Beelaerts van Blokland ;

lesquels, apres s'gtre communiqu6
leurs pleins pouvoirs, trouv6s en
bonne et due forme, sont convenus
des articles suivants:

Article i. Les Hautes Parties
Contractantes s'engagent a ne pro-
c6der, dans leurs relations r6ci-

1 The titles of plenipotentiaries are omitted. — ED.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 313

in customs duties above the level of
the duties existing at the date of the
signature of the present convention,
nor establish any duties not existing
on that date.

The High Contracting Parties
agree not to make any increase of a
protective character in their customs
duties nor establish any new pro-
tective duties with respect to the
merchandise of third states to which
they are bound by commercial con-
ventions, unless in the case that the
said states, by a new increase of the
customs barriers or of obstacles to
commerce, should cause grave prej-
udice to the High Contracting
Parties.

Art. 2. The High Contracting
Parties undertake to reduce pro-
gressively, in their reciprocal rela-
tions, their customs duties in accord-
ance with the following provisions.

The customs duties shall be re-
duced at the moment of the putting
into effect of the present convention
by 10 per cent of the rate existing on
the date of the signature of the pres-
ent convention; the reduction shall
be carried one year afterward to 20
per cent of such rate, two years after-
ward to 30 per cent, three years after-
ward to 40 per cent, and four years
afterward to 50 per cent of such rate.

The customs duties shall not be
reduced below 50 per cent of the rate
existing on the date of the signature
of the present convention, nor below
a level corresponding to 4 per cent
ad valorem for semimanufactures
and 8 per cent ad valorem for fin-
ished manufactures.

Art. 3. The High Contracting
Parties undertake not to apply
among themselves any new prohi-
bition or restriction on importation
or exportation or any new regulatory
measure which would have the effect
of hindering their reciprocal ex-
changes.

proques, & des augmentations des
droits de douane au-dessus du niveau
des droits existants £ la date de la
signature de la pr£sente Convention,
ou £ I'^tablissement de droits non
existants & la date de ce jour.

Les Hautes Parties Contractantes
conviennent de ne proc<§der £ aucune
augmentation de caract&re protec-
teur de leurs droits de douane ni £
aucun 6tablissement de droits pro-
tecteurs nouveaux i l'6gard des
marchandises d'Etats tiers auxquels
elles sont li£es par des conventions
commerciales, si ce n'est dans le cas
ou ces Etats, par un nouvel accroisse-
ment des barri^res douani£res ou
d'entraves au commerce, causeraient
un grave prejudice aux Hautes Par-
ties Contractantes.

Art. 2. Les Hautes Parties Con-
tractantes s'engagent £ r6duire pro-
gressivement, dans leurs relations
r6ciproques, leurs droits de douane
conform^ment aux dispositions sui-
vantes.

Les droits de douane seront r£duits
au moment de la mise en vigueur de
la presente Convention de 10% du
taux existant 4 la date de la signature
de la pr6sente Convention ; la r£duc-
tion sera port£e un an aprds & 20%
de ce taux, deux ans apr^s & 30%,
trois ans apr£s & 40%, et quatre ans
apr&s £ 50% de ce taux.

Les droits de douane ne devront
pas £tre r<§duits au-dessous de 50%
du taux existant & la date de la signa-
ture de la pr<§sente Convention, ni au-
dessous d'un niveau correspondant
£ 4% ad valorem pour les produits
demi~ouvr<§s et 8% ad valorem pour
les produits enti&rement ouvr6s.

Art. 3. Les Hautes Parties Con-
tractantes s'engagent £ n'appliquer
entre elles aucune nouvelle prohibi-
tion ou restriction & Timportation ou
& Texportation ou aucune nouvelle
mesure de r£glementation qui aurait
pour effet d'entraver leurs ^changes
r6ciproques.

July 1 8, 1932 OUCHY CONVENTION ON ECONOMIC BARRIERS

They reserve the right, however,
to note exceptions to this principle,
for the reasons enumerated below
and in so far as the said prohibitions
or restrictions are applicable at the
same time to all other countries
which are in the same conditions:

1. Prohibitions or restrictions
relating to public safety;

2. Prohibitions or restrictions
enacted for moral or humanitarian
reasons ;

3. Prohibitions or restrictions
concerning traffic in arms, am-
munition and war material, or un-
der exceptional circumstances, in
other war supplies;

4. Prohibitions or restrictions
enacted with a view to protecting
the public health or providing for
the food supply of the people, as
well as the protection of animals or
plants against the danger of com-
plete destruction, diseases, injuri-
ous insects and injurious parasites;

5. Prohibitions or restrictions
on exportation having as their ob-
ject the protection of the national
artistic, historical or archeological
patrimony;

6. Prohibitions or restrictions
applicable to gold, silver, specie,
paper money and securities, with
the exception of measures of con-
trol of exchange;

7. Prohibitions or restrictions
the object of which is the extension
to foreign products of the r6gime
established for similar national
products, with reference to produc-
tion, commerce, transportation
and commerce;

8. Prohibitions or restrictions
applied to products which consti-
tute or shall constitute, as far as
production or commerce is con-
cerned, the subject of state monop-
olies or monopolies exercised under
the control of the state;

9. Prohibitions or restrictions
the object of which is to protect

Elles se reservent toutefois le
droit d'apporter des exceptions & ce
principe, pour les raisons ci-apres
enumerees et pour autant que ces
prohibitions ou restrictions soient
en m^me temps applicables £ tous les
autres pays se trouvant dans les
m£mes conditions :

1. prohibitions pu restrictions
relatives & la securit6 publique;

2. prohibitions ou restrictions
6dict6es pour des raisons morales
ou humanitaires ;

3. prohibitions ou restrictions
concernant le trafic des armes, des
munitions et du materiel de guerre,
ou, dans des circonstances excep-
tionnelles, de tous autres appro vi-
sionnernents de guerre;

4. prohibitions ou restrictions
edictles en vue de proteger la
sant£ publique ou d 'assurer Tali-
mentation populaire, ainsi que la
protection des animaux ou des
plantes contre le danger d'une de-
struction complete, les maladies, les
insectes et les parasites nuisibles;

5. prohibitions ou restrictions
& Fexportation ayant pour but la
protection du patrimoine national
artistique, historique ou archeo-
logique;

6. prohibitions ou restrictions
applicables £ 1'or, £ Targent, aux
especes, au papier-monnaie et aux
titres, & Texception des mesures
de contrdle des devises;

7. prohibitions ou restrictions
ayant pour but d'6tendre aux
produits 6trangers le regime 6tabli
pour les produits nationaux simi-
laires, en ce qui concerae la pro-
duction, le commerce, le transport
et la consommation ;

8. prohibitions ou restrictions
appliqu6es & des produits qui font
ou feront, en ce qui concerne la
production ou le commerce, Tobjet
de monopoles d'Etat ou de mono-
poles exerces sous le contrdle de
1'Etat;

9. prohibitions ou restrictions
ayant pour but de proteger le droit

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 313

the property right on the results of
scientific works.

On the other hand, in case the ex-
changes between the High Contract-
ing Parties should be gravely dis-
turbed by abnormal circumstances,
each of the parties shall have the
privilege of limiting its importations
or its exportations, on the condition,
however, of determining a contin-
gent which, in principle, and except
in exceptional cases, can not be less
than 100 per cent of the average of
the quantities imported or exported
during normal years.

The High Contracting Parties un-
dertake to eliminate as soon as cir-
cumstances shall permit, in their
reciprocal relations, prohibitive, re-
strictive, or regulatory measures
existing at the date of the signature
of the present convention, with reser-
vation of the exceptions indicated
above.

Art. 4. In order to facilitate as
much as possible the application of
the present convention, the High
Contracting Parties reserve the right
to require certificates of origin or of
destination upon importation or ex-
portation. They will come to an
understanding beforehand on the
modalities of the regime which they
shall institute in this respect.

With the same object, they shall
reach an agreement with a view to
the adoption of a common customs
nomenclature.

Art. 5. The High Contracting
Parties undertake to apply to their
reciprocal exchanges the uncondi-
tional and unlimited regime of the
most favored nation.

Art. 6. If a difference should arise
between two or more of the High
Contracting Parties on the subject
of the interpretation or application
of the present convention and if the
parties involved should not succeed
in settling it among themselves by
diplomatic means, the question shall

de propri6t6 sur les resultats de
travaux scientifiques.

D'autre part, au cas oil les
^changes entre les Hautes Parties
Contractantes seraient gravement
troubles par des circonstances anor-
males, chacune des Parties aura la
facult6 de limiter ses importations
ou ses exportations, £ la condition
toutefois de fixer un contingent qui,
en principe, et sauf dans des cas
exceptionnels, ne pourra £tre inf<§-
rieur £ 100% de la moyenne des
quantit^s import£es ou export6es
pendant les ann£es nor males.

Les Hautes Parties Contractantes
s'engagent & faire disparaitre, aussi-
t6t que les circonstances le per-
mettront, dans leurs relations r6~
ciproques, les mesures de prohibition,
de restriction ou de r6glementation
existant £ la date de la signature
de la pr6sente Convention, sous r<§-
serve des exceptions indiqu<§es ci-
dessus.

Art 4. Pour faciliter autant que
possible Tapplication de la pr£sente
Convention les Hautes Parties Con-
tractantes se r6servent d'exiger &
Timportation ou £ Texportation des
certificats d'origine ou de destination.
Elles s'entendront au pr^alable sur
les modalit6s du regime quf elles
institueront & cet 6gard.

Dans le m£me but, elles se mettront
d 'accord en vue de Tadoption d'une
nomenclature douani£re commune.

Art 5. Les Hautes Parties Con-
tractantes s'engagent £ appliquer £
leurs ^changes r6ciproques le regime
inconditionnel et illimit6 de la nation
la plus favoris6e.

Art 6. Si un diff&rend surgissait
entre deux ou plusieurs des Hautes
Parties Contractantes au sujet de
Interpretation ou de Tapplication de
la pr6sente Convention et si les
Parties en cause ne r6ussissaient pas
4 le r6gler entre elles par la voie
diplomatique, la question sera sou-

July 18, 1932 OUCHY CONVENTION ON ECONOMIC BARRIERS

be submitted at the instance of one
of the interested parties for an opin-
ion by a permanent committee of
experts to be established by the
High Contracting Parties.

If the party concerned should be
unable to agree to this opinion or if
the committee should be unable to
render a unanimous opinion, the
difference shall be submitted to the
Permanent Court of International
Justice.

Art. 7. The present convention is
concluded for a period of five years.

Six months before the expiration
of the said period, each of the High
Contracting Parties will have the
right to notify the Government of
the Netherlands of its intention
to denounce the convention. The
Government of the Netherlands shall
give notice thereof to the other High
Contracting Parties, who may not
have denounced it.

For the High Contracting Parties
who have not denounced the con-
vention, the latter shall remain in
force on the same conditions for an-
other period of one year, and so on
from year to year.

In case of denunciation after the
first period of five years, the proce-
dure contemplated in the second
paragraph shall likewise be followed.

Art. 8. Any other state shall have
the privilege of adhering to the pres-
ent convention on an equal footing
with the signatory states.

The state which desires to adhere
thereto shall give notice of its inten-
tion by an act which shall be depos-
ited in the archives of the Govern-
ment of the Netherlands. The latter
shall send a certified true copy
thereof by diplomatic channels to
each of the High Contracting Parties.

As long as the other states, with-
out adhering to the convention, shall
nevertheless observe, in fact, the pro-
visions, they shall be admitted to the
benefit of the conventional regime.

Art. 9. The present convention

mise pour avis a la diligence d'une
des Parties int6ress6es a un Comit6
permanent d 'experts a cr6er par les
Hautes Parties Contractantes.

Si la Partie interess6e ne pouvait se
conformer a cet avis ou si le Comit6
ne pouvait rendre un avis unanime,
le diff6rend sera soumis a la Cour
permanente de Justice Internationale.

Art. 7. La presente Convention
est conclue pour une dur£e de cinq
ann£es.

Six mois avant Pexpiration de
cette p^riode, chacune des Hautes
Parties Contractantes aura le droit
de notifier au Gouvernement des
Pays-Bas son intention de d6noncer
la Convention. Le Gouvernement
des Pays-Bas en informera les autres
Hautes Parties Contractantes, qui
n'auraient pas d6nonc£.

Pour les Hautes Parties Contrac-
tantes, qui n'ont pas d6nonce la Con-
vention, celle-ci restera en vigueur,
aux mSmes conditions, pour une
nouvelle periode d'une ann£e, et
ainsi de suite d'ann6e en ann£e.

Dans le cas de d6nonciation apr£s
la fin de la premiere periode de cinq
ann6es, la procedure pr6vue au se-
cond alin£a sera 6galement suivie.

Art. 8. Tout Etat tiers aura la
facult^ d 'adherer a la presente Con-
vention, sur un pied d'<§galit£ avec
les Etats signataires.

L'Etat qui desire y adherer noti-
fiera son intention par un acte
qui sera d£pos6 dans les archives
du Gouvernement des Pays-Bas.
Celui-ci en enverra une copie, certi-
fi£e conforme, par la voie diplo-
matique a chacune des Hautes Par-
ties Contractantes.

Aussi longtemps que les Etats
tiers, sans adherer a la Convention,
en observeraient cependant, en fait,
les dispositions, ils seront admis au
b6n6fice du regime conventionnel.

Art. g. La presente Convention

IOO

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 313

shall be ratified. The instruments
of ratification shall be deposited with
the Government of the Netherlands.
It will become effective 15 days after
two of the High Contracting Parties
shall have deposited their instru-
ments of ratification.

Art. 10. At the time of the signa-
ture of the present convention or of
the deposit of the instruments of
ratification, each High Contracting
Party may declare that it does not
bind itself except for its territories in
Europe.

The High Contracting Party which
avails itself of this privilege, has the
right to declare subsequently to the
Government of the Netherlands that
it desires to have the convention
extended to its overseas territories,
colonies or mandated territories.
The latter Government shall trans-
mit such declaration immediately to
the other High Contracting Parties.
The convention shall become effec-
tive with reference to the overseas
territories, colonies or mandated ter-
ritories, 15 days after the transmis-
sion of the above declaration by the
Government of the Netherlands.

The High Contracting Party
which has made this declaration has
likewise the right to declare subse-
quently that it desires to have the
effects of the convention cease for
the territories in question. In this
case, such denunciation shall be made
six months before the expiration of
the current annual period.

IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the

above-named plenipotentiaries have
signed the present convention and
have thereunto affixed their seals.

Done at Geneva, July 18, 1932, in
a single copy, which shall be de-
posited in the archives of the Gov-
ernment of the Netherlands and of
which a certified true copy shall be
sent by diplomatic channels to each
of the High Contracting Parties.

sera ratifi£e. Les instruments de
ratification seront d£pos6s aupr&s du
Gouvernement des Pays-Bas. Elle
entrera en vigueur quinze jours apr£s
que deux des Hautes Parties Con-
tractantes auront d6pos<§ leurs in-
struments de ratification.

Art. 10. Lors de la signature de
la pr6sente Convention ou du d6p6t
des instruments de ratification,
chaque Haute Partie Contractante
peut d6clarer qu'elle ne se lie que
pour ses territoires en Europe.

La Haute Partie Contractante qui
fait usage de cette facult<§, a le droit
de declarer ult6rieurement au Gou-
vernement des Pays-Bas qu'elle d£-
sire voir £tendre la Convention & ses
territoires d'outre-mer, colonies ou
territoires sous mandat. Ce Gou-
vernement transmettra cette d6cla-
ration imm^diatement aux autres
Hautes Parties Contractantes. La
Convention entrera en vigueur pour
ce qui concerne les territoires d'outre-
mer, colonies ou territoires sous
mandat, quinze jours aprds la trans-
mission de la declaration susvis£e par
le Gouvernement des Pays-Bas.

La Haute Partie Contractante qui
a fait cette declaration, a 6galement
le droit de declarer ult6rieurement
qu'elle desire voir cesser les effets de
la Convention pour les territoires en
cause. Dans ce cas, cette d<§noncia-
tion devra §tre faite six mois avant
1'expiration de la p£riode annuelle en
cours.

EN FOI DE QUOI, les Pl£nipoten-
tiaires susnomm6s ont sign6 la pr£-
sente Convention et y ont appos6
leurs cachets.

Fait & Gen&ve, le 18 juillet 1932,
en un seul exemplaire, qui sera
d£pos6 dans les archives du Gou-
vernement des Pays-Bas et dont une
copie, certifie'e conforme, sera remise
par la voie diplomatique & chacune
des Hautes Parties Contractantes.

[Signed :] For Belgium : (In signing the present convention I declare that the
Belgian Government binds itself only for the Belgian territory in Europe.), PAUL

July 1 8, 1932 OUCHY CONVENTION ON ECONOMIC BARRIERS

101

H YMANS ; for Luxembourg : BECH ; for the Netherlands : (In signing the pres-
ent convention I declare that the Government of the Netherlands binds itself only for
the Kingdom in Europe.), BEELAERTS VAN BLOKLAND.

No. 313a

Protocol to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers.
Signed at Geneva, July 18, 1932.

Protocole de la Convention pour Pabaissement des barrieres econo-
rniques. Signe a Geneve, 18 juillet 1932.

[Translation]

Ad Articles i and 2. — i. Notwith-
standing the provisions of articles I
and 2, each High Contracting Party
retains the right to increase, for fiscal
reasons, its tariff duties applicable to
goods not produced on its territory.
Subject to the favorable opinion of
the committee of experts contem-
plated in article 6, it has, moreover,
the option, in exceptional circum-
stances, of taking any other customs
measure of a fiscal character which
may appear necessary to it. In case
the committee should not render a
favorable opinion on this subject, the
party in question could denounce the
present convention upon giving pre-
vious notice of three months.

2. The High Contracting Parties
retain the option of adapting their
customs tariff to any changes which
may take place in industrial tech-
nique, it being understood that the
new duties which would thus be
established shall follow the general
regime of the present convention.

3. In case one of the High Con-
tracting Parties should denounce one
of its commercial treaties, it has the
option, if need be, of restoring the
duty to the rate provided in the
autonomous tariff, with respect to
the titles of its customs tariff on
which it has agreed to reductions.
However, if it avails itself of this
option, it must apply to this rate the
reductions which should have been

Ad articles i et 2. — i. Nonobstant
les dispositions des articles i et 2,
chaque Haute Partie Contractante
garde le droit de majorer, pour des
raisons fiscales, les droits de son tarif
aff£rents a des marchandises non
produites sur son territoire. Sous
reserve de 1'avis favorable du Comit£
d 'experts prevu a 1'article 6, elle a, en
outre, la faculty, dans des circon-
stances exceptionnelles, de prendre
toute autre mesure douaniere de
caractere fiscal qui lui paraitrait
n£cessaire. Au cas ou le Comit6 ne
rendrait pas a ce sujet un avis favo-
rable, la Partie en cause pourrait
d^noncer la pr<§sente Convention,
moyennant un preavis de trois mois.

2. Les Hautes Parties Contrac-
tantes garden t la facult6 d 'adapter
leur tarif douanier aux modifications
qui pourraient intervenir dans la
technique industrielle, 6tant entendu
que les nouveaux droits qui seraient
ainsi institu<§s suivront le regime
g6n6ral de la pr6sente Convention.

3. Au cas ou une des Hautes
Parties Contractantes viendrait a
d6noncer un de ses trait6s de com-
merce, elle a la facult6, le cas £che-
ant, de ramener, pour les rubriques
de son tarif douanier sur lesquelles
elle a consent! des reductions, le
droit au taux prevu dans le tarif
autonome. Toutefois si elle fait
usage de cette facult<§, elle devra
apporter a ce taux les reductions qui

IO2

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No.

made in accordance with the present
convention if, at the moment of the
signature of this act, the duty in
force had been that of the autono-
mous tariff.

Ad Art. 2. — i. It is to be under-
stood that whenever there is an
internal duty in force, the rates of
reduction of the duty shall be calcu-
lated, as a rule, on the difference
existing between the entry duty and
the internal duty.

2. The High Contracting Parties
shall determine, as rapidly as possible
and before the putting into effect of
the present convention, the products
which, in the meaning of the said
convention, must be considered as
raw materials, semimanufactures or
manufactures.

3. When the tariff listing is spe-
cific, the ad valorem percentages
treated of in paragraph 3 of article 2
must be understood as of the inci-
dence of the duties applicable to the
titles such as they exist in the cus-
toms tariff of the party concerned at
the date of the signature of the pres-
ent convention. As soon as the
High Contracting Parties shall have
adopted the common customs no-
menclature treated of in article 4 the
ad valorem percentages just spoken
of must be understood as of the inci-
dence of the duties applicable to the
titles such as they shall be estab-
lished in this common nomenclature.

4. In each country and in so far as
specific duties are involved, the an-
nual rate of reduction of 10 per cent
of the amount of the basic duties
may be diminished by the rate of the
rise in the wholesale price index exist-
ing in the said country, or inversely
should be increased by the rate of
reduction of the said index. More-
over each state, in case of variation
in values, retains the privilege of
adjusting the specific duties of its
tariff to the incidences contemplated
in paragraph 3.

auraient dfi £tre faites conform&tnent
£ la pr£sente Convention si, au
moment de la signature de cet acte,
le droit en vigueur avait 6t£ celui du
tarif autonome,

Ad art. 2. — I. II doit £tre entendu
que chaque fois qu'il existe un droit
int£rieur, les taux de reduction du
droit se calculeront en principe sur
la difference existant entre le droit
d'entr£e et le droit int6rieur.

2. Les Hautes Parties Contrac-
tantes d£termineront, le plus rapide-
ment possible et avant la mise en
vigueur de la pr6sente Convention,
les produits qui, au sens de ladite
Convention, doivent Stre consid6r£s
comme mati&res premieres, produits
demi-ouvr6s ou produits enticement
ouvr£s.

3. Lorsque la tarification est sp£-
cifique, les pourcentages ad valorem
dont il est question dans le para-
graphe 3 de Tart. 2, doivent s'en-
tendre de Tincidence des droits
aff brents aux rubriques telles qu'elles
existent dans le tarif douanier de la
Partie int6ress£e £ la date de la signa-
ture de la pr6sente Convention.
Aussit6t que les Hautes Parties Con-
tractantes auront adopt6 la nomen-
clature douani&re commune, dont il
est question & Tart. 4, les pourcentages
ad valorem dont il vient d'dtre par!6
devront s 'entendre de 1'incidence des
droits aff6rents aux rubriques telles
qu'elles seront 6tablies dans cette
nomenclature commune.

4. Dans chaque pays et pour au-
tant qu'il s'agisse de droits sp6ci-
fiques, le taux annuel de reduction
de 10% du montant des droits de base
pourra £tre diminu6 du taux d'£16va~
tion de 1'indice des prix de gros
existant dans ce pays, ou inverse-
ment devra 6tre augment^ du taux
de diminution de cet indice. En
outre, chaque Etat, en cas de varia-
tion des valeurs, garde la facult£
d'ajuster les droits sp6cifiques de
son tarif aux incidences pr6vues &
l'alin£a 3.

July 1 8, 1932 OUCHY CONVENTION ON ECONOMIC BARRIERS

103

5. The High Contracting Parties
shall determine, as soon as possible
and before the putting into effect of
the present convention, the mini-
mum rates below which the duties
applicable to agricultural products
must not be reduced.

6. The High Contracting Parties
shall come to an agreement, as
rapidly as possible and before the
putting into effect of the present con-
vention, on the products to which, by
reason of exceptional circumstances,
the said convention can not be
applied except with certain delays
and with certain reservations.

Ad Art. 3. — i. The expression
" regulatory measure " which ap-
pears in the first and last paragraphs
of article 3 contemplates especially
the control of bills of exchange.

2. The expression " abnormal cir-
cumstance" which appears in the
next to the last paragraph of article
3 contemplates especially:

(a) The case in which the currency
of one of the contracting countries
should depreciate without the level
of prices existing in that country
adjusting itself to the new currency
rates;

(&) The case in which prohibitive
or restrictive measures should have
the effect of turning certain com-
mercial currents toward the market
of one of the High Contracting Par-
ties and thus increase the importa-
tions on that market to an abnormal
and dangerous degree.

IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the pleni-
potentiaries have signed the present
protocol.

Done at Geneva, July 18, 1932.

5. Les Hautes Parties Contrac-
tantes d6termineront, le plus rapide-
ment possible et avant la mise en
vigueur de la pr6sente Convention,
les taux minima en-dessous desquels
ne devront pas £tre r6duits les droits
afferents aux produits agricoles.

6. Les Hautes Parties Contrac-
tantes se mettront d'accord, le plus
rapidement possible et avant la mise
en vigueur de la pr^sente Conven-
tion, sur les produits auxquels, a
raison de circonstances exception-
nelles, ladite Convention ne pourrait
s'appliquer qu'avec certains d£lais et
sous certaines reserves.

Ad art. 3. — i. L'expression "me-
sure de r£glementation " qui figure au
premier et au dernier paragraphes de
Tarticle 3 vise notamment le con-
trdle des devises.

2 . L 'expression ' ' circonstance anor-
male" qui figure a 1'avant dernier
paragraphe de Tar tide 3 vise notam-
ment:

a. le cas oft la monnaie d'un pays
contractant viendrait a se d6pr6cier
sans que le niveau des prix existant
dans ce pays s'ajuste au nouveau
taux de la monnaie;

b. le cas oil des mesures de prohibi-
tion ou de restriction auraient pour
effet de d6tourner certains courants
commerciaux vers le march6 d'une
des Hautes Parties Contractantes et
ainsi d'augmenter les importations
sur ce march.6 dans une mesure
anormale et dangereuse.

EN FOI DE QUOI, les P16nipoten-
tiaires ont sign6 le present Protocole.

Fait a Gen&ve, le 18 juillet 1932.

[Signed:] For Belgium: PAUL HYMANS; for Luxembourg: BECH; for the
Netherlands: BEELAERTS VAN BLOKXAND.

In signing the protocol annexed to the
international convention for the lowering
of economic barriers, we declare that, in
the interval between the signature and
the putting into effect of the said conven-
tion,— during which period the commit-

En signant le Protocole annex6 i la
Convention internationale pour 1'abaisse-
ment des barrieres 6conomiques, nous
declarons que, dans rintervalle entre la
signature et Tentr6e en vigueur de ladite
Convention, — p&riode pendant laquelle le

104

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No.

tee contemplated in article 6 will not
yet exist, — the Belgian-Luxembourg Eco-
nomic Union will consider itself free to
take, if necessary, any customs measures
of a fiscal character, as is provided for in
the second sentence of the first paragraph
ad articles i and 2.
Geneva, July 18, 1932.

PAUL HYMANS
BECH

In signing the protocol annexed to the
international convention for the lowering
of economic barriers, signed on this date at
Geneva, I declare that, between the signa-
ture and the putting into effect of the said
convention, during which period the com-
mittee contemplated in article 6 will not
exist, my Government will consider itself
free to take, if necessary, the measures
provided for in the second sentence ad
articles i and 2 of the protocol.

Geneva, July 18, 1932.

BEELAERTS VAN BLOKLAND

Comit6 preVu £ 1'article 6 n'existera pas
encore, — 1'Union e'conomique belgo-
luxembourgeoise se considerera libre de
prendre eVentuellement toutes mesures
douanieres de caractere fiscal, ainsi qu'il
est prevu a la deuxieme phrase du premier
paragraphe ad articles r et 2.
Geneve, le 18 juillet 1932.

PAUL HYMANS
BECH

En signant le protocole annex6 £ la
convention internationale pour 1'abaisse-
ment des barri&res economiques, sign6e &
la date de ce jour & Geneve, je declare
que, entre la signature et^ Tentr6e en
vigueur de ladite convention, p<§riode
pendant laquelle le comit<§ pr6vu a Tarticle
6 n'existera pas encore, mon gouverne-
ment se consid6rera libre de prendre
eVentuellement les mesures pr£vues a la
seconde phrase ad art. i et 2 du protocole.

Geneve, le 18 juillet 1932.

BEELAERTS VAN BLOKLAND

No. 313b

Declaration annexed to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic
Barriers. Signed at Geneva, July 18, 1932.

Declaration annexee a la Convention pour Pabaissement des bar-
rieres economiques. Signee a Geneve, 18 juillet 1932.

[Translation]

The High Contracting Parties re-
serve the privilege of reducing among
themselves pursuant to private ac-
cords, open to all states, their entry
duties on certain goods, .in accord-
ance with other modalities than those
provided in article 2 of the present
convention. Such reductions would
be extended to all other states who
have adhered to the private accords
in question, whether or not they are
parties to the present convention.

DONE at Geneva, July 18, 1932.

Les Hautes Parties Contractantes
se r6servent la facult6 de r<§duire
entre elles & la suite d 'accords par-
ticuliers, ouverts 4 tous les Etats,
leurs droits d'entr6e sur certaines
marchandises, suivant d'autres
modalit£s que celles pr6vues & Parti-
cle 2 de la pr6sente Convention.
Ces reductions seraient 6tendues i
tous Etats tiers qui ont adh6r£ aux
accords particuliers dont il s'agit,
qu'ils soient ou non Parties & la
pr6sente Convention.

FAIT i Geneve, le 18 juillet 1932.

[Signed:] For Belgium: PAUL HYMANS; for Luxembourg; BECH; for the
Netherlands: BEELAERTS VAN BLOKLAND.

Aug. 3, 1932 DECLARATION BY AMERICAN STATES

No. 314

105

DECLARATION by American States. Signed at Washington,

August 3, 1932.

DECLARACION por Estados Americanos. Firmada en Washington,

3 de agosto de 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. This declaration was signed as a telegram to the Governments of Bolivia
and Paraguay, parties to the Chaco dispute, on the suggestion of the neutral members of a
commission of conciliation created under a protocol of January 3, 1929. It was frequently
referred to in the course of later efforts to end the Chaco War, and it was recognized by
Bolivia and Paraguay in the protocol signed at Buenos Aires on June 12, 1935. League of
Nations Official Journal, 1935, p. 901. The basic principle of the declaration had been
adopted by the Assembly of the League of Nations in its resolution of March n, 1932.
Idem, Special Supplement No. 101, p. 87. This principle was also incorporated in Article 3
of the anti-war treaty of October 10, 1933 (No. 346, post) and in Article II of the convention
on rights and duties of states, of December 26, 1933 (No. 361, post), and the declaration was
mentioned in the League of Nations Assembly recommendation of July 4, 1936. Records of
the Sixteenth Assembly, Plenary Meetings, Part II, p. 65.

RATIFICATIONS. This declaration was not subject to ratification.

Entered into force August 3, IQ32.1

Text and translation from Press Releases of the United States Department
of State, No. 149, pp. 98, 100.

[Translation]

The representatives of all the
American Republics, meeting in
Washington, the seat of the Neutral
Commission, having been duly au-
thorized by their respective Govern-
ments, have the honor to make the
following declaration to the Govern-
ments of Bolivia and Paraguay:

"Respect for law is a tradition
among the American nations, who
are opposed to force and renounce it
both for the solution of their con-
troversies and as an instrument of
national policy in their reciprocal
relations. They have long been the
proponents of the doctrine that the
arrangement of all disputes and con-
flicts of whatever nature or origin
that may arise between them can
only be sought by peaceful means.
The history of the American nations

Los Representantes de todas las
Repiiblicas Americanas, reunidos en
Washington en donde reside la
Comisi6n de Neutrales, habiendo
sido debidamente autorizados por
sus respectivos Gobiernos, tienen el
honor de hacer la siguiente declara-
ci6n a los Gobiernos de Bolivia y
Paraguay:

"El respeto al derecho es una
tradici6n entre las naciones ameri-
canas, las cuales se oponen a la
fuerza y renuncian a ella tanto para
la soluci6n de sus controversias
cuanto para utilizarla comp un in-
strumento de politica nacional en
sus relaciones recfprocas. Ellas ban
sido por mucho tiempo los lideres de
la doctrina de que el arreglo de todas
las disputas y conflictos de cualquier
naturaleza u origen que se puedan
suscitar entre ellas, s61o sera pro-

1 Not registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations (July I, 1937)-

106

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 314

shows that all their boundary and
territorial controversies have been
arranged by such means. There-
fore, the nations of America declare
that the Chaco dispute is susceptible
of a peaceful solution, and they
earnestly request Bolivia and Para-
guay to submit immediately the
solution of this controversy to an
arrangement by arbitration or by
such other peaceful means as may
be acceptable to both.

"As regards the responsibilities
which may arise from the various
encounters which have occurred
from June 15 to date, they consider
that the countries in conflict should
present to the Neutral Commission
all the documentation which they
may consider pertinent, and which
will be examined by it. They do not
doubt that the country which this
investigation shows to be the aggres-
sor will desire to give satisfaction to
the one attacked, thus eliminating
all misunderstanding between them.

"They furthermore invite the
Governments of Bolivia and Para-
guay to make a solemn declaration to
the effect that they will stop the
movement of troops in the disputed
territory, which should clear up the
atmosphere and make easy the road
to the solution of good understanding
which America hopes for in the name
of the permanent interests of all the
countries of this hemisphere.

"The American nations further
declare that they will not recognize
any territorial arrangement of this
controversy which has not been ob-
tained by peaceful means nor the
validity of territorial acquisitions
which may be obtained through oc-
cupation or conquest by force of
arms."

curado por medios pacificos. La
historia de las naciones americanas
demuestra que todas sus controver-
sias territoriales y de limites ban sido
arregladas por tales medios. Por
esto, las naciones de America de-
claran que la disputa del Chaco es
susceptible de una soluci6n pacifica
y piden encarecidamente a Bolivia y
Paraguay que sometan inmediata-
mente la de esta controversia a un
arreglo por arbitraje u otro medio
amistoso que fuere aceptable para
ambos.

" En cuanto a las responsabilidades
que puedan derivarse de los diversos
encuentros ocurridos desde el 15 de
Junio hasta la fecha, consideran que
los paises en conflicto deberian
presentar a la Comisi6n de Neutrales
toda la documentation que con-
cepttien pertinente, la cual seria
examinada por ella. No dudan de
que, el pais que de esa investigation
resulte agresor, habrd de querer dar
satisfacci6n al agredido, elimin&n-
dose asi toda desavenencia entre
ellos.

"Invitan, ademds, a los Gobiernos
de Bolivia y Paraguay a hacer una
declaration solemne en el sentido de
paralizar movimientos de tropas en
el territorio disputado, lo cual sere-
narfa el ambiente y haria fdcil el
camino a la soluci6n de concordia
que America espera en nombre de los
intereses permanentes de todos los
paises de este hemisferio.

"Las naciones de America de-
claran tambi<§n que no reconocer&n
arreglo territorial alguno de esta
controversia que no sea obtenido por
medios pacificos ni la validez de
adquisiciones territoriales que sean
obtenidas mediante ocupacI6n o
conquista por la fuerza de las armas."

[Signed:] FRANCIS WHITE, for the Secretary of State of the United
States; FABIO LOZANO T., Minister of Colombia; Josfe RICHLING, Charg6
d 'Affaires of Uruguay; Josi T. BAR6N, Charg£ d'Affaires of Cuba; P.
HERRERA DE HUERTA, Charg6 d'Affaires of Mexico; M. DE FREYRE Y S.,

Sept. 2, 1932 TRANSPORT OF GOODS BY RAIL IO7

Ambassador of Peru; R. DE LIMA E SILVA, Ambassador of Brazil; FELIPE A.
ESPIL, Ambassador of Argentina; MIGUEL CRUCHAGA, Ambassador of Chile;
ADRIAN RECINOS, Minister of Guatemala; PEDRO M. ARCAYA, Minister of
Venezuela; DANTES BELLEGARDE, Minister of Haiti; ROBERTO DESPRADEL,
Minister of the Dominican Republic; C&LEO DAviLA, Minister of Honduras;
GONZALO ZALDUMBIDE, Minister of Ecuador; HORATIO F. ALFARO, Minister
of Panama; Luis M. DEBAYLE, Charg£ d 'Affaires of Nicaragua; MANUEL
GONZALEZ-ZELEDON, Charg& d'Affaires of Costa Rica; ROBERTO D. MELEN-
DEZ, Special Representative of the Republic of El Salvador in the Board of
Directors of the Pan American Union.

No. 315

ADDITIONAL ACT to the Convention of October 23, 1924, on the
Transport of Goods by Rail. Opened for signature at Berne,
September 2, 1932.

ACTE ADDITIONNEL a la Convention du 23 octobre 1924 concer-
nant le transport des marchandises par chemins de f er. Ouvert
a la signature §. Berne, 2 septembre 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. By a protocol to the convention on the transport of goods by rail,
signed at Berne, October 23, 1924 (No. 1290, ante), provision was made for exceptions, during
a period of four years, to certain articles of the convention relating to charges. The period,
which was to expire in October, 1932, is extended by this Additional Act until the coming
into force of a new convention. The new convention was signed at Rome, November 23,
1933 (No. 353, post).

RATIFICATIONS. Ratifications of this act were deposited at Berne by Czechoslovakia,
September 21, 1932, and by Switzerland, September 30, 1932. On October 30, 1934, ratifi-
cations had been deposited by all of the signatories except Bulgaria and France; and acces-
sions had been deposited by Finland, Greece, and Spain.

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of this act is also published in 154 League of Nations Treaty
Series, p. 123; Reichsgesetzblatt, 1933, II, p. 703; 40 Bulletin des transports international par
chemins defer (1932), annexe, p. 145.

Anon., " Prolongation de la duree de validite des dispositions transitoires actuelles du
Protocole de signature du 23 octobre 1924," 40 Bulletin des transports international par
chemins defer (1932), pp. 451-2.

Entered into force October 10, I932.1
Text supplied by the Political Department of the Swiss Government.

L'Allemagne, TAutriche, la Bel- Pologne, la Roumanie, la Suede, la

gique, la Bulgarie, le Danemark, la Suisse, la Tch<§coslovaquie, la Tur-

Ville libre de Dantzig, TEstonie, la quie et la Yougpslavie, consid6-

France, la Hongrie, 1'Italie, la Let- rant que la situation mon6taire et

tonie, le Liechtenstein, le Luxem- £conomique actuelle est de nature &

bourg, la Norv£ge, les Pays-Bas, la rendre necessaire le maintien des

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3543, November 14, 1934-

io8

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 315

Dispositions transitoires, objet du
chapitre II du Protocole de signa-
ture de la Convention Internationale
du 23 octobre 1924 concernant le
transport des marchandises par
chemins de fer (C. I. M.),

qu'en vertu dudit Protocole, ces
Dispositions transitoires doivent
prendre fin le ier octobre 1932,

qu'il est par consequent n^cessaire
de maintenir lesdites Dispositions
transitoires jusqu'£ Tentr6e en vi-
gueur du texte qui resultera de la
prochaine Conference de revision de
la C. L M.,

ont nomme pour leurs Pienipo-
tentiaires, savoir:1

L'Allemagne: W. Dankwort;

L'Autriche: M. Hoffinger, F. Je-
linek;

La Belgique: E. du Bois;

La Bulgarie: D. Mikoff;

Le Danemark: E. H. Schack;

La Ville Libre de Dantzig: J. de
Modzelewski ;

L'Estonie: A. Schmidt;

La France: H. de Marcilly;

La Hongrie ; A. N4n4ssy ;

LltalierG. Marchi;

La Lettonie: J. Klavin§-Ellansky;

Le Liechtenstein: E. Beck;

Le Luxembourg: J. Elter;

La Norv&ge: H. Birkeland;

Les Pays-Bas: W. L Doude van
Troostwijk;

La Pologne: J. de Modzelewski;

La Roumanie: V. Statesco;

La Suede: K. A. Belfrage;

La Suisse: H, Hunziker;

La Tchecoslovaquie : Z.Prochcizka ;

La Turquie: Nedim Veysel Bey;

La Yougoslavie: D. Markovi6;

lesquels, en presence et avec la
participation du D£16gu£ de la Com-
mission de Gouveraement du Terri-
toire du Bassin de la Sarre, apr&s
s'gtre communique leurs pleins pou-

voirs, trouv6s en bonne et due forme,
sont convenus de ce qui suit:

Le delai de quatre ans fixe par les
Dispositions transitoires qui font
1'objet du chapitre II du Protocole
de signature de la Convention inter-
national du 23 octobre 1924 con-
cernant le transport des marchan-
dises par chemins de fer (C. I. M.)
est prolong^, & partir du ier octobre
1932, jusqu'k la date de Tentr6e en
vigueur du texte qui r6sultera de la
prochaine Conference de revision de
la C. I. M.

Vu Turgence et les intents im-
portants qui sont en jeu, le present
Acte entrera en vigueur entre les
Etats qui Tauront ratifie, dix jours
apr£s la date & laquelle le Gouverne-
ment £6d6ral suisse aura notifie aux
Gouvernements interesses le dep6t
des ratifications.

Le present Acte demeure ouvert
jusqu'au 15 septembre 1932 4 la sig-
nature et, apr&s cette date, £ Tad-
hesion des Etats qui participent & la
Convention Internationale du 23
octobre 1924.2

Le Gouvernement suisse se charge
de recueillir et de notifier les adhe-
sions et les ratifications.

EN FOI DE QUOI, les Pienipotenti-
aires ci-dessus et le Deiegue de la
Commission de Gouvernement du
Territoire du Bassin de la Sarre ont
signe le present Acte.

Fait £ Berne, le deux septembre
mil neuf cent trente-deux, en un seul
exemplaire, qui restera depose dans
les Archives de la Confederation
Suisse et dont une expedition au-
thentique sera remise & chacune des
Parties.

[Signe:] Pour FAllemagne: DANKWORT; pour PAutriche: HOFFINGER;
Dr. F. JELINEK ; pour la Belgique : E. Du Bois ; pour la Bulgarie : D. MIKOFF ;
pour le Danemark : E. H. SCHACK; pour la Ville Libre de Dantzig : J. DE MOD-

1 The titles of plenipotentiaries are omitted. — ED. 2 No, 129, ante. — ED.

Dec. 9, 1932 TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION IO9

ZELEWSKI; pour PEstonie: A. SCHMIDT; pour la France: H. DE MARCILLY;
pour la Hongrie: Dr. NANASSY; pour PItalie: G. MARCHI; pour la Lettonie:
J . KLAVINS-ELLANSKY ; pour le Liechtenstein : E. BECK ; pour le Luxembourg :
JULES ELTER; pour la Norvege: HERSLEB BIRKELAND; pour les Pays-Bas:
W. DOUDE VAN TROOSTWIJK; pour la Pologne: J. DE MODZELEWSKI; pour la
Roumanie : VICTOR STATESCO ; pour la Suede : KURT A. BELFRAGE ; pour la
Suisse: HUNZIKER; pour la Tchecoslovaquie : Dr. PROCHAZKA; pour la
Turquie: NEDIM VEYSEL; pour la Yougoslavie: Dr. D. MARKOVIC; pour la
Commission de Gouvernement du Territoire du Bassin de la Sarre: T.

COURTILET.

No. 316

TELECOMMUNICATION Convention. Signed at Madrid, Decem-
ber 9, 1932.

CONVENTION des telecommunications. Signee a Madrid, 9

decembre 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. The International Telegraphic Union was established under a conven-
tion signed at Paris, May 17, 1865. 56 J3r. and For. St. Papers, p. 295. That convention
was revised at Vienna, July 21, 1868 (59 idem, p. 322), at Rome, January 14, 1872 (66 idem,
P- 975) » and at St. Petersburg, July 10/22, 1875 (idem, p. 19). Numerous revisions were
made of the regulations attached to the convention ; for the Paris revision of October 29,
1925, see ante, No. 146. A radiotelegraph convention signed at Berlin, November 3, 1906
(99 idem, p. 321), was revised at London, July 5, 1912 (105 idem, p. 219), and at Washington,
November 25, 1927 (No. 185, ante). The International Telegraph Conference which met at
Paris in 1925 and the International Radiotelegraph Conference which met at Washington in
1927, both resolved in favor of combining the conventions relating to the two subjects. The
Madrid Convention of 1932 effects such a combination; it abrogates the previous telegraphic
and radiotelegraphic conventions, and it replaces the International Telegraphic Union with
the International Telecommunication Union. Telegraphic and radiotelegraphic relations
have been regulated by numerous other conventions which were less general. See also the
convention creating the Inter- American Union of Electrical Communications (No. 116,
ante), and the European Convention on Broadcasting (No. 330, post). A North and Central
American Regional Radio Conference, held at Mexico City, July lo-August 9, 1933, adopted
recommendations on allocation of frequencies. U. S. Treaty Information Bulletin, No. 47,

P- 15-

RATIFICATIONS. On July i, 1937, ratifications of or accessions to this convention had
been deposited at Madrid by Afghanistan, Albania, Australia, Austria, Belgium (and de-
pendencies), Bulgaria, Canada, China, Colombia, Czechoslovakia, Denmark, Dominican
Republic, Egypt, Estonia, Ethiopia, Finland, Germany, Great Britain (and various British
dependencies), Haiti, Hungary, Iceland, India, Irish Free State, Italy (and dependencies),
Japan, Luxemburg, Mexico, Morocco, Netherlands (and dependencies), New Zealand,
Panama, Persia, Poland, South Africa, Spain, Switzerland, Syria and Lebanon, Turkey,
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, United States of America, Uruguay, Vatican City
State, Venezuela, Yemen, and Yugoslavia. In addition, formal accessions were made by or
on behalf of various dependencies and twenty-seven private companies: see U. S. Treaty
Information Bulletin, No. 76, p. 12; Registration of Treaties, No. 165, p. u; Journal des
telecommunications (passim). Nicaragua, which had not deposited a ratification, denounced
the convention, November 26, 1936.

IIO INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 316

BIBLIOGRAPHY. Propositions pour la Conference radiotelegraphigue international de
Madrid, 1932 (Berne: Bureau international de 1'Union telegraphique, 1931) ', Documents de la
Conference radiot&Ugraphigue internationale de Madrid, 1932 (Berne: Bureau Internationale
de TUnion telegraphique, 1933), 2 vols.; International Radiotelegraph Conference, Madrid,
1932, U. S. Department of State, Conference Series, No. 15, Publication No. 540. See also
the Journal des t&Ucommunciations (formerly the Journal t&Ugraphigue), official organ of the
Bureau de I' Union internationale des Telecommunications. The text of this convention is also
published in 151 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. 4; Reichsgesetzblatt, 1934, p. 1063; and by
H. M. Stationer's Office (London, 1933).

J. C. de Fabel, " Les Conferences diplomatiques de Madrid et de Lucerne," 10 Revue inter-
nationale de la radio£lectricit£ (1934), pp. 5-20; de Fabel, "Le regime international de la
radioelectricite et les conferences diplomatiques de Madrid et de Lucerne/' 12 Rev. de dr. int.
(J933)» PP- 566-80; P. S. Gerbrandy, Het vraagstuk van den radio-omroep (Te Kampen:
Kok, 1934), pp. 17-34; R. Homburg, "Next World Conference at Madrid and the Interna-
tional Regulation of Electric and Radio-Electric Transmissions," I Journal of Radio Law
(I93I)» PP- 220-40; O. Kucera, "Einige Rechtsprobleme der Madrider Weltfunktelegraph-
enkonferenz," 5 Archivfur Funkrecht (1932), pp. 239-44; P« de La Pradelle, " Le droit de vote
aux Conferences des telecommunications," 9 Revue jur idigue internationale de la radMlec-
tricite' (1933), pp. 398-424; G. Montefinale, " I problem! tecnici, marittimi ed aerei alia Con-
ferenza radio di Madrid," 66 Rivista marittima (1933), pp. 13-20; Irvin Stewart, "The Ma-
drid International Telecommunication Convention," 5 Air Law Review (1934), pp. 236-66.

Entered into force January i, 1934.*
Text and translation from U. S. Treaty Seriest No. 867.

[Translation]

Union of South Africa; Germany; Union de FAfrique du Sud; Al-

Republic of Argentina; Common- lemagne; R6publique Argentine;

wealth of Australia; Austria; Bel- F£d6ration Australienne ; Autriche;

gium; Bolivia; Brazil; Canada; Belgique; Bolivie; Bresil; Canada;

Chile; China; Vatican City State; Chili; Chine; Etat de la Cite* du

Republic of Colombia; French Colo- Vatican; Re"publique de Colombie;

nies, protectorates and territories Colonies franchises, protectorats et

under French mandate; Portuguese territoires sous mandat frangais;

Colonies; Swiss Confederation; Bel- Colonies portugaises; Confederation

gian Congo; Costa Rica; Cuba; suisse; Congo beige; Costa- Rica;

Curagao and Surinam; Cirenaica; Cuba; Curasao et Surinam; Cyr6-

Denmark; Free City of Danzig; naique; Danemark; Ville libre de

Dominican Republic; Egypt; Re- Dantzig; R6publique Dominicaine;

public of El Salvador; Ecuador; Egypte ; R^publique de El Salvador ;

Eritrea ; Spain ; United States of Equateur ; Ery thr6e ; Espagne ; Etats-

America; Empire of Ethiopia; Fin- Unis d'Am&rique; Empire d'Ethio-

land; France; United Kingdom of pie; Finlande; France; Royaume-

Great Britain and Northern Ireland ; Uni de la Grande-Bretagne et de

Greece; Guatemala; Republic of 1'Irlande du Nord; Grece; Guate-

Honduras; Hungary; Italian Islands mala; R£publique de Honduras;

of the Aegean Sea; British India; Hongrie; lies italiennes de TEgee;

Dutch East Indies; Irish Free State; Indes britanniques ; Indes ne*erlan-

Iceland; Italy; Japan, Chosen, Tai- daises; Etat libre dlrlande; Islande;

wan, Karafuto, Kwantung Leased Italie; Japon, Chosen, Taiwan, Kara-

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3479, August 30, 1934.

Dec. 9, 1932

TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION

III

Territory and the South Sea Islands
under Japanese mandate; Latvia;
Liberia; Lithuania; Luxemburg;
Morocco; Mexico; Nicaragua; Nor-
way; New Zealand; Republic of
Panama; Netherlands; Peru; Persia;
Poland; Portugal; Rumania; Italian
Somaliland; Sweden; Syria and Leb-
anon; Czechoslovakia; Tripolitania;
Tunisia; Turkey; Union of Soviet
Socialist Republics; Uruguay; Vene-
zuela; Yugoslavia.

The undersigned, plenipotentiaries
of the governments listed above,
having met in conference at Madrid,
have, in common agreement and
subject to ratification, concluded the
following Convention :

CHAPTER I

ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTIONING OF
THE UNION

futo, le Territoire & bail du Kwan-
tung et les lies des Mers du Sud
sous mandat japonais; Lettonie;
Liberia ; Lithuanie ; Luxembourg ;
Maroc; Mexique; Nicaragua; Nor-
v£ge; Nouvelle-Z61ande; Republique
de Panama; Pays-Bas; Perou; Perse;
Pologne; Portugal; Roumanie;
Somalie italienne; Suede; Syrie et
Liban ; Tchecoslovaquie ; Tripoli-
taine; Tunisie; Turquie; Union des
R<§publiques Sovi6tistes Socialistes;
Uruguay; V6nezu61a; Yougoslavie.

Les soussign6s, pl<§nipotentiaires
des gouvernements ci-dessus enu-
m£r£s, sJ6tant reunis en conference £
Madrid, ont, d'un commun accord
et sous reserve de ratification, arr8t6
la Convention suivante:

CHAPITRE I

ORGANISATION ET FONCTIONNEMENT
DE L'UNION

ARTICLE i. — Constitution of the "Union ARTICLE i. — Constitution de V Union

§ i. The countries, parties to the
present Convention, form the Inter-
national Telecommunication Union
which shall replace the Telegraph
Union and which shall be governed
by the following provisions.

§ 2. The terms used in this Con-
vention are defined in the annex to
the present document.

ARTICLE 2. — Regulations

§ i. The provisions of the present
Convention shall be completed by
the following Regulations:

the Telegraph Regulations,
the Telephone Regulations,
the Radio Regulations (General
Regulations and Additional Regu-
lations),

which shall bind only the contracting
governments which have under-
taken to apply them, and solely as
regards governments which have
taken the same obligation.

§ 2. Only the signatories to the

§ i. Les pays, Parties £lapresente
Convention, forment 1'Union inter-
nation ale des t61ecommunications,
qui remplace I'Union t61egraphique,
et qui est r6gie par les dispositions
suivantes.

§ 2. Les termes employes dans la
pr6sente Convention sont d6finis
dans 1'annexe £ ce document.

ARTICLE 2. — Kbglements

§ i. Les dispositions de la pr6-
sente Convention sont completes
par les Rdglements, savoir:

le R&glement t£16graphique,
le Reglement t616phonique,
les R^glements des radiocom-

munications (R&glement g6n6ral et

Reglement additionnel),

qui ne lient que les gouvernements
contractants qui se sont engag6s £
les appliquer, et seulement vis-^L-vis
des gouvernements qui ont pris le
mime engagement.

§ 2. Seuls les signataires de la

112

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 316

Convention or the adherents to this
document shall be permitted to sign
the Regulations or to adhere thereto.
The signing of at least one of the sets
of Regulations shall be obligatory
upon the signatories of the Conven-
tion. Similarly, adherence to at
least one of the sets of Regulations
shall be obligatory upon the adher-
ents to the Convention. However,
the Additional Radio Regulations
may not be the subject of signature
or adherence except when the Gen-
eral Radio Regulations have been
signed or adhered to.

§ 3. The provisions of the present
Convention shall bind the contract-
ing governments only with respect to
the services governed by the Regula-
tions to which these governments are
parties.

ARTICLE 3. — Adherence of Govern-
ments to the Convention

§ i. The government of a country,
in the name of which the present
Convention has not been signed,
may adhere to it at any time. Such
adherence must cover at least one of
the sets of annexed Regulations, sub-
ject to the application of § 2 of article
2 above.

§ 2. The act of adherence of a
government shall be deposited in the
archives of the government which
received the conference of plenipo-
tentiaries that has drawn up the
present Convention. The govern-
ment with which the act of adherence
has been deposited shall communi-
cate it to all the other contracting
governments through diplomatic chan-
nels.

§ 3. Adherence shall carry with it
as a matter of right, all the obliga-
tions and all the advantages stipu-
lated by the present Convention; it
shall, in addition, entail the obliga-
tions and advantages stipulated by
the particular Regulations which the
adhering governments undertake to
apply.

Convention ou les adherents £ cet
acte sont admis & signer les R&gle-
ments ou It y adherer. La signature
de Tun, au moins, des R£glernents
est obligatoire pour les signataires
de la Convention. De mgme, Tad-
hesion £ Tun, au moins, des R&gle-
ments est obligatoire pour les adh£-
rents & la Convention. Toutefois,
le R£glement additionnel des ra-
dipcommunications ne peut pas
faire Tobjet de la signature ou de
Tadh6sion sans que la signature ou
I'adhdsion ait <§t6 donn6e au R&gle-
ment g6n6ral des radiocommunica-
tions.

§ 3. Les prescriptions de la pr<§-
sente Convention n'engagent les
gouvernements contractants que
pour les services r£gis par les R&gle-
ments auxquels ces gouvernements
sont Parties.

ARTICLE 3. — AdMsion des gouverne-
ments ci la Convention

§ i. Le gouvernement d'un pays,
au nom duquel la pr&sente Conven-
tion n'a pas 6t6 sign6e, peut y ad-
h6rer en tout temps. Cette adh.6-
sion doit porter sur un au moins des
R£glements annexes, sous reserve de
^application du § 2 de Tarticle 2
ci-dessus.

§ 2. L'acte d'adh6sion d'un gou-
vernement sera d£pos6 dans les
archives du gouvernement qui a ac-
cueilli la conference de pl&nipoten-
tiaires ayant arr£t6 la pr6sente Con-
vention. Le gouvernement qui a
re£u en d6p6t Tacte d 'adhesion en
donne connaissance, par la voie di-
plomatique, & tous les autres gou-
vernements contractants.

§ 3. L'adh6sion emporte de plein
droit toutes les obligations et tous
les avantages stipules par la pr6sente
Convention; en outre, elle entraine
les obligations et avantages stipules
par les seuls R&glements que les
gouvernements adherents s'engagent
4 appliquer.

Dec. 9, I932

TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION

113

ARTICLE 4. — Adherence of Govern-
ments to the Regulations
The government of a country
signatory or adherent to the present
Convention may at any time adhere
to one or more of the sets of Regula-
tions which it has not undertaken to
observe, taking into account the pro-
visions of article 2, § 2. Such ad-
herence shall be notified to the Bu-
reau of the Union which shall inform
the other governments concerned
thereof.

ARTICLE 5. — Adherence to the Con-
vention and to the Regulations
by Colonies, Protectorates, Overseas
Territories, or Territories under
Sovereignty, Authority, or Mandate
of the Contracting Governments

§ i. Any contracting government
may, at the time of its signature, its
ratification, its adherence, or later,
declare that its acceptance of the
present Convention is valid for the
whole or a group or a single one of its
colonies, protectorates, overseas ter-
ritories, or territories under sover-
eignty, authority, or mandate.

§ 2. The whole or a group or a
single one of these colonies, protec-
torates, overseas territories, or terri-
tories under sovereignty, authority,
or mandate may, respectively, at any
time, be the subject of a separate
adherence.

§ 3. The present Convention shall
not apply to colonies, protectorates,
overseas territories, or territories
under sovereignty, authority, or
mandate of a contracting govern-
ment, unless statement to this effect
is made by virtue of § I of the present
article, or a separate adherence is
made by virtue of § 2 above.

§ 4. The declarations of adher-
ence, made by virtue of § I and § 2
of this article, shall be communicated
through diplomatic channels to the
government of the country on the
territory of which was held the con-

ARTICLE 4. — Adhesion des gouverne-
ments aux Reglements

Le gouvernement d'un pays signa-
taire ou adherent a la presente
Convention peut adherer en tout
temps au R&glement ou aux Regle-
ments auxquels il ne s'est pas engag£,
en tenant compte des dispositions du
§ 2 de I'artide 2. Cette adh6sion
est notifi&e au Bureau de 1'Union,
lequel en donne connaissance aux
autres gouvernements int£ress6s.

ARTICLE 5. — Adhesion a la Conven-
tion et aux Reglements des colonies,
protectorats, territoires d'outre-mer
ou territoires sous souverainete,
autorite ou mandat des gouverne-
ments contractants

§ i. Tout gouvernement contrac-
tant peut declarer, soit au moment de
sa signature, de sa ratification ou de
son adhesion, soit apr&s, que son
acceptation de la pr&sente Conven-
tion est valable pour 1 'ensemble ou
un groupe ou un seul de ses colonies,
protectorats, territoires d'outre-mer
ou territoires sous souverainet£, au-
torit<§ ou mandat.

§ 2. L 'ensemble ou un groupe ou
un seul de ces colonies, protectorats,
territoires d'outre-mer ou territoires
sous souverainet6, autorit£ ou man-
dat peut respectivement faire Tobjet,
a toute 6poque, d'une adhesion
distincte.

§ 3. La pr6sente Convention ne
s'applique pas aux colonies, pro-
tectorats, territoires d'outre-mer ou
territoires sous souverainete, autorit6
ou mandat d'un gouvernement con-
tractant, a moins d'une d6clara-
tion a cet effet faite en vertu du
§ i du present article ou d'une ad-
h£sion distincte faite en vertu du
§ 2 ci-dessus.

§ 4. Les declarations d'adh6sion
faites en vertu des §§ i et 2 du pr6-
sent article seront communiquees,
par la voie diplomatique, au gou-
vernement du pays sur le territoire
duquel aura 6t£ tenue la conference

114

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 316

ference of plenipotentiaries, at which
the present Convention was drawn
up, and a copy thereof shall be
transmitted by this government to
each of the other contracting govern-
ments.

§ 5. The provisions of §§ I and 3
of this article shall also apply either
to the acceptance of one or more of
the sets of Regulations, or to the ad-
herence to one or more of the sets of
Regulations, within the terms of the
provisions contained in article 2, § 2.

Such acceptance or adherence shall
be notified in conformity with the
provisions of article 4.

§ 6. The provisions of the preced-
ing paragraphs shall not apply to the
colonies, protectorates, overseas ter-
ritories, or territories under sover-
eignty, authority, or mandate which
appear in the preamble of the present
Convention.

ARTICLE 6. — Ratification of the
Convention

§ i. The present Convention must
be ratified by the signatory govern-
ments and the ratifications thereof
must be deposited, as soon as possi-
ble, through diplomatic channels, in
the archives of the government of the
country which received the confer-
ence of plenipotentiaries that has
drawn up the present Convention;
this same government shall, through
diplomatic channels, notify the other
signatory and adhering governments
of the ratifications, as soon as they
are received.

§ 2. In case one or more of the
signatory governments would not
ratify the Convention, the latter
shall none the less be valid for the

fovernments which shall have rati-
ed it.

ARTICLE 7. — Approval of the
Regulations

§ I. The governments must, as
soon as possible, submit their deci-
sion concerning the approval of the
Regulations drawn up by the Con-

de pl&iipotentiaires & laquelle la
pr<§seiite Convention a et6 arr6t<§e, et
une copie en sera transmise par ce
gouvernement & chacun des autres
gouvernements contractants.

§ 5. Les dispositions des §§ I et
3 du present article s'appliquent
aussi soit pour 1'acceptation d'un ou
de plusieurs R^glements, soit pour
Fadh6sion & un ou & plusieurs R£gle-
ments, en tenant compte des pre-
scriptions du § 2 de Tar tide 2.
Cette acceptation ou cette adhesion
est notifi6e en conformite des dis-
positions de Tarticle 4.

§ 6. Les dispositions des para-
graphes pr6c6dents ne s'appliquent
pas aux colonies, protectorate, terri-
toires d'outre-nier ou territoires sous
souverainet<§, autorit6 ou mandat
qui figurent dans le pr6ambule de la
pr<§sente Convention.

ARTICLE 6. — Ratification de la
Convention

§ I. La pr£sente Convention devra
£tre ratifiie par les gouvernements
signataires et les ratifications en
seront d6pos<§es, par la voie diplo-
matique, dans le plus bref d61ai
possible, aux archives du gouverne-
ment du pays qui a accueilli la con-
f^rence de pl6nipotentiaires ayant
arr6t6 la pr6sente Convention et qui
notifiera aux autres gouvernements
signataires et adh6rents, par la voie
diplomatique, les ratifications au fur
et & mesure de leur reception.

§ 2. Dans le cas otl un ou plusieurs
des gouvernements signataires ne
ratifieraient pas la Convention,
celle-ci n'en sera pas moins valable
pour les gouvernements qui 1'auront
ratifi£e.

ARTICLE 7. — Approbation des
Rbglements

§ i. Les gouvernements doivent se
prononcer dans le plus bref d61ai
possible au sujet de 1'approbation des
R6glements arr6t6s en conference.

Dec. 9, 1932

TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION

ference. This approval shall be re-
ported to the Bureau of the Union
which shall inform the members of
the Union accordingly.

§ 2. In case one or several of the
governments concerned would not
report such an approval, the new
regulatory provisions shall none the
less be valid for the governments
which shall have approved them.

ARTICLE 8. — Abrogation of Conven-
tions and of Regulations Prior to
the Present Convention

The present Convention and the
Regulations annexed thereto shall
abrogate and replace, in the relations
between the contracting govern-
ments, the International Telegraph
Conventions of Paris (1865), Vienna
(1868), Rome (1872), and St. Peters-
burg (1875), and the Regulations
annexed thereto, as well as the Inter-
national Radiotelegraph Conventions
of Berlin (1906), London (1912), and
Washington (1927), and the Regula-
tions annexed thereto.

ARTICLE 9. — Execution of the Conven-
tion and of the Regulations

§ i. The contracting governments
undertake to apply the provisions of
the present Convention and of the
Regulations accepted by them, in all
the offices and in all the telecom-
munication stations established or
operated by them, and which are
open to the international service of
public correspondence, to the broad-
casting service, or to the special serv-
ices governed by the Regulations.

§ 2. Moreover, they agree to take
the steps necessary to enforce the
provisions of the present Convention
and of the Regulations which they
accept, upon the private operating
agencies recognized by them and
upon the other operating agencies
duly authorized to establish and
operate telecommunications of the

Cette approbation est notifi6e au
Bureau de 1' Union qui en fait part
aux membres de 1'Union.

§ 2. Dans le cas oft un ou plusieurs
des gouvernements int<§resses ne
notifieraient pas cette approbation,
les nouvelles dispositions reglemen-
taires n'en seront pas moins valable
pour les gouvernements qui les
auront approuv^es.

ARTICLE 8. — Abrogation des Conven-
tions et des Reglements anterieurs a
la prfaente Convention

La pr6sente Convention et les
R£glements y annexes abrogent et
remplacent, dans les relations entre
les gouvernements contractants, les
Conventions t^legraphiques interna-
tionales de Paris (1865), de Vienna
(1868), de Rome (1872) et de St-
P<§tersbourg (1875) et les Regie-
men ts y annexes, ainsi que les Con-
ventions radiot61£graphiques inter-
nationales de Berlin (1906), de
Londres (1912) et de Washington
(1927) et les R£glements y annexes.

ARTICLE 9. — Execution de la Conven-
tion et des Reglements

§ i. Les gouvernements contrac-
tants s'engagent a appliquer les
dispositions de la pr6sente Conven-
tion et des Reglements accept6s par
eux dans tous les bureaux et dans
toutes les stations de t61<§communi-
cations £tablis ou exploites par leurs
soins et qui sont ouverts au service
international de la correspondance
publique, au service de la radio-
diffusion ou aux services sp6ciaux
r6gis par les Reglements.

§2. Us s'engagent, en outre, a
prendre les mesures n£cessaires pour
imposer Tobservation des disposi-
tions de la presente Convention et
des Reglements qu'ils acceptent,
aux exploitations privies reconnues
par eux et aux autres exploitations
dtlment autoris6es a I'etablissement
et a 1'exploitation des t£16communi-

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 316

international service whether or not
open to public correspondence.

ARTICLE 10. — Denunciation of the
Convention by the Governments

§ I* Each contracting government
shall have the right to denounce the
present Convention by a notification,
addressed, through diplomatic chan-
nels, to the government of the coun-
try in which was held the conference
of plenipotentiaries that has drawn
up the present Convention, and an-
nounced by these governments to all
the other contracting governments,
likewise through diplomatic chan-
nels.

§ 2. This denunciation shall take
effect at the expiration of the period
of one year, beginning with the day
on which the notification was re-
ceived by the government of the
country in which the last conference
of plenipotentiaries was held. This
effect shall apply only to the author
of the denunciation ; the Convention
shall remain in force for the other
contracting governments.

ARTICLE n. — Denunciation of the
Regulations by the Governments

§ I. Each government shall have
the right to terminate the obligation
which it has undertaken to apply one
of the sets of Regulations, by notify-
ing its decision to the Bureau of the
Union which shall inform thereof the
other governments concerned. Such
notification shall take effect at the
expiration of the period of one year,
beginning with the day on which it
was received by the Bureau of the
Union. This effect shall apply only
to the author of the denunciation;
the Regulations in question shall re-
main in force for the other govern-
ments.

§ 2. The provision of § I above
shall not annul the obligation for the
contracting governments to enforce
at least one of the sets of Regula-
tions, covered by article 2 of this

cations du service international ou-
vertes ou non ouvertes £ la corre-
spondance publique.

ARTICLE 10. — Denonciation de la
Convention par les gouvernements
§ I. Chaque gouvernement con-
tractant a le droit de denoncer^la
presente Convention par une notifi-
cation adressee, par la voie diplo-
matique, au gouvernement du pays
dans lequel a sieg6 la conference de
pienipotentiaires qui a arr£t<§ la
presente Convention et annonc6e
ensuite par ce gouvernement, 6gale-
ment par la voie diplomatique, £
tous les autres gouvernements con-
tractants.

§ 2. Cette denonciation produit
son effet & Fexpiration du deiai d'une
ann6e & partir du jour de la reception
de sa notification par le gouverne-
ment du pays oil a sieg<§ la derniere
conference de pienipotentiaires.
Cet effet ne vise que 1'auteur de la
d6nonciation; pour les autres gou-
vernements contractants, la Conven-
tion reste en vigueur.

ARTICLE 1 1 . — DSnonciation des Kbgle-
ments par les gouvernements

§ I. Chaque gouvernement a le
droit de mettre fin £ Fengagement
qu'il a pris d'executer un R^glement,
en notifiant sa decision au Bureau de
TUnion, lequel en donne connais-
sance aux autres gouvernements
interesses. Cette notfication pro-
duit son effet & Fexpiration du deiai
d'une annee £ partir du jour de sa
reception par le Bureau de 1' Union.
Cet effet ne vise que Tauteur de la
denonciation; pour les autres gou-
vernements, le R&glement vis6 reste
en vigueur.

§ 2. Les dispositions du § I ci-
dessus ne suppriment pas 1'obliga-
tion pour les gouvernements con-
tractants d'executer au moins Tun
des R£glements, visee par 1'article 2

Dec. 9, 1932

TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION

117

Convention, taking into account the de la pr6sente Convention, et compte
reservation contained in § 2 of the tenu de la reserve mentionn£e au
said article. § 2 dudit article.

ARTICLE 12. — Denunciation of the
Convention and of the Regulations
by Colonies, Protectorates, Overseas
Territories, or Territories under
Sovereignty, Authority, or Mandate
of the Contracting Governments

§ i. The application of the present
Convention to a territory, by virtue
of the provisions of § I or of § 2 of
article 5, may terminate at any time.

§ 2. The declarations of denuncia-
tion provided for in § I above shall
be notified and announced according
to the conditions stated in § I of
article 10; they shall take effect ac-
cording to the provisions of § 2 of the
latter article.

§ 3. The application of one or
more of the sets of Regulations to a
territory, by virtue of the provisions
of § 5 of article 5, may terminate at
any time.

§ 4. The declarations of denuncia-
tion provided for in § 3 above shall
be notified and announced in accord-
ance with the provisions of § I of
article 1 1 and shall take effect under
the conditions set forth in the said
paragraph.

ARTICLE 13. — Special Arrangements

The contracting governments re-
serve the right, for themselves, for
the private operating agencies rec-
ognized by them, and for other oper-
ating agencies duly authorized to
that effect, to conclude special ar-
rangements on service matters which
do not concern the governments in
general. However, such arrange-
ments must remain within the terms
of the Convention and of the Regula-
tions annexed thereto, as regards
interference which their application
might be likely to cause with the
services of other countries.

ARTICLE 12. — D&nonciation de la
Convention et des R^glements par
les colonies, protectorats, territoires
d'outre-m&r ou territoires sous souve-
rainete, autoritfr ou mandat des
gouvernements contractants

§ i. L 'application de la pr6sente
Convention & un territoire, faite en
vertu des prescriptions du § I ou du
§ 2 de Particle 5, peut prendre fin &
toute &poque.

§ 2. Les declarations de denoncia-
tion prevues au § I ci-dessus sont
notifiees et annonc6es dans les condi-
tions fixees au § i de 1'article 10; elles
produisent leur effet d'apr£s les
dispositions du § 2 du m£me article.

§ 3. L'application d'un ou de plu-
sieurs R6glements & un territoire,
faite en vertu des dispositions du
§ 5 de 1'article 5, peut prendre fin &
toute 6poque.

§ 4. Les declarations de d&noncia-
tion pr6vues au § 3 ci-dessus sont
notifies et annoncees selon les pre-
scriptions du § i de Particle II et
produisent leur effet dans les condi-
tions fix6es audit paragraphs.

ARTICLE 13. — Arrangements
particuliers

Les gouvernements contractants
se r^servent, pour eux-m6mes, pour
les exploitations privies reconnues
par eux et pour d'autres exploita-
tions dfiment autoris6es £ cet effet, la
facult6 de conclure des arrangements
particuliers sur les points du service
qui n'interessent pas la g6n6ralit6
des gouvernements. Toutefois, ces
arrangements devront rester dans
les limites de la Convention et des
R&glements y annexes, pour ce qui
concerne les brouillages que leur mise
£ execution serait susceptible de
produire dans les services des autres
pays.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 316

ARTICLE 14. — Relations with Non-
contracting Governments

§ i. Each of the contracting gov-
ernments reserves the right, for itself
and for the private operating agen-
cies which it recognizes, to determine
the conditions under which it will
admit telecommunications exchanged
with a country which has not ad-
hered to the present Convention or
to the Regulations which contain the
provisions relative to the telecom-
munications involved.

§ 2. If a telecommunication origi-
nating in a nonadhering country is
accepted by an adhering country, it
must be transmitted and, so far as it
uses the channels of a country ad-
hering to the Convention and to the
respective Regulations, the man-
datory provisions of the Convention
and of the Regulations in question,
as well as the normal rates, shall be
applicable to it.

ARTICLE 15. — Arbitration

§ i. In case of disagreement be-
tween two or more contracting gov-
ernments concerning the execution
of either the present Convention or
the Regulations contemplated in ar-
ticle 2, the dispute, if it is not settled
through diplomatic channels, shall
be submitted to arbitration at the
request of any one of the govern-
ments in disagreement.

§ 2. Unless the parties in disagree-
ment agree to adopt a procedure
already established by treaties con-
cluded between them for the settle-
ment of international disputes, or the
procedure provided for in § 7 of this
article, arbitrators shall be ap-
pointed in the following manner:

§ 3. (i) The parties shall decide,
after mutual agreement, whether the
arbitration is to be entrusted to in-
dividuals or to governments or ad-
ministrations; failing an agreement
on this matter, governments shall be
resorted to.

ARTICLE 14. — Relations avec des Etats
non contractants

§ i. Chacun des gouvernements
contractants se reserve, pour lui et
pour les exploitations privies recon-
nues par lui, la faculte de fixer ies
conditions dans lesquelles il admet
les telecommunications 6chang6es
avec un pays qui n'a pas adhere £ la
presente Convention ou au R£gle-
ment dans lequel sont comprises les
dispositions relatives aux t616com-
munications en cause.

§ 2. Si une telecommunication
originaire d'un pays non adherent
est acceptee par un pays adherent,
elle doit £tre transmise, et, pour
autant qu'elle emprunte les voies
d'un pays adherent & la Convention
et aux R£glements respectifs, les
dispositions obligatoires de la Con-
vention et des R&glements en ques-
tion ainsi que les taxes normales lui
sont appliqu6es.

ARTICLE 15. — Arbitrage

§ I. En cas de disaccord entre
deux ou plusieurs gouvernements
contractants relativement & Tex6cu-
tion soit d<e la pr<§sente Convention,
soit des R£glements pr£vus & Tarticle
2, le difKrend, s'il n'est regie par la
voie diplomatique, est soumis £ un
jugement arbitral £ la demande
d'un quelconque des gouvernements
en disaccord.

§ 2. A moins que les Parties en
disaccord ne s'entendent pour faire
usage d'une procedure d6j& etablie
par des trails conclus entre elles
pour le r£glement des conflits inter-
nationaux, ou de celle pr^vue au
§ 7 du present article, il sera precede
comme il suit £ la designation des
arbitres:

§ 3. (i) Les Parties deddent, apr£s
entente redproque, si 1'arbitrage
doit gtre confie £ des personnes ou &
des gouvernements ou administra-
tions; & defaut d 'entente, il est re-
couru & des gouvernements.

Dec. 9, 1932

TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION

119

(2) In case the arbitration is to be
entrusted to individuals, the arbitra-
tors must not be of the same nation-
ality as any one of the parties con-
cerned in the dispute.

(3) In case the arbitration is to be
entrusted to governments or ad-
ministrations, the latter must be
chosen from among the parties ad-
hering to the agreement, the applica-
tion of which caused the dispute,

§4. The party appealing to ar-
bitration shall be considered as the
plaintiff. This party shall designate
an arbitrator and notify the opposing
party thereof. The defendant must
then appoint a second arbitrator,
within two months after the receipt
of plaintiff's notification.

§ 5. If more than two parties are
involved, each group of plaintiffs or
of defendants shall appoint an arbi-
trator, observing the same procedure
as in § 4.

§ 6. The two arbitrators thus ap-
pointed shall agree in designating an
umpire who, if the arbitrators are in-
dividuals and not governments or
administrations, must not be of the
same nationality as either of them or
either of the parties involved. Fail-
ing an agreement of the arbitrators
as to the choice of the umpire, each
arbitrator shall propose an umpire in
no way concerned in the dispute.
Lots shall then be drawn between the
umpires proposed. The drawing of
lots shall be done by the Bureau of
the Union.

§ 7. Finally, the parties in dispute
shall have the right to have their
disagreement settled by a single
arbitrator. In this case, either they
shall agree on the choice of the arbi-
trator, or the latter shall be desig-
nated in conformity with the method
indicated in § 6.

§ 8. The arbitrators shall be free
to decide on the procedure to be
followed.

§ 9. Each party shall bear the ex-
penses it shall have incurred in the

(2) Dans le cas ou Tarbitrage doit
£tre confi6 £ des personnes, les
arbitres ne doivent litre de la natio-
nalite d'aucune des Parties in-
t6ressees dans le diff£rend.

(3) Dans le cas oti 1'arbitrage doit
§tre confie h. des gouvernements ou
administrations, ceux-ci doivent £tre
choisis parmi les Parties adh6rentes
£ 1'accord dont 1'application a pro-
voqu<§ le differend.

§ 4. La Partie qui fait appel £
Tarbitrage est consid6r6e comme
Partie demanderesse. Elle designe
un arbitre et le notifie 4 la partie ad-
verse. La Partie d<§fenderesse doit
alors nommer un deuxieme arbitre,
dans un d6lai de deux mois & partir
de la reception de la notification de
la demanderesse.

§ 5. S'il s'agit de plus de deux
Parties, chaque groupe de deman-
deresses ou de defenderesses procede
4 la nomination d'un arbitre en ob-
servant le proc£d£ indique au § 4.

§ 6. Les deux arbitres ainsi nom-
m6s s'entendent pour designer un
surarbitre qui, si les arbitres sont
des personnes et non pas des gou-
vernements ou administrations, ne
soit de la nationality d'aucun d'eux
et d'aucune des Parties. A defaut
pour les arbitres de s'entendre sur le
choix du surarbitre, chaque arbitre
propose un surarbitre d6sint6resse
dans le diff6rend. II est ensuite tire
au sort entre les surarbitres proposes.
Ce tirage au sort est effectu6 par le
Bureau de 1'Union.

§ 7. Enfin, les Parties en disac-
cord ont la facult^ de faire juger leur
diff6rend par un seul arbitre. Dans
ce cas, ou bien elles s'entendent sur
le choix de Tarbitre, ou bien celui-ci
est d6sign£ conform£ment £ la m£-
thode indiqu6e au § 6.

§ 8. Les arbitres arrgtent libre-
ment la procedure & suivre.

§ 9. Chaque Partie supporte les
d£penses que lui occasionne Tinstruc-

I2O

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 316

investigation of the dispute. The
cost of the arbitration shall be ap-
portioned equally among the parties
involved.

ARTICLE 16. — International Consult-
ing Committees

§ i. Consulting committees may
be formed for the purpose of study-
ing questions relating to the telecom-
munication services.

§ 2. The number, composition,
duties, and functioning of these com-
mittees are defined in the Regulations
annexed to the present Convention.

ARTICLE 17. — Bureau of the Union

§ I. A central office, called the
Bureau of the International Tele-
communication Union, shall function
under the conditions stated herein-
after:

§ 2. (i) In addition to the work
and operations provided for by the
various other articles of the Conven-
tion and of the Regulations, the
Bureau of the Union shall be charged
with:

(a) work preparatory to and fol-
lowing conferences, in which it shall
be represented in an advisory ca-
pacity;

(b) providing, in cooperation with
the organizing administration in-
volved, the secretariat of conferences
of the Union, as well as, when so re-
quested or when so provided for by
the Regulations annexed to the
present Convention, the secretariat
of meetings of committees appointed
by the Union or placed under the
auspices of the latter;

(2) On the basis of the documents
put at its disposal and of the informa-
tion which it may gather, it shall
publish periodically a journal of
information and documentation con-
cerning telecommunications.

(3) It must also, at all times, hold

tion du difKrend. Les frais d 'arbi-
trage sont repartis de fagon egale
entre les Parties en cause.

ARTICLE 16. — Comit&s consultatifs
international

§ i. Des comites consultatifs peu-
vent £tre institu6s en vue d'etudier
des questions relatives aux services
des telecommunications.

§ 2. Lenombre, la composition, les
attributions et le fonctionnement de
ces comites sont definis dans les R&gle-
ments annexes a la pr6sente Conven-
tion.

ARTICLE 17. — Bureau de V Union

§ i. Un office central, d6nomm6
Bureau de 1'Union Internationale des
telecommunications, fonctionne dans
les conditions fix6es ci-apr£s :

§ 2. (i) Outre les travaux et ope-
rations pr£vus par divers autres
articles de la Convention et des
R^glements, le Bureau de 1'Union
est charg6 :

a) des travaux preparatoires des
conferences et des travaux consecu-
tifs a ces conferences, auxquelles il
est represente avec voix consultative ;

b) d'assurer, d'accord avec Tad-
ministration organisatrice interessee,
le secretariat des conferences de
FUnion, de m§me que, lorsqu'il en
est prie ou que les Rdglements an-
nexes a la presente Convention en
disposent ainsi, le secretariat des
reunions des comites institues par
1'Union ou places sous 1'egide de
celle-ci;

c) de proceder aux publications
dont 1'utilite generale viendrait a se
reveler entre deux conferences.

(2) II publie periodiquement, a
1'aide des documents qui sont mis a
sa disposition et des renseignements
qu'il peut recueillir, un journal
d 'information et de documentation
concernant les telecommunications.

(3) II doit, d'ailleurs, se tenir en

Dec. 9, 1932

TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION

121

itself at the disposal of the contract-
ing governments to furnish them
with such opinions and information
as they may need on questions con-
cerning international telecommuni-
cations, and which it is in a better
position to have or to obtain than
these governments.

(4) It shall prepare an annual re-
port on its activities, which shall be
communicated to all members of the
Union. The operating account shall
be submitted, for examination and
approval, to the plenipotentiary or
administrative conferences provided
for in article 1 8 of the present Con-
vention.

§ 3. (i) The general expenses of
the Bureau of the Union must not
exceed, per year, the amounts speci-
fied in the Regulations annexed to
the present Convention. These gen-
eral expenses shall not include:

(a) the expenses pertaining to the
work of plenipotentiary or adminis-
trative conferences,

(&) the expenses pertaining to the
work of duly created committees.

(2) The expenses pertaining to the
plenipotentiary and administrative
conferences shall be borne by all the
governments participating therein,
in proportion to the contribution
which they pay for the operation of
the Bureau of the Union, in accord-
ance with the provisions of the fol-
lowing subparagraph (3) .

The expenses pertaining to the
meetings of the committees regu-
larly created shall be borne in ac-
cordance with the provisions of the
Regulations annexed to the present
Convention.

(3) The receipts and expenses of
the Bureau of the Union must be
carried in two separate accounts, one
for the telegraph and telephone serv-
ices, the other for the radio service.
The expenses pertaining to each of
these two divisions shall be borne by
the governments adhering to the cor-
responding Regulations. For the

tout temps £ la disposition des gou-
vernements contractants pour leur
fournir, sur les questions qui int^res-
sent les telecommunications interna-
tionales, les avis et les renseigne-
ments dont ils ppurraient avoir
besoin, et qu'il serait mieux en me-
sure que ces gouvernements de
posseder ou de se procurer.

(4) II fait, sur sa gestion, un rap-
port annuel qui est communique &
tous les membres de 1' Union. Le
compte de gestion est soumis £
Texamen et £ 1'appreciation des con-
ferences de pienipotentiaires ou ad-
ministratives, prevues par I'article
1 8 de la presente Convention,

§ 3. (i) Les frais communs du
Bureau de 1' Union ne doivent pas
depasser, par annee, les sommes
fixees dans les R£glements annexes
£ la presente Convention. Ces frais
comrnuns ne comprennent pas:

a) les frais afferents aux travaux
des conferences de pienipotentiaires
ou administratives,

5) les frais afferents aux travaux
de comites regulierement crees.

(2) Les frais afferents aux confe-
rences de pienipotentiaires et admi-
nistratives sont supportes par tous les
gouvernements, qui y prennent part
proportionnellement & la contribu-
tion qu'ils payent pour le fonctionne-
ment du Bureau de 1'Union, suivant
les dispositions de 1'alinea (3) ci-apr&s.

Les frais afferents aux reunions
des comites regulierement crees sont
supportes suivant les dispositions
des R&glements annexes i la presente
Convention.

(3) Les recettes et les depenses du
Bureau de 1'Union doivent ^faire
1'objet de deux comptes distincts,
1'un pour les services teiegraphique
et teiephonique, 1'autre pour le
service des radio communications.
Les frais afferents i chacune de ces
deux divisions sont supportes par les
gouvernements adherents aux R£gle-

122

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 316

apportioning of these expenses, the
adhering governments shall be di-
vided into six classes, each contribut-
ing at the rate of a certain number of
units, namely:

ist class: 25 units
2d class : 20 units
3d class
4th class
5th class

6th class :

15 units
10 units
5 units
3 units

(4) Each government shall inform
the Bureau of the Union, directly or
through its administration, of the
class in which its country is to be
placed. This classification shall be
communicated to the members of the
Union.

(5) The amounts advanced by the
government supervising the Bureau
of the Union must be refunded by
the debtor governments with the
briefest possible delay, and, at the
latest, at the end of the fourth month
following the month during which
the account was rendered. After
this period, the amounts due shall
bear interest, accruing to the creditor
government, at the rate of six per-
cent (6%) per annum, counting from
the date of expiration of the above-
mentioned period.

§ 4. The Bureau of the Union shall
be placed under the high supervision
of the Government of the Swiss Con-
federation which shall regulate its
organization, supervise its finances,
make the necessary advances, and
audit the annual accounts.

CHAPTER II

CONFERENCES

ARTICLE 18. — Conferences of Pleni-
potentiaries and Administrative
Conferences

§ i. The provisions of the present
Convention shall be subject to revi-
sion by conferences of plenipoten-
tiaries of the contracting govern-
ments.

ments correspondants. Pour la r6-
partition de ces frais, les gouverne-
ments adherents sont divis6s en six
classes, contribuant -chacun dans la
proportion d'un certain nombre
d 'unites, savoir:

ire classe: 25 unites,
2e classe: 20 unites,
3e classe: 15 unites,
4e classe: 10 unites,
5e classe: 5 unites,
6e classe: 3 unites.

(4) Chaque gouvernement fait
connaitre au Bureau de 1'Union, soit
directement, soit par rinterm^diaire
de son administration, dans quelle
classe son pays doit £tre rang6.
Cette classification est communique
aux membres de TUnion.

(5) Les sommes avanc6es par le
gouvernement qui contr61e le Bureau
de TUnion doivent £tre rembours6es,
par les gouvernements d6biteurs,
dans le plus bref d61ai et, au plus tard,
& Texpiration du quatri£me mois
qui suit le mois durant lequel le
compte a 6t6 envoy<§. Pass6 ce
d61ai, les sommes dues sont pro-
ductives d'int£r6ts, au profit du
gouvernement crMiteur, £ raison de
six pour cent (6%) Tan, & compter
du jour de 1'expiration du d61ai
susmentionn6.

§ 4. Le Bureau de T Union est
plac6 sous la haute surveillance du
Gouvernement de la Confederation
suisse, qui en r&gle 1'organisation, en
contrdle les finances, fait les avances
n6cessaires et v6rifie le compte
annuel.

CHAPITRE II

CONFERENCES

ARTICLE 18. — Conferences de pleni-
potentiaires et conferences adminis-
tfatives

§ i. Les prescriptions de la pr6-
sente Convention sont revisables par
des conferences de pl£nipotentiaires
des gouvernements contractants.

Dec. 9, 1932

TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION

123

§ 2. Revision of the Convention
shall be undertaken when it has been
so decided by a preceding conference
of plenipotentiaries, or when at least
twenty contracting governments have
so stated their desire to the govern-
ment of the country in which the
Bureau of the Union is located.

§ 3. The provisions of the Regula-
tions annexed to this Convention
shall be subject to revision by ad-
ministrative conferences of delegates
from the contracting governments
which have approved the Regula-
tions to be revised, each conference
itself determining the place and time
for the following meeting.

§ 4. Each administrative confer-
ence may permit the participation, in
an advisory capacity, of private
operating agencies recognized by
the respective contracting govern-
ments.

ARTICLE 19. — Change of Date of a
Conference

§ I. The time set for the meeting
of a conference of plenipotentiaries
or of an administrative conference
may be advanced or postponed if
request to this effect is made by at
least ten of the contracting govern-
ments to the government of the
country in which the Bureau of the
Union is located, and if such proposal
is agreed to by the majority of the
contracting governments which shall
have forwarded their opinion within
the time indicated.

§ 2. The conference shall then be
held in the country originally desig-
nated, if the government of that
country consents. Otherwise, the
contracting governments shall be
consulted through the government
of the country in which the Bureau
of the Union is located.

ARTICLE 20. — Internal Regulations of
the Conferences

§ I. Before any other deliberation,
each conference shall establish Inter-
nal Regulations containing the rules

§ 2. II est procede" £ la revision de
la Convention lorsqu'il en a 6t£ ainsi
decid6 par une precedente conference
de plenipotentiaires, ou lorsque
vingt ^ gouvernements contractants
au nioins en ont manifeste le desir au
gouvernement du pays oil siege le
Bureau de T Union.

§ 3. Les prescriptions des R£gle-
ments annexes & la presente Conven-
tion sont revisables par des confe"-
rences administratives de d61egu6s
des gouvernements contractants qui
ont approuv6 les Rfeglements soumis
£ revision, chaque conference fixant
elle-m^me le lieu et 1'epoque de la
reunion suivante.

§ 4. Chaque conference adminis-
trative peut permettre la participa-
tion, & titre consultatif, des ex-
ploitations privies reconnues par les
gouvernements contractants re-
spectifs.

ARTICLE 19. — Changement de la date
d'une conference

§ I. L'epoque fix6e pour la re-
union d'une conference, soit de
plenipotentiaires, soit administra-
tive, peut £tre avancee ou reculee si
la demande en est faite par dix, au
moins, des gouvernements contrac-
tants, au gouvernement du pays ou
le Bureau de 1* Union a son si&ge, et si
cette proposition recoit 1'agrement
de la majorit6 des gouvernements
contractants qui auront fait par-
venir leur avis dans le delai fix6.

§ 2. La conference a alors lieu
dans le pays primitivement d6sign6,
si le gouvernement de ce pays y con-
sent. Dans le cas contraire, il est
proc£d6 £ une consultation des gou-
vernements contractants, par les
soins du gouvernement du pays oil le
Bureau de TUnion a son siege.

ARTICLE 20. — Rbglement interieur des
conferences

§ i. Avant toute autre d<§lib6ra-
tion, chaque conference etablit un
reglement int6rieur, qui contient les

124

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 316

according to which the debates and
the work shall be organized and
conducted.

§ 2. For this purpose, the confer-
ence shall take as a basis the Internal
Regulations of the preceding confer-
ence, which it may modify if deemed
advisable.

ARTICLE 21. — Language

§ i. The language used in drafting
the acts of the conferences and for all
the documents of the Union, shall be
French.

§ 2, (i) In the discussions of con-
ferences, the French and English
languages shall be permitted.

(2) Speeches made in French shall
immediately be translated into Eng-
lish, and vice versa, by official inter-
preters of the Bureau of the Union.

(3) Other languages may also be
used in the discussions of the confer-
ences, on condition that the delegates
using them provide for the transla-
tion of their own speeches into
French or into English.

(4) Likewise these delegates may,
if they so desire, have speeches in
French or in English translated into
their own language.

CHAPTER III

GENERAL PROVISIONS

ARTICLE 22. — Telecommunication as
a Public Service

The contracting governments rec-
ognize the right of the public to
correspond by means of the interna-
tional service of public correspond-
ence. The service, the charges, the
guarantees shall be the same for all
senders, without any priority or pref-
erence whatsoever not provided for
by the Convention or the Regula-
tions annexed thereto.

ARTICLE 23. — Responsibility

The contracting governments de-
clare that they accept no respon-

r&gles suivant lesquelles sont or-
ganises et conduits les debats et les
travaux.

§ 2. A cet effet, la conference
prend comme base le r&glement in-
terieur de la pr6c6dente conference,
qu'elle modifie si elle I'estime utile.

ARTICLE 21. — Langue

§ i. La langue employee pour la
redaction des actes des conferences et
pour tous les documents de 1'Union
est le frangais.

§ 2. (i) Dans les debats des con-
ferences, les langues frangaise et
anglaise sont admises.

(2) Les discours prononc6s en
fran^ais sont imm6diatement tra-
duits en anglais, et r6ciproquement,
par des traducteurs officiels du
Bureau de TUnion.

(3) En outre, d'autres langues
peuvent £tre utilises dans les debats
des conferences, & la condition que les
deiegues qui les emploient pourvoient
eux~m6mes & la traduction de leurs
discours en frangais ou en anglais.

(4) De m§me, ces deiegues peu-
vent, s'ils le desirent, faire traduire
dans leur propre langue les discours
prononces en frangais ou en anglais.

CHAPITRE III
DISPOSITIONS D'ORDRE G^N^RAL

ARTICLE 22. — La telecommunication
service public

Les gouvernements contractants
reconnaissent au public le droit de
correspondre au moyen du service
international de la correspondance
publique. Le service, les taxes, les
garanties seront les m£mes pour tous
les expediteurs, sans priorite ni pre-
ference quelconques non prevues par
la Convention ou les R&glements y
annexes.

ARTICLE 23. — Responsabilitg

Les gouvernements contractants
dedarent n'accepter aucune respon-

Dec. 9, 1932

TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION

125

sibility in regard to the users of
the international telecommunication
service.

ARTICLE 24.

Secrecy of Telecommu-
nications

§ i. The contracting governments
agree to take all the measures possi-
ble, compatible with the system of
telecommunication used, with a view
to insuring the secrecy of interna-
tional correspondence.

§ 2. However, they reserve the
right to communicate international
correspondence to the proper author-
ities, in order to insure either the ap-
plication of their internal legislation,
or the execution of international
conventions, to which the govern-
ments concerned are parties.

ARTICLE 25. — Constitution, Opera-
tion, and Protection of the Telecom-
munication Installations and Chan-
nels

§ I . The contracting governments,
in agreement with the other contract-
ing governments concerned, shall
establish, under the best technical
conditions, the channels and installa-
tions necessary to carry on the rapid
and uninterrupted exchange of tele-
communications in the international
service.

§ 2. So far as possible, these chan-
nels and installations must be oper-
ated by the best methods and pro-
cedures which the practice of the
service shall have made known ; they
must be maintained constantly in
operating condition and kept abreast
of scientific and technical progress.

§ 3. The contracting governments
shall insure the protection of these
channels and installations within the
limits of their respective action.

§ 4. Unless other conditions are
laid down by special arrangements,
each contracting government shall,
at its own expense, establish and
maintain the sections of interna-
tional conductors included within the
limits of the territory of its country.

sabilite & regard des usagers du
service international de telecom-
munication.

ARTICLE 24. — Secret des ^com-
munications

§ I. Les gouvernements contrac-
tants s'engagent & prendre toutes les
mesures possibles, compatibles avec
le systeme de telecommunication
employe, en vue d 'assurer le secret
des correspondances Internationales.

§ 2. Toutefois, ils se reservent le
droit de communiquer les correspon-
dances internationales aux autorites
competentes pour assurer, soit Tap-
plication de leur legislation interieure,
soit Texecution des conventions in-
ternationales auxquelles les gouver-
nements interesses sont Parties.

ARTICLE 25. — Constitution, exploita-
tion et sauvegarde des installations
et des voies de telecommunication

§ i. Les gouvernements contrac-
tants etablissent, en accord avec les
autres gouvernements contractants
interesses et dans les meilleures con-
ditions techniques, les voies et in-
stallations necessaires pour assurer
Tediange rapide et ininterrompu des
telecommunications du service in-
ternational.

§ 2. Autant que possible, ces voies
et installations doivent £tre exploi-
tees par les methodes et procedes les
meilleurs que la pratique du service
aura fait connaitre, entretenues en
constant etat d'utilisation et main-
tenues au niveau des progres scien-
tifiques et techniques.

§ 3. Les gouvernements contrac-
tants assurent la sauvegarde de ces
voies et installations dans les limites
de leur action respective.

§ 4. Chaque gouvernement con-
tractant etablit et entretient It ses
frais — £ rnoins d 'arrangement par-
ticulier fixant d'autres conditions —
les sections des conducteurs inter-
nationaux comprises dans les limites
du territoire de son pays.

126

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 316

§ 5. In the countries where certain
telecommunication services are oper-
ated by private operating agencies
recognized by the governments, the
above-mentioned obligations shall be
undertaken by the private operating
agencies.

ARTICLE 26. — Stoppage of Telecom-
munications

§ i. The contracting governments
reserve the right to stop the trans-
mission of any private telegram or
radiotelegram which might appear
dangerous to the safety of the state
or contrary to the laws of the coun-
try, to public order, or to decency,
provided that they immediately
notify the office of origin of the stop-
page of the said communication or of
any part thereof, except when it
might appear dangerous to the safety
of the state to issue such notice.

§ 2. The contracting governments
likewise reserve the right to interrupt
any private telephone communica-
tion which might appear dangerous
to the safety of the state or contrary
to the laws of the country, to public
order, or to decency.

ARTICLE 27. — Suspension of Service

Each contracting government re-
serves the right to suspend the serv-
ice of international telecommunica-
tion for an indefinite time if it deems
necessary, either generally or only as
regards certain connections and/or
certain classes of communications,
provided that it immediately so ad-
vise each of the other contracting
governments, through the intermedi-
ary of the Bureau of the Union.

ARTICLE 28. — Investigation of Viola-
tions

The contracting governments un-
dertake to inform each other con-
cerning violations of the provisions

§ 5. Dans les pays oil certains ser-
vices de telecommunication sont as-
sures par des exploitations privees
reconnues par les gouvernements, les
engagements ci-dessus sont pris par
les exploitations privies.

ARTICLE 26. — ArrU des ^communi-
cations

§ i. Les gouvernements contrac-
tants se r<§servent le droit d'arr^ter
la transmission de tout te!6gramme
ou radiot616gramrne priv6 qui parai-
trait dangereux pour la sfirete" de
1'Etat ou contraire aux lois du pays,
£ Tordre public ou aux bonnes
mceurs, & charge d'avertir imm6di-
atement le bureau d'origine de 1'arrgt
de ladite communication ou djune
partie quelconque de celle-ci, sauf
dans le cas oti remission de 1'avis
peut paraitre dangereuse pour la sfir-
et6 de 1'Etat.

§ 2. Les gouvernements contrac-
tants se reservent aussi le droit de
couper toute communication tele-
phonique privee qui peut paraitre
dangereuse pour la sftret6 de 1'Etat ou
contraire aux lois du pays, & Tordre
public ou aux bonnes mceurs.

ARTICLE 27. — Suspension du service

Chaque gouvernement contrac-
tant se reserve le droit de suspendre
le service des telecommunications
internationales pour un temps inde-
termine, s'il le juge necessaire, soit
d'une maniere generate, soit seule-
ment pour certaines relations et/ou
pour certaines natures de corre-
spondances, & charge pour lui d'en
aviser imm6diatement chacun des
autres gouvernements contractants,
par Pinterm6diaire du Bureau de
1'Union.

ARTICLE 28. — Instruction des con-
traventions

Les gouvernements contractants
s'engagent & se renseigner mutuelle-
ment au sujet des infractions aux

Dec. 9, 1932

TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION

127

of the present Convention and of the
Regulations which they accept, in
order to facilitate the action to be
taken.

ARTICLE 29. — Charges and Franking
Privileges

The provisions relating to the
charges for telecommunications and
the various cases in which the latter
enjoy franking privileges are laid
down in the Regulations annexed to
the present Convention.

ARTICLE 30. — Priority of Transmis-
sion for Government Telegrams and
Radiotelegrams

In transmission, government tele-
grams and radio telegrams shall enjoy
priority over other telegrams and
radio telegrams, except in the case
when the sender expressly waives
such right of priority.

ARTICLE 31. — Secret Language

§ i. Government telegrams and
radiotelegrams as well as service
telegrams and radiotelegrams, in all
relations, may be written in secret
language.

§ 2. Private telegrams and radio-
telegrams may be sent in secret
language between all the countries,
except those which previously, through
the intermediary of the Bureau of the
Union, have announced that they do
not permit such language for these
categories of messages,

§ 3. Contracting governments which
do not permit private telegrams and
radiotelegrams in secret language
from or to their own territory must
permit them to pass in transit, except
in the case of suspension of service
provided for in article 27.

ARTICLE 32. — Monetary Unit

The monetary unit used in the
composition of international tele-
communication rates and in setting

dispositions de la presente Conven-
tion et des R£glements qu'ils accep-
tent, afin de faciliter les poursuites £
exercer.

ARTICLE 29. — Taxes et franchise

Les dispositions relatives aux
taxes des telecommunications et les
divers cas dans lesquels celles-ci
b efficient de la franchise sont fixes
dans les R&glements annexes & la pre-
sente Convention.

ARTICLE 30. — Priority de transmis-
sion des ttUgrammes et radiotele-
grammes d'Etat

Dans la transmission, les tele-
grammes et radioteiegrammes d'Etat
jouissent de la priorite sur les autres
teiegrammes et radioteiegrammes,
sauf dans le cas oti Texpediteur de-
clare renoncer £ ce droit de priorite.

ARTICLE 31. — Langage secret

§ I. Les teiegrammes et les
teiegrammes d'Etat ainsi que les
teiegrammes et les radioteiegrammes
de service peuvent £tre rediges en
langage secret dans toutes les rela-
tions.

§ 2. Les teiegrammes et les radio-
teiegrammes prives peuvent §tre
emis en langage secret entre tous les
pays, & Texception de ceux qui auront
prlalablement notifie, par Tinter-
mediaire du Bureau de 1'Union, qu'ils
n'admettent pas ce langage pour ces
categories de correspondences.

§ 3. Les gouvernements contrac-
tants qui n'admettent pas les tele-
grammes et les radioteiegrammes
prives en langage secret en provenance
ou £ destination de leur propre ter-
ritoire doivent les laisser circuler en
transit, sauf le cas de suspension de
service defini & 1'article 27.

ARTICLE 32. — Unite mon&taire

L'unite monetaire employee £ la
composition des tarifs des telecom-
munications internationales et &

128

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 316

up the international accounts shall
be the gold franc of loo centimes,
weighing 10/31 of a gram, and of a
fineness of 0.900.

ARTICLE 33. — Rendering of Accounts

The contracting governments must
account to one another for the
charges collected by their respective
services.

CHAPTER IV

SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR RADIO

ARTICLE 34. — Intercommunication

§ I. Stations carrying on radio
communications in the mobile serv-
ice shall be bound, within the scope
of their normal operation, to ex-
change radio communications with
one another irrespective of the radio
system they have adopted.

§2. In order not to hinder scien-
tific progress, however, the provi-
sions of the preceding paragraph
shall not prevent the use of a radio
system incapable of communicating
with other systems provided that
this inability is due to the specific
nature of the system and that it is
not the result of devices adopted
solely for the purpose of preventing
intercommunication .

ARTICLE 35. — Interference

§ i. All stations, regardless of
their purpose, must, so far as possi-
ble, be established and operated in
such a manner as not to interfere
with the radio services or communi-
cations of either the other contract-
ing governments, or the private
operating agencies recognized by
these contracting governments and
of other duly authorized operating
agencies which carry on radio-com-
munication service.

§2. Each contracting government
which does not operate the radio
facilities itself undertakes to require

T^tablissement des comptes inter-
nationaux est le franc-or 4 100 cen-
times, d'un poids de 10/31 de gramme
et d'un titre de 0,900.

ARTICLE 33. — Reddition des comptes

Les gouvernements contractants
se doivent r6ciproquement compte
des taxes percues par leurs services
respectifs.

CHAPITRE IV

DISPOSITIONS SPECIALES AUX RADIO-
COMMUNICATIONS

ARTICLE 34. — Intercommunication

§ i. Les stations assuran ties radio-
communications dans le service mo-
bile sont tenues, dans les limites de
leur affectation normale, d'6changer
r6ciproquement les radiocommuni-
cations sans distinction du syst&me
radio&ectrique adopt6 par elles.

§ 2. Toutefois, afin de ne pas en-
traver les progr£s scientifiques, les
dispositions du paragraphe pr6c6dent
n'empgchent pas Temploi d'un sys-
t£me radio&ectrique incapable de
communiquer avec d'autres sys-
t£mes, pourvu que cette incapacity
soit due £ la nature sp6cifique de ce
syst&me et qu'elle ne soit pas Teffet
de dispositifs adopt&s uniquement
en vue d'emp^cher rintercommunir
cation.

ARTICLE 35. — Brouillages

§ i. Toutes les stations, quel que
soit leur objet, doivent, autant que
possible, £tre 6tablies et exploit6es
de manure £ ne pas troubler les
communications ou services radio-
£l£ctriques, soit des autres gou-
vernements contractants, soit des
exploitations privies reconnues par
ces gouvernementscontractantsetdes
autres exploitations dfiment autori-
sees qui effectuent un service de
radiocommunication .

§ 2. Chacun des gouvernements
contractants n'exploitant pas lui-
m£me les moyens de radiocommuni-

Dec. 9, 1932

TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION

129

the private operating agencies rec-
ognized by it and the other operating
agencies duly authorized for this pur-
pose, to observe the provisions of § I
above.

ARTICLE 36. — Distress Calls and
Messages

Stations participating in the mo-
bile service shall be obliged to accept,
with absolute priority, distress calls
and messages regardless of their
origin, to reply in the same manner
to such messages, and immediately
to take such action in regard thereto
as they may require.

ARTICLE 37. — False or Deceptive Dis-
tress Signals — Irregular Use of Call
Signals

The contracting governments agree
to take the steps required to prevent
the transmission or the putting into
circulation of false or deceptive dis-
tress signals or distress calls, and the
use, by a station, of call signals which
have not been regularly assigned to
it.

ARTICLE 38. — Limited Service

Notwithstanding the provisions of
§ I of article 34, a station may be as-
signed to a limited international tele-
communication service, determined
by the purpose of such telecommuni-
cation or by other circumstances
independent of the system.

ARTICLE 39. — Installations of Na-
tional Defense Services

§ i. The contracting governments
retain their full freedom in regard to
radio installations not covered by
article 9 and, particularly, the mili-
tary stations of land, maritime, or air
forces.

§ 2. (i) However, these installa-
tions and stations must, so far as pos-

cation s 'engage & exiger des exploi-
tations privies reconnues par lui et
des autres exploitations dtiment
autoris£es £ cet effet Tobservation de
la prescription du § i ci-dessus.

ARTICLE 36, — Appels et messages de
detresse

Les stations participant au service
mobile sont obligees d'accepter par
priority absolue les appels et mes-
sages de detresse, quelle qu'en soit
la provenance, de repondre de m£me
& ces messages et d'y donner imm£di-
atement la suite qu'ils comportent.

ARTICLE 37. — Signaux de d&tresse
faux ou trompeurs — Usage irregu-
lier d'indicatifs d'appel

Les gouvernements contractants
s'engagent & prendre les mesures
utiles pour r6primer la transmission
ou la mise en circulation de signaux
de detresse ou d'appels de detresse
faux ou trompeurs et 1'usage, par une
station, d'indicatifs d'appel qui ne
lui ont pas 6t<§ reguli&rement at-
tribues.

ARTICLE 38. — Service restreint

Nonobstant les dispositions du
§ ier de 1'article 34, une station peut
6tre affect£e & un service interna-
tional restreint de t616communication
d6termin6 par le but de ^cette tele-
communication ou par d'autres cir-
constances independantes du sys-
t£me employ^.

ARTICLE 39. — Installations des ser-
vices de defense nationale

§ i. Les gouvernements contrac-
tants conservent leur enti&re libert£
relativement aux installations radio-
£lectriques non pr&vues & Tarticle 9
et, notamment, aux stations mili-
taires des forces terrestres, mari-
times ou a6riennes.

§2. (i) Toutefois, ces installa-
tions et stations doivent, autant que

130

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 316

sible, comply with the regulatory
provisions concerning aid to be ren-
dered in case of distress and measures
to be taken to avoid interference.
They must also, to the extent possi-
ble, comply with the regulatory
provisions concerning the types of
waves and the frequencies to be used,
according to the nature of the service
performed by the said services.

(2) Moreover, when these installa-
tions and stations exchange public
correspondence or engage in the spe-
cial services governed by the Regu-
lations annexed to the present Con-
vention, they must, in general, com-
ply with the regulatory provisions
for the conduct of such services.

possible, observer les dispositions
r<§glementaires relatives aux secours £
prater en cas de d6tresse et aux
mesures & prendre pour emp^cher le
brouillage. Elles doivent aussi, au-
tant que possible, observer les dis-
positions r<§glementaires en ce qui
concerne les types d'ondes et les fr6-
quences & utiliser, selon le genre de
service que lesdites stations assurent.

(2) En outre, lorsque ces instal-
lations et stations font un ^change de
correspondance publique ou parti-
cipent aux services sp&iaux r£gis par
les R6glements annexes & la prfeente
Convention, elles doivent se con-
former, en g6n£ral, aux prescriptions
r£glementaires pour Pex6cution de
ces services.

CHAPTER V

FINAL PROVISIONS

ARTICLE 40. — Effective Date of the
Convention

The present Convention shall be-
come effective on the first day of
January, nineteen hundred and thirty-
four.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the respec-
tive plenipotentiaries have signed
the Convention in a single copy
which shall remain deposited in the
archives of the Government of Spain
and one copy of which shall be for-
warded to each government.

Done at Madrid, December 9,
1932.

CHAPITRE V

DISPOSITION FINALE

ARTICLE 40. — Mise en vigueur de la
Convention

La pr6sente Convention entrera en
vigueur le premier Janvier mil neuf
cent trente-quatre.

EN FOI DE QUOI, les p!6nipoten-
tiaires respectifs ont sign € la Con-
vention en un exemplaire qui restera
d<§pos£ aux archives du Gouverne-
ment de TEspagne et dont une copie
sera remise & chaque gouvernement.

Fait i Madrid, le 9 d6cembre 1932.

[Signed:] For the Union of South Africa: H. J. LENTON, A. R. McLACH-
LAN; for Germany: HERMANN GIESS, Dr. ING. HANS CARL STEIDLE, Dr.
PAUL JAGER, Dr. HANS HARBICH, PAUL MUNCH, MARTIN FEUERHAHN,
SIEGFRIED MEY, Dr. FRIEDRICH HERATH, RUDOLF SALZMANN, ERHARD
MAERTENS, CURT WAGNER; for the Argentine Republic: D. GARCIA MAN-
SILLA, R. CORREA LUNA, Luis S. CASTiNEiRAS, M. SAENZ BRIONES; for the
Commonwealth of Australia: J. M. CRAWFORD; for Austria: RUDOLPH
OESTREICHER, ING. H. PFEUFFER; for Belgium: B. MAUS, R. CORTEIL, Jos.
LAMBERT, H. FOSSION; for Bolivia: GEORGES SAENZ; for Brazil: Luis Gui-
MARAES; for Canada: ALFRED DURANLEAU, W. ARTHUR STEEL, JEAN DESY;
for Chile: E. BERMUDEZ; for China: LINGOH WANG; for the Vatican City

Dec. 9, 1932 TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 13!

State: GUISEPPE GIANFRANCESCHI ; for the Republic of Colombia: Jos£
JOAQUIN CASAS, ALBERTO SANCHEZ DE IRIARTE, W. MACLELLAN; for the
French Colonies, Protectorates and Territories under French Mandate: G.
CAROUR; for the Portuguese Colonies: ERNESTO JULIO NAVARO, ARNALDO
DE PAIVA CARVALHO, JOSE M&NDES DE VASCONCELLOS GUIMARAES, MARIO
CORREA BARATA DA CRUZ; for the Swiss Confederation: G. KELLER, E.
METZLER; for Belgian Congo: G. TONDEUR; for Costa Rica: A. MARTIN
LANUZA; for Cuba: MANUEL S. PICHARDO; for Curasao and Surinam: G.
SCHOTEL, HOOGEWOONING; for Cyrenaica: G. GNEME, GIAN FRANCO DELLA
PORTA; for Denmark: KAY CHRISTIANSEN, C. LERCHE, GREDSTED; for
Danzig Free City: ING. HENRYK KOWALSKI, ZANDER; for the Dominican
Republic: E. BRACHE (Junior), JUAN DE OL6zAGA; for Egypt: R. MURRAY,
MOHAMED SAID; for the Republic of El Salvador: RAOUL CONTRERAS; for
Ecuador: Hip6LiTo DE MOZONCILLO, ABEL ROMEO CASTILLO; for Eritrea:
G. GNEME, GIAN FRANCO DELLA PORTA; for Spain: MIGUEL SASTRE, RAMON
MIGUEL NIETO, GABRIEL HOMBRE, FRANCISCO VIDAL, J. DE ENCIO, ToMAs
FERNANDEZ QUINTANA, LEOPOLDO CAL, TRINIDAD MATRES, CARLOS DE
BORDONS; for the United States of America: EUGENE O. SYKES, C. B. JOL-
LIFFE, WALTER LICHTENSTEIN, IRVIN STEWART; for the Empire of Ethiopia:
TAGAGNE ; for Finland : NIILO ORASMAA, VILJO YLOSTALO ; for France : JULES
GAUTIER; for the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland:
F. W. PHILLIPS, J. LOUDEN, F. W. HOME, C. H. BOYD, J. P. G. WORLLEDGE;
for Greece: Th. PENTHEROUDAKIS, STAM NICOLIS; for Guatemala: VIRGILIO
RoDRfcuEz BETATA, ENRIQUE TRAUMANN, RICARDO CASTANEDA PAGANINI;
for the Republic of Honduras: ANT* GRAINO; for Hungary: Dr. FRAN-
gois HAVAS, Ing. JULES ERDOSS; for the Italian Islands of the Aegean: G.
GNEME, E. MARIANI; for British India: M. L. PASRICHA, P. J. EDMUNDS; for
the Butch East Indies : A. J. H. VAN LEEUWEN, VAN DOOREN, G. SCHOTEL,
HOOGEWOONING; for the Irish Free State: P. S. 6H-£iGEARTAiGH, E. Cui-
SIN; for Iceland: G. HLIDDAL; for Italy: G. GNEME, G. MONTEFINALE; for
Japan, for Chosen, Taiwan, Karafuto, the Leased Territory of Kwantung
and the South Seas Islands under Japanese Mandate: SAICHIRO KOSHIDA,
ZENSHICHI ISHII, SATOSHI FURIHATA, Y. YONEZAWA, T. NAKAGAMI, TAKEO
IINO; for Latvia: B. EINBERG; for Liberia: Luis MA. SOLER; for Lithuania:
Ing. K. GAIGALIS; for Luxemburg: JAAQUES; for Morocco: DUBEAUCLARD;
for Mexico: G. ESTRADA, EMILIO TORRES, AUGUSTIN FLORES, JR., S. TAYA-
BAS; for Nicaragua: Jos6 GARC!A PLAZA; for Norway: T. ENGSET, HERMOD
PETERSEN, ANDR. HADLAND; for New Zealand: M. B. ESSON; for the Re-
public of Panama: M. LASSO DE LA VEGA; for the Netherlands: H. J.
BOETJE, H. C. FELSER, C. H. DE Vos, J. A. BLAND VD BERG, W. DOGTEROM;
for Peru: JUAN DE OSMA; for Persia: MOHSEN KHAN RAIS; for Poland: Ing.
HENRYK KOWALSKI, ST. ZUCHMANTOWICZ, KAZIMIERZ GOEBEL, K. KRULISZ,
KAZIMIERZ SZYMANSKI; for Portugal: MIGUEL VAZ DUARTE BACELAR, JOSE
DE Liz FERREIRA, Junior, DAVID DE SOUSA PIRES, JOAQUIM RODRIGUES
GONCALVES; for Roumania: Ing. T. TANASESCO; for Italian Somaliland: G.
GNEME; for Sweden: G. WOLD; for Syria and Lebanon: M. MORILLON; for
Czechoslovakia: Ing. STRNAD, Dr. OTTO KU&RA, VACLAV KU&RA, Ing.
JAROMIR SVOBODA; for Tripolitania: G. GNEME, D. CRETY; for Tunis:
CROUZET; for Turkey: FAHRI, L CEMAL, MAZHAR; for the Union of Soviet
Socialist Republics: EUGENE HIRSCHFELD, ALEXANDRE KOKADEEV; for
Uruguay: ad referendum du Gouvernement de TUruguay, DANIEL CAS-
TELLANOS; for Venezuela: CfesAR MARMOL CUERVO, ANTONIO REYES; for
Jugoslavia: D. A. ZLATANOVITCH.

132

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 316

ANNEX
(See article i, § 2)

DEFINITION OF TERMS USED IN THE
INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION
CONVENTION

Telecommunication: Any telegraph or
telephone communication of signs, signals,
writings, images, and sounds of any
nature, by wire, radio, or other systems
or processes of electric or visual (sema-
phore) signaling,

Radio communication: Any telecom-
munication by means of Hertzian waves.
Radiotelegram: Telegram originating in
or intended for a mobile station, trans-
mitted on all or part of its route over the
radio-communication channels of the mo-
bile service.

Government telegrams and radiotele-
grams: Those emanating from:

(a) the head of a government;
(&) a minister, member of a govern-
ment;

(c) the head of a colony, protector-
ate, overseas territory, or territory un-
der sovereignty, authority, or mandate
of the contracting governments;

(d) commanders in chief of land,
naval, or air military forces;

(e) diplomatic or consular officers of
the contracting governments;

(/) the secretary general of the
League of Nations,
as well as the replies to such messages.

Service telegrams and radiotelegrams:
Those emanating from the telecommuni-
cation administrations of the contracting
governments, or from any private operat-
ing agency recognized by one of these gov-
ernments, and which refer to international
telecommunications, or to matters of pub-
lic interest determined by agreement
among the said administrations.

Private telegrams and radiotelegrams:
Those other than a service or government
telegram and radiotelegram.

Public^ correspondence: Any telecom-
munication which the offices and stations,
by reason of their being at the disposal of
the public, must accept for transmission.

Private operating agency: Any indi-
vidual, company, or corporation, other

ANNEXE
(voir article premier, § 2)

DEFINITION DES TERMES EMPLOYES DANS
LA CONVENTION INTERNATIONALE DES
TELECOMMUNICATIONS

Telecommunication: Toute communica-
tion telegraphique ou telephonique de
signes, de signaux, d'taits, d'images et de
sons de toute nature, par fil, radio ou
autres systemes ou precedes de signalisa-
tion electriques ou visuels (semaphores).

Radiocommunication: Toute tele" com-
munication a Paide des ondes hertziennes.

Radiot6legramme: T61e"gramme origi-
naire ou a destination d'une station mobile
transmis, sur tout ou partie de son par-
cours, par les voies de radiocommunica-
tion du service mobile.

Telegrammes et radiotelegrammes d'Etat:
Ceux qui 6manent :

a) d'un chef d'Etat;

b) d'un ministre membre d'un gou-
vernement;

c) d'un chef de colonie, protectorat,
territoire d'outre-mer ou territoire sous
souverainete, autorite ou mandat des
gouvernements contractants ;

d) des commandants en chef des
forces militaires terrestres, navales ou
aeriennes;

e) des agents diplomatiques ou con-
sulaires des gouvernements contrac-
tants;

/) du secretaire g£n6ral de la Soci6t6
des Nations,

ainsi que les reponses a ces correspon-
dances.

Telegrammes et radiotelegrammes de
service: Ceux qui 6manent des administra-
tions de telecommunication des gouverne-
ments contractants ou de toute exploita-
tion privee reconnue par un de ces
gouvernements et qui sont relatifs aux
telecommunications internationales, soit
a des objets d'inter^t public determines de
concert par lesdites administrations.

Telegrammes et radiotelegrammes prives:
Les teiegrammes et radiotelegrammes
autres que les teiegrammes et radiotele-
grammes de service ou d'Etat.

Correspondence publique: Toute tele-
communication que les bureaux et sta-
tions, par le fait de leur mise a la disposi-
tion du public, doivent accepter pour
transmission.

Exploitation privee: Tout particulier ou
toute compagnie ou corporation autre

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

133

than a governmental institution or agency,
which is recognized by the government
concerned and operates telecommunica-
tion installations for the purpose of ex-
changing public correspondence.

Administration: A government admin-
istration.

Public service: A service for the use of
the public in general.

International service: A telecommunica-
tion service between offices or stations
subject to different countries, or between
stations of the mobile service except when
the latter are of the same nationality and
are within the limits of the country to
which they belong. An internal or na-
tional telecommunication service which is
likely to cause interference with other
services beyond the limits of the country
in which it operates, shall be considered
as an international service from the stand-
point of interference.

Limited service: A service which can be
used only by specified persons or for spe-
cial purposes.

Mobile service: A radio-communication
service carried on between mobile and land
stations and by mobile stations communi-
cating among themselves, special services
being excluded.

qu'une institution ou agence gouverne-
mentale, reconnue par le gouvernement
inte"ress£ et qui exploite des installations
de telecommunication en vue de 1'e" change
de la correspondance publique.

Administration: Une administration
gouvernementale.

Service public: Un service a 1'usage du
public en general.

Service international: Un service de
telecommunication entre bureaux ou
stations relevant de pays differents ou
entre stations du service mobile, sauf si
celles-ci sont de m&ne nationalit6 et se
trouvent dans les limites du pays auquel
elles appartiennent. Un service de tele-
communication interieur ou national, qui
est susceptible de causer des brouillages
avec d'autres services au dela des limites
du pays dans lequel il opere, est consider
comme service international au point de
vue du brouillage.

Service restreint: Un service ne pouvant
£tre utilise que par des personnes specifies
ou dans des buts particuliers.

Service mobile: Un service de radiocom-
munication execute entre stations mobiles
et stations terrestres et par les stations
mobiles communiquant entre elles, a
1 'exclusion des services speciaux.

No. 317

GENERAL Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication
Convention. Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932.

REGLEMENT general des radiocommunications annexe a la Con-
vention des telecommunications. Signe & Madrid, 9 decembre
1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. These regulations supersede the regulations annexed to the radiotele-
graph convention of November 25, 1927 (No. i85a, ante). Several agreements relating to
radio communications have been concluded between two or more states. See, for example,
the convention between Peru and Brazil of December 31, 1928, 127 League of Nations Treaty
Series, p. 455.

ACCESSIONS. On July I, 1937, these regulations had been approved or acceded to by
all the states which had ratified or acceded to the telecommunication convention (No. 316,
ante), except Afghanistan, Albania, Luxemburg, and Yemen, and by Bolivia, Greece, and
Sweden. Certain states, while not formally approving or acceding, had given notice of an
intention to apply the provisions of the regulations. U. S. Treaty Information Bulletin, No.
66, p. 15.

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of these regulations is also published in 151 League of Nations
Treaty Series, p. 278. (See the bibliography under No. 316, ante.)

134

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

Entered into force January i, 1934. 1
Text and translation from U. S. Treaty Series, No. 867.

[Translation]
ARTICLE i. — Definitions

H 2 The following definitions shall sup-
plement those contained in the Conven-
tion:

[2] Fixed station: A station not capable of
being moved, and communicating by
radio with one or more stations estab-
lished in the same manner.

[3] Land station: A station not capable of
being moved, carrying on a mobile service.

[*] Coast station: A land station carrying
on a service with ship stations. This may
be a fixed station assigned also to com-
munication with ship stations; in this case,
it shall be considered as a coast station
only for the duration of its service with
ship stations.

[5] Aeronautical station: A land station
carrying on a service with aircraft stations.
This may be a fixed station assigned also
to communication with aircraft stations;
in this case, it shall be considered as an
aeronautical station only for the duration
of its service with aircraft stations.

[6] Mobile station: A station capable of

being moved and which ordinarily does

move.

[7] On-board station: A station on board

either a ship which is not permanently

moored, or an aircraft.

[8] Skip station: A station on board a ship

which is not permanently moored,

[9] Aircraft station: A station on board
any aerial vehicle.

[10] Radiobeacon station: A special station
the emissions of which are intended to
enable an on-board station to determine
its bearing or a direction with reference
to the radiobeacon station, and in some
cases also the distance which separates it
from the latter.

[u] Radio direction-finding^ station: A
station equipped with special apparatus
for determining; the direction of the emis-
sions of other stations.

ARTICLE i. — Definitions

f1] Les definitions ci-apres competent
celles qui sont mentionnees dans la Con-
vention:

[2] Station fixe: Station non susceptible
de se d6placer et communiquant, par le
moyen de radiocommunication, avec une
ou plusieurs stations etablies de la m6me
maniere.

[3] Station terrestre: Une station non
susceptible de se deplacer et effectuant un
service mobile.

[4] Station cdtilre: Une station terrestre
effectuant un service avec les stations de
navire. Ce peut Stre une station fixe
affectee aussi aux communications avec
les stations de navire; elle n'est alors
consideree comme station c6tiere que
pendant la dur6e de son service avec les
stations de navire.

[6] Station aeronautique: Une station
terrestre effectuant un service avec les
stations d'aeronef. Ce peut £tre une
station fixe afFect6e aussi aux communica-
tions avec les stations d'aeronef; elle n'est
alors considered comme station aero-
nautique que pendant la duree de son
service avec les stations d'aeronef.
[6] Station mobile: Une station susceptible
de se deplacer et qui habituellernent se
deplace.

[7] Station de lord: Une station plac£e a
bord, soit d'un navire qui n'est pas amarr6
en permanence, soit d'un aeronef.
[8] Station de navire: Une station placee a
bord d'un navire qui n'est pas amarr& en
permanence.

[9] Station d'atronef: Une station plac6e
a bord de tout v6hicule a£rien.
[10] Station de radiophare: Une station
speciale dont les Emissions sont destinies
a permettre a une station de bord de
determiner son relevement ou une direc-
tion par rapport a la station de radio-
phare, eVentuellement aussi la distance
qui la s6pare de cette derni&re.
[u] Station radiogoniometrique: Une sta-
tion pourvue d'appareils sp£ciaux destines
a determiner la direction des Emissions
d'autres stations.

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3479, August 30, 1934.

2 The consecutive numbering of the paragraphs by figures in brackets was decided upon by the
Radiotelegraph Conference of Madrid (1932), to facilitate reference. — ED.

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

135

[12] Telephone "broadcasting station: A
station carrying on a telephone broad-
casting service.

[is] Visual broadcasting station: A station
carrying on a visual broadcasting service.

[u] Amateur station: A station used by an
"amateur", that is, by a duly authorized
person interested in radio technique solely
with a personal aim and without pecuniary
interest.

[is] Private experimental station: A private
station intended for experiments looking
to the development of radio technique or
science.

[isa] Private radio station: A private sta-
tion, not open to public correspondence,
which is authorized solely to exchange
with other "private radio stations" com-
munications concerning the private busi-
ness of the license holder or holders.

[is] Frequency assigned to a station: The
frequency assigned to a station is the fre-
quency occupying the center of the fre-
quency band in which the station is
authorized to work. In general, this fre-
quency is that of the carrier wave.
[17] Frequency band of an emission: The
frequency band of an emission is the fre-
quency band actually occupied by this
emission for the type of transmission and
for the signaling speed used.

[18] Frequency tolerance: The frequency
tolerance is the maximum permissible
separation between the frequency as-
signed to a station and the actual fre-
quency of emission.

[19] Power of a radio transmitter: The
power of a radio transmitter shall be the
power supplied to the antenna.
[20] In the case of a modulated wave
transmitter, the power in the antenna
shall be represented by two numbers, one
indicating the value of the carrier-wave
power supplied to the antenna and the
other indicating the actual maximum rate
of modulation used.

[21] Telegraphy: Telecommunication by
any system of telegraph signaling. The
word "telegram" also covers "radio-
telegram", except when the text expressly
precludes such a meaning.

[22] Telephony: Telecommunication by
any system of telephone signaling.

[12] Station de radiodiffnsion teUphonique:
Une station effectuant un service de radio-
diffusion t616phonique.
[l3] Station de radiodiffusion visuelle:
Une station effectuant un service de radio-
diffusion visuelle.

[w] Station d'amateur: Une station utili-
see par un "amateur", c'est-a-dire par
une personne dtiment autoris6e, s'inte"res-
sant a la technique radioelectrique dans
un but uniquement personnel et sans
inte're't pe"cuniaire.

[15] Station experimental privee: Une
station privee destined a des experiences
en vue du d6veloppement de la technique
ou de la science radioelectrique.
[1Sa] Station privee de radiocommunica-
lion: Une station priv6e, non ouverte a la
correspondance publique, qui est autoris6e
uniquement i 6changer avec d'autres
"stations privies de radiocommunica-
tion" des communications concernant les
affaires propres du ou des licencies.
[i6] Frequence assignee a une station:
La frequence assignee a une station est la
frequence qui occupe le centre de la bande
de frequences dans laquelle la station est
autorisee & travailler. En general, cette
frequence est celle de 1'onde porteuse.
[l7] Bande de frequences d'une emission:
La bande de frequences d'une Emission
est la bande de frequences effectivement
occupee par cette Emission, pour le type
de transmission et pour la vitesse de sig-
nalisation utilises.

[18] Tolerance de frequence: La tolerance
de frequence est le maximum de FScart
admissible entre la frequence assign6e a
une station et la frequence rdelle d'emis-
sion.

[19] Puissance d*un emetteur radioelectri-
que: La puissance d'un ernetteur radioelec-
trique est la puissance fournie & 1'antenne.
[20] Dans le cas d'un 6metteur & ondes
modu!6es, la puissance dans 1'antenne est
caract£ris6e par deux nombres, indiquant,
Tun la valeur de la puissance de 1'onde
porteuse fournie a Tantenne et Fautre
le taux maximum r6el de modulation
employed

[21] TeUgraphie: T616communicatipn par
un syst&me quelconque de signalisation
t61egraphique. Le mot "t616gramme"
vise aussi le " radio tele^ramme", sauf
lorsque le texte exclut express6ment une
telle signification.

[22] Telephonie: Tel6communication par
un syst&me quelconque de signalisation
t616phonique.

136

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

ps] General network of telecommunication
channels: The whole of the existing tele-
communication channels open to public
service, with the exception of the radio
channels of the mobile service.
[24] Aeronautical service: A radio service
carried on between aircraft stations and
land stations and by aircraft stations
communicating among themselves. This
term shall also apply to fixed and special
radio services intended to insure the safety
of aerial navigation.

ps] Fixed service: A service carrying on
radio communication of any kind between
fixed points, with the exception of the
broadcasting services and special services.
p6] Special service: A telecommunication
service carried on especially for the needs
of a specific service of general interest and
not open to public correspondence, such
as: a service of radiobeacons, radio direc-
tion finding, time signals, regular me-
teorological bulletins, notices to navi-
gators, press messages addressed to all,
medical notices (medical consultation by
radio), standard frequencies, emissions for
scientific purposes, etc.

P7] Telephone broadcasting service: A
service carrying on the broadcasting of
radiotelephone emissions primarily in-
tended to be received by the general
public.

p8] Visual broadcasting service: A service
carrying on the broadcasting of visual
images, either fixed or moving, primarily
intended to be received by the general
public.

ARTICLE 2. — Secrecy of Radio
Communications

P9] The administrations agree to take
the necessary measures to prohibit and
prevent:

[30] (a) the unauthorized interception of
radio communications not intended for
the general use of the public;
[3l] (&) the divulging of the contents or
of the mere existence, the publication or
use, without authorization, of radio com-
munications which may have been inter-
cepted intentionally or otherwise.

ARTICLE 3. — License

[32] § I. (i) No transmitting station
may be established or operated by any
person or by any enterprise whatever

p3] Reseau general des votes de tSlecom-
munication: L/ensemble des voies de
telecommunication existantes ouvertes au
service public, a Fexclusion des voies de
radiocommunication du service mobile.
p4] Service aeronautique: Un service de
radiocommunication ex6cut6 entre sta-
tions d'aeronef et stations terrestres et
par les stations d'a6ronef communiquant
entre elles. Ce terme s'applique egale-
ment aux services fixes et splciaux de
radiocommunication destines a assurer la
s£curit6 de la navigation a£rienne.
p5] Service fixe: Un service assurant des
radiocommunications de toute nature
entre points fixes, £ 1'exclusion des services
de radiodiffusion et des services speciaux.
p6] Service special: Un service de t616-
communication op&rant sp6cialement
pour les besoins d'un service d'inte"r£t
general determine et non ouvert a la cpr-
respondance pubKque, tel que: un service
de radiophare, de radiogoniometrie, de
signaux horaires, de bulletins m6t£oro-
logiques r£guliers, d'avis aux navigateurs,
de messages de presse adress6s a tous,
d'avis medicaux (consultations radio-
m6dicales), de frequences 6talonn6es,
demissions destin6es a des buts scienti-
fiques, etc.

p7] Service de radiodiffusion tSlephonique:
Un service effectuant la diffusion d'6mis-
sions radiophoniques essentiellement des-
tinies a §tre revues par le public en g&ne'raL

p8] Service de radiodiffusion visuelle:
Un service effectuant la diffusion d 'images
visuelles, fixes ou anim6es, essentiellement
destinies a 8tre recues par le public en
g£ne"ral.

ARTICLES 2. — Secret des radiocom-
munications

p9] Les administrations s'engagent &
prendre les mesures n6cessaires pour faire
interdire et r6primer:
[30] a) 1'interception, sans autorisation,
de radiocommunications qui ne sont pas
destinies a Tusage general du public;
[31] b) la divulgation du contenu ou
simplement de 1'existence, la publication
ou 1'usage, sans autorisation, de radio-
communications qui auraient 6t6 inter-
cept£es d61ib6r6ment ou non.

ARTICLE 3. — Licence

[32] § i. (i) Aucune station emet trice
ne ppurra 6tre 6tablie ou exploitee par un
particulier, ou par une entreprise quel-

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

137

without a special license issued by the gov-
ernment of the country to which the sta-
tion in question is subject.
[«] (2) Mobile stations having their port
of registry in a colony, a territory under
sovereignty or mandate, an overseas ter-
ritory, or a protectorate, may be con-
sidered as being subject to the authority
of this colony, these territories, or this
protectorate, so far as concerns the grant-
ing of licenses.

[34] § 2. The holder of a license shall be
bound to preserve the secrecy of tele-
communications, as provided for in article
24 of the Convention. In addition, the
license must state that it is prohibited to
receive radio correspondence other than
that which the station is authorized to
receive, and that, in case such correspond-
ence is received involuntarily, it must
neither be reproduced nor communicated
to third persons, nor used for any purpose
whatever, and that the very existence
thereof must not be revealed.

[35] § 3. In order to facilitate the verifi-
cation of licenses issued to mobile sta-
tions, it is recommended that there be
added, when necessary, to the text drafted
in^the national language, a translation of
this text into a language in general use in
international relations.
[36] §4. The government issuing the
license to a mobile station shall mention
therein the category to which this station
belongs from the standpoint of interna-
tional public correspondence.

ARTICLE 4. — Choice of Apparat^ts

[37] § I. The choice of radio apparatus
and devices to be used in a station shall
be unrestricted, provided that the waves
emitted satisfy the provisions of the pres-
sent Regulations.

[38] ^ § 2. However, within limits com-
patible with economic requirements, the
choice of transmitting, receiving, and
measuring apparatus must be guided by
the most recent technical progress as
shown, notably, in the Opinions of the
C.C.I.R.

ARTICLE 5. — Classification of Emissions

[39] § I. Emissions shall be divided into
two classes:

A. Continuous waves,

B. Damped waves,
defined as follows:

conque, sans licence sp6ciale d61ivr6e par
le gpuvernement du pays dont releve la
station en question.

[33] (2) Les stations mobiles qui ont
leur port d'attache dans une colonie, un
territoire sous souverainet6 ou mandat, un
territoire d'outre-mer ou un protectorat
peuvent £tre cpnsid&rees comme d6pen-
dant de Pautorit6 de cette colonie, de ces
territoires ou de ce protectorat, en ce qui
concerne 1'octroi des licences.
[34] §2. Le titulaire d'une licence est
tenu de garder le secret des tetecommuni-
cations, comme il est preVu a Tarticle 24
de la Convention. En outre, il doit r6-
sulter de la licence qu'il est interdit de
capter les ^correspondances de radio-
communication autres que celles que la
station est autorise"e a recevoir et que,
dans le cas oft de telles correspondances
sont involontairement recues, elles ne
doivent £tre ni reproduces, ni communi-
qu6es a des tiers, ni utilises dans un but
quelconque, et leur existence m£me ne doit
pas £tre reV616e.

M § 3- Ann de faciliter la verification
des licences d61ivr6es a des stations mo-
biles, il est recommande" d'ajouter, s'il y a
lieu, au texte redigd dans la langue na-
tionale, une traduction de ce texte en une
langue dont 1'usage est tres repandu dans
les relations Internationales.
[B6] § 4. Le gouvernement qui deliyre la
licence a une station mobile y mentionne
la catSgorie dans laquelle cette station est
classee au point de vue de la correspon-
dance publique Internationale.

ARTICLE 4. — Choix des appareils

[37] § i. Le choix des appareils et des
dispositifs radioelectriques a employer
dans une station est libre, a condition que
les ondes 6mises satisfassent aux stipula-
tions du present Reglement.
[88] § 2. Toutefois, dans les limites com-
patibles avec les exigences 6conomiques,
le choix des appareils d'6mission, de r£-
ception et de mesure doit s'inspirer des
plus r6cents progres de la technique, tels
qu'ils sont indiqu6s notamment dans les
avis du C.C.I.R.

ARTICLE 5. — Classification des emissions

[39] § I. Les Emissions sont r6parties en
deux classes:

A. Ondes entretenues,

B. Ondes amorties,
d6finies comme suit:

138

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

[40] Class A: Waves the successive oscil-
lations of which are identical under fixed
conditions.

[41] Class B: Waves composed of suc-
cessive series of oscillations the amplitude
of which, after attaining a maximum, de-
creases gradually.

[42] § 2. The following types of waves
are derived from Class A waves:
[48] Type Ax. Continuous waves the
amplitude or frequency of which varies
under the effect of telegraph keying.
M Type A2. Continuous waves the
amplitude or frequency of which varies
according to a periodic audiofrequency
law, combined with telegraph keying.

[45] Type A$. Continuous waves the
amplitude or frequency of which varies
according to a complex and variable
audiofrequency law. An example of this
type is radiotelephony.
[46] Type A4. Continuous waves the
amplitude or frequency of which varies
according to any law of frequencies
greater than audible frequencies. An
example of this type is television.
[47] § 3- The foregoing classification Into
waves of types Ai, A2, A3, and A4 shall
not prevent the use, under conditions
fixed by the administrations concerned,
of waves modulated or keyed by methods
not included in the definitions of types
Ai, As, A3, and A4.

[4*] §4. These definitions shall not re-
late to systems of transmitting apparatus.

M § 5- Waves shall be indicated first
by their frequency in kilocycles per second
(kc). Following this indication there
shall be indicated, in parentheses, the ap-
proximate length in meters. In the
present Regulations, the approximate
value of the wave length in meters is the
quotient of the number 300,000 divided
by the frequency expressed in kilocycles
per second.

ARTICLE 6. — Quality of Emissions

[60] § I. The waves emitted by a station
must be kept on the authorized frequency
as exactly as the state of the art permits,
and their radiation must be as free as
practically possible from all emissions not
essential to the type of communication
carried on.

P1] § 2. (i) The administrations shall,
for the various cases of operation, deter-

[40] Classe A: Ondes dont les oscillations
successives sont identiques en regime
permanent.

[41] Classe B: Ondes composees de series
successives d'oscillations dont 1 'amplitude,
apres avoir atteint un maximum, decroit
graduellement.

[42] § 2. Des ondes de la classe A derivent
les ondes des types ci-apres:
[«] Type Ai. Ondes entretenues dont
1'amplitude ou la frequence varie sous
I'effet d'une manipulation t61£graphique.
M Type A2. Ondes entretenues dont
1'amplitude ou la frequence varie suivant
une Ipi p6riodique de frequence audible
combinee avec une manipulation t616-
graphique.

t46] Type AS. Ondes entretenues dont
I'amplitude ou la frequence varie suivant
une loi complexe et variable de frequences
audibles. Un exemple de ce type est la
radioteiephonie.

[46] Type A4. Ondes entretenues dont
I'amplitude ou la frequence varie suivant
une loi quelconque de frequence plus
grande que les frequences audibles. Un
exemple de ce type est la television.
[47] § 3. La classification qui precede, en
ondes Ai, A2, A3 et A4, n'emp^che pas
I'emplpi, dans des conditions fix£es par les
administrations int6ress6es, d 'ondes modu-
les ou manipulees, par des proc6des ne
rentrant pas dans les definitions des types
Ai, A2, A3 et A4.

[48] § 4. Ces definitions ne sont pas
relatives aux systemes des appareils
d'emission.

[49] § 5- Les ondes seront d£signees, en
premier lieu, par leur frequence en Jkilo-
cycles par seconde (kc/s). A la suite de
cette designation sera indiquee, entre
parentheses, la longueur approximative en
metres. Dans le present R£glement, la
valeur approximative de la longueur
d'onde en metres est le quotient de la
division du nombre 300 ooo par la fre-
quence exprimee en kilocycles par seconde.

ARTICLE 6. — Qualiti des emissions
[50] § i. Les ondes emises par une sta-
tion doivent 8tre maintenues a la fre-
quence autorisee, aussi exactement que le
permet 1'etat de la technique, et leur
rayonnement doit Itre aussi exempt qu'il
est pratiquement possible, de toute emis-
sion qui n'est pas essentielle au type de la
communication effectuee.
[Sl] § 2. (i) Les administrations fixent,
pour les differents cas d'exploitation, les

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

139

mine the characteristics relative to the
quality of the emissions, notably the ac-
curacy and stability of frequency of the
emitted wave, the level of harmonics, the
width of the total frequency band occu-
pied, etc., so that they will be in accord
with technical progress.
[™] (2) The administrations agree to
consider the tables (appendix I : Table of
Frequency Tolerances and of Instabili-
ties; appendix 2: Table of Frequency
Band Widths Occupied by the Emissions)
as a guide indicating for the various cases,
the limits to be observed to the extent
possible.

["] (3) Concerning the widths of fre-
quency bands occupied by emissions, in
practice the following conditions must be
taken into account:

1. Width of the band as shown in
appendix 2.

2. Variation of the frequency of the
carrier wave,

3. Other technical conditions, such
as the technical possibilities with
regard to the form of filter circuit
characteristics, both for trans-
mitters and for receivers.

M §3- (i) The administrations shall
frequently check the waves emitted by the
stations under their jurisdiction to de-
termine whether or not they comply with
the provisions of the present Regulations.
[55] (2) Effort shall be made to obtain
international cooperation in this matter.
[66] § 4. In order to reduce interference
in the frequency bands above 6,000 kc
(wavelengths below 50 m), the use of
directive antenna systems is recommended
when such use is compatible with the
nature of the service.

ARTICLE 7. — Allocation and Use of Fre-
quencies (Wavelengths) and of Types of
Emission

[57] § i. Subject to the provisions of sub-
paragraph (5) of § 5 below, the adminis-
trations of the contracting countries may
assign any frequency and any type of wave
to any radio station under their jurisdic-
tion on the sole condition that no inter-
ference with any service of another coun-
try will result therefrom.

[68] § 2, The administrations, however,
agree to assign to stations which by their

caracteristiques relatives a la qualit<§ des
Emissions, notamment 1'exactitude et la
stability de la frequence de 1'onde 6mise, le
niveau des harmoniques, la largeur de la
bande to tale de frequences occup6e, etc.,
de maniere qu'elles repondent aux progres
de la technique.

[62] (2) Les administrations sont d'ac-
cord pour considerer les tableaux (ap-
pendice i: tableau des to!6rances de
frequence et des instabilites, appendice 2:
tableau des largeurs de bande de fr£-
quences occupies par les Emissions)
comme un guide indiquant, pour les
difTerents cas, les limites a observer dans
la rnesure du possible.
M (3) En ce qui concerne la largeur des
bandes de frequences occupees par les
Emissions, il faut tenir compte, dans la
pratique, des conditions suivantes:

i° Largeur de la bande donnee dans

Pappendice 2.
2° Variation de la frequence de

1'onde porteuse.

3° Conditions techniques suppl£-
mentaires, telles que les possibili-
tes techniques relatives a la
forme des caracteristiques des
circuits filtrants, tant pour les
£metteurs que pour les r6cepteurs.

[54] § 3- (i) Les administrations v£rifie-
ront frequemment si les ondes 6mises par
les stations relevant de leur autorite r£-
pondent aux prescriptions du present
R&glement.

[55] (2) On s'efforcera d'obtenir une col-
laboration Internationale en cette matiere.
[5<J] § 4. Afin de r6duire les brouillages
dans la bande de frequences au-dessus de
6000 kc/s (longueurs d'onde infdirieures a
50 m), il est recommande d'employer,
lorsque la nature du service le perrnet, des
syst&mes d'antennes directives.

ARTICLE 7. — Repartition et emploi des
frequences (longueurs d'onde) et des types
d'&mission

[67] § i. Sous reserve des dispositions de
1'alinea (5) du § 5 ci-apres, les administra-
tions des pays contractants peuvent at-
tribuer une frequence quelconque et un
type d'onde quelconque a toute station
radioelectrique sous leur autorite, £ la
seule condition qu'il n'en r6sulte pas de
brouillages avec un service quelconque
d'un autre pays.

[B8] § 2. Toutefois, les administrations
sont d'accord pour attribuer aux stations

140

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

very nature are capable of causing serious
international interference, frequencies and
types of waves in conformity with the
rules for allocation and use of waves, as
set forth below.

[6a] § 3» The administrations also agree
to assign frequencies to these stations,
according to the kind of service they per-
form, in conformity with the table of
allocation of frequencies (see table below).
[80] § 4. In the case where bands of fre-
quencies are assigned to a specific service,
the stations of that service must use fre-
quencies sufficiently separated from the
limits of these bands so as not to produce
harmful interference with the operation
of stations belonging to services to which
the frequency bands immediately ad-
joining have been assigned.

[61] § 5- 00 The frequencies assigned
by administrations to all fixed, land, and
broadcasting stations, as well as the upper
limit of power contemplated, must be
notified to the Bureau of the Union with
a view to their publication, when the sta-
tions in question carry on a regular service
and are capable of causing international
interference. Frequencies on which a
coast station receives in carrying on a
particular service with ship stations using
stabilized transmitters must also be noti-
fied to the Bureau of the Union with a
view to their publication. Frequencies
must be selected in such a way as to avoid,
so far as possible, interfering with inter-
national services belonging to the con-
tracting countries and operated by exist-
ing stations, of which the frequencies have
already been notified to the Bureau of the
Union. The aforesaid notification must
be made in accordance with the provi-
sions of article 15, § I (&) and appendix 6
before the frequency is put into service
and sufficiently in advance thereof to
allow administrations to take any action
which they may deem necessary to insure
the efficient operation of their services.

[M] (2) (a) However, when the fre-
quency which an administration intends
to assign to a station is outside the bands
authorized by the present Regulations
for the service involved, this administra-
tion shall, in a special report, make the
notification mentioned in the preceding
subparagraph at least 6 months before

qui, en raison de leur nature m^me, sont
susceptibles de causer de s6rieux brouil-
lages internationaux, des frequences et des
types d'onde en conformity avec les regies
de repartition et d'emploi des ondes, telles
qu'elles sont indique'es ci~apr&s.
[59] § 3- Les administrations s'engagent
aussi a attribuer des frequences & ces sta-
tions, selon le genre de leur service, en se
conformant au tableau de repartition des
frequences (voir le tableau ci-apr&s).
[60] §4. Dans le cas oft des bandes de
frequences sont attribuees a un service
determine, les stations de ce service
doivent employer des frequences suffisam-
ment eloignees des limites de ces bandes,
pour ne pas prpduire de brouillage nuisible
dans le travail des stations appartenant
aux services auxquels sont attribuees les
bandes de frequences immediatement
voisines.

[61] §5- (*) Les frequences assignees par
les administrations a toutes stations fixes,
terrestres et de radiodiffusion, ainsi que la
limite superieure de la puissance prevue
doivent £tre notifies au Bureau de
TUnion, en vue de leur publication,
lorsque les stations en question effectue-
ront un service regulier et qu'elles seront
susceptibles de causer des brouillages
internationaux. Doivent egalement 6tre
notifiees au Bureau de 1 'Union, en vue de
leur publication, les frequences sur les-
quelles regoit une station c6tiere pour
effectuer un service particulier avec les
stations de navire utilisant des emetteurs
stabilises. Les frequences doivent £tre
choisies de manure a eviter, autant que
possible, de brouiller les services interna-
tionaux appartenant aux pays contrac-
tants et efTectuees par des stations exis-
tantes, dont les frequences ont deja ete
notifiees au Bureau de 1 'Union. La noti-
fication predtee devra £tre faite selon les
dispositions de 1'article 15, § I, &) et de
1'appendice 3 avant la mise en service de
la frequence et suffisamment a temps pour
permettre aux administrations de prendre
toute mesure qui leur semblerait neces-
saire en vue d 'assurer une bonne execution
de leurs services.

[fl2] (2) a) Toutefois, lorsque la frequence
qu'une administration a 1'intention d'as-
signer a une station est une frequence en
dehors des bandes autorisees par le present
R&glement pour le service en cause, cette
administration fera, par avis special, la
notification prevue a l'alinea precedent au
moins six mois avant la mise en exploita-

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

141

this frequency is put into service, and in
urgent cases, at least 3 months before that
date.

[6»] (b) The notification procedure laid
down above shall also be observed when
an administration intends to increase or to
authorize the increase of the power or a
change in the conditions of radiation of a
station already operating outside the au-
thorized bands, even if the frequency used
is to remain the same.

[*4] (c) With regard to stations which,
when the present Regulations go into
force, are already operating outside the
bands authorized therein, the frequency
and the power used shall be notified im-
mediately to the Bureau of the Union,
with a view to their publication, if such a
notification has not been made previously.

[8S] (3) W The administrations con-
cerned shall conclude agreements, when
needed, for determining the waves to be
assigned to the stations in question, as
well as for laying down the conditions of
use of the waves thus assigned.
[M] (b) The administrations of any re-
gion may, in accordance with article 13 of
the Convention, conclude regional ar-
rangements regarding the allocation
either of frequency bands to the services
of the participating countries, or of fre-
quencies to stations of these countries, and
concerning the conditions for the use of
the waves so assigned. The provisions of
§ i and those of § 5 (i) and (2) shall also
apply to any arrangement of this nature.

[67] (4) The administrations concerned
shall conclude the necessary agreements
to avoid interference and, when needed,
shall, for this purpose, in conformity with
the procedure which will be agreed among
them in bilateral or regional agreements,
call upon organs of expert investigation or
of expert investigation and conciliation.
If no agreement can be reached with re-
gard to avoiding interference, the pro-
visions of article 15 of the Convention can
be applied.

[M] (5) (?) With regard to European
broadcasting and subject to any right to
which the extra-European administrations
might be entitled by virtue of the present
Regulations, the detailed provisions be-
low, which can be abrogated or changed
by agreement among the European ad-
ministrations and which in no way change

tion de cette frequence et, dans les cas
d'urgence, au moins trois mois avant cette
date.

['*] b) La procedure de notification in-
dique"e ci-avant sera egalement observed
lorsqu'une administration aura 1'intention
d'augmenter ou d'autoriser Taugmenta-
tion de la puissance ou un changement
dans les conditions de rayonnement d'une
station travaillant dej& en dehors des
bandes autorisees, mime si la frequence
utilis6e doit rester la m6me.
[M] c) Pour ce qui est des stations qui,
lors de I'entr6e en vigueur du present
R&glement, travaillent deja en dehors des
bandes y autorisees, la frequence utilis6e
et la puissance employee seront imm6di-
atement notifies au Bureau de I'Union en
vue de leur publication, pour autant que
pareille notification n'aura pas 6t6 faite
auparavant.

t66] (3) #) Les administrations int6res-
sees s'entendent, en cas de besoin, pour la
fixation des ondes £ attribuer aux stations
dont il s'agit, ainsi que pour la determina-
tion des conditions d'emploi des ondes
ainsi attributes.

[6ft] &) Les administrations d'une region
quelconque peuvent conclure, conform6-
ment £ 1'article 13 de la Convention, des
arrangements r£gionaux concernant Tat-
tribution soit de bandes de frequences aux
services des pays participants, soit de
frequences aux stations de ces pays, et
concernant les conditions d'emploi des
ondes ainsi attributes. Les dispositions
du § I et celles du § 5 (i) et (2) s'appli-
quent egalement £ tout arrangement de
cette nature.

[8r] (4) Les administrations int6ress6es
prennent les accords n6cessaires pour
eviter les brouillages et, en cas de besoin,
feront appel, a cet effet, conformement ^,
la procedure qui sera convenue entre elles
par des accords bilateraux ou regionaux, £
des organes soit d'expertise, soit d'exper-
tise et de conciliation. Si aucun arrange-
ment en vue d'eviter les brouillages ne
peut 6tre realise, les prescriptions de
1'article 15 de la Convention peuvent toe
appliquees.

[68] (5) a) En ce qui concerne la radio-
diffusion europeenne et sous reserve de
tout droit qui reviendrait aux adminis-
trations extra-europeennes en vertu du
present R^glement, les modalites ci-apres,
qui pourront Itre abrogees ou modifiees
par accord entre les administrations
europeennes et qui ne modifient en rien

142

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

the provisions of subparagraph (2) above,
shall be brought to bear in applying the
principle laid down in § I.
[69] (6) Failing a preliminary agreement
between the administrations of the Euro-
pean contracting countries, the right con-
templated in § I cannot, within the limits
of the European region, be used for the
purpose of carrying on a broadcasting serv-
ice outside the bands authorized by the
present Regulations on frequencies be-
low 1,500 kc (wavelengths above 200 m).

[70] (c) An administration wishing to es-
tablish such a service or to obtain a change
in the conditions laid down by a previous
agreement with regard to such a service
(frequency, power, geographic position,
etc.) shall submit the request to the Euro-
pean administrations through the Bureau
of the Union. Any administration which
does not answer within 6 weeks after the
receipt of the said communication shall be
considered as having given its assent.

[7l] (d) It is fully understood that such a
preliminary agreement shall also be neces-
sary whenever, in a European broadcast-
ing station, operating outside the author-
ized frequency bands, a change is made in
the characteristics previously reported to
the Bureau of the Union, and when such
change is capable of affecting the con-
dition of international interference.

[72] § 6. (i) In principle, the power of
broadcasting stations must not exceed the
value necessary to insure economically an
effective high-quality national service
within the limits of the country consid-
ered.

[73] (2) In principle, the location of
powerful broadcasting stations, and espe-
cially of those which operate near the
limits of the frequency bands reserved to
broadcasting, must be chosen in such a
way as to avoid, so far as possible, inter-
ference caused to^the broadcasting services
of other countries or to other services
operating on neighboring frequencies.

[T*] § jt The following table shows the
allocation of frequencies (approximate
wavelengths) to the various services.

[Table omitted. — Allocation of frequency
bands between 10 and 60,000 kc (30,000 and
5m).}
[9S] §8. (i) The use of type-B waves

les dispositions de 1'alinea (2) ci-avant,
sont apportees a 1'application du principe
<§noncl au § I.

[69] V) A defaut d'accord pr6alable entre
les administrations des pays europeens
contractants, la facult6 pr6vue au § I ne
pourra, dans les limites de la region euro-
peenne, 6tre utilis6e en vue d'effectuer un
service de radiodiffusion en dehors des
bandes autorisees par le present Regle-
ment sur des frequences au-dessous de
i 500 kc/s (longueurs d'onde au-dessus
de 200 m).

[70] c) L 'administration qui desire etablir
un tel service ou obtenir une modification
des conditions fixees par un accord an-
terieur relatif £ un tel service (frequence,
puissance, position g6ographique, etc.) en
saisit les administrations europeennes par
rinterm6diaire du Bureau de TUnion.
Toute administration qui n'aura pas
r6pondu dans un d61ai de 6 semaines apres
reception de ladite communication sera
consid£r6e comme ayant donn£ son
assentiment.

[71] d) II est bien entendu quTun tel
accord prealable sera £galement n£ces-
saire toutes les fois que, dans une station
de radiodiffusion europeenne, travaillant
hors des bandes de frequences autoris6es,
un changement sera apport6 aux carac-
t6ristiques precedemment notifi6es au
Bureau de 1' Union, et que ce changement
sera susceptible d'affecter les conditions
de brouillages internationaux.
[7Z] § 6. (i) En principe, la puissance
des stations de radiodiffusion ne doit pas
depasser la valeur permettant d 'assurer
economiquement un service national
efficace et de bonne quality dans les limites
du pays consid6r6.

[73] (2) En principe, remplacement des
stations de radiodiffusion puissantes, et
plus particulierement de celles qui travail-
lent pres des limites des bandes de fr^-
quences r6servees a la radiodiffusion, doit
§tre choisi de maniere & eviter, autant que
possible, la g§ne causee aux services de
radiodiffusion des autres pays ou aux
autres services travaillant avec des fre-
quences voisines.

[74] § 7. Le tableau ci-apres donne la
repartition des frequences (longueurs
d'onde approximatives) entre les divers
services.

[Tableau omis, — Repartition des bandes
di >, frequences entre 10 et 60 ooo kc/s (30 ooo
et5m).}
[93] § 8. (i) L'usage des ondes du type

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS,

143

shall be forbidden on all frequencies, ex-
cept the following:

375 kc (800 m)
410 kc (730 m)
425 kc (705 m)
454 kc (660 m)
500 kc (600 m)
1,364 kc (220 m)*

[94] (2) No new installation of trans-
mitters of type-B waves may be made on
ships or aircraft, except when these trans-
mitters, working at full power, use less
than 300 watts measured at the input of
the audiofrequency supply transformer.

[9&] (3) The use of type-B waves on all
frequencies shall be forbidden, beginning
January I, 1940, except for transmitters
meeting the power requirements stated in
subparagraph (2) above.
[9S] (4) No new installation of type-B-
wave transmitters may be made in a land
or fixed station. The waves of this type
shall be forbidden in all land stations be-
ginning January I, 1935.

[97] (5) The administrations shall en-
deavor to abandon type-B waves, other
than the 500-kc (6oo-m) wave, as soon as
possible.

[98] § 9. The use of type-Ai waves only
shall be authorized between 100 and 160
kc (3,000 and 1,875 m) ; the only exception
to this rule shall be for type-A2 waves
which may be used in the band 100 to 125
kc (3,000 to 2,400 m) for time signals ex-
clusively.

["] § 10. In the band 460 to 550 kc (652
to 545 m) no type of emission capable of
rendering inoperative the distress, alarm,
safety, or urgent signals sent on 500 kc
(600 m) shall be authorized,

[10°] §11. (i) In the band 325 to 345 kc
(923 to 870 m), no type of emission capa-
ble of rendering inoperative distress,
safety, or urgent signals shall be author-
ized.

[x°l] (2) This rule shall not apply to
regions in which special agreements pro-
vide otherwise.

[l02] § 12. (i) In principle, any station
carrying on a service between fixed points
on a wave with a frequency below no kc

B est interdit pour toutes les frequences a
Fexception des frequences suivantes:

375 kc/s (800 m)
410 kc/s (730 m)
425 kc/s (705 m)
454 kc/s (660 rn)
500 kc/s (600 m)
1364 kc/s (220 m)*

[u] (2) Aucune nouvelle installation
d'emetteurs d'ondes du type B ne peut
£tre faite sur des navires ou des aeronefs,
sauf quand ces emetteurs, travaillant a
pleine puissance, depenseront moins de
300 watts mesures a 1'entree du trans-
formateur d 'alimentation a frequence
audible.

[96J (3) L'usage des ondes du type B de
toutes frequences sera interdit a partir du
ier Janvier 1940, sauf pour les emetteurs
remplissant les conditions de puissance
indiquees a 1'alinea (2) ci-avant.
[96] (4) Aucune nouvelle installation
d'emetteurs d 'ondes du type B ne peut
etre faite dans une station terrestre ou
fixe. Les ondes de ce type seront inter-
dites dans toutes les stations terrestres a
partir du ier Janvier 1935.
[97] (5) Les administrations s'efforceront
d'abandonner le plus t6t possible les
ondes du type B, autres que 1'onde de
500 kc/s (600 m).

[98] § 9. L'emploi des ondes du type Ai
seulement est autoris£ entre 100 et 160
kc/s (3 ooo et i 875 m) ; la seule exception
a cette regie est relative aux ondes du
type A2 qui peuvent £tre utilisees dans la
bande de 100 & 125 kc/s (3 ooo a 2 400
m) pour les signaux horaires exclusive-
ment.

["] § 10. Dans la bande de 460 £ 550
kc/s (652 a 545 m), aucun type d'emission
susceptible de rendre inoperant les signaux
de detresse, d'alarme, de security ou
d'urgence, emis sur 500 kc/s (600 m),
n'est autoris6.

[10°] § II. (i) Dans la bande de 325 a
345 kc/s (923 a 870 m) aucun type d'emis-
sion susceptible de rendre inoperants les
signaux de detresse, de security ou d'ur-
gence, n'est autorise.
[lw] (2) Cette regie ne s 'applique pas
aux regions oh des accords particuliers en
disposent autrement.
[m] § 12. (i) En principe, toute station
qui assure un service entre points fixes sur
une onde de frequence inferieure a no

*See footnote 10 to the allocation table [omitted here].

* Voir la note 10 du tableau du repartition des frequences [pas inclus ici].

144

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

(wavelengths above 2,727 m) must use
only one frequency, chosen from the
bands allocated to the said service (§7
above), for each of its transmitters capa-
ble of simultaneous operation.

[103] (2) A station shall not be permitted
to use a frequency other than that allo-
cated as stated above, for a service be-
tween fixed points.

[l04] § 13. In principle, the stations shall
use the same frequencies and the same
types of emission for the transmission of
messages by the unilateral method as for
their normal service. Regional arrange-
ments may, however, be made for the
purpose of exempting the stations con-
cerned from complying with this rule.
[106] § 14. A fixed station may, as sec-
ondary service, on its normal working
frequency, make transmissions intended
for mobile stations on the following condi-
tions:

[106] (a) that the administrations ^ con-
cerned deem it necessary to use this ex-
ceptional working method;
[m] (ty that no increase in interference
results therefrom.

[108] § 15. In order to facilitate the ex-
change of synoptic meteorological mes-
sages in the European regions, the fre-
quencies of 41.6 kc and 89.5 kc (7,210 m
and 3,352 m) shall be allocated to this
service.

[109] § 1 6. To facilitate rapid transmis-
sion and distribution of information of
value in the detection of crime and pur-
suit of criminals, a frequency between
37.5 and 100 kc (between 8, poo and 3,000
m) shall be reserved for this purpose by
regional arrangements.
[uo] § 17. Each administration may al-
locate to amateur stations frequency
bands in accordance with the allocation
table (§7 above).

[m] § 1 8. In order to decrease interfer-
ence in the frequency bands above 4,000
kc (wavelengths below 75 m), used by the
mobile service, and particularly in order
to avoid interfering with the long-distance
telephone communications of this service,
the administrations agree to adopt the
following rules, wherever possible, taking
into account current engineering de-
velopment:

[1U] 00 W In "the frequency bands
above 5,500 kc (wavelengths below 54.55

kc/s (longueur d'onde supeVieure a 2 727
m) doit employer une seule frequence,
choisie parmi les bandes attributes audit
service (§7 ci-avant), pour chactm des
6metteurs qu'elle comporte, susceptibles
de fonctionner simul tankmen t.
[l08] (2) II n'est pas permis & une station
de faire usage, pour un service entre
points fixes, d'une frequence autre que
celle attribute comme il est dit ci-
avant.

[l04] § 13. En principe, les stations em-
ploient les m6mes frequences et les m^mes
types demission pour les transmissions de
messages par la meihode unilat&rale que
pour leur service normal. Toutefois, des
arrangements re"gionaux peuvent £tre
realises en vue de dispenser les stations
int&resse'es de se soumettre a cette regie.
[l05] § 14. Une station fixe peut effec-
tuer, sur sa frequence normale de travail,
comme service secondaire, des Emissions
destinies aux stations mobiles, a condi-
tion:

[loe] a) que les administrations inte"-
resse"es jugent n£cessaire d'utiliser cette
m£thode exceptionnelle de travail;
[IOT] &) qu'il n'en resulte aucune aug-
mentation des brouillages.
[l08] § 15. Afin de faciliter l'£change des
messages me'te'orologiques synoptiques
dans les regions europ£ennes, les fr£-
quences 41,6 kc/s et 89,5 kc/s (7210 m
et 3 352 m) sont attributes a ce service.

[los] § 1 6. Pour faciliter la transmission
et la distribution rapides des renseigne-
ments utiles & la d6couverte des crimes et
a la poursuite des criminels, une frequence
entre 37,5 et 100 kc/s (entre 8 ooo et
3 ooo m) sera re'serv^e pour cet objet, par
des arrangements regionaux.
[ll°] § 17. Chaque administration peut
attribuer aux stations d'amateur des
bandes de frequences conformes au
tableau de repartition (§7 ci-avant).
[lu] § 1 8. En vue de reduire les brouil-
lages dans les bandes de frequences su-
p6rieures a 4 ooo kc/s (longueurs d'onde
inferieures a 75 m), utilises par le service
mobile, et en particulier pour eViter de
g£ner les communications telephoniques £
grande distance de ce service, les admin-
istrations sont d'accord pour adopter,
autant que possible, les regies suivantes,
en tenant compte du deVeloppement de
la technique courante:
[112] (i) a) Dans les bandes de fre-
quences superieures a 5 500 kc/s (Ion-

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

m) allocated exclusively to the mobile
service, the frequencies (wavelengths)
which must be used by ship stations
carrying on commercial service shall be on
the low-frequency (longwave) side of the
band, and especially in the limits of the
harmonic bands enumerated below:

5,500 to 5,550 kc

6,170 to 6,250 kc

8,230 to 8,330 kc

11,000 to 11,100 kc

12,340 to 12,600 kc

16,460 to 16,660 kc

22,000 tO 22,200 kc

(54-55 to 54.05 m)
(48.62 to 48.00 m)
(36.45 to 36.01 m)
(27.27 to 27.03 m)
(24.31 to 24.00 m)
(18.23 to l8-01 m)
(13.64 to 13.51 m)

[ii3] NOTE. — The frequency bands 4,115
to 4,165 kc (72.90 to 72.03 m) may also be
used by the stations mentioned above
[see also (2) (c) below].

["*] (&) However, any commercial ship
station the emissions of which comply
with the frequency tolerances required of
land stations under § 2 (2) of article 6,
may transmit on the same frequency as
the coast station with which it communi-
cates.

[ll8] (c) When a communication for which
no special arrangement has been made
must be established between a ship sta-
tion, on one hand, and another ship sta-
tion or a coast station, on the other hand,
the mobile station shall use one of the fol-
lowing frequencies situated approximately
in the middle of the bands :

4,140 kc (72.46 m

5,520 kc (54.35

6,210 kc (48.31

8,280 kc (36.23 m
11,040 kc (27.17 m
12,420 kc (24.15 nri
16,560 kc (18.12 m)
22,080 kc (13.59 m)

pie] NOTE. — The administrations agree,
in reporting the frequency of a coast sta-
tion, to indicate on which one of the waves
specified in subparagraph (i) (c) listening
will be carried on.

[U7] (2) (a) Ship stations carrying on
commercial service shall use the shared
bands above 4,000 kc (wavelengths below
75 m) only when their emissions comply
with the frequency tolerances specified for
land stations in § 2 (2) of article 6. In
this case, the frequencies used must be
chosen on the higher-frequency (shorter-
wave) side of the shared band and, more

gueurs d'onde inferieures a 54,55 m) at-
tribuees exclusivement au service mobile,
les frequences (longueurs d'onde) qui
devront £tre utilisees par les stations de
navire affectees au service commercial
seront du c6te des basses frequences
(ondes plus longues) et spedalement dans
les limites des bandes harmoniques
enumerees ci-apres:

5 500 & 5 550 kc/s (54,55 & 54,05 m)

6 170 £ 6 250 kc/s (48,62 4 48,00 m)
8 230 & 8 330 kc/s (36,45 & 36,01 m)

11 ooo an 100 kc/s (27,27 & 27,03 m)

12 340 & 12 500 kc/s (24,31 & 24,00 m)
1 6 460 & 1 6 660 kc/s (18,23 & 1 8,01 m)
22 ooo & 22 200 kc/s (13,64 & 13,51 m)

[U3] NOTE. — Les bandes de frequences de
4115 a 4165 kc/s (72,90 & 72,03 m)
peuvent egalement £tre utilisees par les
stations susdites [voir aussi (2), c)
ci-apres].

[U4] b) Cependant, toute station com-
merciale de navire dont remission satis-
fait aux tolerances de frequence exigees
des stations terrestres au § 2, (2) de 1'ar-
ticle 6, peut emettre sur la m£me fre-
quence que la station c6tiere avec laquelle
elle communique.

lll&] c) Quand une communication, pour
laquelle aucun arrangement special n'a
ete fait, doit £tre etablid entre une station
de navire, d'une part, et une autre station
de navire ou une station cdtiere, d'autre
part, la station mobile utilisera une des
frequences suiyantes situees approxima-
tivement au milieu des bandes:

4 140 kc/s (72,46 m)

5 520 kc/s (54,35 m;

6 210 kc/s (48,31 m.
8 280 kc/s (36,23 m.

11 040 kc/s (27,17 m)

12 420 kc/s (24,15 m)
1 6 560 kc/s (18,12 m)
22 080 kc/s (13,59 m)

[1W] NOTE. — Les administrations sont
d'accord pour indiquer, en notifiant la
frequence d'une station c6tiere, sur
laquelle des ondes spedfiees & 1'alinea (l),
litt. c) 1'ecoute sera faite.
[117] (2) a) Les stations de navire affec-
tees au service commercial n'utiliseront
les bandes communes superieures a 4 ooo
kc/s (longueurs d'onde inferieures £ 75 m)
qu'autant que leurs emissions satisferont
aux tolerances de frequence specifics pour
les stations terrestres au § 2, (2) de 1'ar-
ticle 6. Dans ces cas, les frequences
employees doivent £tre choisies du c6te

146

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

especially, in the limits of the harmonic
bands enumerated below:

4,400 to 4,450 kc (68.18 to 67,42 m)

8,800 to 8,900 kc (34.09 to 33.71 m)

13,200 to 13,350 kc (22.73 to 22.47 m)

17,600 to 17,750 kc (17.05 to 16.90 m)

22,900 to 23,000 kc (13.10 to 13.04 m)

[U8] (&) Frequencies chosen in the por-
tion of the band reserved to mobile services
from 6,600 to 6,675 kc (45.45 to 44.94 m),
in harmonic relation with the preceding
bands, may also be used.

[ll9] (c) The provisions of subparagraph
(2) (a) shall not apply to the portion of the
shared band between 4,115 and 4,165 kc
(72.90 and 72.03 m) which may be used by
any ship station carrying on a commer-
cial service.

[m] (3) In selecting frequencies for new
fixed and coast stations, the administra-
tions shall avoid using the frequencies in
the bands specified in subparagraphs (i)
(a), (2) (a), (2) (&), and (2) (c).

[m] § 19- (i) It is recognized that the
frequencies between 6,000 and 30,000 kc
(50 and 10 m) are very efficient for long-
distance communications.
[m] (2) The administrations shall make
the greatest possible effort to reserve the
frequencies of this band for this purpose,
except when their use for short- or medi-
um-distance communication is not likely
to interfere with long-distance communi-
cations.

t123] §20. In Europe, Africa, and Asia,
low-power directional radiobeacons the
range of which does not exceed about 50
km may use any frequency in the band
1,500 to 3,500 kc (200 to 85.71 m) except
the guard band of 1,630 to 1,670 kc (184
to 1 80 m) subject to agreements with the
countries whose services are likely to be
interfered with.

ARTICLE 8. — Amateur Stations and Private
Experimental Stations

P24] § I. The exchange of communica-
tions between amateur stations and be-
tween private experimental stations of
different countries shall be forbidden if
the administration of one of the interested
countries has given notice of its opposition
to this exchange.

des frequences les plus hautes (ondes plus
courtes) de la bande commune et, plus
sp6cialement, dans les limites des bandes
harmoniques 6num6rees ci-apres:

4 400 & 4 450 kc/s (68, 1 8 & 67,42 m)

8 800 £ 8 900 kc/s (34,09 a 33,71 m)

13 200 i 13 350 kc/s (22,73 & 22,47 m)

17 600 a 17 750 kc/s (17,05 a 16,90 m)

22 900 & 23 ooo kc/s (13,10 a 13,04 m)

[us] &) On peut egalement utiliser des
frequences choisies dans la portion de la
bande r6serv6e aux services mobiles de
6 600 a 6 675 kc/s (4545 & 4-4,94 m), en
relation harmonique avec les bandes
pr6c6dentes.

[119] c) Les prescriptions de Talinea (2),
a) ne s'appliquent pas a la portion de la
bande commune entre 4 115 et 4 165
kc/s (72,90 et 72,03 m) qui peut £tre
utilisee par toute station de navire affec-
t6e au service commercial.
[12°] (3) En choisissant les frequences
des nouvelles stations fixes et c6tieres, les
administrations eviteront d 'employer les
frequences des bandes sp6cifiees dans les
alineas (i), litt. a), (2), litt. a), (2), litt. 6)
et (2), litt. c).

[121] § 19. (i) U est reconnu que les fr6-
quences entre 6 ooo et 30 ooo kc/s (50 et
10 m) sont tres efficaces pour les com-
munications a longue distance.
p2] (2) Les administrations s'efforce-
ront, dans toute la mesure du possible, de
r6server les frequences de cette bande dans
ce but, except6 quand leur emploi pour des
communications a courte ou a moyenne
distance n'est pas susceptible de brouiller
les communications a grande distance.
[123] § 20. En Europe, Afrique, Asie, les
radiophares directionnels de faible puis-
sance et dont la portee ne depasse pas 50
km environ peuvent faire usage de toute
frequence dans la bande de i 500 a 3 500
kc/s (200 a 85,71 m), a 1'exception de la
bande de protection de i 630 & i 670 kc/s
(184 a 180 m), sous reserve d'accord des
pays dont les services soht susceptibles
d^tre brouilles.

ARTICLE 8. — Stations d' amateur et stations
experimental privees

[124] § i. L'6change de communications
entre stations d 'amateur et entre stations
exp6rimentales privies de pays differents
est interdit si 1'administration de Fun des
pays interesses a notifi6 son opposition a
cet echange.

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

147

[12S] §2. (i) When this exchange is per-
mitted, the communications must be car-
ried on in plain language and be limited to
messages relating to experiments and to
remarks of a private nature for which, by
reason of their lack of importance, the use
of the telegraph service could not enter
into consideration. It shall be strictly
forbidden for owners of amateur stations
to transmit international communications
emanating from third persons.

[126] (2) The foregoing provisions may be
modified by special arrangements between
the interested countries.
[m] § 3- In amateur stations or in pri-
vate experimental stations, authorized to
conduct transmissions, any person operat-
ing the apparatus on his own account or
for third persons must have proved that he
is able to transmit texts in Morse code
signals and to read, by aural radiotele-
graph reception, texts so transmitted.
He can be replaced only by authorized
persons possessing the same qualifications.

[12S] § 4. Administrations shall take such
measures as they judge necessary to
verify, from a technical standpoint, the
qualifications of any person operating the
apparatus.

[129] § 5- (i) The maximum power which
amateur stations and private experimental
stations may use shall be fixed by the inter-
ested administrations, taking account of
the technical qualifications of the opera-
tors and of the conditions under which the
said stations must work.
[13°] (2) All the general rules laid down
in the Convention and in the present
Regulations shall apply to amateur stations
and to private experimental stations. In
particular, the frequency of the wave
emitted must be as constant and as free
from harmonics as the state of the art
permits.

lm] (3) In the course of their emissions,
these stations must, at short intervals,
transmit their call signals or, in the case of
experimental stations not yet provided
with call signals, their names.

ARTICLE 9. — Conditions to be Observed by
Mobile Stations

A. — General

[m] 1 1. (i) Mobile stations must be
established in such a way as to conform, as

[m] § 2. (i) Lorsque cet ^change est
permis, les communications doivent s'ef-
fectuer en langage clair et se limiter aux
messages ayant trait aux experiences et a
des remarques d'un caract&re personnel
pour lesquelles, en raison de leur manque
d'importance, le recours au service
teiegraphique public ne saurait entrer en
consideration. II est absolument interdit
aux titulaires des stations d 'amateur de
transmettre des communications interna-
tionales 6manant de tierces personnes.
[m] (2) Les dispositions ci-avant peu-
vent £tre modifie'es par des arrangements
particuliers entre les pays int6resses.
[X27] § £ Dans les stations d'amateur ou
dans les stations experimentales privies,
autoris6es £ effectuer des emissions, toute
personne manceuvrant les appareils, pour
son propre compte ou pour celui de tiers,
doit avoir prouv6 qu'elle est apte a trans-
mettre les textes en signaux du code
Morse et a lire, a la reception radio-
teiegraphique auditive, les textes ainsi
transmis. Elle ne peut se faire remplacer
que par des personnes autorise'es poss6-
dant les mSmes aptitudes.
[m] § 4. Les administrations prennent
telles mesures qu'elles jugent n6cessaires
pour verifier les capacitis, au point de vue
technique, de toute personne manceuvrant
les appareils.

[m] § 5- (i) La puissance maximum que
les stations d'amateur et les stations ex-
perimentales privies peuvent utiliser est
fix6e par les administrations interess^es,
en tenant compte des qualit£s techniques
des operateurs et des conditions dans les-
quelles lesdites stations doivent travailler.
[18°] (2) Toutes les regies g6nerales fixees
dans la Convention et dans le present
R£glement s'appliquent aux stations
d'amateur et aux stations experimentales
privees. En particulier, la frequence des
ondes 6mises doit £tre aussi constante et
aussi exempte d'harmoniques que l'6tat
de la technique le permet.
[m] (3) Au cours de leurs emissions, ces
stations doivent transmettre, a de courts
intervalles, leur indicatif d'appel, ou leur
nom dans le cas de stations experimentales
non encore pourvues d'indicatif d'appel.

ARTICLE 9. — Conditions £ remplir par les
stations mobiles

A. — Genemlitis

[132] § i. (i) Les stations mobiles doi-
vent §tre etablies de maniere a se con-

148

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

regards frequencies and types of waves, to
the general provisions forming the subject
of article 7.

[133] (2) In addition, no new type-B-
wave transmitter installation shall be
made in mobile stations, except when these
transmitters, working at full power, use
less than 300 watts measured at the input
of the audiofrequency supply transformer.

[m] (3) Finally, the use of type-B waves
on all frequencies shall be forbidden, be-
ginning with January I, 1940, except for
transmitters fulfilling the same conditions
as above regarding power.
[135] § 2. The frequency of emission of
mobile stations shall be verified as often as
possible by the inspection service to which
they are subject.

[l36] § 3- Receiving apparatus must be
such that the current which they induce
into the antenna shall be as low as possible
and shall not disturb neighboring stations.

[l87] § 4. Transmitting and receiving sets
of any mobile station must permit of mak-
ing frequency changes as rapidly as possi-
ble. All installations must be such that,
after the communication is established,
the time necessary to change from trans-
mission to reception and vice versa shall
be as short as possible.

B.—Ship Stations

[138j § 5. (i) The transmitting appara-
tus used in ship stations working on type-
A2 or -B waves in the authorized band be-
tween 365 and 515 kc (822 and 583 m)
must be provided with devices making it
possible conveniently and appreciably to
reduce the power thereof.

[139] (2) This provision shall not apply to
transmitters in which the power, as meas-
ured at full load, does not exceed 300 watts
on the transmitting-tube plates (type-A2
emission) or at the input of the audio-
frequency supply transformers (type-B
emission).

[14°] (3) All ship stations transmitting on
frequencies in the band 100 to 160 kc
(3,000 to 1,875 m) and on frequencies
above 4,000 kc (wavelengths below 75 m)
must be equipped with a wave meter hav-
ing a precision at least equal to 5/1000, or
with an equivalent device.

former, en ce qui concerne les frequences
et les types d'onde, aux dispositions
generates faisant 1'objet de Tarticle 7.
pas] (2) En outre, aucune nouvelle in-
stallation d'emetteurs d'ondes du type B
ne peut §tre faite, dans les stations
mobiles, sauf quand ces emetteurs, tra-
vaillant a pleine puissance, d6penseront
moins de 300 watts mesur6s a 1'entree du
transformateur d 'alimentation a fr6quence
audible.

f134] (3) Enfin, 1'emploi des ondes du
type B de toutes frequences sera interdit a
partir du ier Janvier 1940, sauf pour les
Emetteurs remplissant les mSmes condi-
tions de puissance que ci-avant.
[l35] § 2. La frequence demission des
stations mobiles sera verified le plus
sou vent possible par le service d 'inspec-
tion dont elles relevent.
[13G] §3. Les appareils r6cepteurs dpi-
vent 6tre tels que le courant qu'ils in-
duisent dans 1'antenne soit aussi r6duit
que possible et n'incommode pas les sta-
tions du voisinage.

[137] § 4. Les changements de frequence
dans les appareils emetteurs et recepteurs
de toute station mobile doivent pouvoir
Itre effectu6s aussi rapidernent que possi-
ble. Toutes les installations doivent Stre
telles, que la communication £tant
6tablie, le temps necessaire au passage de
remission & la r6ception et vice-versa soit
aussi recluit que possible.

B. — Stations de navire

[138] §5. (i) Les appareils d'emission
utilises dans les stations de navire travail-
lant sur des ondes du type A2 ou B dans
les bandes autorise'es entre 365 et 515
kc/s (822 et 583 m) doivent £tre pourvus
de dispositifs permettant, d'une maniere
facile, d'en r&iuire sensiblement la
puissance.

[139] (2) Cette disposition ne s'applique
pas aux emetteurs dont la puissance,
mesur6e a pleine charge, ne depasse pas
300 watts a la plaque des lampes £met-
trices (emission du type A.2) ou £ 1'entree
des transformateurs d 'alimentation a fr6-
quence audible (Emission du type B).
[14°] (3) Toutes les stations de navire
6mettant sur des frequences dans les
bandes de 100 a 160 kc/s (3 ooo a i 875
m) et sur des frequences supeYieures a
4 ooo kc/s (longueurs d'onde inf6rieures &
75 m) doivent 6tre munies d'un onde-
metre ayant une precision au moins 6gale
a 5/1 ooo ou d'un dispositif equivalent.

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

149

[i«] §6. Any station installed on
board a ship, compulsorily provided with
radio apparatus as a result of an inter-
national agreement, must be able to trans-
mit and to receive on the wave of 500 kc
(600 m), type-A2 or -B and, in addition,
on at least one other type-As or -B wave,
in the authorized band between 365 and
485 kc (822 and 619 m).
[142] § 7- (i) In addition to the waves
mentioned above, ship stations equipped
to transmit type-Ai, -A2, or -A3 waves
may use the waves authorized in article 7.

[*43] (2) The use of type-B waves shall be
prohibited on all frequencies, except the
following ones;

375 kc (800 m)
410 kc (730 m)
425 kc (705 m)
454 kc (660 m)
500 kc (600 m)
1,364 kc (220 m)*

[144] § 8. All the ship station apparatus
installed for the transmission of type-Ai
waves in the authorized band between 100
and 160 kc (3,000 and 1,875 m) must per-
mit of using at least two frequencies,
selected in this band, in addition to the
frequency of 143 kc (2,100 m).

[14B] § 9- 00 All stations on board ships
compulsorily provided with radiotele-
graph apparatus must be capable of re-
ceiving the wave of 500 kc (600 m) and, in
addition, all the waves necessary to the
operation of the service which they carry
on.

[«•] (2) These stations must be capable
of receiving types Ai and A2 waves on the
same frequencies easily and efficiently.

C. — Aircraft Stations
[147] § jo. (i) (a) Any station installed
on board an aircraft flying over a mari-
time route, and compulsorily provided
with radio apparatus as the result of an
international agreement, must be capable
of transmitting and receiving on the wave
of 500 kc (600 m), type A2 or B.
[148] (&) As regards the restriction in the
use of type-B waves, see B, § 7 (2) above.

[i*9] (2) (a) Any aircraft station must

[Ml] § 6. Toute station installee & bord
d'un navire obligatoirement pourvu d'ap-
pareils radioelectriques par suite d'un ac-
cord international doit pouvoir emettre et
recevoir sur 1 'oxide de 500 kc/s (600 m), du
type A2 ou B et, en outre, au moins sur
une autre onde, du type A2 ou B, dans les
bandes autorisees entre 365 et 485 kc/s
(822 et 619 m).

I142] §7- W En plus des ondes visees ci-
avant, les stations de navire £quip£es pour
emettre des ondes des types Ai, A2 ou A3
peuvent employer les ondes autorisees £
1'article 7.

[143] (2) L'usage des ondes du type B est
interdit pour toutes les frequences 4 Tex-
ception des frequences suivantes:

375 kc/s (800 m)
410 kc/s (730 m)
425 kc/s (705 m)
454 kc/s (660 m)
500 kc/s (600 m)
I 364 kc/s (220 m)*

[144] § 8. Tous les appareils de stations
de navire etablis pour la transmission
d'ondes du type Ai des bandes autorisees
entre 100 et 160 kc/s (3 opo et I 875 m)
doivent permettre 1'emploi, en plus dela
frequence de 143 kc/s (2 100 m), dedeux
frequences au minimum, choisies dans ces
bandes.

[145] § 9. (i) Toutes les stations & bord
des navires obligatoirement pourvus d 'ap-
pareils radiotelegraphiques doivent £tre £
m6me de recevoir 1'onde de 500 kc/s (600
m) et, en outre, toutes les ondes n£ces-
saires & raccomplissement du service
qu'elles effectuent.

[*48] (2) Ces stations doivent toe &
m£me de recevoir facilement et efficace-
rnent, sur les mSmes frequences, les ondes
des types Ai et A2.

C. — Stations d'aSronef

[147] § 10. (i) a) Toute station installee

£ bord d'un a6ronef effectuant un par-

cours maritime, obligatoirement ^pourvu

d 'appareils radio61ectriques par suite d'un

accord international, doit pouvoir emettre

et recevoir sur 1'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m)f

du type A2 ou B.

[148] b) En ce qui concerne la restriction

dans Tusage des ondes du type B, voir

sous B, § 7 (2) ci-avant.

[*49] (2) a) Toute station d'aeronef doit

* See note 10 to the frequency allocation table [omitted here].

* Voir la note 10 du tableau de repartition des frequences [pas inclus ici].

ISO

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

be capable of transmitting and receiving
the wave of 333 kc (900 m), type A2 or

A3-

[X5°] (&) This rule shall not apply to air-
craft stations flying over regions ^ where
local agreements providing otherwise are
in force.

[Articles 10-11 omitted. — Operators'
Certificates. Authority of the Master.]

ARTICLE 12* — Inspection of Stations
[m] § i. (i) The competent govern-
ments or administrations of countries
where a mobile station calls, may demand
the production of the license. The opera-
tor of the mobile station or the person
responsible for the station must submit to
this verification. The license must be
kept in such a way that it may be fur-
nished without delay. However, the
production of the license may be replaced
by a permanent posting in the station, of
a copy of the license certified by the
authority which has granted it.
[IDS] (2) When the license cannot be
produced or when manifest irregularities
are detected, the governments or ad-
ministrations may proceed to the inspec-
tion of radio installations in order to be
assured that they satisfy the require-
ments of the present Regulations.

[194] (3) Moreover, the inspectors shall
have the right to demand the production
of the operators' certificates although no
proof of professional qualifications may be
demanded.

[19S] § 2. (i) When a government or an
administration has found it necessary to
resort to the measures provided for in § I
above, or when it has not been possible to
produce the operators' certificates, it shall
be necessary immediately to inform
thereof the government or the administra-
tion to which the mobile station in ques-
tion is subject. In addition, the pro-
cedure specified in article 13 shall be
followed should necessity arise.
[196] (2) The official of the government or
of the administration which has inspected
the station must, before leaving the latter,
communicate his findings to the com-
mander or to the responsible person (art.
n) or to their substitute.
[i97] §3. As regards the technical and
operating conditions which mobile sta-
tions holding a license must satisfy in the

pouvoir dmettre et recevoir 1'onde de 333
kc/s (900 m), du type A2 ou A3.

[16°] b) Cette regie ne s'applique pas aux
stations d'a&ronef survolant les regions ou
des accords locaux, qui en disposent autre-
ment, sont en vigueur.

[Articles 10-11 omis. — Certificats des
operateurs. Autorite du commandant.}

ARTICLE 12. — Inspection des stations
[192] § it (!) Les gouvernements ou ad-
ministrations comp6tents des pays ou une
station mobile fait escale peuvent exiger
la production de la licence. L' op<§rateur
de la station mobile, ou la personne respon-
sable de la station, doit se prater a cette
constatation. La licence doit 6tre con-
serv6e de facon qu'elle puisse £tre fournie
sans d61ai. Toutefois, la production de la
licence peut £tre remplace*e par 1'affichage
a demeure, dans la station, d'une copie de
la licence, certifiee conforme par I'autorit6
qui 1'a d61ivr6e.

[193] (2) Lorsque la licence ne peut 8tre
produite, ou que des anomalies manifestes
sont constat6es, les gouvernements ou ad-
ministrations peuvent faire proc£der a
1'inspection des installations radio61ec-
triques, en vue de s'assurer qu'elles re"-
pondent aux stipulations du present
R£glement.

[194] (3) En outre, les inspecteurs sont en
droit d'exiger la production des certificats
des op&rateurs, sans qu'aucune justifica-
tion de connaissances professionnelles
puisse 6tre demande'e.
[19B] §2 (i) Lorsqu'ungouvernementou
une administration s'est trouv6 dans 1'ob-
ligation de recourir a la mesure pr6vue au
§ i ci-avant ou lorsque les certificats
d'op6rateur n'ont pu toe produits, il y a
lieu d'en informer imm^diatement le gou-
vernement pu Tadministration dont de*-
pend la station mobile en cause. Pour le
surplus, il est proce"d6, le cas ech6ant,
ainsi que le present 1'article 13.

[196] (2) Le d616gu6 du gouvernement ou
de 1' administration qui a inspect^ la sta-
tion doit, avant de quitter celle-ci, faire
part de ses constatations au commandant
ou a la personne responsable (article il)
ou a leur remplagant.
[l97] § 3. En ce qui concerne les condi-
tions techniques et d'exploitation aux-
quelles doivent satisfaire, pour le service

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

international radio-communication serv-
ice, the contracting governments shall
bind themselves not to impose upon for-
eign stations which are temporarily
located in their territorial waters, or
which may stop temporarily in their terri-
tory, conditions more stringent than those
which are provided for in the present
Regulations. These provisions shall in
no way affect the provisions which, com-
ing within the scope of international
agreements relative to maritime or air
navigation, are not determined in the
present Regulations.

ARTICLE 13. — Reporting of Violations

[lfl8] § i. Violations of the Convention or
the Radio Regulations shall be reported
by the stations detecting them to their
administration by means of statements
conforming to the model shown in ap-
pendix 3.

[l99] § 2. In case of serious violations
committed by a station, representations
must be made to the administration of the
country to which this station is subject.

[20°] § 3. If an administration has knowl-
edge of a violation of the Convention or of
the Regulations, by a station which it has
authorized, it shall ascertain the facts,
determine the responsibility, and take
the necessary action.

ARTICLE 14. — Call Signals

poi] § i. (i) All^ stations open to the
international service of public correspond-
ence, as well as private experimental
stations, amateur stations, and private
radio-communication stations, must have
call signals from the international series
assigned to each country in the following
table.1 In this table, the first letter or
the first two letters of the call signals show
the nationality of the stations.

[202] (2) When a fixed station in the
international service uses more than one
frequency, each frequency shall be
designated by a separate call signal used
for that frequency only.

de radiocommunication international, les
stations mobiles titulaires d'une licence,
les gouvernements contractants s'en-
gagent a ne pas imposer aux stations
mobiles £trang£res qui se trouvent tern-
porairement dans leurs eaux territoriales,
ou s'arr£tent temporairement sur leur ter-
ritoire, des conditions plus rigoureuses que
celles qui sont pr£vues dans le present
R&glement. Ces prescriptions n'affectent
en rien les dispositions qui, 6tant du res-
sort d 'accords internationaux relatifs a la
navigation maritime ou aerienne, ne sont
pas determiners dans le present R&gle-
ment.

ARTICLE 13. — Rapport sur les infractions

[198] § I. Les infractions £ la Convention
ou aux R&glements des radiocommunica-
tions sont signa!6es a leur administration
par les stations qui les constatent et ce,
au moyen d'etats cpnformes au module
reproduit a 1'appendice 3.
[199] § 2. Dans le cas d 'infractions im-
portantes, commises par une station, des
representations doivent 8tre faites a 1'ad-
ministration du pays dont depend cette
station.

[20°] § 3- Si une administration a con-
naissance d'une infraction a la Conven-
tion ou aux R£glements, commise dans
une des stations qu'elle a autoris6es, elle
constate les faits, fixe les responsabilite's
et prend les mesures n6cessaires.

ARTICLE 14. — Indicatifs d'appel

[201] § i. (i) Toutes les stations ouvertes
au service international de la correspon-
dance publique, ainsi que les stations
experimental privies, les stations d'ama-
teur et les stations privies de radiocom-
munication, doivent poss£der des indicatifs
d'appel de la s6rie Internationale attri-
bute a chaque pays dans le tableau de
repartition ci-apr6s. Dans ce tableau, la
premiere lettre ou les deux premieres let-
tres prevues pour les indicatifs d'appel
distinguent la nationality des stations.
[202] (2) Lorsqu'une station fixe em-
ploie, dans le service international, plus
d'une frequence, chaque frequence est
d6sign6e par un indicatif d'appel dis-
tinct, utilise uniquement pour cette fre"-
quence.

i The English translation of the table is not here reproduced. — ED.

152

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION
P03] TABLEAU DE REPARTITION DBS INDICATIFS D?APPEL

No. 317

Pays

Indicatifs

Chili . . .

CAA-CEZ

Canada

CFA-CKZ

Cuba

CLA-CMZ

Maroc

CNA-CNZ

Cuba

COA-COZ

Bolivie

CPA-CPZ

Colonies portugaises

CQA-CRZ

Portugal

CSA-CUZ

Uruguay

CVA-CXZ

Canada

CYA-CZZ

Allemagne

Espagne

EAA-EHZ

Etat libre d'Irlande

EIA-EIZ

Republique de Liberia ....

ELA-ELZ

Perse.

EPA-EQZ

Estonie

ESA-ESZ

Ethiopie

ETA-ETZ

Territoire de la Sarre

EZA-EZZ

France et colonies et pro-,
tectorats

Grande-Bretagne

Hongrie

HAA-HAZ

Confederation suisse

HBA-HBZ

Equateur

HCA-HCZ

Republique d'Ha'itL

HHA-HHZ

Republique Dominicaine . . .
Republique de Colombie . . .
Republique de Panama ....
R6publique de Honduras , . .
Siam

HIA-HIZ
HJA-HKZ
HPA-HPZ
HRA-HRZ
HSA-HSZ

Etat de la Cite du Vatican. .
Hedjaz ,

HVA-HVZ
HZA-HZZ

Italic et colonies

Japon

Etats-Unis d'Amerique ....
Norvege . ...

K
LAA-LNZ

Republique Argentine

LOA-LWZ

Luxembourg . . ,

LXA-LXZ

Lithuanie

LYA-LYZ

Bulgarie

LZA-LZZ

Grande-Bretagne

Etats-Unis d'Amerique ....
Perou

N
OAA-OCZ

Autriche. ..,.,,,, f

OEA-OEZ

Finlande. . .

OFA-OHZ

Tchecoslovaquie

OKA-OKZ

Belgique et colonies

ONA-OTZ

Danemark

OUA-OZZ

[204] j 2. Call signals shall consist of:

[205] (a) three letters, in the case of land
stations;

p06] (6) three letters, or three letters fol-
lowed by a single figure (other than o or
i), in the case of fixed stations;
[207] (c) four letters, in the case of ship
stations;

Pays

Indicatifs

Pays-Bas

PAA-PIZ

Curasao

PJA-PJZ

PKA-POZ

Bresil

PPA-PYZ

PZA-PZZ

(Abr6viations)

Union des Republiques
Sovietistes Socialistes. . . .
Suede

SAA-SMZ

Pologne

SOA-SRZ

Eervote

STA-SUZ

Grece

SVA-SZZ

Turquie

TAA-TCZ

Islande . - ...

TFA-TFZ

Guatemala

TGA-TGZ

Costa- Rica

TIA-TIZ

France et colonies et pro-,
tectorats

TKA-TZZ

Union des Republiques
Sovietistes Socialistes. . . .
Canada. .

U
VAA-VGZ

Federation Australienne. . . .
Terre-Neuve .

VHA-VMZ
VOA-VOZ

Colonies et protectorats
britanniques

VPA-VSZ

Indes britanniques

VTA-VWZ

Canada

VXA-VYZ

Etats-Unis d'Am6rique ....
Mexique

W
XAA-XFZ

Chine

XGA-XUZ

Indes britanniques . . .

XYA-XZZ

Afghanistan ,

YAA-YAZ

Indes n^erlandaises.

YBA-YHZ

Iraq

YIA-YIZ

Nouvelles-Hebrides

YTA-YTZ

Lettonie

YLA—YLZ

Ville libre de IDantzig

YMA-YMZ

Nicaragua

YNA-YNZ

Roumanie

YOA-YRZ

Republique de El Salvador. .
Yougoslavie

YSA-YSZ
YTA-YUZ

Venezuela

YVA-YWZ

Albanie

ZAA-ZAZ

Colonies _ et protectorats
britanniques.

ZBA-ZJZ

Nouvelle-Zeiande

ZKA-ZMZ

Paraguay

ZPA-ZPZ

Union de TAfrique du Sud. .

ZSA-ZUZ

[204] §2. Les indicatifs d'appel sont
formes de:

[206] a) trois lettres, dans le cas de sta-
tions terrestres ;

p06] 6) trois lettres, ou trois lettres sui-
vies d'un seul chifTre (autre que o ou i),
dans le cas de stations fixes;
[207] c) quatre lettres, dans le cas de
stations de navire;

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

153

PCS] (^) five letters, in the case of air-
craft stations;

p09] (e) five letters preceded and fol-
lowed by the Morse code signal cor-
responding to " underlined " (•••— — •—) ,
in the case of stations or aircraft carrying
matter having to do with the functioning
of the League of Nations;
pio] (j) four letters followed by a single
figure (other than o or i), in the case of
other mobile stations;
[211] (g) one or two letters and a single
figure (other than o or i) followed by a
group of not more than three letters, in
the case of private experimental stations,
amateur stations, and private radio-
communication stations; however, the
prohibition against the use of the figures
o and I shall not apply to amateur stations.
I212] §3- W In the aeronautical radio
service, after communication has been
established by means of the complete call
signal [see § 2, (d) and (e)], the aircraft
station may use an abbreviated call signal
composed :

[21S] (a) in radiotelegraphy, of the first
and last letters of the complete 5-letter
call signal;

[214] (b) in radiotelephony, of all or part
of the name of the owner of the aircraft
(company or individual) followed by the
last two letters of the registration mark.

[215] (2) In the case of an aircraft per-
forming a service which concerns the
functioning of the League of Nations, the
words "Soci6t6 des Nations" shall replace
the name of the owner of the aircraft.
[*«] §4. (i) The 26 letters of the alpha-
bet, as well as the figures, in the cases pro-
vided for in § 2, may be used to form call
signals; accented letters shall be excluded.

[217] (2) However, the following letter
combinations may not be used for call
signals:

P18] (a.) combinations beginning with A
or B, these two letters being reserved for
the geographical part of the International
Code of Signals;

pis] (b) combinations used in the Inter-
national Code of Signals, second part;

[22°] (c) combinations which might be
confused with distress signals or with
other signals of a similar character;
[221] (d) combinations reserved for the
abbreviations to be used in the radio
service.

[208] d) cinq lettres, dans le cas de sta-
tions d'aeronef ;

P09] ^ e) cinq lettres, prec6d6es et suivies
du signal du code Morse correspondant au
"soulign6" (••— — ••— ), dans le cas de
stations & bord d'aeYonef s effectuant un
transport int6ressant le fonctionnement de
la Societ6 des Nations;
[210] jf) quatre lettres, suivies d'un seul
chiflre (autre que o ou i), dans le cas
d'autres stations mobiles;
P"] g) une ou deux lettres et un seul
chiffre (autre que o ou i), suivi d'un
groupe de trois lettres au plus dans le cas
de stations exp6rimentales privies, de
stations d'amateur et de stations privies
de radiocommunication ; toutefois, 1 'in-
terdiction d'employer les chiffres o et I
ne s'applique pas aux stations d'amateur.
P12] § 3- (i) Dans le service radioa6rien,
apr&s que la communication a 6t6 6tablie
au moyen de Tindicatif d'appel complet
[voir § 2, d) et e)], la station d'aeronef
peut employer un indicatif abr6g6 con-
stitue":

pis] a) en radiotele"graphie, par les pre-
miere et derniere lettres de 1'indicatif
d'appel complet de cinq lettres;
[214] b) en radiot616phonie, par tout ou
partie du nom du propri6taire de I'a6ronef
(compagnie ou particulier) suivi des
deux dernieres lettres de la marque d'im-
matriculation.

pis] (2) Pour un aeronef effectuant un
service int6ressant le fonctionnement de
la Soci6t6 des Nations, les mots "Soci6t6
des Nations" remplacent le nom du
propne"taire de 1'aeronef.
H § 4- (i) Les 26 lettres de 1'alphabet,
ainsi que les chiffres dans les cas prevus au
§ 2, peuvent £tre employes pour former
les indicatif s d'appel ; les lettres accentu6es
sont exclues.

[217] (2) Toutefois, les combinaisons de
lettres indiqu6es ci-apres ne peuvent £tre
employees comme indicatif s d'appel:
[218] a) combinaisons commencant par
A ou par B, ces deux lettres 6tant r£-
serv6es pour la partie g6ographique du
Code International de Signaux;
p19] b) combinaisons employ6es dans le
Code International de Signaux, deuxieme

0] c) combinaisons qui pourraient toe
confondues avec les signaux de d6tresse
ou avec d'autres signaux de mime nature;
p21] d) combinaisons r&servees pour^les
abr^viations a employer dans les services
de radiocommunication.

154

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

[222] § 5- (*) Each country shall choose
call signals for its stations from the inter-
national series which is allocated to it and
shall notify the Bureau of the Union of the
call signals which it has assigned to its
stations.

p23] (2) The Bureau of the Union shall
see that the same call signal is not al-
located more than once and that those
call signals which might be confused with
distress signals, or with other signals of a
similar character, are not allocated.

ARTICLE 15. — Service Documents

[224] § I. The Bureau of the Union shall
prepare and publish the following service
documents:

[225j (#) The nomenclatures of all the
land, mobile, and fixed stations having a
call signal from the international series,
whether or not open to public correspond-
ence; the nomenclatures of the stations
operating special services, broadcasting,
and radio communications between fixed
points.

[226] (I) The frequency list. This list
shall give all the frequencies assigned to
stations intended to carry on a regular serv-
ice and which are capable of causing
international interference.
p27] (c) A nomenclature of the telegraph
offices and land stations open to inter-
national service.

[228] (d) A chart of coast stations open
to public correspondence.
p29] (e) A table and a chart to be an-
nexed to the nomenclature of coast and
ship stations indicating the zones and
hours of service of shrps of which the sta-
tions belong to the second category (see
appendices 4 and 5).

[23°] (/) An alphabetical list of the call
signals of the stations mentioned under
(a) and provided with a call signal of the
international series. This list shall be
arranged without considering nationality.
It shall be preceded by the call-signal-
allocation table appearing in article 14.

[231J (g) General radio statistics.

P32] § 2. (i) The nomenclatures of sta-
tions [§ I (a)] shall be published in sepa-
rate volumes as follows:

I. Nomenclature of Coast and Ship
Stations.

[2221 § 5- C1) Chaque pays choisit les
indicatifs d'appel de ses stations dans la
serie Internationale qui lui est allouee et
notifie au Bureau de 1'Umon les indicatifs
d'appel qu'il a attribues & ses stations.

[223] (2) Le Bureau de 1'Union veille cL
ce qu'un m£me indicatif d'appel ne soit
pas attribu6 plus d'une fois et & ce que
les indicatifs d'appel qui pourraient £tre
confondus avec les signaux de d6tresse, ou
avec d'autres signaux de mSme nature, ne
soient pas attribues.

ARTICLE 15. — Documents de service

p24] § i. Le Bureau de 1'Union dresse et
public les documents de service suivants:

[22S] a) les nomenclatures de toutes les
stations terrestres, mobiles, fixes ayant
un indicatif d'appel de la serie interna-
tionale et ouvertes ou non a la corres-
pondance publique; les nomenclatures des
stations effectuant des services speciaux,
de la radiodiffusion, des radiocommunica-
tions entre points fixes;
p26] 6) la liste des frequences. Cette
liste indique toutes les frequences at-
tribu6es aux stations destinees & effectuer
un service regulier et qui sont susceptibles
de causer des brouillages internationaux;
p27] c) une nomenclature des bureaux
t<§16graphiques et des stations terrestres
ouverts au service international ;
p28] d) une carte des stations c6tieres
ouvertes & la correspondance publique;
p29] e) un tableau et une carte destines
a £tre annexes & la nomenclature des sta-
tions c6tieres et de navire, et indiquant les
zones et les heures de service & bord des
navires dont les stations sont classics dans
la deuxieme cat6gorie (voir appendices 4

et5);

[230] y) une iiste alphabetique des indi-
catifs d'appel des stations mentionn6es
sous d) et pourvues d'un indicatif d'appel
de la serie Internationale. Cette liste est
dressee sans consideration de nationality.
Elle est prec6dee du tableau de repartition
des indicatifs d'appel figurant a I'article

P31] g) une statistique generate des radio-
communications.

p32] § 2. (i) Les nomenclatures des sta-
tions [§ i,^ a] sont publics en fascicules
s6par£s, ainsi qu'il suit:

I. Nomenclature des stations c6ti-
eres et de navire.

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

155

II. Nomenclature of Aeronautical and
Aircraft Stations.

III. Nomenclature of Stations Operat-

ing Special Services.

IV. Nomenclature of Fixed Stations

(Index to the List of Frequencies
for Fixed Stations in Service).
V. Nomenclature of Broadcasting Sta-
tions.

p33] (2) In the nomenclatures I, II, and
III, each class of stations shall occupy a
special section.

[234] §3- The form for the different
nomenclatures and for the frequency list
is given in appendix 6. Detailed informa-
tion concerning the preparation of these
documents shall be given in the prefaces,
in the headings of columns, and in the
notes of the said documents.
[235] § 4. Once a month, by means of
forms similar to those given in appendix 6,
the administrations shall notify the Bu-
reau of the Union of the additions,
changes, and deletions to be made in the
above-mentioned documents.
[236] § 5« (i) The nomenclature of coast
and ship stations as well as the nomencla-
ture of aeronautical and aircraft stations
shall be reedited every 6 months without
supplements between the two reeditipns.
As regards the nomenclature of stations
operating special services and the nomen-
clature of broadcasting stations, the Bu-
reau of the Union shall decide upon the
intervals at which they must be reedited.

p87] (2) A recapitulative supplement
shall be published every 3 months for the
nomenclature of stations operating special
services, and every 6 months for the no-
menclature of broadcasting stations,
pas] (3) xhe frequency list and the no-
menclature of fixed stations constituting
an index to the frequency list, for fixed
stations in service, shall be reedited sepa-
rately each year. They shall be kept up
to date by means of monthly supplements
also edited separately.

P39] § 6. (i) The names of coast and

aeronautical stations shall be followed

respectively by the words RADIO and

AERADIO.

p40] (2) The names of radio direction

finding and of radio-beacon stations

shall be followed respectively by the

words GONIO and PHARE.

P41] § 7. Appendix 7 contains the sym-

II. Nomenclature des stations aero-
nautiques et d'a&ronef.

III. Nomenclature des stations effectu-

ant des services sp6ciaux.

IV. Nomenclature des stations fixes

(Index a la liste des frequences
pour les stations fixes en service).
V. Nomenclature des stations de
radiodiffusion.

pas] (2) £>ans jes nomenclatures I, II et
III, chaque categoric de stations est
rang6e dans une section speciale.
p34] § 3. La forme a donner aux diffe-
rentes nomenclatures et & la liste des fr6-
quences est indiquee a 1'appendice 6.
Les renseignements d6taill6s sur 1'etablisse-
ment de ces documents sont donnes dans
les prefaces, dans I'en-t6te des colonnes et
dans les annotations desdits documents.
P35] §4. Les administrations notifient
une fois par mois au Bureau de 1'Union, au
moyen de formules identiques a celles
donnees par 1'appendice 6, les additions,
modifications et suppressions a apporter
aux documents susvises.
P36] § 5. (i) La nomenclature des sta-
tions cdtieres et de navire ainsi que la
nomenclature des stations adronautiques
et d'a6ronef sont r6editees tous les six
mois sans supplement entre deux r66di-
tions. En ce qui concerne la nomencla-
ture des stations effectuant des services
spedaux et la nomenclature des stations
de radiodiffusion, le Bureau de 1'Union
decide a quels intervalles elles doivent
£tre reeditees.

p37] (2) Un supplement recapitulatif est
public tous les 3 mois pour la nomencla-
ture des stations effectuant des services
speciaux et tous les 6 mois pour la nomen-
clature des stations de radiodiffusion.
P38] (3) La liste des frequences et la
nomenclature des stations fixes qui con-
stitue un index a la liste des frequences,
pour les stations fixes mises en service,
sont reeditees s£par6ment chaque annee.
Elles sont tenues & jour au moyen de
supplements mensuels 6dit6s 6galement
separement.

p39] § 6. (i) Les noms des stations
c6tieres et aeronautiques sont suivis
respectivement des mots RADIO et
AERADIO.

p40] (2) Les noms des stations radio-
goniometriques et des radiophares sont
suivis respectivement des mots GONIO et
PHARE.
p41] § 7. L'appendice 7 contient les no-

156

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

tations employees dans les documents
pour indiquer la nature et P6tendue du
service des stations.

[242] § 8. Les documents de service dont
les stations mobiles doivent £tre pourvues
sont enumeres dans Fappendice 8.

ARTICLE 16. — Procedure generale radio-
telegraphique dans le service mobile l,2
p43] § i (l) Dans le service mobile, la
procedure d6taille"e ci-apres est obliga-
toire, sauf dans le cas d'appel ou de trafic
de dtoesse auquel sont applicables les
dispositions de 1'article 22.
[244] (2) Pour l'£change des radiocom-
munications, les stations du service mobile
utilisent les abr&viations vis6es £ 1'ap-
pendice 9.

[245] § 2. (i) Avant d'emettre, toute sta-
tion doit s'assurer qu'elle ne produira pas
un brouillage nuisible aux transmissions
s'effectuant dans son rayon d 'action; si un
tel brouillage est probable, la station at-
tend le premier arrest de la transmission
qu'elle pourrait troubler.
[246] (2) Toutefois, m£me si, en opeYant
ainsi, 1'^mission de cette station vient &
brouiller une transmission radio61ectrique
d6j£ en cours, on appliquera les regies
suivantes:

[247] a) Dans la zone de communication
(Tune station terrestre ouverte au service
de la correspondance publique ou d'une
station a6ronautique quelconque, la sta-
tion dont remission produit le brouillage
doit cesser d'6mettre 4 la premiere de-
mande de la station terrestre ou a6ro-
nautique pr6cit6e.

p48] 6) Dans le cas ou une transmission
radioelectrique d£j£ en cours entre deux
navires vient & £tre brouill£e par une
Emission d'un autre navire, ce dernier doit
cesser d'&nettre & la premiere demande de
1'un quelconque des deux autres.
p49] c) La station qui demande cette
cessation doit indiquer la dur£e approx-
imative de 1'attente impos6e & la station
dont elle suspend 1'emission.
[2SO] § 3- Les radiotelegrammes de toute
nature transmis par les stations de navire
sont numerates par s6ries quotidiennes en
donnant le numero I au premier radio-
telegramme transmis chaque jour £ chaque
station terrestre diffeYente.

* This procedure shall be applicable to short waves so far as possible.

* The provisions of §§ 2 and 8 shall be applicable to radiotelephone transmissions of the mobile
service.

1 Cette procedure est applicable aux ondes courtes, dans la mesure du possible,
a Les dispositions des §§ 2 et 8 sont applicables aux transmissions radiotelephoniques du service .
mobile.

bols used in the documents to indicate the

nature and the scope of the service of

stations.

[242] § 8. The service documents with

which mobile stations must be provided

are listed in appendix 8.

ARTICLE 16. — General Radiotelegraph Pro-

cedure in the Mobile Service V
P43] § I- (i) In the mobile service, the
following detailed procedure shall be
obligatory except in the case of distress
call or traffic to which the provisions of
article 22 shall apply.
[244] (2) For the exchange of radio com-
munications, stations of the mobile service
shall use the abbreviations given in ap-
pendix 9.

p46] § 2. (i) Before transmitting, any
station must make sure that it will not
produce harmful interference with the
transmissions being made within its
range; if such interference is likely, the
station shall await the first stop in the
transmission which it may disturb.
p46] (2) If however, even after taking
these precautions, the emissions of this
station should cause interference with a
radio transmission already in progress, the
following rules shall be applied:
[247] (o) in the communication zone of a
land station open to the public corre-
spondence service or of any aeronautical
station, the station whose emission pro-
duces the interference must cease trans-
mitting at the first request of the above-
mentioned land or aeronautical station.

p48] . (6) In the case where a radio trans-
mission already in progress between two
ships happens to be interfered with by an
emission from another ship, the latter
must cease transmitting at the first re-
quest of either of the other two.
P49] (c) The station requesting this ces-
sation must indicate the approximate
length of the wait imposed upon the sta-
tion whose emission it is suspending.
P50] §3- Radiotelegrams of all kinds
transmitted by ship stations shall be num-
bered in daily series, assigning number I
to the first radiotelegram transmitted each
day to each land station separately.

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

157

[2S1] § 4. CALLING A STATION AND SIGNALS
PREPARATORY TO TRAFFIC

[252] (i) Method of calling

The call shall consist of the following:

not more than three times the call
signal of the station called; the
word DE;

not more than three times the call
signal of the calling station.

pas] (2) Wave to be used for the call and
for preparatory signals

To make the call as well as to transmit
preparatory signals the calling station
shall use the wave on which the station
called is listening.

[254] (.j) Indication of the wave to be used
for the traffic

[2B5] The call, as indicated in subpara-
graph (i) above, must be followed by the
regulatory abbreviation indicating the
frequency and/or the type of wave which
the calling station proposes to use to
transmit its traffic.

[256] When, as an exception to this rule,
the call is not followed by the indica-
tion of the wave to be used for the
traffic:

[257] (a) if the calling station is a land
station:

it shall mean that this station proposes
to use its normal working-wave, as in-
dicated in the nomenclature, for the
traffic.

[268] (b) if the calling station is a
mobile station:

it shall mean that the wave to be used
for the traffic is to be chosen by the sta-
tion called.

P69] (4) Indication, when required, of the
number of telegrams or of
transmission by series

peo] When the calling station has more
than one telegram to transmit to the sta-
tion called, the preceding preparatory
signals shall be followed by the regulatory
abbreviation and by the figure specifying
the number of these telegrams,
pei] Furthermore, when the calling sta-
tion wishes to transmit these telegrams in
series, it shall so indicate by adding the
regulatory abbreviation requesting the
consent of the station called.

P51] §4. APPEL D'UNE STATION ET SIG-
NAUX PREPARATOIRES AU TRAFIC

P62] (i) Formule d'appel

L'appel est constitud comme suit:

trois fois, au plus, 1'mdicatif d'appel
de la station appelee; le mot DE;

trois fois, au plus, 1'indicatif d'appel
de la station appelante.

p53] (2) Ond e d, utiliser pour I'appel et les
signaux preparatoires

Pour faire I'appel ainsi que pour trans-
mettre les signaux preparatoires, la station
appelante utilise I'onde sur laquelle veille
la station appelee.

P54] (3) Indication de I'onde a utiliser
pour le trafic

P55] L'appel, tel qu'il est indique &
1'alinea (i) ci-avant, doit £tre suivi de
Fabreviation reglementaire indiquant la
frequence et/ou le type d'onde que la
station appelante se propose d 'utiliser
pour transmettre son trafic.
P56] Lorsque, par exception a cette
regie, Tappel n'est pas suivi de 1'indication
de I'onde £ utiliser pour le trafic:

p57] a) si la station appelante est une

station terrestre:

c'est que cette station se propose d'utili-
ser pour le trafic son onde normale de
travail, indique"e dans la nomenclature;

pss] ft) ^ la station appelante est une

station mobile:

c'est que Tonde & utiliser pour le trafic
est £ choisir par la station appelee.

P59] (4) Indication iventuelle du nombre
de radiotelegrammes ou de la
transmission par serie

p60] Lorsque la station appelante a plus
d'un radioteiegramme & transmettre &
la station appelee, les signaux prepara-
tpires precedents sont suivis de 1'abr Avia-
tion reglementaire et du chiffre spedfiant
le nombre de ces radiotelegrammes.
p61] En outre, lorsque la station ap-
pelante desire transmettre ces radio-
teiegrammes par serie, elle 1'indique en
ajoutant 1'abreviation reglementaire pour
emander le consentement de la stationd
appelee.

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

P62] § 5- REPLY TO CALLS AND SIGNALS
PREPARATORY TO TRAFFIC

[2»] (i) Method of reply to calls

The reply to calls shall consist of the
following:

not more than three times the call

signal of the calling station;
the word DE;
the call signal of the station called.

[»M] (2) Wave for reply

[285] Xo transmit the reply to calls and to
preparatory signals, the station called
shall use the wave on which the calling
station must listen.

[2M] As an exception to this rule, when a
mobile station calls a coast station on the
wave 143 kc (2,100 m), the coast station
shall transmit the reply to the calls on its
normal working-wave of the bands be-
tween 100 and 160 kc (3,000 and 1,875
m), as indicated in the nomenclature.

per] (3) Understanding as to the wave to
be used for the traffic

[268] A. If the station called has an un-
derstanding with the calling station, it
shall transmit:

(a) the reply to the call ;

(&) the regulatory abbreviation indi-
cating that from that time on it is listen-
ing on the frequency and/or the type of
wave announced by the calling station;

(d) the letter K, if the station called
is ready to receive the traffic of the calling
station;

(e) in certain cases, if it is useful, the
regulatory abbreviation and the figure
indicating the strength of the signals
received. (See appendix 10.)

269] B. If the station has no preliminary
understanding, or if it must choose the
wave to be used for the traffic, it shall
transmit:

(a) the reply to the call;

(b) the regulatory abbreviation indi-
cating the frequency and/or the type of
wave requested;*

[282] § 5- R&PONSE AUX APPELS ET SIG-
NAUX PR&PARATOIRES AU TRAFIC

[26S] (i) Formule de reponse aux appels

La reponse aux appels est constitute
comme suit:

trois fois, au plus, 1'indicatif d'appel

de la station appelante ;
le mot DE;

Tindicatif d'appel de la station
appe!6e.

ps*] (2) Qnde de reponse

[265] Pour transrnettre la r£ponse aux
appels et aux signaux preparatoires, la
station appelee emploie 1'onde sur laquelle
doit veiller la station appelante.
[266] Par exception & cette regie, quand
une station mobile appelle une station
c6ti&re sur 1'onde de 143 kc/s (2 100 m), la
station cdtiere transmet la reponse aux
appels sur son onde normale de travail des
bandes de 100 & 160 kc/s (3 ooo a I 875
m), telle qu'elle est indiqu6e dans la
nomenclature.

per] (3) Accord sur Vonde a utilizer pour
le trafic

[268] A. Si la station appelee est d'accord
avec la station appelante, elle transmet:

a) la reponse a Tappel ;

6) 1'abreviation reglementaire indiquant
qu'a partir de ce moment elle ecoute sur
la frequence et/ou le type d'onde an-
nonces par la station appelante;

c) eventuellement les indications pr6-
vues a Talinea (4) ;

d) la lettre K si la station appelee est
pr6te a recevoir le trafic de la station
appelante;

e) eventuellement, si c'est utile, I'abr6-
viation reglementaire et le chiifre indi-
quant la force des signaux regus (voir
1'appendice 10).

[26£>] B. Si la station n'est pas d'accord,
ou si elle doit choisir 1'onde £ utiliser pour
le trafic, elle transmet:

a) la reponse a 1'appel ;

b) Fabreviation reglementaire indi-
quant la frequence et/ou le type d'onde
demandes;*

* In the case where the choice of the wave to be used for the traffic falls to the station called, and
if, in exceptional cases, the latter station does not give the corresponding indication, the traffic
shall take place on the wave used for the call.

* Dans le cas ou le choix de 1'onde a utiliser pour le trafic revient a la station appelee, et sif ex-
ceptionnellement, cette dernidre station ne donne pas 1'indication correspondante, le trafic a lieu
sur 1'onde utilisee pour 1'appel.

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

159

(c) in some cases, the indications men-
tioned in subparagraph (4),
[270] When an agreement is reached on
the wave which the calling station must
use for its traffic, the station called shall
transmit the letter K after the indications
contained in its reply.

p71] (4) Reply to the request for transmis-
sion by series

p72] The station called, replying to a
calling station which has asked to trans-
mit its telegrams in series [§ 4 (4)], shall
indicate, by means of the regulatory ab-
breviation, whether it refuses or accepts
and, in the latter case, if need be, shall
specify the number of radiotelegrams
which it is ready to receive in one series.

P73] (5) Difficulties in reception

p74] (a) If the station called is prevented
from receiving, it shall reply to the call as
indicated in subparagraph (3) above, but
it shall replace the letter K by the signal
•«—••* (wait), followed by a number
indicating in minutes the probable dura-
tion of the wait. If this probable dura-
tion exceeds 10 minutes, (5 minutes in the
aeronautical mobile service), a reason
must be given therefor.
[275] (j) When a station receives a call
without being certain that this call is in-
tended for it, it must not reply before the
call has been repeated and understood.
When, on the other hand, a station re-
ceives a call which is intended for it, but is
doubtful about the call signal of the calling
station, it must reply immediately, using
the regulatory abbreviation instead of the
call signal of the latter station.

P78] § 6. ROUTING OF TRAFFIC

[277] (j) Traffic wave

[m] (0) Each station of the mobile serv-
ice shall transmit its traffic by using, in
principle, one of its working-waves, as
they are indicated in the nomenclature for
the band in which the call was made.

P79] (b) Outside of its normal working-
wave which is printed in boldface type in
the nomenclature, each station may use
additional waves of the same band, in ac-
cordance with the provisions of article 19
§ i do).

c) 6ventuellement les indications pre-
vues a Talin6a (4).

P70] Lorsque 1'accord est realise sur
1'onde que devra employer la station
appelante pour son trafic, la station
appe!6e transmet la lettre K a la suite des
indications contenues dans sa r£ponse.

p71] (4) Reponse a la demande de trans-
mission par serie

[272] ^ La station appelee, r£pondant a une
station appelante qui a demande a trans-
mettre ses radiot61£grammes par s6rie
[§ 4, (4)], indique, au moyen de 1'abrevia-
tion r6glementaire, son refus ou son ac-
ceptation et, dans ce dernier cas, s'il y a
lieu, elle specific le nombre des radioteld-
gramrnes qu'elle est pr6te a recevoir en
une s6rie.

P73] (5) Difficult^ de reception

p74] a) Si la station appelee est emp£ch6e
de recevoir, elle repond a 1'appel comme il
est indique a 1'alinea (3) ci-avant, mais
elle remplace la lettre K par le signal
.—»«•. (attente), suivi d'un nombre
indiquant en minutes la duree probable de
1'attente. Si cette duree probable excede
10 minutes (5 minutes dans le service
mobile de I'a&ronautique), 1'attente doit
£tre motivee.

P7fi] &) Lorsqu'une station recoit un
appel sans £tre certaine que cet appel lui
est destin£, elle ne doit pas r6pondre avant
que 1'appel n'ait 6te r6pete et compris.
Lorsque, par ailleurs, une station recpit
un appel qui lui est destin£, mais a des
doutes sur 1'indicatif d 'appel de la station
appelante, elle doit repondre imm£diate-
ment en utilisant 1'abreviation regle-
mentaire en lieu et place de 1'indicatif
d'appel de cette derniere station.

P76] §6. ACHEMINEMENT DU TRAFIC

P77] (i) Ondedetrafic

p78] a) Chaque station du service mobile
transmet son trafic en employant, en
principe, une de ses ondes de travail,
telles qu'elles sont indiquees dans la
nomenclature, pour la bande dans laquelle
a eu lieu 1'appel.

p79] b) En dehors de son onde normale de
travail, imprimee en caracteres gras dans
la nomenclature, chaque station peut
employer des ondes supplementaires de la
m£me bande, conform6ment aux disposi-
tions de 1'article 19, § I, (10).

i6o

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

PSD] (c) Tne use of calling waves for
traffic shall be governed by article 19.

[28X] (2) Long radiotelegrams

p82] (a) In principle, any radio telegram
containing more than 100 words shall be
considered as forming a series or shall end
a series in progress.

[283] (b) As a general rule, long radio-
telegrams, both in plain language and in
code or cipher language, shall be trans-
mitted in sections, each section containing
50 words in the case of plain language, and
20 words or groups in the case of code or
cipher.

p84] (c) At the end of each section the
signal ••——*• (?) meaning "have you
received the radiotelegram correctly up to
this point?" shall be transmitted. If the
section has been correctly received, the
receiving station shall reply by the letter
K and the transmission of the radiotele-
gram shall be continued.

[285] (3) Suspension of traffic

When a station of the mobile service
transmits on a working-wave of a land
station and thus causes interference with
the said land station, it must suspend its
work at the request of the latter.

[286] § ^ END OF TRAFFIC AND OF WORK

t287] (i) Signal for the end of trans-
mission

pas] (a) The transmission of a radio*
telegram shall be ended by the signal
••"•• ••"""• (end of transmission), followed
by the call signal of the transmitting
station and the letter K.
p89] (b) In the case of transmission by
series, the end of each radiotelegram shall
be indicated by the signal •«—•—-• and
the end of the series by the call signal of
the transmitting station and the letter K.

[290] (2) Acknowledgment of receipt

p91] (a) The acknowledgment of receipt
of a radiotelegram shall be given by trans-
mitting the letter R, followed by the
number of the radiotelegram; this ac-
knowledgment of receipt shall be preceded
by the following formula: call signal of the
station which has transmitted, word DE,
call signal of the station which has re-
ceived.

pso] c) L'emploi des ondes d'appel pour
le trafic est reglement6 par 1'article 19.

p81] (2) Longs radiotelegrammes

p82] a) En principe, tout radiotele-
gramme contenant plus de 100 mots est
consider^ comme formant une serie, ou
met fin a la serie en cours.
p83] b) En regie g6n6rale, les longs radio-
telegrammes, tant ceux en langage clair
que ceux en langage convenu ou chififr6,
sont transmis par tranches, chaque
tranche contenant 50 mots dans le cas du
langage clair et 20 mots ou groupes
lorsqu'il s'agit du langage convenu ou
chiffre.

p84] c) A la fin de chaque tranche, le
signal ••—•—•• (?) signifiant "avez-
vous bien regu le radiotelegrarnme jusqu'
ici?" est transmis. Si la tranche a 6t6
correctment recue, la station receptrice
repond par la lettre K et la transmission
du radiotelegramme est poursuivie.

P863 (3) Suspension du trafic

Quand une station du service mobile
transmet sur une onde de travail d'une
station terrestre et cause ainsi du brouil-
lage a ladite station terrestre, elle doit
suspendre son travail a la demande de
cette derniere.

[286] § 7. FIN DU TRAFIC ET DXJ TRAVAIL

P87] (l) Signal defin de transmission

P8S] a) La transmission d'un radiotele-
gramme se termine par le signal •—••—*
(fin de transmission), suivi de 1'indicatif
d'appel de la station transmettrice et de
la lettre K.

P89] b) Dans le cas de transmission par
serie, la fin de chaque radiotelegramme
est indiqu^e par le signal •-«••—•* et la
fin de la serie par 1'indicatif d'appel de la
station transmettrice et la lettre K.

p90] (2) Accuse de reception

P91]^ a) L'accus6 de reception d'un
radiot61egramme est donn6 en transmet-
tant la lettre R, suivie du num6ro du
radiotelegramme; cet accus6 de reception
est pr6c6d6 de la formule ci-apr^s: indi-
catif d'appel de la station qui a transmis,
mot DE, indicatif d'appel de la station
qui a recu.

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

[292] (&) The acknowledgment of receipt
of a series of radiotelegrams shall be given
by transmitting the letter R followed by
the number of the last radiotelegram re-
ceived. This acknowledgment of receipt
shall be preceded by the above formula.
p93] (c) The acknowledgment of receipt
shall be made by the receiving station on
the same wave as for the reply to the call
[see § 5 (2) above].

[294]

(3) End of work

[295] (0) xhe end of work between two
stations shall be indicated by each of
them by means of the signal *••—••—
(end of work), followed by its own call
signal.

p96] (&) For these signals, the sending
station shall continue to use the traffic
wave and the receiving station the wave
for the reply to the call.
p97] (c) The signal •••• — — (end of
work) shall also be used when the trans-
mission of radiotelegrams of general in-
formation, meteorological information,
and general safety warnings is ended and
the transmission ends in the long-distance
radio-communication service with de-
ferred acknowledgment of receipt or
without acknowledgment of receipt.

[298] § 8. DURATION OF WORK

[299] (x) (0,) in no case, in the maritime

mobile service, must the work on 500 kc

(600 m) exceed 10 minutes.

[80°] (&) In no case, in the aerial mobile

service, must the work on 333 kc (900 m)

exceed 5 minutes.

[*°l] (2) On frequencies other than those

of 500 kc (600 m) and 333 kc (900 m) the

duration of the periods of work shall be

determined :

[302] (a) between a land station and a

mobile station, by the land station,

[303] (&) between mobile stations, by the

receiving station.

[304] §9. TESTS

When it is necessary to make test sig-
nals, either for the adjustment of a trans-
mitter before transmitting the call, or for
the adjustment of a receiver, these signals
must not last more than 10 seconds, and
they must be composed of a series of V's
followed by the call signal of the station
transmitting for the tests.

P92] b) L'accus6 de reception d'une
seVie de radiote"legrammes est donn6 en
transmettant la lettre R suivie du num6ro
du dernier radiotelegramme recu. Get
accus6 de reception est pr£c6d6 de la
formule ci-avant.

p93] c) L'accus6 de reception est fait
par la station receptrice sur la m£me
onde que pour la response a Tappel [voir
§ 5, (2) ci-avant].

P94] (3) Fin du travail

p96] a) La fin du travail entre deux
stations est indiquee par chacune d'elles
au moyen du signal •••—••— (fin du tra-
vail), suivi de son propre indicatif d'appel.

P96] 5) Pour ces signaux, la station
knettrice continue i utiliser Tonde de
trafic et la station receptrice 1'onde de
r£ponse a 1'appel.

p97] c) Le signal •••— — (fin du
travail) est aussi utilis6 lorsque la trans-
mission des radio t616grammes d 'informa-
tion g6ne"rale, des informations m6teoro-
logiques et des avis g6n&raux de s6curit6
se termine et que la transmission se
termine dans le service de radiocommu-
nication £ grande distance avec accus6
de reception diff6r6 ou sans accus6 de
reception.

P98] § 8. DUR&E DU TRAVAIL

p99] (i) a) En aucun cas, dans le service
mobile maritime, le travail sur 500 kc/s
(600 m) ne doit d6passer dix minutes. ^
[300] 5) En aucun cas, dans le service
mobile aerien, le travail sur 333 kc/s
(900 m) ne doit depasser cinq minutes.
[301] (2) Sur les frequences autres que
celles de 500 kc/s (600 m) et 333 kc/s
(900 m), la dur6e des p£riodes de travail
est d6terminee:

[302] a) entre station terrestre et station
mobile, par la station terrestre,
[808] 6) entre stations mobiles, par la
station receptrice.

[804] §9. ESSAIS

Lorsqu'il est necessaire de faire des
signaux d'essais, soit pour le r6glage d'un
dmetteur avant de transmettre 1'appel,
spit pour le r6glage d'un r6cepteur, ces
signaux ne doivent pas durer plus de 10
secondes et ils doivent §tre constitu6s
par une s£rie de WV suivie de Findicatif
d'appel de la station qui 6met pour
essais.

162

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

ARTICLE 17. — General Call "to all11

[30B] § i. Two types of call signals "to
all" shall be recognized:

1. the CQ call followed by the
letter K (see §§2 and 3);

2. the CQ call not followed by
the letter K (see § 4).

[306] § 2. Stations desiring to enter into
communication with stations of the mobile
service, without however, knowing the
names of the mobile stations within their
range, can use the inquiry signal CQ, in
place of the call signal of the station called,
in the calling formula, this formula being
followed by the letter K (general call to all
mobile stations, with request for reply).

[m] § 3- In regions where traffic is
heavy, the use of the CQ call followed by
the letter K shall be forbidden, except in
combination with urgent signals.
[308] § 4. The CQ call not followed^ by
the letter K (general call to all stations
without request for reply) shall be used
before transmission of information of all
kinds intended to be read or used by any-
one who can receive it.

ARTICLE 18. — Catting
[joj] § Im (x) AS a general rule, it shall
devolve upon the mobile station to estab-
lish communication with the land station.
It may call the land station for this pur-
pose only after having arrived within the
range of the latter.

[3io] (2) However, a land station having
traffic for a mobile station which has not
indicated its presence may call the latter if
it has reason to assume that the said mo-
bile station is within its range and is
listening.

[8U] § 2. (i) Furthermore, land stations
may transmit their calls in the form of
"lists of calls" consisting of the call sig-
nals of all mobile stations for which they
have traffic on hand, at definite intervals,
at least 2 hours apart, which have been
established by agreements between the
governments concerned. Land stations
which transmit their calls on the wave of
500 kc (600 m) shall transmit them in the
form of "lists of calls'1, in alphabetical
order, to include only the call signals of
mobile stations for which they have traffic
on hand and which are within their range.

ARTICLE 17. — Appel general "d tons"

[305] § i. Deux types de signaux d'appels
"a tous" sont reconnus:

i° appel CQ suivi de la lettre K

(voir §§2et3);
2° appel CQ non suivi de la

lettre K (voir §4).

[306] § 2. Les stations qui d6sirent entrer
en communication avec des stations du
service mobile, sans toutefpis connaitre
le nom de celles de ces stations qui sont
dans leur rayon d'action, peuvent em-
ployer le signal de recherche CQ, rem-
placant 1'indicatif de la station appele*e
dans la fprmule d'appel, cette formule
<§tant suivie de la lettre K (appel g<§ne>al &
toutes les stations du service mobile, avec
demande de r6ponse).
t307] § 3- Dans les regions ou le trafic
est intense, 1'emploi de 1 'appel CQ suivi de
la lettre K est interdit, sauf en combi-
naison avec des signaux d'urgence.
[308] §4. L'appel CQ non suivi de la
lettre K (appel general £ toutes les sta-
tions sans demande de response) est em-
ploye* avant la transmission des informa-
tions de tpute nature destinies a 6tre
lues ou utilises par quiconque peut les
capter.

ARTICLE 18. — Appels

[809] §i. (i) En regie g£n6rale, il in-
combe a la station mobile d'6tablir la
communication avec la station terrestre.
Elle ne peut appeler la station terrestre
dans ce but qu'apres §tre arrivee dans le
rayon d'action de celle-ci.
[aio] (2) Toutefois, une station terrestre
ayant du trafic pour une station mobile
qui ne lui a pas signale sa presence, peut
appeler cette station si elle est en droit de
supposer que ladite station mobile est a
sa port£e et assure 1'ecoute.
[3l1] § 2. (i) En outre, les stations ter-
restres peuvent transmettre leurs appels
sous forme de "listes d'appels" forme'es
des indicatifs d'appel de toutes les stations
mobiles pour lesquelles elles ont du trafic
en instance, £ des intervalles determines,
espace"s d'au moins deux heures, ayant
fait Tobjet d'accords conclus entre les
gouvernements int£ress£s. Les stations
terrestres qui £mettent leurs appels sur
1'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m) les trans-
mettent sous forme de "listes d'appels",
par ordre alphab£tique, en y insurant
seulement les indicatifs d'appel de ces

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

I63

To their own call signal they shall add the
abbreviations to indicate the working-
wave they wish to use in the transmission.
Land stations which use continuous waves
outside of the band olf 365 to 515 kc (822 to
583 rn) shall transmit the call signals in
the order which is most convenient for
them.

[3l2] (2) The time at which land stations
transmit their lists of calls, as well as the
frequencies and types of waves which they
use for this purpose must be indicated in
the nomenclature.

[313] (3) Mobile stations which, during
this transmission, hear their call signal,
must answer as soon as they can, follow-
ing, so far as possible, the order in which
they were called.

[3H] (4) When the traffic cannot be dis-
posed of immediately, the land station
shall inform each mobile station concerned
of the probable time at which the work
can begin, as well as the frequency and the
type of wave which will be used in the
work with it, if this is necessary.

[315] § 3- When a land station receives
calls from several mobile stations at prac-
tically the same time, it shall decide as to
the order in which these stations may
transmit their traffic to it, its decision
being based only on the necessity for per-
mitting each calling station to exchange
with it the greatest possible number of
radiotelegrams.

[816] § 4- (i) When communication is
first established with a land station, every
mobile station, if it deems it advisable on
account of possible confusion, can trans-
mit its name spelled out as it appears in
the nomenclature.

[an] (2) The land station can, by means
of the abbreviation PTR, request the
mobile station to give it the following
information:

(a) approximate distance in nautical
miles and bearing with reference to the
land station, or else the position indicated
by latitude and longitude;

(6) next port of call,

[si8j (3) The information covered by
subparagraph (2) shall be furnished by
authorization of the commander or the
person responsible for the vehicle carrying

stations mobiles pour lesquelles elles ont
du tranc en instance et qui se trouvent
dans leur rayon d'action. Elles ajoutent
& leur propre indicatif d'appel les abrevia-
tions pour 1'indication de 1'onde de travail
dont elles veulent faire usage pour la
transmission. Les stations terrestres qui
utilisent des ondes entretenues en dehors
de la bande de 365 £ 515 kc/s (822 & 583
m) transrnettent les indicatifs d'appel dans
1'ordre qui leur convient le mieux.
[812] (2) L'heure & laquelle les stations
terrestres transrnettent leur liste d'appels,
ainsi que les frequences et les types d'onde
qu 'elles utilisent & cette fin doivent 6tre
mentionn£s dans la nomenclature.
[3l3] (3) Les stations mobiles qui, dans
cette transmission, pergoivent leur indi-
catif d'appel, doivent r6pondre, aussit6t
qu'elles le peuvent, en observant entre
elles, autant que possible, 1'ordre dans
lequel elles ont iti appe!6es.
[3H] (4) Lorsque le trafic ne peut £tre
6coul6 immediatement, la station ter-
restre fait connaitre a chaque station
mobile int£ressee 1'heure probable a
laquelle le travail pourra commencer
ainsi que, si cela est n6cessaire, la fr6-
quence et le type d'onde qui seront utilis6s
pour le travail avec elle.
t315] § 3' Quand une station terrestre
recoit, pratiquement en m£me temps, des
appels de plusieurs stations mobiles, elle
decide de 1'ordre dans lequel ces stations
pourront lui transmettre leur trafic, sa
decision s'inspirant uniquement de la
n6cessite de permettre £ chacune des
stations appelantes d'6changer avec elle le
plus grand nombre possible de radio-
tel6grammes.

lm] § 4- (i) Lors du premier 6tablisse-
ment de communication avec une station
terrestre, toute station mobile peut, si elle
le juge utile parce que des confusions sont &
craindre, transmettre en toutes lettres son
nom tel qu'il figure dans la nomenclature.
[M] (2) La station terrestre peut, au
moyen de 1'abr Aviation PTR, demander £
la station mobile de lui fournir les indica-
tions ci-apres:

a) distance approximative en milles ma-
rins et relevement par rapport & la station
terrestre ou bien position indiqu6e par la
latitude et la longitude;

b) prochain lieu d'escale.

[318] (3) Les indications vis6es £ Talinea
(2) sont fournies apr&s autorisation du
commandant ou de la personne jrespon-
sable du v£hicule portant la station mo-

1 64

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

the mobile station and only in case it is
requested by the land station.
[8l9] § 5- In. communications between
land stations and mobile stations, the
mobile station shall comply with the in-
structions given by the land station, in all
questions relative to the order and the
time of transmission, to the choice of fre-
quency (wavelength) and/or of the type
of wave and to the suspension of work.
This provision shall not apply to cases of
distress.

[82°] § 6. In communications between
mobile stations, and except for cases of
distress, the station called shall control
the work as indicated in § 5 above.
[35Sl] § 7. (i) When a station called does
not answer a call sent three times, at
intervals of 2 minutes, the call must cease
and it may be resumed only 15 minutes
later (5 minutes for aeronautical mobile
service). The calling station, before re-
suming the call, must make certain that
the station called is not in communication
with another station at that time.

[322] (2) The call may be repeated at
shorter intervals if there is no danger that
it will interfere with communications in
progress.

[323] §g. When the name and the ad-
dress of the operating agency of a mobile
station are not shown in the nomencla-
ture or are no longer in accord with the
data given therein, it shall devolve upon
the mobile station, as a matter of routine,
to furnish the land station to which it
sends traffic with all the necessary infor-
mation in this connection, using for this
purpose the appropriate abbreviations.

ARTICLE 19. — Use of Waves in the Mobile
Service

[8JU] § i. (i) In the bands included be-
tween 365 and 515 kc (822 and 583 in), the
only type-B waves permissible shall be
the following:

375, 410, 425, 454, and 500 kc (800, 730,
705, 660, and 600 m).
[325I (2) The general calling-wave which
must be used by all ship stations and by
all coast stations working in radioteleg-
raphy in the authorized bands between
365 and 515 kc (822 and 583 m), as well as
by aircraft wishing to enter into communi-
cation with a coast station or a ship sta-
tion, shall be the wave 500 kc (600 m)
(Ai, A2, or B).

bile et seulement dans le cas oft elles sont
demandees par la station terrestre.
[8l9] § 5- Dans les communications entre
stations terrestres et stations mobiles, la
station mobile se conforme aux instruc-
tions donn£es par la station terrestre, dans
toutes les questions relatives & 1'ordre et &
1'heure de transmission, au choix de la
frequence (longueur d'onde) et/ou du
type d'onde, et & la suspension du travail.
Cette prescription ne s 'applique pas aux
cas de d6tresse.

[32°] § 6. Dans les ^changes entre stations
mobiles, et sauf dans le cas de d£tresse,
la station appel<§e a le contr61e du travail,
comme il est indiqu6 au § 5 ci-avant.
[321J §7- (*) Lorsqu'une station ap-
pe!6e ne r6pond pas & 1'appel 6rnis trois
fois, 4 des intervalles de deux minutes,
1'appel doit cesser et il ne peut §tre repris
que 15 minutes plus tard (5 minutes pour
le service mobile de Pa6ronautique). La
station appelante, avant de recommencer
1'appel, doit s'assurer que la station ap-
pe!6e n'est pas, £ ce moment, en com-
munication avec une autre station.
[322] (2) L'appel peut Stre r6p6te a des
intervalles moms longs, s'il n'est pas a
craindre qu'il vienne brouiller des com-
munications en cours.
[323] § 8. Lorsque le nom et Fadresse de
1'exploitant d'une station mobile ne sont
pas mentionne's dans la nomenclature ou
ne sont plus en concordance avec les in-
dications de celle-ci, il appartient & la sta-
tion mobile de donner d'office & la station
terrestre £ laquelle elle transmet du trafic,
tous les renseignements n6cessaires, sous
ce rapport, en utilisant, £ cette, fin, les
abr6viations appropriees,

ARTICLE 19. — Emploi des ondes dans le

service mobile

[324] § If (r) Dans les bandes comprises
entre 365 et 515 kc/s (822 et 583 m), les
seules ondes admises en type B sont les
suivantes:

375, 410, 425, 454 et 500 kc/s (800, 730,
705, 660 et 600 m).

[325] (2) L'onde generate d'appel qui
doit £tre employee par toute station de
navire et toute station cdti&re travaillant
en radiot616graphie dans les bandes
autorisees entre 365 et 515 kc/s (822 et
583 m), ainsi que par les a6ronefs qui
d^sirent entrer en communication avec
une station cdtiere ou une station de
navire, est 1'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m)
(Ai, A2 ou B).

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

165

[m] (3) L'onde de 333 kc/s (900 m) est
1'onde Internationale d'appel pour les
services a6riens, sauf comme il est indiqu6
dans Tarticle 9, § 10 (2).
[327] (4) L'onde de 143 kc/s (2 100 m)
(du type A I settlement) est 1'onde Inter-
nationale d'appel employee dans les com-
munications du service mobile a grande
distance dans les bandes de 100 a 160 kc/s
(3 ooo a I 875 m).

[328] (5) L'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m) est
1'onde internationale de detresse; elle est
utilisee dans ce but par les stations de
navire et par les stations d'aeronef qui
demandent 1'assistance des services mari-
times. Elle ne peut 6tre utilisee d'une
maniere gen6rale que pour 1'appel et la
reponse ainsi que pour le trafic de de-
tresse, les signaux et messages d'urgence
et de s6curite.

[329] (6) Toutefois, a condition de ne pas
troubler les signaux de detresse, d'ur-
gence, de s6curit&, d'appel et de reponse,
1'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m) peut Itre
utilisee:

[33°] a) dans les regions de trafic intense
pour la transmission d'un radiotele-
gramme unique et court;1
[331] &) dans les autres regions, pour
d'autres buts, mais avec discretion.
[332] (7) En dehors de 1'onde de 500
kc/s (600 m), 1'usage des ondes de tous
types comprises entre 485 et 515 kc/s
(620 et 583 m) est interdit.
[338] (8) En dehors de 1'onde de 143 kc/s
(2 100 m), 1'usage de toutes ondes com-
prises entre 140 et 146 kc/s (2 143 et
2 055 m) est interdit.
[334] (9) Les stations cdtieres et de
navire travaillant dans les bandes au-
toris6es entre 365 et 515 kc/s (822 et 583
m) doivent 6tre en mesure de faire usage
au moins d'une onde en plus de celle de
500 kc/s (600 m) ; quand une onde addi-
tionnelle est imprim6e en caracteres gras
dans la nomenclature, elle est 1'onde nor-
male de travail de la station. Les ondes
additionnelles ainsi choisies pour les sta-
tions c6ti£res peuvent £tre les m^mes que
celles des stations de bord ou peuvent
£tre differentes. En tout cas, les ondes
de travail des stations c6tieres doivent
£tre choisies de maniere £ eviter les
brouillages avec les stations voisines.

1 The regions of heavy traffic are indicated in the nomenclature of coast stations. These regions
consist of the service areas of the coast stations indicated as not accepting traffic on 500 kc (600 m) .

i Les regions de trafic intense sont indiquees par la nomenclature des stations cdtieres; ces regions
sont constitutes par les zones d 'action des stations cdtieres indiquees comme n'acceptant pas le
trafic sur 500 kc/s (600 m) (voir 1'appendice ?)•

[328] (3) The wave of 333 kc (900 m)
shall be the international calling- wave for
aerial services, except as indicated in
article 9, § 10 (2).

[3*7] (4) The wave of 143 kc (2,100 m)
(Type-Ai only), shall be the interna-
tional calling-wave for use in long-dis-
tance communications of the mobile serv-
ice in the band 100 to 160 kc (3,000 to
1,875 m).

t328] (5) The wave of 500 kc (600 m)
shall be the international distress wave; it
shall be used for that purpose by ship sta-
tions and aircraft stations in requesting
help from the maritime services. It may
be used in a general way only for calls and
replies as well as for distress traffic, urgent
and safety messages, and signals.

[329] (6) However, on condition that the
distress, urgent, safety, calling, and reply
signals are not interfered with, the wave
of 500 kc (600 m) may be used :

[33°] (a) in the regions of heavy traffic
for the transmission of a single short
radiotelegram ;x

[331] (£) in other regions, for other pur-
poses, but with discretion.
[332j (7) Besides the wave of 500 kc (600
m), the use of waves of all types between
485 and 515 kc (620 and 583 m) shall be
forbidden.

[383] (8) Except for the wave of 143 kc
(2,100 m) the use of any wave between
140 and 146 kc (2,143 and 2,055 m) shall
be forbidden.

[334] (Q) Coast and ship stations working
within the authorized band between 365
and 515 kc (822 and 583 m) must be able
to use at least one wave besides that of
500 kc (600 m); when an additional
wave is printed in heavy type in the
nomenclature, this is the normal working-
wave of the station. The additional
waves thus chosen for coast stations may
or may not be the same as those of ship
stations. In any case, the working-waves
of coast stations must be chosen in such a
way as to avoid interference with neigh-
boring stations.

166

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

[ass] (I0) Besides their normal working-
waves, printed in heavy type in the
nomenclature, land and on-board sta-
tions may use, in the authorized bands,
supplementary waves which shall be men-
tioned in the nomenclature in ordinary
print. However, the band of frequencies
from 365 to 385 kc (822 to 779 m) shall be
reserved to the radio direction-finding
service; it can be used by the mobile serv-
ice, for radiotelegraph correspondence,
only subject to the conditions set forth
in article 7.

[3381 (n) (a) The wave for the reply to
a call transmitted on the general calling-
wave [see § i (2)] shall be the wave of 500
kc (600 m), the same as that for calling.
[m] (&) The wave for the reply to a call,
for aircraft stations and aeronautical sta-
tions working in the band 315 to 365 kc
(952 to 822 m) shall be the wave of 333 kc
(900 m), the same as that for calling,

[338] (c) The wave for the reply to a call
transmitted on the international calling-
wave of 143 kc (2,100 m) [see § i (4)]
shall be:

the wave of 143 kc (2,100 m) for a

mobile station;
the normal working-wave, for a coast

station.

[339]^ § 2. (i) In order to increase safety
of ^ life at sea (ships), and over the sea
(aircraft), all the stations of the maritime
mobile service which normally listen on
the waves of the authorized bands be-
tween 365 and 515 kc (822 and 583 m)
must, during their working hours, make
the necessary provisions to insure the
watch on the distress wave [500 kc (600
m)] twice per hour, for 3 minutes, be-
ginning at x:i5 and at x.*45 o'clock, Green-
wich mean time.

[34°] (2) During the intervals indicated
above, outside the transmissions men-
tioned in article 22 (§§ 22 to 28) :
[341] A. Transmissions must cease in the
bands of 460 to 550 kc (652 to 545 m) ;

[342] B. Outside these bands:

(a) transmissions of type B waves shall
be forbidden;

(b) other transmissions of the mobile
service stations may continue; stations of
the maritime mobile service may listen to
these transmissions on the express condi-

[338] (I0) En dehors de leur onde nor-
male de travail imprim£e en caracteres
gras dans la nomenclature, les stations
terrestres et de bord peuvent employer,
dans les bandes autorisees, des ondes sup-
p!6mentaires qui sont mentionne'es en
caracteres ordinaires dans la nomencla-
ture. Toutefois, la bande de frequences
de 365 £ 385 kc/s (822 & 779 m) est reservd
au service de la radiogoniometrie ; elle ne
peut £tre utilisee par le service mobile,
pour la correspondance radio telegraphi-
que, que sous les reserves indiqu6es a
1'article 7.

[83a] (n) a) L'onde de reponse a un ap-
pel 6mis sur 1'onde gen6rale d'appel [voir
§ i, (2)] est 1'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m), la
m£me que celle d'appel.
[337] b) L'onde de reponse & un appel,
pour les stations d'aeronef et les stations
aeronautiques travaillant dans la bande
de 315 a 365 kc/s (952 & 822 m), est
1'onde de 333 kc/s (900 m), la ra£me que
celle d'appel.

[33S] c) L'onde de reponse & un appel
6mis sur 1'onde Internationale d'appel de
143 kc/s (2 100 m) [voir § i, (4)] est:

pour une station mobile, 1'onde de 143

kc/s (2 loo m) ;
pour une station c6tiere, son onde

normale de travail.

[339] ^§2. (i) En vue d'augmenter la
s£curit6 de la vie humaine sur mer (na-
vires) et au-dessus de la rner (aeronefs),
toutes les stations du service mobile
maritime qui ecoutent normalement les
ondes des bandes autorisees entre 365 et
515 kc/s (822 et 583 m) doivent, pendant
la duree de leurs vacations, prendre les
mesures u tiles pour assurer 1'ecoute sur
1'onde de detresse [500 kc/s (600 m)] deux
fois par heure, pendant trois minutes,
commencant a x h 15 et & x h 45, temps
moyen de Greenwich.
[340] (2) Pendant les intervalles indiques
ci-avant, en dehors des emissions en-
visagees & 1'article 22 (§§ 22 a 28):
[341] A. Les 6missions doivent cesser
dans les bandes de 460 a 550 kc/s (652 i
545m);
[342] B. Hors de ces bandes:

a) les emissions des ondes du type B
sont interdites;

b)^ les autres Emissions des stations du
service mobile peuvent continuer; les sta-
tions du service mobile maritime peuvent
6couter ces emissions sous reserve ex-

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

I67

tion that these stations shall first insure
the watch on the distress wave, as pro-
vided for in subparagraph (i) of this
paragraph.

[343] § 3- Since calls in the authorized
bands between 365 and 515 kc (822 and
583 m) and from 315 to 365 kc (952 to
822 m) are normally made on the inter-
national calling- waves [§ I (2) and (3)
above], mobile service stations open to
the service of public correspondence and
using waves from these bands for their
work must, during their hours of watch,
remain on watch on the calling-wave of
their service. These stations, while ob-
serving the provisions of article 19, § 2 (i)
and (2) and § 4 D, are authorized to
abandon this watch only when they are
engaged in a communication on other
waves.

[34*] § 4. The following rules must be
followed in the operation of stations of the
mobile service using type-Ai waves in the
band 100 to 160 kc (3,000 to 1,875 m):

[345] A. (a) Any coast station carrying
on a communication on one of these
waves must listen on the wave of 143 kc
(2,100 m), unless otherwise indicated in
the nomenclature.

[S46] (j) The coast station shall transmit
all its traffic on the wave or on the waves
which are specifically assigned to it.
[347] (c) A coast station to which one or
more waves within the band 125 to 150 kc
(2,400 to 2,000 m) have been allocated,
shall have a prior right to this or these
waves.

[348] (f) Any other mobile service sta-
tion transmitting public traffic on this or
these waves and thereby causing inter-
ference with the said coast station must
discontinue its work at the request of
the latter.

[849] B. (a) When a mobile station
wishes to establish communication on one
of these waves with another station of the
mobile service, it must use the wave of
143 kc (2,100 m), unless otherwise in-
dicated in the nomenclature.
[350] (&) This wave, designated as a
general calling-wave, must be used ex-
clusively in the North Atlantic:

1. for making individual calls and
answering these calls;

2. for transmitting signals prelim-
inary to the transmission of traffic.

presse que ces stations assurent d'abord la
veille sur 1'onde de detresse, comme il est
prevu £ Falinea (i) de ce paragraphe.

[343I § 3' Les appels dans les bandes au-
toris6es entre 365 et 515 kc/s (822 et 583
m) et entre 315 et 365 kc/s (952 et 822 m)
etant faits normalement sur les ondes in-
ternationales d'appel [§ I, (2) et (3) ci~
avant], les stations du service mobile
ouvertes au service de la correspondance
publique et utilisant pour leur travail des
ondes de ces bandes doivent, pendant
leurs heures de veille, rester & 1'ecoute sur
Ponde d'appel de leur service. Ces sta-
tions, tout en observant les prescriptions
de 1'article 19, § 2, (i) et (2), et § 4, D, ne
sont autorisees a abandonner cette ecoute
que lorsqu'elles sont engagees dans une
communication sur d'autres ondes.
[344] § 4. Les regies ci-apres doivent toe
suivies dans 1'exploitation des stations du
service mobile employant des ondes du
type Ai des bandes de 100 a 160 kc/s
(3 ooo & i 875 m) :

[345] A. a) Toute station c6tiere assu-
rant une communication sur une de ces
ondes doit faire l'6coute sur 1'onde de 143
kc/s (2 100 m), a moins qu'il n'en soit
dispos6 autrement dans la nomenclature.
[34<$] &) La station c6tiere transmet tout
son trafic sur 1'onde ou sur les ondes qui
lui sont specialement attributes.
[347] c) Une station c6tiere, a laquelle
une ou plusieurs ondes comprises dans la
bande de 125 a 150 kc/s (2 400 a 2 ooo
m) sont allouees, possede sur cette ou sur
ces ondes un droit de preference.
f348] d) Toute autre station du service
mobile transmettant un trafic public sur
cette ou sur ces ondes, et causant ainsi du
brouillage a ladite station cdtiere, doit
suspendre son travail a la demande de
cette derniere.

[349] B. a) Lorsqu 'une station mobile d6-
sire etablir la communication sur une de
ces ondes avec une autre station du ser-
vice mobile, elle doit employer 1'onde de
143 kc/s (2 100 m), £ moins qu'il n'en soit
dispos6 autrement dans la nomenclature.
[35°] 6) Cette onde, designee comme onde
g6n6rale d'appel, doit toe employee ex-
clusivement, dans 1'Atlantique Nord:

i° pour la production des appels in-

dividuels et des reponses £ ces

appels ;
2° pour la transmission des signaux

prealables & la transmission du

trafic.

r 68

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

[851] C. A mobile station, after having
established communication with another
station of the mobile service on the gen-
eral calling-wave of 143 kc (2,100 m) must,
so far as possible, transmit its traffic on
some other wave of the authorized bands,
provided it does not interfere with the
work in progress of another station.

[352] D. As a general rule, any mobile
station equipped for service on type-Ai
waves in the band 100 to 160 kc (3,000 to
1,875 m) and which is not engaged in a
communication on another wave, must, in
order to permit the exchange of traffic
with other stations of the mobile service,
return each hour to the wave of 143 kc
(2,100 m) for 5 minutes beginning at
x:$5 o'clock Greenwich mean time, during
the specified hours, according to the cate-
gory to which the station in question
belongs.

[353] E. (a) Land stations must, so far
as possible, transmit calls in the form of
call lists; in this case, the stations shall
transmit their call lists at specified hours
published in the nomenclature, on the
wave or waves allocated to them, in the
band 100 to 160 kc (3,000 to 1,875 m)>
but not on the wave of 143 kc (2,100 m).

[354] (b) Land stations may, however,
call mobile stations individually at any
other time, outside the hours fixed for the
transmission of call lists, according to cir-
cumstances or according to the work
which they have to perform.
[m] (c) The wave of 143 kc (2,100 m)
may be used for individual calls and shall
preferably be used for this purpose during
the period indicated in § 4, D.

[8M] § 5- Radio communications from

aeronautical and aircraft stations shall, in

principle, be exchanged in the following

manner:

[867] i. For aircraft stations:

(a) In radiotelephony (calling and
working) for aircraft of which the crew
does not include a radiotelegraph opera-
tor.

(b) In radiotelegraphy on continuous
waves for aircraft of which the crew in-
cludes a radiotelegraph operator.

Calling: type-A2 waves.

Working: type-Ar waves (type-A2

shall be permitted in the case of

work on short waves).

[361] C. Une station mobile, apres avoir
£tabli la communication avec une autre
station du service mobile sur 1'onde g£ne-
rale d'appel de 143 kc/s (2 100 m), doit,
autant que possible, transmettre son
trafic sur une autre onde quelconque des
bandes autorisees, a condition de ne pas
troubler le travail en cours d'une autre
station.

[85a] D. En regie g<§nerale, toute station
mobile 6quipee pour le service sur les
ondes du type Ai des bandes de 100 a 160
kc/s (3 ooo a i 875 m) et qui n'est pas
engaged dans une communication sur une
autre onde doit, en vue de permettre
i'6change du trafic avec d'autres stations
du service mobile, revenir chaque heure
sur 1'onde de 143 kc/s (2 100 m) pendant
5 minutes & partir de x h 35, temps moyen
de Greenwich, durant les heures pr£vues,
suivant la cat6gorie a laquelle appartient
la station envisagee.

[863] E. a) Les stations terrestres doi-
vent, autant que possible, transmettre les
appels sous forme de listes d'appels ; dans
ce cas, les stations transmettent leurs
listes d'appels a des heures d6termin6es,
publi6es dans la nomenclature, sur 1'onde
ou sur les ondes qui leur sont attributes,
dans les bandes de 100 a 160 kc/s (3 ooo £
i 875 m), mais non sur 1'onde de 143
kc/s (2 100 m).

[364] b) Les stations terrestres peuvent,
toutefois, appeler individuellement les
stations mobiles & toute autre heure, en
dehors des heures fixees pour remission
des listes d'appels, selon les circonstances
ou le travail qu'elles ont a effectuer.
[86B] c) L'onde de 143 kc/s (2 100 m)
peut £tre employee pour les appels in-
dividuels et sera, de pr6f6rence, utilisee
dans ce but pendant la p£riode indiqu6e
au § 4, D.

[856] § 5- Les radiocommunications des
stations aeronautiques et des stations
d'a£ronef spnt 6changees, en principe, de
la facon suivante:
t357] i. Pour les stations d'a6ronef:

a) En radiot616phonie (appel et travail)
pour les a&ronefs dont l'£quipage ne com-
porte pas d'op6rateur radiote!6graphiste.

b) En radiot616graphie sur ondes entre-
tenues pour les a6ronefs dont l'£quipage
comporte un op&rateur racliot616graphiste.

Appel: ondes du type A2.

Travail: ondes du type Ai (le type

A2 est admis dans le cas du travail

sur ondes courtes).

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

169

pas] 2. For aeronautical stations:

(a) In radiotelephony (calling and
working) when the station must com-
municate with an aircraft of which the
crew does not include a radiotelegraph
operator.

(6) In radiotelegraphy, when the sta-
tion must communicate with an aircraft
of which the crew includes a radiotele-
graph operator.

Type- A I waves (calling and work-
ing).

Type-A2 waves shall be permitted
(calling and working) in the case
of short waves.

ARTICLE 20. — Interference

[359] § i. (i) The exchange of unneces-
sary signals or messages shall be forbidden
to all stations.

[sec] (2) Tests and experiments shall be
permitted in mobile stations if they do not
interfere with the service of other stations.
As for stations other than mobile stations,
each administration shall judge, before
authorizing them, whether or not the pro-
posed tests or experiments are likely to
interfere with the service of other stations.

[361] § 2. It is recommended that traffic
relating to public correspondence be trans-
mitted on type-Ai waves rather than on
type-A2 waves, and on type-A2 waves
rather than on type-B waves.

[362] § 3- All stations of the mobile serv-
ice shall be required to exchange traffic
with the minimum of radiated power
necessary to insure good communication.

[363] § 4« Except in cases of distress,
communications between on-board sta-
tions must not interfere with the work of
land stations. When this work is thus
interfered with, the on-board stations
which cause it must stop transmitting or
change wave, upon the first request of the
land station concerned,
[ae*] § cj. Test and adjustment signals
must be selected in such a way that there
will result no confusion with a signal, an
abbreviation, etc., having a particular
meaning defined by these Regulations or
by the International Code of Signals.

[m] § 6. (i) When it is necessary to
transmit test or adjustment signals, and
there is danger of interfering with the

[*68] 2. Pour les stations aeYonautiques:
a) En radiotelephonie (appel et tra-
vail) lorsque la station doit communiquer
avec un aeronef dont T£quipage ne com-
porte pas d'op6rateur radiotelegraphiste,

6) En radiotelegraphie lorsque la sta-
tion doit communiquer avec un aeronef
dont 1' equipage comporte un operateur
radioteldgraphiste.

Ondes du type Ai (appel et travail) .

Les ondes du type A2 sont admises
(appel et travail) dans le cas des
ondes courtes.

ARTICLE 20. — Brouillages
[35»] § If (j) L'6change de signaux ou
correspondances superflus est interdit a
toutes les stations.

[sec] (2) Des essais et des experiences
sont toleres dans les stations mobiles, s'ils
ne troublent point le service d'autres sta-
tions. Quant aux stations autres que les
stations mobiles, chaque administration
apprecie, avant de les autoriser, si les
essais ou experiences proposes sont suscep-
tibles ou non de troubler le service d'au-
tres stations.

[36i] § 2. II est recommand6 de transmet-
tre le trafic se rapportant a, la correspon-
dance publique sur des ondes du type Ai ,
plut6t que sur des ondes du type A2, et sur
des ondes du type A2, plut6t que sur des
ondes du type B.

lm] §3- Toutes les stations du service
mobile sont tenues d'e"changer le trafic
avec le minimum d'6nergie rayonn£e
n£cessaire pour assurer une bonne com-
munication.

[363] § 4. Sauf dans les cas de detresse,
les communications entre stations de bord
ne doivent pas troubler le travail des sta-
tions terrestres. Lorsque ce travail est
ainsi trouble, les stations de bord qui en
sont la cause doivent cesser leurs trans-
missions ou changer d'onde & la premiere
demande de la station terrestre interess6e.
[3<u] § 5. Les signaux d'essais et de
r£glage doivent 6tre choisis de telle ma-
nilre qu'aucune confusion ne puisse se pro-
duire avec un signal, une abr&viation, etc.,
d'une signification particuli&re d6fime par
le present R£glement ou par le Code In-
ternational de Signaux.
[36B] § 6. (i) Quand il est n£cessaire
d'6mettre des signaux d'essais ou de r6-
glage, et qu'il y a risque de troubler le

170

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

service of the adjoining land station, per-
mission must be obtained from that land
station before such transmissions are
made.

[366] (2) Any station making transmis-
sions for purposes of testing, adjusting, or
experimenting, must transmit its call
signal or, if need be, its name at frequent
intervals in the course of these transmis-
sions.

[sex] § 7, xhe administration or enter-
prise which makes a complaint regarding
interference must, to support and justify
the complaint:

(a) specify the characteristics of the
interference noted (frequency, variations
in adjustment, call signal of the interfering
station, etc.) ;

(&) state that the station interfered
with actually uses the frequency assigned
to it;

(c) state that it regularly uses receiving
instruments of a type equivalent to the
best used in the current practice of the
service concerned.

[368] § 8. The administrations shall take
the steps which they deem advisable and
which are in keeping with their domestic
legislation so that electrical apparatus
capable of serious interference with an
authorized radio service, will be used in
such a manner as to avoid such inter-
ference.

ARTICLE 21. — Emergency Installations
[389] § r. xhe Convention for the Safety
of Life at Sea shall determine which ships
must be provided with emergency installa-
tions and shall define the conditions to be
fulfilled by installations of this category.

[37°] § 2. In the use of emergency instal-
lations, all the provisions of the present
Regulations must be observed.

ARTICLE 22. — Distress Traffic and Distress
Signals — Alarm f Emergency, and Safety
Signals

A. — General

p71] § i. No provision of these Regula-
tions shall prevent a mobile station in
distress from using any means available to
it for drawing attention, signaling its
position, and obtaining help.

[m] § 2. (i) When distress, emergency,

service de la station terrestre voisine, le
consentement de cette station terrestre
doit 6tre obtenu avant d'effectuer de telles
Emissions.

[3«6] (2) Une station quelconque effec-
tuant des Emissions pour des essais, des
r£glages ou des experiences doit trans-
mettre son indicatif d'appel ou,^ en cas de
besoin, son nom, a de frequents intervalles
au cours de ces Emissions.
[*87] § 7. L'administration ou Tentre-
prise qui formule une plainte en mati&re
de brouillage doit, pour 6tayer et justifier
celle-ci :

a) pr£ciser les caract&ristiques du brou-
illage constat6 (frequence, variations de
r6glage, indicatif du poste brouilleur,

etc.);

b) declarer que le poste brouill<§ utilise
bien la frequence qui lui est attribute;

c) faire connattre qu'elle emploie r6gu-
li£rement des appareils de reception <Tun
type 6quivalent au type le meilleur utilis6
dans la pratique courante du service dont
il s'agit.

t368] § 8- Les administrations prennent
les mesures qu'elles jugent utiles et qui
sont compatibles avec leur legislation in-
terieure, pour que les appareils electriques
susceptibles de troubler serieusement un
service autoris6 de radipcommunication
soient employes de maniere a 6viter de
telles perturbations.

ARTICLE 21. — Installations de secours

[369] § i. La Convention pour la sauye-
garde de la vie humaine en rner determine
quels sont les navires qui doivent 6tre
pouryus d'une installation de secours et
d£finitjes conditions a remplir par les in-
stallations de cette cat£gorie.
[37°] §2. Pour 1'utilisation des installa-
tions de secours, toutes les prescriptions
du present R£glement doivent £tre
observers.

ARTICLE 22. — Signal et traftc de detresse.
Signaux d'alarme, d'urgence et de securite

A. — Generalites

[m] § I. Aucune disposition du present
R&glement ne peut faire obstacle a 1 em-
ploi, par une station mobile en detresse,
de tous les moyens dont elle dispose pour
attirer 1'attention, signaler sa situation et
obtenir du secours.
[372] § 2. (i) La vitesse de transmission

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

171

or safety is involved, the telegraph trans-
mission speed in general, must not exceed
1 6 words per minute.
[373] (2) The transmission speed for the
alarm signal is indicated in § 21 (i).

te!6graphique dans les cas de detresse,
d'urgence ou de securite ne doit pas, en
general, d6passer 16 mots a la minute.
[87S] (2) La vitesse de transmission du
signal d'alarme est indiquee au § 21, (i).

$m — Waves to be used in case of distress B. — Ondes d employer en cas de detresse

[374] § 3- (*) Ships. — In case of distress,
the wave to be used shall be the inter-
national distress wave, that is, 500 kc (600
m) (see art. 19) ; it must preferably be used
in type A2 or B. Vessels which cannot
transmit on the international distress
wave shall use their normal calling-wave.

[375] (2) Aircraft. — Any aircraft in dis-
tress must transmit the distress call on the
watching-wave of the fixed or mobile
stations likely to help it: 500 kc (600 m)
for stations of the maritime service, 333 kc
(900 m) for stations of the aeronautical
service [except as indicated in art. 9, § 10
(2)]. The waves to be used are type A2
or A3.

C. — Distress signal

[376] § 4- (i) In radiotelegraphy, the dis-
tress signal shall consist of the group
..«__«»-••.; in radiotelephony, the
distress signal shall consist of the spoken
expression MAYDAY (corresponding to
the French pronunciation of the expres-
sion "m'aider").

[377] (2) These distress signals shall an-
nounce that the ship, aircraft, or any
other vehicle which sends the distress sig-
nal is threatened by serious and imminent
danger and requests immediate assistance.

D. — Distress call

I378] §5- W The distress call, when sent
in radiotelegraphy on 500 kc (600 m) shall,
as a general rule, be immediately preceded
by the alarm signal as the latter is denned
in § 21 (i),

[379] (2) When circumstances permit,
the transmission of the call shall be sepa-
rated from the end of the alarm signal by a
2 -minute silence.
[38°] (3) The distress call shall include;

the distress signal transmitted three

times,

the word DE, and
the call signal of the mobile station in

distress transmitted three times.

[374] § 3- (i) Navires. — En cas de d6-
tresse, 1'onde a employer est 1'onde inter-
nationale de d6tresse, c'est-£-dire 500
kc/s (600 m) (voir article 19); elle doit
£tre, de pref6rence, utilisee en type A2 ou
B. Les Mtiments qui ne peuvent £met-
tre sur 1'onde internationale de detresse
utilisent leur onde normale d'appel.
[37S] (2) Aeronefs.— Tout a&ronef en de-
tresse doit transmettre 1'appel de d6tresse
sur 1'onde de veille des stations fixes ou
mobiles susceptibles de lui porter secours:
500 kc/s (600 m) pour les stations du
service maritime, 333 kc/s (900 m) pour
les stations du service a6ronautique [sauf
comme il est indiqu6 a 1'article 9, § 10,
(2)]. Les ondes a employer sont du type
A2 ou A3.

C. — Signal de detresse

[376] § 4. (i) En radiote!6graphie, le sig-
nal de d6tresse consiste dans le groupe
..*_—_...; en radiot616phonie, le
signal de d6tresse consiste dans 1 'ex-
pression parlee MAYDAY (correspondant
It la prononcjation franchise de 1'expres-
sion "m'aider").

[377] (2) Ces signaux de detresse an-
noncent que le navire, l'a£ronef, ou tout
autre vehicule qui 6met le signal de de-
tresse est sous la menace d'un danger
grave et imminent et demande une as-
sistance immediate.

D. — Appel de detresse
[378] § 5. (j) L'appel de detresse, lors-
qu'il est 6mis par radiot616graphie sur 500
kc/s (600 m), est, en r^gle g£n<§rale, im-
m6diatement pr6ced6 du signal d'alarme
tel que ce dernier est d6fini au § 21, (i).
[87fl] (2) Lorsque les circonstances le per-
mettent, remission de 1'appel est s6par6e
de la fin du signal d'alarme par un silence
de deux minutes.
[380] (3) L'appel de detresse comprend:

le signal de d£tresse transmis trois
fois,

le mot DE, et

1'indicatif d'appel de la station mo-
bile en detresse, transmis trois fois.

172

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

[3SIJ (4) This call shall have absolute
priority over other transmissions. All
stations hearing it must immediately cease
all transmission capable of interfering
with the distress traffic, and must listen on
the wave used for the distress call. This
call must not be sent to any particular
station and does not require an acknowl-
edgment of receipt.

E. — Distress message

[382] §6. (l) The distress call must be
followed as soon as possible by the distress
message. This message shall include the
distress call followed by the name of the
ship, aircraft, or the vehicle in distress, in-
formation regarding the position of the
latter, the nature of the distress and the
nature of the help requested, and any
other further information which might
facilitate this assistance.
[ass] (2) When, after having sent its
distress message, an aircraft is unable to
signal its position, it shall endeavor to
send its call signal long enough so that the
radio direction-finding stations may de-
termine its position.

[884] § 7, (r) AS a general rule, a ship or
aircraft at sea shall signal its position in
latitude and longitude (Greenwich), using
figures, for the degrees and minutes, ac-
companied by one of the words NORTH
or SOUTH and one of the words EAST or
WEST. A period shall separate the de-
grees from the minutes. In some cases,
the true bearings and the distance in
nautical miles from some known geo-
graphical point may be given.
[88B] (2) As a general rule, an aircraft
flying over land shall signal its position by
the name of the nearest locality, its ap-
proximate distance from this point, ac-
companied according to the case, by one
of the words NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, or
WEST, or, in some cases, words indicating
intermediate directions.
[sse] § 3. The distress call and message
shall be sent only by order of the master
or person responsible for the ship, aircraft,
or other vehicle carrying the mobile sta-
tion.

t387] § 9- 00 The distress message must
be repeated at intervals until an answer
has been received, and especially during
the periods of silence provided for in
article 19, §2.

[ass] (2) The alarm signal may also be
repeated, if necessary.

[asi] (4) Cet appel a priority absolue sur
les autres transmissions. Toutes les sta-
tions qui Tentendent doivent cesser im~
m£diatement toute transmission suscep-
tible de troubler le trafic de d6tresse et
£couter sur Tonde d'&nission de 1'appel de
d6tresse. Get appel ne doit pas £tre
adress6 a une station d6terminee et ne
donne pas lieu a l'accus£ de reception.

E. — Message de detresse
[382] § 5. (r) L'appel de detresse doit
6tre suivi aussitdt que possible du message
de detresse. Ce message comprend 1'ap-
pel de detresse, suivi du nom du navire, de
I'a6ronef ou du v£hicule en detresse, des
indications relatives a la position de
celui-ci, & la nature de la d£tresse et a la
nature du secours demand^ et, 6ventuelle-
ment, de tout autre renseignement qui
pourrait faciliter ce secours.
[388] (2) Lorsque, apres avoir transmis
son message de d6tresse, un a&ronef ne
peut signaler sa position, il s'efforce
d'&mettre son indicatif d'appel suffisam-
ment longtemps pour permettre aux sta-
tions radiogoniom&triques de determiner
sa position.

[384] § 7. (x) En r&gle g6n£rale, un na-
vire ou un a6ronef a la mer signale sa posi-
tion en latitude et longitude (Greenwich),
en employant des chiffres pour les degres
et les minutes, accompagnes de Tun des
mots NORTH ou SOUTH et de Tun des
mots EAST ou WEST; un point s&pare
les degres des minutes. Eventuellement,
le relevement vrai et la distance en milles
marins par rapport & un point g6ogra-

Phique connu peuvent toe donnes.
186] (2) En regie gen6rale, un a£ronef en
vpl au-dessus de la terre signale sa posi-
tion par le nom de la locality la plus proche,
sa distance approximative par rapport
a celle-ci, accompagn6e, selon le cas, de
Tun des mots NORTH, SOUTH, EAST
ou WEST ou, 6ventuellernent, des mots
indiquant les directions intermediaires.
[38<J] § 8. L'appel et le message de de-
tresse ne sont emis que sur ordre du com-
mandant ou de la personne responsable
du navire, de l'a£ronef ou de tout autre
v6hicule portant la station mobile.
[387J § 9» (i) Le message de d£tresse
doit £tre r6pet6, par intervalles, jusqu'a ce
qu'une reponse soit rec.ue et, notamment,
pendant les periodes de silence pr£vues i
Tarticle 19, § 2.

[388] (2) Le signal d'alarme peut £gale-
ment §tre rSpete, si nScessaire.

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

173

[389] (3) Xhe intervals must, however, be
sufficiently long so that stations preparing
to reply may have time to put their trans-
mitters in operation.

[39°] (4) In case the on-board station in
distress receives no answer to a distress
message sent on the 5OO-kc (6oo-m) wave,
the message may be repeated on any other
available wave by means of which atten-
tion might be attracted.

[391] § jo. Furthermore, a mobile station
which becomes aware that another mobile
station is in distress, may transmit the
distress message in either of the following
cases:

[392] (a) when the station in distress is
not itself in a position to transmit it;
[393] (&) when the master (or his relief)
of the vessel, aircraft, or other vehicle
carrying the station which intervenes, be-
lieve that further help is necessary.
[394] § ii. (i) Stations which receive a
distress message from a mobile station
which is unquestionably in their vicinity,
must acknowledge receipt thereof at once
(see §§ 1 8 and 19 below), taking care not
to interfere with the transmission of the
acknowledgment of receipt of the said
message by other stations.

[395] (2) Stations which receive a distress
message from a mobile station which un-
questionably is not in their vicinity, must
wait a short period of time before ac-
knowledging receipt thereof, in order to
make it possible for stations nearer to the
mobile station in distress to answer and
acknowledge receipt without interference.

F. — Distress traffic

[396] §12. Distress traffic shall include all
messages relative to immediate assistance
needed by the mobile station in distress.

[m] § 13. Every distress traffic radio-
telegram must include the distress signal
transmitted at the beginning of the pre-
amble.

[398] § 14. The control of distress traffic
shall devolve upon the mobile station in
distress or upon the mobile station which,
by application of the provisions of § 10
(a), has sent the distress call. These sta-
tions may delegate the control of the dis-
tress traffic to another station.
[8M] § 15. (l) When it considers it in-

[389] (3) Les intervalles doivent, toute-
fois, £tre suffisamment longs pour que les
stations qui se pr6parent a repondre aient
le temps de mettre leurs appareils emet-
teurs en rnarche.

[39°] (4) Dans le cas ou la station de bord
en detresse ne rec,oit pas de reponse a un
message de detresse transmis sur 1'onde de
500 kc/s (600 m), le message peut £tre
repete sur toute autre onde disponible, £
1'aide de laquelle 1'attention pourrait £tre
attiree.

[39i] § 10. De plus, une station mobile qui
apprend qu'une autre station mobile est
en detresse peut transmettre le message de
detresse dans Tun des cas suivants:

[392] a) la station en detresse n'est pas &
m&me de le transmettre elle-m^me;
[393] b) le commandant (ou son rempla-
gant) du navire, aeronef ou autre vehicule
portant la station intervenante juge que
d'autres secours sont n£cessaires.
[394] §11. (i) Les stations qui regoivent
un message de detresse d'une station ^mo-
bile se trouvant, sans doute possible,
dans leur voisinage doivent en accuser
reception imrnediatement (voir §§ 18 et
19 ci-apres), en prenant soin de ne pas
troubler la transmission de 1 'accuse de
reception dudit message effectuee par
d'autres stations.

[395] (2) Les stations qui regoivent un
message de detresse d'une station mobile
qui, sans doute possible, n'est pas dans
leur voisinage doivent laisser s'6couler un
court laps de temps avant d'en accuser
reception, afin de permettre & des stations
plus proches de la station mobile en de-
tresse de repondre et d'accuser reception
sans brouillage.

F. — Trafic de detresse
[3»6] § I2. Le trafic de detresse comprend
tous les messages relatifs au secours im-
m&iiat n6cessaire & la station mobile en
detresse.

[m] § 13. Tout radiote!6gramme d'un
trafic de d&tresse doit comprendre le sig-
nal de detresse transmis au debut du
preambule.

[398] § 14. La direction du trafic de de-
tresse appartient £ la station mobile en
detresse ou & la station mobile qui, par
application des dispositions du § 10, lit-
tera a), a £mis Fappel de detresse. Ces
stations peuvent c^der la direction du
trafic de d6tresse 4 une autre station.
[399] § I5. (!) Lorsqu'elle le juge indis-

174

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

dispensable, any station of the mobile
service in the proximity of the ship, air-
craft, or ^ vehicle in distress, may impose
silence either to all the stations of the
mobile service in the zone, or to any one
station which may be causing interference
with the distress traffic. In both cases,
the regulatory abbreviation (QRT) shall
be used, followed by the word DISTRESS ;
these indications shall be addressed "to
all " stations or to one station only, as the
case may be.

[40°] (2) When the station in distress
wishes to impose silence, it shall use the
above-mentioned procedure, substituting
the distress signal • ••—•«••—«•• for the
word DISTRESS.

[401] § 16. (i) Any station hearing a dis-
tress call must conform to the provisions
of § 5 (4).

[402] (2) Any station of the mobile serv-
ice which becomes aware of distress
traffic must listen to this traffic even if it
is not taking part in it.
[403] (3) por the entire duration of dis-
tress traffic, it shall be prohibited for all
stations which are aware of this traffic and
which are not taking part in it:
[4<H] (a) to use the distress wave [500 kc
(600 m)] or the wave on which the distress
traffic is taking place;
[406] (b) to use type-B waves.

[m] (4) A station of the mobile service
which, while following distress traffic of
which it is aware, is able to continue its
normal service, may do so, when the dis-
tress traffic is well established, under the
following conditions:

[m] (#) the use of the waves specified in
(3) shall be forbidden;
[408] (&) the use of type-Ai waves, with
the exception of those which might inter-
fere with the distress traffic, shall be per-
mitted;

[409] (c) £t ^^1 j-)e allowed to use type-
A2 or -A3 waves only in the band or bands
allocated to the mobile service and which
do not include frequencies used for distress
traffic [the band around 500 kc (600 m)
extends from 385 to 550 kc (779 to 545
m)].

[41°] § 17. When it is no longer necessary
to observe silence, or when the distress
traffic is ended, the station which has con-
trolled this traffic shall send on the distress
wave, and, where necessary, on the wave
used for this distress traffic, a message ad-
dressed "to all", indicating that the dis-

pensable, toute station du service mobile a
proximite du navire, de 1'aeronef ou du
v6hicule en d£tresse peut imposer silence
soit a toutes les stations du service mobile
dans la zone, soit & une station qui trou-
blerait le trafic de dtoesse. Dans les
deux cas il est fait usage de Fabreviation
r6glementaire (QRT) suivie du mot DE-
TRESSE; suivant le cas, les indications
sont adress£es "a tous" ou seulement &
une station.

[40°] (2) Lorsque la station en d6tresse

veut imposer silence, elle emploie la

procedure qui vient d'etre indiqu£e,

en substituant le signal de d<§tresse

• •——••• au mot DETRESSE.

[4°l] § 16. (i) Toute station qui entend

un appel de detresse doit se conformer aux

prescriptions du § 5, (4).

[4°2] (2) Toute station du service mobile

qui a connaissance d'un trafic de detresse

doit suivre ce trafic, m£me si elle n'y

participe pas.

[403] (3) Pendant toute la duree d'un

trafic de detresse, il est interdit & toutes

les stations qui ont connaissance de ce

trafic et qui n'y participent pas:

[404] a) d'employer 1'onde de detresse

[500 kc/s (600 m)] ou Fonde sur laquelle

a lieu le trafic de ddtresse;

[405] j) d'employer des ondes du type

[406] (4) Une station du service mobile

qui, tout en suivant un trafic de detresse

dont elle a connaissance, est capable de

continuer son service normal, peut le faire,

lorsque le trafic de d6tresse est bien £tabli,

dans les conditions suivantes:

[407] a) Femploi des ondes indique"es en

(3) est interdit;

[408] Zrn'emploi des ondes du type Ai, &

1'exception de celles qui pourraient trou-

bler le trafic de ddtresse, ltd est permis ;

[409] c) 1'emploi des ondes des types A2
ou A3 ne lui est permis que dans la ou les
bandes affect6es au service mobile et qui
ne comprennent pas de frequence utilised
pour le trafic de detresse [la bande autour
de 500 kc/s (600 m) s'6tend de 385 a 550
kc/s (779 a 545 m)].

r10] § !/• Lorsque Tobservation du si-
lence n'est plus n6cessaire ou que le trafic
de detresse est termin6, la station qui a eu
la direction de ce trafic transmet sur
Fonde de detresse et, s'il y a lieu, sur
1'onde utilisee pour ce trafic de d£tresse,
un message adresse ua tous" indiquant

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

175

tress traffic is ended. This message shall
take the following form:

CQ call "to all" (three times),

the word DE,

call signal of the station transmitting
the message,

distress signal,

time of filing of the message,

name and call signal of the mobile
station which was in distress,

words "distress traffic ended".

G. — Acknowledgment of receipt of a distress
message

[4U] § 1 8. The acknowledgment of re-
ceipt of a distress message shall be given
in the following form;

call signal of the mobile station in
distress (three times),

the word DE,

call signal of the station acknowledg-
ing receipt (three times),

group RRR,

distress signal.

[4l2] § *9' (0 Any mobile station ac-
knowledging receipt of a distress message
must, on the order of the master or his
relief, give the following information as
soon as possible, in the order indicated :

its name,

its position, in the form specified in

§7,

the maximum speed at which it is pro-
ceeding towards the ship (aircraft
or other vehicle) in distress.

[413] (2) Before transmitting this mes-
sage the station must make sure that it is
not interfering with the emissions of other
stations in a better position to render im-
mediate assistance to the station in dis-
tress.

H. — Repetition of a distress call or message

[414] § 20. (i) Any station of the mobile
service which is not in a position to render
assistance and which has heard a distress
message for which acknowledgment of
receipt has not immediately been given,
must take all possible steps to attract the
attention of stations of the mobile service
which are in a position to furnish help.

[4i5] (2) For this purpose, with the per-
mission of the authority responsible for
the station, the distress call or distress

que le trafic de detresse est terming. Ce
message affecte la forme suivante :

1'appel £ tous CQ (trois fois),

le mot DE,

1'indicatif d'appel de la station qui
transmet le message,

le signal de detresse,

1'heure de depdt du message,

le nom et 1'indicatif d'appel de la
station mobile qui etait en d6tresse,

les mots "trafic detresse terming".

G. — Accuse de reception d'un message de
detresse

[4u] § Ig. L'accus6 de reception d'un
message de detresse est donn£ sous la
forme suivante :

1'indicatif d'appel de la station mobile

en detresse (trois fois),
le mot DE,
1'indicatif d'appel de la station qui

accuse reception (trois fois),
le groupe RRR,
le signal de detresse.

[4i2] | j<^ (j;) Toute station mobile qui
donne I'accus6 de r6ception £ un message
de d&tresse doit, sur ordre du commandant
ou de son remplacant, faire connaitre,
aussitdt que possible, les renseignements
ci-apres dans 1'ordre indiqu6:
son nom,
sa position dans la forme indiqu6e

au §7,

la vitesse maximum avec laquelle elle
se dirige vers le navire (aeVonef ou
autre vehicule) en detresse.

[4ls] (2) Avant d'6mettre ce message, la
station devra s'assurer qu'elle ne brouille
pas les 6missions d'autres stations mieux
placets pour apporter un secours imme-
diat a la station en d6tresse.

H. — Repetition d'un appel ou d'un message
de detresse

[414] § 20. (i) Toute station du service
mobile, qui n'est pas & m&ne de fournir du
secours et qui a entendu un message de
detresse auquel il n'a pas 6t6 donne im-
mediatement d'accuse de reception, doit
prendre toutes les dispositions possibles
pour attirer 1'attention des stations du
service mobile qui sont en situation de
fournir du secours.

[4*8] (2) Dans ce but, avec Tautorisa-
tion de l'autorit£ responsable de la sta-
tion, 1'appel de detresse ou le message de

176

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317

message may be repeated; this repetition
shall be made at full power, either on the
distress wave or on one of the waves which
may be used in case of distress ( § 3 of this
article); at the same time all necessary
steps shall be taken to inform the author-
ities whose assistance may be advanta-
geous.

[m] (3) A station which repeats a dis-
tress call or a distress message shall trans-
mit after it the word DE followed by its
own call signal three times.
[§§ 21-28 omitted.]

[Articles 23-30 omitted. — Working
hours of stations of the mobile service.
Order of priority of communications in the
mobile service. Indication of the station of
origin of radiotelegrams. Routing of radio-
telegrams. Accounting for radiotelegrams.
Aeronautical radio service of public corre-
spondence. Service of low-power mobile
radiotekphone stations. Special services.]

ARTICLE 31. — International Radio Con-
sulting Committee (C.C.I.R.)

[B54] § I. An International Radio Con-
sulting Committee (C.C.I.R.) shall be
charged with the study of technical radio
questions and those of which the solution
depends principally upon considerations
of a technical character, which shall be
submitted to it by the administrations
and radio operating companies.
[«»] §2. (i) It shall be_ formed of ex-
perts of the administrations and radio
operating companies or groups of radio
operating companies recognized by their
respective governments, which state their
desire to participate in its work and under-
take to contribute, in equal shares, to the
common expenses of its meetings. The
statement shall be addressed to the ad-
ministration of the country in which the
last administrative conference was held.
[5M] (2) International organizations in-
terested in radio studies, who shall have
been designated by the last plenipoten-
tiary or administrative conference, and
who undertake to contribute to the ex-
penses of the meetings, as indicated in the
preceding subparagraph, shall also be
admitted.

[5sr] (3) Each administration, company,
group of companies, or international or-
ganization, shall defray the personal ex-
penses of its own experts.

d&tresse peut 6tre r6pet6; cette r6p6tition
est faite & toute puissance soit sur Tonde
de detresse, soit sur une des ondes qui peu-
vent £tre employees en cas de detresse
(§ 3 du present article); en m£me temps,
toutes les dispositions n6cessaires seront
prises pour aviser les autorites qui peu-
vent intervenir utilernent
[416] (3) Une station qui r£pete un appel
de detresse ou un message de d6tresse le
fait suivre du mot DE et de son propre
indicatif d'appel transmis 3 fois.
[§§ 21-28 omis.]

[Articles 23-30 omis. — Vacations des
stations du service mobile. Ordre de pri-
orite des communications dans le service
mobile. Indication de la station d'origine
des radiot&Ugrammes, Direction d donner
aux radiotelegrammes. Comptabilite des
radiotelegrammes. Service radioaerien de
correspondance publigue. Service des sta-
tions radiotelephoniques mobiles de faible
puissance. Services spedaux.]

ARTICLE 31. — Comiti consultatif interna-
tional des radiocommunications (C. C.I.R.*)

[564] § i. Un comit6 consultatif interna-
tional des radiocommunications (C.C.I.R.)
est charg6 d'6tudier les questions radio-
61ectriques techniques et celles dont la
solution depend principalernent de con-
sid6rations d'ordre technique et qui lui
sont soumises par les administrations et les
compagnies d 'exploitation radioelectrique.
[5S5] § 2. (i) II est form6 d'experts des
administrations et des compagnies ou
groupes de compagnies d 'exploitation
radioelectrique reconnues par leurs gou-
vernements respectifs, qui d6clarent vou-
loir participer a ses travaux et qui s'en-
gagent a contribuer, par parts egales, aux
frais communs de ses reunions. La de-
claration est adress6e a radministration
du pays ou a et6 tenue la derniere con-
f6rence administrative,
pee] (2) Sont aussi admis des organismes
internationaux s'int£ressant aux 6tudes
radioelectriques qui sont designes par la
derniere conference de pl£nipotentiaires ou
administrative, et qui s'engagent a con-
tribuer aux frais des reunions comme il
est indiqu6 £ Talinea pr6c6dent.

[SB?] (3) Les d6penses personnelles des
experts de chaque administration, com-
pagnie, groupe de compagnies ou or-
ganisme international sont supportees par
ceux-ci.

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

177

[558] § 3- In principle, the meetings of the
C.C.I.R. shall take place every 5 years.
However, a meeting which has been
scheduled may be advanced or postponed
by the administration calling it at the
request of 10 participating administra-
tions, if the number and nature of the
questions to be studied warrant it.
[559] § 4- (*) The languages and method
of voting used in the plenary assemblies,
committees, and subcommittees, shall be
those adopted by the last plenipotentiary
or administrative conference.

peo] (2) However, when a country is not
represented by an administration, the ex-
perts of the recognized operating com-
panies of that country, in one body, and
regardless of their number shall be entitled
to one deliberative vote only.
[B«i] § 5. The Director of the Bureau of
the Union, or his representative, and the
representatives of the other International
Consulting Committees, C.C.LF. and
C.C.I.T., shall have the right to take part
in the meetings of the C.C.I.R. in an
advisory capacity.

[5SZ] § 6. The internal organization of the
C.C.I.R. shall be governed by the pro-
visions of appendix 14 to the present
Regulations.

ARTICLE 32. — Expenses of the Bureau of

the Union

[6fl3] § I. The ordinary expenses of the
Bureau of the Union for the radio service
must not exceed the amount of 200,000

Pold francs annually.
84] § 2. However, if an extraordinary
expense is incurred for printed matter or
for various documents during a year, and
the corresponding revenue is not col-
lected during the same year, the Bureau
shall be authorized, in this case only, to
exceed the maximum credit provided for,
with the understanding that the maxi-
mum credit for the following year shall be
reduced by an amount equal to the abover
mentioned excess.

[666] § 3. The sum of 200,000 gold francs
may be modified later, with the consent
of all the contracting parties.

ARTICLE 33. — Effective Date of the General

Regulations

[5«8] The present General Regulations shall
go into effect on the first day of January,
one thousand nine hundred and thirty-four.

[55S] § 3* En principe, les reunions du
C.C.LR. ont lieu de cinq en cinq ans.
Cependant, une reunion fixee peut £tre
avancee ou ajournee par 1'administration
qui 1'a convoquee, sur demande de dix ad-
ministrations participantes, si le nombre
et la nature des questions a examiner le
justifient.

[669] § 4- (i) Les langues et le mode de
votation employes dans les assemblies
plenieres, commissions et sous-commis-
sions, sont ceux adoptes par la derniere
conference de plenipotentiaries ou ad-
ministrative.

[56°] (2) Toutefois, lorsqu'un pays n'est
pas represent^ par une administration, les
experts des compagnies d'exploitation
reconnues de ce pays disposent, pour leur
ensemble et quel que soit leur nombre,
d'une seule voix deliberative.
[6W] § 5. Le directeur du Bureau de
1'Union ou son representant et les repre-
sentants des autres comites consultatifs
internationaux, C.C.LF. et C.C.I.T., ont
le droit de participer, avec voix consulta-
tive, aux reunions du C.C.I.R.

[B62] § 6. L'organisation interieure du
C.C.LR. est regie par les dispositions de
1'appendice 14 au present Reglement.

ARTICLE 32. — Frais du Bureau de V Union

[563] § i. Les frais communs du Bureau
de 1'Union pour le service des radio com-
munications ne doivent pas depasser, par
ann£e, la somme de 200 ooo francs-or.
[564] § 2. Toutefois, si une depense ex~
ceptionnellement elevee en imprimes ou
documents divers se presente au cours
d'une annee, sans que les recettes cor-
respondantes soient encaiss&es pendant la
m&ne annee, le Bureau est autorise, ex-
clusivement dans ce cas, a depasser le
credit maximum prevu, sous la reserve
que le maximum du credit pour 1'annee
suivante sera reduit d'un montant egal a
1'excedent susvise.

[S6B] § 3. La somme de 200 ooo francs-or
pourra §tre modifiee ulterieurement du
consentement de toutes les parties con-
tractantes.

ARTICLE 33. — Mise en vigueur du Rlgle-

ment general

[56«] Le present Reglement general en-
trera en vigueur le premier Janvier mil
neuf cent trente-quatre.

I78

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No.

[567] IN WITNESS WHEREOF the respective
plenipotentiaries have signed the present
General Regulations in a single copy
which shall remain deposited in the
archives of the Spanish Government and a
copy of which shall be forwarded to each
government.

Done at Madrid, December 9, 1932.

pe^] EN FOI DE QUOI, les p!6nipotentiaires
respectifs ont sign6 ce Reglement general
en un exemplaire qui restera d6pos6 aux
archives du Gouyernement de 1'Espagne
et dont une copie sera remise & chaque
gouvernement.

Fait & Madrid, le 9 decembre 1932.

[Signatures and Appendices 1-13 omitted; the regulations were signed on behalf of each of
the signatories of the convention (No. 316, ante), with exceptions of Ethiopia, Luxemburg,
Mexico, and Persia.]

No. 317a

Rules of Procedure of the International Consultative Committee for
Radiocommunications (C.C.LR.)- Appendix 14 to the General
Radio Regulations signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932.

Reglement interieur du Comite Consultatif International des Radio-
communications (C.C.I.R.). Appendice 14 au Reglement gene-
ral des radiocommunications signe & Madrid, 9 decembre 1932.

Text and translation from U. S. Treaty Series, No. 867.

[Translation]

Article i. By "managing administra-
tion" shall be meant the administration
in charge of organizing a meeting of the
C.C.I. R. The managing administration
shall start taking care of the work of the
C.C.LR. five months after the closing of
the preceding meeting; its duties shall end
five months after the closing of the meet-
ing it has organized.

Art. 2. The managing administration
shall set the place and definite date of the
meeting which it has charge of organizing.
At least 6 months before the aforesaid
date, the managing administration shall
address the invitation to this meeting to
all the administrations of the Interna-
tional Telecommunication Union, and,
through the latter, to the companies,
groups of companies, and international
radio organizations covered in article 31
of the General Radio Regulations.

Art. 3.— § I. The first meeting of the
plenary assembly shall be opened by the
managing administration. This assembly
shall appoint the necessary committees
and shall distribute to them the questions
to be dealt with, in classes. It shall also
appoint the president and the vice presi-

Article x* On entend par " administra-
tion g£rante", Tadministration qui est
chargee d 'organiser une reunion du
C.C.LR. L'administration g&rante com-
mence a s'occuper des travaux du C.C.LR.
cinq mois apr£s la cldture de la reunion
pr6c<§dente; son r61e expire cinq mois apr&s
la cldture de la reunion qu'elle a organised.

Art. 2. L'administration g£rante fixe
le lieu et la date definitive de la r6union
qu'elle est charged d'organiser. Au moins
six mois avant la date susdite, 1'adminis-
tration g£rante adresse 1'invitation pour
cette reunion a toutes les administrations
de rilnion internationale des tel&com-
munications et, par 1'entremise de celles-
ci, aux conipagnies, aux groupes des com-
pagnies et aux organismes internationaux
radio&ectriques vis6s & Tarticle 31 du
Reglement g6n£ral des radiocommunica-
tions.

Art. 3. § r. La premiere stance de
I'assembl6e p!6niere est ouverte par Tad-
ministration g£rante. Cette assemble
constitue les commissions necessaires et
r£partit entre elles, par categories, les
questions a traiter. Elle d6signe aussi le
president et le vice-president du C.C.LR.,

Dec. 9, 1932

dent of the C.C.I.R. and the chairman
and the vice chairman or vice chairmen of
each committee.

§ 2. The president of the C.C.I.R.
shall conduct the plenary assemblies; in
addition, he shall have the general super-
vision of the work of the meeting. ^ The
vice chairmen shall assist the chairmen
and replace them in case of absence.

Art. 4. The secretariat for the meeting
of the C.C.I.R. shall be provided by the
managing administration, with the col-
laboration of the Bureau of the Union.

Art. 5. In principle, the minutes and
reports shall give only the main points of
the statements of the delegates. How-
ever, each delegate shall have the right to
require the insertion into the minutes or
report, of any statement he has made,
either in summary or verbatim, on condi-
tion that he furnish the text thereof not
later than the morning following the end
of the meeting.

Art. 6. — §i. Any delegation which
might, for serious reasons, be prevented
from attending meetings, shall have the
right to entrust its vote or votes to an-
other delegation. However, a single dele-
gation may not, under these circumstan-
ces, combine and use the votes of more
than two delegations, including its own
vote or votes.

§ 2. A proposal shall be adopted only if
supported by an absolute majority of the
votes cast; in case of a tie it shall fall.
The minutes shall show the number of
delegations which voted in favor of and of
those who voted against the proposal.

§ 3. Voting shall be conducted either
by raising the hands, or, at the request of
a delegation, by roll call in the alpha-
betical order of the French names of the
participating countries. In the latter
case, the minutes shall indicate the dele-
gations who voted in favor of and those
who voted against the proposal.

Art. 7. — § I. The committees created
by the plenary assembly may be divided
into subcommittees and the subcom-
mittees into sub-subcommittees.

§ 2. The chairmen of the committees
shall propose the selection of the chairman
of each subcommittee and sub-subcom-
mittee for the ratification of the respective
committee. The committees, subcom-
mittees, and sub-subcommittees shall
appoint their own reporters.

§3. The opinions expressed by the

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

179

le president et le ou les vice-presidents de
chaque commission.

§2. Le president du C.C.I.R. dirige
les assemblies plenieres; il a, en outre, la
direction generale des travaux de la re-
union. Les vice-presidents present assis-
tance aux presidents et les remplacent en
cas d 'absence.

Art. 4. Le secretariat de la r6union
du C.C.I.R. est assur^ par radministra-
tion g6rante, avec la collaboration du
Bureau de 1' Union.

Art. 5. En principe, les proces-verbaux
et les rapports ne reproduisent les expos6s
des delegu6s que dans leurs points princi-
paux. Cependant, chaque delegu6 a le
droit de demander 1'insertion analytique
ou in extenso au proces-verbal ou au
rapport de toute declaration qu'il a faite,
& condition qu'il en fournisse le texte au
plus tard le matin qui suit la fin de la
seance.

Art. 6. — § i. Une delegation qui serai t
emp6ch6e, pour une cause grave, d'assister
a des seances, a la facult6 de charger de sa
ou de ses voix une autre delegation.
Toutefois, une m£me delegation ne peut
reunir et disposer dans ces conditions des
voix de plus de deux delegations, y com-
pris la sienne ou les siennes.

§ 2. Une proposition n'est adopted que
si elle reunit la majorit6 absolue des
suffrages exprimes; en cas d'egalite de
voix, elle est ecartee. Les proces-verbaux
indiqueront le nombre des delegations qui
ont vot6 pour et le nombre de celles qui
ont vot6 contre la proposition.

§ 3. Les votations ont lieu soit £ mains
levees, soit, sur demande d'une delega-
tion, par appel nominal, dans 1'ordre
alphabetique du nom frangais des pays
participants. Dans ce dernier cas, les
proces-verbaux indiqueront les deJ6ga-
tions qui ont vote pour et celles qui ont
vot6 contre la proposition.

Art. 7. — § i. Les commissions institutes
par Tassemblee pleniere peuvent se sub-
diviser en sous-commissions, etles sous-
commissions en sous-sous-commissions.

§ 2. Les pr6sidents des commissions
proposent a la ratification de la commis-
sion respective le choix du president de
chaque sous-commission et sous-sous-
commission. Les commissions, sous-com-
missions et sous-sous-commissions nom-
ment elles-m£mes leurs rapporteurs.

§ 3. Les avis emis par les commissions

i8o

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No.

committees must be marked: "unani-
mously" if the opinion has been expressed
by the voters unanimously, or: "by a
majority" if the opinion was adopted by a
majority.

Art. 8. The Bureau of the Union shall
take part in the various tasks of the
C.C.I.R. for the purpose of centralizing
and publishing general documents for the
use of the administrations.

Art. 9. — § i. At the closing session of
the plenary assembly, the president shall
communicate the list of opinions and that
of the questions left to be solved and of
the new questions submitted by the com-
mittees.

§ 2, The president shall place on record
the final adoption, of the opinions ex-
pressed, if any. If there is occasion for
voting at the plenary assembly, the
formulas "unanimously" or "by a ma-
jority" shall apply to this vote.

§3. Unsolved and new questions shall
be recorded by the president if the as-
sembly is in favor of continuing their
study. The latter shall then inquire as to
what administrations wish to take charge
of preparing proposals relating to these
questions and what other administrations
or radio operating enterprises are willing
to collaborate in the work. On the basis
of the replies, he shall prepare an official
list of the questions to be included in the
agenda of the following meeting, with the
indication of the centralizing administra-
tions and of the collaborating administra-
tions and private radio operating enter-
prises. This list shall be included in the
minutes of the meeting.

§ 4. In the same session of the plenary
assembly, the C.C.I.R., upon the offer
or with the consent of the interested
delegation, shall designate the adminis-
tration which is to call the following meet-
ing and the approximate date of that
meeting,

Art. 10. — § i. After the meeting is
closed, the preparation of questions sub-
mitted for study shall be entrusted to the
administration designated to organize the
next meeting (new managing administra-
tion). The unfinished business shall, on
the contrary, be entrusted to the former
managing administration, which shall be
in charge of completing it, in collaboration
with the Bureau of the Union.

§ 2. The former managing administra-
tion shall forward the documents to the

doivent porter la fprmule : " & Vunanimite "
si 1'avis a e"t£ e"mis a 1'unanimite des vo-
tants, ou la formule: "d fa majorite" si
1'avis a 6t6 adopte a la majorite.

Art. 8. Le Bureau de T Union prend
part aux divers travaux du C.C.I.R. en
vue de la centralisation et de la publica-
tion d'une documentation g6ne>ale a
1' usage des administrations.

Art, 9. — § i. A la stance de c!6ture de
Fassembiee pieniere, le president com-
munique la liste des avis et celle des
questions qui restent a r6soudre et des
questions nouvelles soumises par les
commissions.

§ 2. Le president constate, le cas e'che'-
ant, Tadoption definitive des avis ex-
prime's. S'il y a lieu a votation a 1'as-
sembiee p!6ni£re, les fprmules "& Funa-
nimite" ou "a la majorite" s'appliquent a
cette votation.

§ 3. Les questions non r6solues et les
questions nouvelles sont enregistr6es par
le president, si Fassemble'e est d'accord
pour en faire poursuivre l'6tude. Celui-
ci demande ensuite quelles administra-
tions desirent se charger de la preparation
des propositions se rapportant a ces ques-
tions et quelles autres administrations
ou entreprises d'exploitation radioelec-
trique sont prates a collaborer aux
travaux. D'apr&s les r&ponses, il dresse
une liste officielle des questions a inscrire
a 1'ordre du jour de la reunion suivante,
avec ^'indication des administrations
centralisatrices et des administrations et
entreprises privies d'exploitation radio-
eiectrique collaboratrices. Cette liste est
inse're'e au proems- verbal de 1'assemblee.

§4. A la m£me stance de Tassemble'e
pieniere, le C.C.I.R., sur 1'offre ou le
consenternent de la delegation int&ress6e,
designe ^'administration qui convoquera
la reunion suivante et la date approxi-
mative de cette reunion.

Art. ro. — § i. Apres la c!6ture de la
reunion, la preparation des questions
mises a 1' etude est confiee a radministra-
tion designed pour organiser la prochaine
reunion (administration gerante nou-
velle). Les affaires en instance sont,
au contraire, confines a ^administration
gerante ancienne, laquelle est chargee de
les terminer, en collaboration avec le
Bureau de 1' Union.

§ 2. L'ancienne administration gerante
transmet les documents a la nouvelle

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

new managing administration not later
than five months after the closing of this
meeting.

Art. ii. After the end of a meeting, all
other questions which the administrations
and radio operating companies wish to
submit to the committee shall be ad-
dressed to the new managing administra-
tion. This administration shall include
these questions in the agenda of the next
meeting. However, no question may be
included in this agenda if it has not been
forwarded to the managing administra-
tion at least six months before the date of
the meeting.

Art. 12. — § I. All documents pertaining
to a meeting, having been sent to the
managing administration before this
meeting, or submitted during the meeting,
shall be printed and distributed by the
Bureau of the Union in collaboration with
the managing administration.

§ 2. When the study of a question has
been entrusted to a centralizing adminis-
tration, it shall devolve upon this admin-
istration to take the necessary steps
toward undertaking the study of the
question. The collaborating adminis-
trations and radio operating companies
must send their report on this question
directly to the centralizing administration,
6 months before the date of the C.C.I.R.
meeting, in order that the said adminis-
tration may consider same in its general
report and in its proposals.

§ 3. However, the administrations and
radio operating companies shall be free to
send another copy of their report to the
Bureau of the Union, if they wish these
reports to be communicated immediately
and separately to all the administrations
and companies concerned, by the said
Bureau.

Art. 13. The managing administration
may correspond directly with the admin-
istrations and radio operating companies
recognized as being capable of collaborat-
ing in the work of the committee. It
shall send at least one copy of the docu-
ments to the Bureau of the Union.

administration g6rante, au plus tard cinq
mois apres la cldture de cette reunion.

Art. ii. Apr&s la fin d'une reunion,
toutes les autres questions que les ad-
ministrations et compagnies d 'exploitation
radioelectrique desirent soumettre au
comit£ sont adress6es & la nouvelle ad-
ministration gdrante. Cette administra-
tion inscrit ces questions & 1'ordre du jour
de la prochaine reunion. Toutefois,
aucune question ne peut y £tre comprise,
si elle n'a ete communique^ a 1 'adminis-
tration g6rante au moins six mois avant
la date de la reunion.

Art. 12. — § i. Tous les documents affe-
rents a une reunion, envpyes avant cette
r6union a 1 'administration gerante, ou
presentes pendant la r6union, sont im~
primes et distribues par le Bureau de
I1 Union en collaboration avec 1'adminis-
tration gerante.

§ 2. Lorsque l'£tude d'une question a
et6 confiee £ une administration centra-
lisatrice, il appartient & cette administra-
tion de faire le n6cessaire pour proc6der a
1' etude de la question. Les administra-
tions et les compagnies d'exploitation
radioelectrique collaboratrices doivent
envoyer directement a radministration
centralisatrice leur rapport sur cette
question, six mois avant la date de la r£-
union du C.C.I.R., afin que ladite ad-
ministration en puisse tenir compte dans
son rapport general et dans ses proposi-
tions.

§ 3. Toutefois, les administrations et
les compagnies d'exploitation radioelec-
trique sont libres d'envoyer aussi copie de
leur rapport au Bureau de P Union, si elles
desirent que ces rapports soient communi-
ques imm6diatement et separement, par
les soins dudit Bureau, £ toutes les ad-
ministrations et compagnies interess6es.

Art. 13. L 'administration gerante peut
correspondre directement avec les ad-
ministrations et les compagnies d'exploita-
tion radioelectrique reconnues susceptibles
de collaborer aux travaux du comit6.
Elle remet au moins un exemplaire des
documents au Bureau de FUnion.

1 82

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 317b

No.

Final Protocol to the General Radio Regulations.

December 9, 1932.

Signed at Madrid,

Protocole final au Rdglement general des radiocommunications.
Signe £ Madrid, 9 decembre 1932.

Entered into force January r, 1934.*
Text and translation from U. S. Treaty Series, No. 867.

[Translation]

At the time of signing the General
Radio Regulations annexed to the Inter-
national Telecommunication Convention,
the undersigned plenipotentiaries take
note of the following statements:

Au moment de proceder & la signature
du Reglement general des radio com-
munications annexe & la Convention in-
ternationale des telecommunications, les
plenipotentiaires soussignes prennent acte
des declarations suivantes:

The plenipotentiaries of Germany state
formally that their Government reserves
the right to continue using the waves of
105 kc (2,857 m) and 117.5 kc (2,553 m)
for some special press services carried on
by radiotelephony.

The plenipotentiaries of the Dutch East
Indies state formally that their Govern-
ment reserves the right of not permitting
the mobile stations of its country to apply
the provisions of the last two sentences of
article 26, § I (i) of the General Regula-
tions concerning the retransmission of
radiotelegrams through a mobile station
for the sole purpose of hastening or
facilitating transmission, instead of trans-
mitting them to the nearest land station.

III

The plenipotentiaries of the Union of
Soviet Socialist Republics state formally
that their Government reserves the right
to use the following frequency bands for
the services listed below:

150 to

285 to
315 to
340 to

285 kc (2,000 to 1,053
315 kc (1,053 to 952 m
340 kc ( 952 to 882 m
420 kc ( 882 to 714 m

Les plenipotentiaires de TAllernagne
declarent formellement que leur gouverne-
ment se reserve le droit de rnaintenir
V usage des ondes de 105 kc/s (2 857 m) et
117,5 kc/s (2 553 m) pour quelques ser-
vices de presse sp6ciaux faits par radio-
telephonie.

Les plenipotentiaires des Indes neerlan-
daises declarent formellement que leur
gouvernement se reserve le droit de ne
pas perrnettre aux stations mobiles de son
pays d'appliquer les dispositions des deux
dernieres phrases de 1'article 26, § I, (i)
du Reglement general concernant la re-
transmission des radio tejegrammes par
I'lntermediaire d'une station mobile dans
le seul but d'acc£16rer ou de faciliter la
transmission au lieu de les transmettre &
la station terrestre la plus proche,

III

Les plenipotentiaires de 1' Union des
Republiques Sovietistes Socialistes de-
clarent formellement que leur gouverne-
ment se r6serve le droit d'utiliser les
bandes de frequences suivantes pour les
services ci-apres enumeres:

broadcasting

radiobeacons

aeronautical services and radio direction finding

broadcasting

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations under No. 3479, August 30,
1934.

Dec. 9, 1932

GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS

183

515 to

9,600 to

11,700 to

I2,IOO tO

15,350 to
17,800 to
21,550 to

150 a
285 a
315 &
340 &
51531

9 600 a

1 1 700 &

12 ioo a
15 350 a
17800 a
21 550 &

550 kc ( 583 to 545 m) aeronautical services
9,700 kc (31.25 to 30.93 m) broadcasting
11,900 kc (25.64 to 25,21 m) fixed services
12,300 kc (24.79 to 24.39 m) broadcasting
15,450 kc (19.54 to 19.42 m) broadcasting
17,850 kc (16.85 to 1 6. 8 1 m) broadcasting
21,750 kc (13.92 to 13.79 m) broadcasting

285
315
340
420

550

9700

ii 900

12300

15450
17850
21750

kc/s (2000 ct 1053 m) radiodiffusion

kc/s (1053 a 952 m) radiophares

kc/s ( 952 & 882 m) services aeronautiques et radiogoniometrie

kc/s ( 882 a 714 m) radiodiffusion

kc/s ( 583 a 545 m) services aeronautiques

kc/s (31,25 a 30,93 in) radiodiffusion

kc/s (25,64 a 25,21 m) services fixes

kc/s (24,79 & 24,39 m) radiodiffusion

kc/s (19,54 a 19,42 m) radiodiffusion

kc/s (16,85 a 16,81 m) radiodiffusion

kc/s (13,92 a 13,79 m) radiodiffusion.

With reference to the statement made
in this protocol by the plenipotentiaries of
the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics
concerning the use of certain frequency
bands, the plenipotentiaries of China state
formally that their Government reserves
the right to take any steps which might
become necessary with a view to protect-
ing their radio communications against
any interference which might be caused
by the putting into execution of the said
reservations of the Government of the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics,

Se referant a la declaration faite dans
le present Protocole par les pienipoten-
tiaires de TUnion des Republiques Sovie-
tistes Socialistes relativement a rutilisa-
tion de certaines bandes de frequences, les
plenipotentiaires de la Chine dedarent
formellement que leur gouvernement se
reserve le droit de prendre toutes les
mesures qui seraient 6ventuellement n6-
cessaires en vue de prot6ger leurs radio-
communications centre tout brouillage
qui pourrait 6tre occasionne par la mise en
execution desdites reserves du Gouverne-
ment de 1'Union des Republiques Sovie-
tistes Socialistes.

The plenipotentiary of Hungary states
formally that owing to the reservations of
the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics
concerning article 7 of the General Radio
Regulations (allocations and use of fre-
quencies), his Government reserves the
right of not enforcing the provisions of § 5
(2) of the said article in the case where the
emissions from the stations installed by
the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics in
application of its reservation, would inter-
fere seriously with the emissions of the
Hungarian stations.

Referring to the statement made in this
protocol by the plenipotentiaries of the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics con-
cerning the use of certain frequency bands,
the plenipotentiaries of Japan state for-
mally that their Government reserves the

Le pienipotentiaire de la Hongrie deV
clare formellement qu'en raison de la re-
serve de 1'Union des Republiques Sovie-
tistes Socialistes relative & Tarticle 7 du
R&glement g6n6ral des radiocommunica-
tions (repartition et emploi des fre-
quences), son gouvernement se reserve le
droit de ne pas appliquer les dispositions
du § 5, (2) dudit article dans les cas ou les
emissions des postes instalies par 1' Union
des Republiques Sovietistes Socialistes,
en execution de ses reserves, brouilleraient
d'une maniere grave les emissions de
stations hongroises.

Se referant £ la declaration faite dans
le present Protocole par les plenipotenti-
aires de 1'Union des Republiques Sovie-
tistes Socialistes relativement a Futilisa-
tion de certaines bandes de frequences, les
plenipotentiaires du Japon dedarent

1 84

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No.

right, for Japan, Chosen, Taiwan, Kara-
futo, the Kwantung Leased Territory and
the South Sea Islands under Japanese
mandate, to take any steps which might
become necessary with a view to protect-
ing their radio communications against
any interference which might be caused
by the putting into execution of the said
reservations of the Government of the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics.

VII

The plenipotentiaries of Poland and of
Rumania, in view of the reservations al-
ready made in connection with the use of
certain frequency bands, state formally
that in the case where no satisfactory
regional (European conference) or special
arrangement would be brought about,
each of their Governments reserves the
right to make any necessary derogations
in regard to the use, for the aeronautical
services, of certain frequencies outside the
bands assigned by article 7 of the General
Radio Regulations, in agreement with the
adjoining countries interested, and par-
ticularly not to await the period of time
provided for in § 5 (2) of this article, for
the protection' of the fundamental needs
of these services against any interference
which might be caused by the putting into
execution of the above-mentioned reser-
vations.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the plenipoten-
tiaries listed below have drawn up this
protocol and have signed it in one copy
which shall remain in the archives of the
Government of Spain and of which one
copy shall be forwarded to each govern-
ment signatory of the said protocol.

Done at Madrid, December 9, 1932.

formellement que leur gouvernement se re-
serve pour le Japon, Chosen, Taiwan,
Karafuto, le Territoire £ bail du Kwan-
tung et les lies des Mers du Sud sous
mandat japonais, le droit de prendre
toutes les mesures qui seraient eventuel-
lement n6cessaires en vue de proteger leurs
radiocommunications centre tout brouil-
lage qui pourrait 6tre occasionn6 par la
mise en execution desdites reserves du
Gouvernement de T Union des Republi-
ques Sovietistes Socialistes.

VII

Les plenipotentiaires de la Pologne et
de la Roumanie, vu les reserves dej£
formulas au sujet de Tutilisation de
certaines bandes de frequences, declarent
formellement que, dans le cas oti un ar-
rangement regional (Conference europe-
enne) ou particulier satisfaisant n'abou-
tirait pas, chacun de leurs gouvernements
se reserve le droit de faire eventuellement
des derogations en ce qui concerne Tutili-
sation pour les services a6ronautiques de
certaines frequences en dehors des bandes
attributes par 1'article 7 du Reglement
general des radiocommunications, en
accord avec les pays voisins interesses, et
specialement de ne pas attendre le delai
prevu au § 5, (2) de cet article, pour
sauvegarder les besoins fondamentaux
de ces services centre tout brouillage qui
pourrait £tre occasion^ par la mise en
execution des reserves ci-avant mention-
nees.

EN FOI DE QUOI les plenipotentiaires ci-
apres ont dress6 le present Protocole et ils
1'ont sign6 en un exemplaire qui restera
dans les archives du Gouvernement de
1'Espagne et dont une copie sera remise
& chaque gouvernement signataire dudit
Protocole.

Fait £ Madrid, le 9 decembre 1932.

[Signatures omitted; the final protocol was signed on behalf of each of the signatories of
the general radio regulations.]

Dec. 9, 1932 ADDITIONAL RADIO REGULATIONS

No. 318

185

Additional Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication
Convention. Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932.

Reglement additionnel des radiocommunications annexe & la Con-
vention des telecommunications. Signe a Madrid, 9 decembre
1932-

ACCESSIONS. On July I, 1937, these regulations had been approved or acceded to by all
the states which had ratified or acceded to the telecommunication convention (No. 316,
ante), except Afghanistan, Albania, Canada, Dominican Republic, Ethiopia, Luxemburg,
United States of America, and Yemen, and by Bolivia, Greece, and Sweden.

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of these regulations is also published in 151 League of Nations
Treaty Series, p. 448. (See the bibliography under No. 316, ante.)

Entered into force January i, 1934. x

Text and translation from U. S. Treaty Series, No. 867.

[Translation]

ARTICLE I. — Application of the Telegraph
and Telephone Regulations to Radio
Communication

[«8] § i. The provisions of the Tele-
graph and Telephone Regulations shall be
applicable to radio wherever the Radio
Regulations do not provide otherwise.

[m] §2. (i) Radiotelegrams shall be
drafted and dealt with in conformity with
the provisions set forth in the Telegraph
Regulations for telegrams, with the ex-
ception of the cases provided for in the
following articles.

[87°] (2) The use of letter groups taken
from the International Code of Signals
shall be allowed in radiotelegrams ex-
changed with ships.

[m] §3- Since the word RADIO or
AERADIO, respectively, is always added,
in the nomenclature, to the name of the
land station mentioned in the address of
a radiptelegram, this word must not be
given in the transmission of a radiotele-
gram, as a service instruction before the
preamble.

ARTICLE 2. — Charges

[l72] § i. The charge for a radio telegram
originating in or intended for a mobile
station, or exchanged between mobile sta-
tions shall include, as the case may be:

ARTICLE i. — Application des Rlglements
telegraphique et telephonigue aux radio-
communications

[568] § I. Les dispositions des Regie*
ments te!6graphique et telephonique sont
applicables aux radiocommunications en
tant que les Reglements des radiocom-
munications n'en disposent pas autrement.
[669] § 2. (i) Les radiot61egrammes sont
rediges et trait6s conformement aux dis-
positions fixees dans le Reglement telegra-
phique^ pour les telegrammes, sauf^ les
exceptions prevues dans les articles
suivants.

[67°] (2) L'emploi de groupes de lettres
du Code International de Signaux est per-
mis dans les radiotelegrammes ^changes
avec les navires.

[5n] § 3. Le mot RADIO ou AERA-
DIO, respectivement, etant toujours
ajoute, dans la nomenclature, au nom de
la station terrestre mentionnee dans Fad-
resse des radiot616grammes, ce mot ne
doit pas toe donne, comme indication de
service, en t£te du pr£ambule, dans la
transmission d'un radiot616gramme.

ARTICLE 2. — Taxes

[872] § i. La taxe d'un radiot&£gramme
originaire ou a destination d'une station
mobile ou 6chang6 entre stations mobiles
comprend, selon le cas:

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3479, August 30, 1934.

186

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 318

[m] (a) the on-board charge accruing to
the mobile station of origin or destination,
or to both these stations;
[m] (b) the land charge or charges [see
§ 3 (2)]j accruing to the land station or
stations which participate in the trans-
mission ;

[five] (<;) the charge for transmission over
the general system of telecommunication
channels, computed in accordance with
the usual rules;

[576] (d) the charge pertaining to supple-
mentary services requested by the sender.
[B77] §2. (l) The land and on-board
charges shall be determined in accordance
with the rate per word pure and simple,
with no minimum charge.
[678] (2) The maximum land charge shall
be sixty centimes (o fr. 60) per word ; the
maximum on-board charge shall be forty
centimes (o fr. 40) per word.
[579] (3) The land and on-board charges
pertaining to radiotelegrams which con-
cern stations not yet listed in the nomen-
clature may be fixed by the charging
office, as part of its duties, at the maxi-
mum rates provided above.
[58°] (4) However, each administration
reserves the right to fix and authorize land
or on-board charges higher than the max-
ima indicated above, in the case of land or
aircraft stations where the cost of installa-
tion or operation is exceptionally high.

[68i] (5) The radiotelegraph charge for
CDE radiotelegrams shall be reduced in
the same proportion as the telegraph
charge for these same radiotelegrams.
[***] (6) In the traffic between on-board
stations, whether it be direct or through
the medium of a single coast station, the
charge applicable to CDE telegrams shall
always equal six tenths (£f o) of the full
charge.

[ess] (7) The reduction granted shall al-
ways be applicable to the radiotelegraph
retransmission charge, if any.
[S84] (g) i^ minimum charge equal to
the charge for five words, as provided for
in article 26, § 3 (a) of the Telegraph Regu-
lations, shall not be applicable to the
radiotelegraph portions of the route of
radiotelegrams.

I586] §3- GO When ^ a land station is
used as an intermediary between mobile
stations, only one land charge shall be
collected. If the land charge applicable
to communications with the sending mo-

[m] a) la taxe de bord, revenant a la
station mobile d'origine ou de destina-
tion, ou a ces deux stations;
[B74] 6) la ou les taxes terrestres [voir § 3,
(2)] revenant a la station terrestre ou aux
stations terrestres qui participent a la
transmission ;

[578] c) la taxe pour la transmission sur
le r6seau g6n£ral des voies de tel£com-
munication, calculee d'apres les regies
ordinaires ;

[576] d) la taxe aff&rente aux operations
accessoires demandees par I'exp&diteur.
[677] §2. (i) La taxe terrestre et celle de
bord sont fix6es suivant le tarif par mot
pur et simple, sans perception d'un
minimum.

[678] (2) La taxe maximum terrestre est
de soixante centimes (o fr. 60) par mot; la
taxe maximum de bord est de quarante
centimes (o fr. 40) par mot.
t579] (3) Les taxes terrestres ou de bord
aff&rentes aux radio 1 61 ^grammes mt6res-
sant des stations non encore inscrites a la
nomenclature peuvent tee fixees d'office
par le bureau taxateur aux maxima vis6s
ci-avant.

[58°] (4) Toutefois, chaque administra-
tion se reserve la facult6 de fixer et
d'autoriser des taxes terrestres ou de bord
superieures aux maxima indiqu6s ci-
avant, dans le cas de stations terrestres
ou d'a&ronef exceptionnellement on6-
reuses, du fait de Installation ou de
Texploitation.

[681] (5) La taxe radiot616graphique des
radiotel£grammes CDE est reduite dans
les mSmes proportions que la taxe tel£-
graphique de ces m£mes radiote!6grammes.
[582] (6) Dans le trafic entre postes de
bord, direct ou par Tinterm^diaire d'une
seule station c6tiere, la taxe & appliquer
aux radiot£l6grammes CDE est toujours
6gale aux six dixi&mes (%o) de la taxe
pleine.

[B83J] (7) La reduction accorded est tou-
jours applicable aux taxes Sventuelles de
retransmission radiote!6graphique.
[584] (8) Le minimum de perception £gal
a la taxe de cinq mots, preVu a Tarticle
26, §3, a) du R&glement t616graphique,
n'est pas^ applicable au parcours radio-
te!6graphique des radiotel6grammes«

[885] §3' (i) Lorsqu'une station terrestre
est utilisee comme intermMiaire entre des
stations mobiles, il n'est perc.u qu'une
seule taxe terrestre. Si la taxe terrestre
applicable aux ^changes avec la station

Dec. 9, 1932

ADDITIONAL RADIO REGULATIONS

I87

bile station differs from that applicable
to communications with the receiving
mobile station, the higher of these two
charges shall be collected. There may be
collected, in addition, a territorial tele-
graph charge equal to that referred to in
§ 5 below, as being applicable to trans-
mission over the telecommunication
channels.

[586] (2) When, upon request of the
sender, two land stations are used as in-
termediaries between two mobile sta-
tions, the land charge of each station as
well as the telegraph charge covering the
route between the two stations shall be
collected.

[68r] § 4. Retransmission service and
charges shall be regulated by article 7 of
these Regulations.

[588] §5- (i) Where radiotelegrams origi-
nating in or addressed to a country
are exchanged directly by or with land
stations of that country, the telegraph
charge applicable to the transmission over
the internal telecommunication channels
of that country shall, in principle, be
computed according to the rate per word,
pure and simple, without a minimum
charge. This charge shall be reported in
gold francs to the Bureau of the Union by
the administration having jurisdiction
over the land stations.
[889] (2) When a country finds itself
obliged to apply a minimum charge by
reason of the fact that its internal tele-
communication system is not operated by
the government, it shall so inform the
Bureau of the Union which shall mention
in the nomenclature the amount of this
minimum charge following the indication
of the charge per word. In the absence of
such notice the charge to be applied shall
be the charge per word, pure and simple,
without a minimum charge.
[59°] §6. The country on whose terri-
tory there is established a land station
serving as an intermediary for the ex-
change of radiotelegrams between a
mobile station and another country shall
be considered, for the purpose of applying
telegraph charges, as the country of origin
or of destination of these radiotelegrams,
and not as the transit country.
[fi91] § 7. The total charge for radiotele-
grams shall be collected from the sender,
with the exception:

[692] jg-t^ Of those special delivery charges
which are to be collected on delivery [art.
62 > § 5 (2) of the Telegraph Regulations];

mobile qui transmet est diff £rente de celle
applicable aux ^changes avec la station
mobile qui regoit, c'est la plus elevee de
ces deux taxes qui est perdue. II peut
8tre pergu, en outre, une taxe territoriale
teiegraphique, 6gale & celle qui, au § 5
ci-apres, est indiqu6e comme etant ap-
plicable a la transmission sur les voies de
telecommunication.

[586] (2) Lorsque, sur la demande de
I'expediteur, deux stations terrestres sont
utilises comme intermediates entre deux
stations mobiles, la taxe terrestre de
chaque station est pergue ainsi que la
taxe teiegraphique aff&rente au parcours
entre les deux stations.
[fi87] § 4. Le service et les taxes des re-
transmissions sont regies par Tarticle 7
du present R&glement.
[588] § 5- (i) Dans le cas oft des radio-
teiegrammes originaires ou & destination
d'un pays sont 6chang6s directement par
ou avec les stations terrestres de ce pays,
la taxe teiegraphique applicable a la trans-
mission sur les voies interieures de tele"-
communication de ce pays est, en prin-
cipe, calculee suivant le tarif par mot pur
et simple, sans perception d'un minimum.
Cette taxe est notified, en francs-or, au
Bureau de 1' Union par Tadministration
dont reinvent les stations terrestres.

[gas] (2) Lorsqu'un pays se trouve dans
1'obligation d'imposer un minimum de per-
ception, en raison du fait que son syst&me
de telecommunications interieures n'est
pas exploite par le gouvernement, il doit
en informer le Bureau de 1'Union, qui
mentionne dans la nomenclature le mon-
tant de ce minimum de perception a la
suite de Pindication de la taxe par mot.
A defaut d'une pareille mention, la taxe &
appliquer est celle par mot pur et simple,
sans perception d'un minimum.
[59°] § 6. Le pays sur le territoire duquel
est etablie une station terrestre servant
d 'intermediate pour 1'echange de radio-
teiegrammes entre une station mobile et
un autre pays est consider^, en ce qui con-
cerne 1'application des taxes t£l£gra-
phiques, comme pays de provenance ou de
destination de ces radioteiegrammes et
non comme pays de transit.
[69*] § 7. La taxe totale des radioteie-
grammes est pergue sur 1'expediteur, £
Texception:

[592] i° c[es fj-ais d'expres & percevoir &
1'arrivee [article 62, § 5 (2) du R&glement
teiegraphique] ;

188

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 318

[5W] 2d. of the charges applicable to
combinations or alterations of words
which are not accepted and which are
found by the office or mobile station of
destination (art. 23, § I of the Telegraph
Regulations); such charges shall be col-
lected from the addressee.
[B9*] § 8. The word count by the office of
origin shall be decisive in the case of radio-
telegrams addressed to mobile stations
and the word count by the mobile station
of origin shall be decisive in the case of
radio telegrams originating with mobile
stations, both for transmission and for
international accounts. However, when
the radiotelegram is expressed wholly or
partly either in one of the languages of
the country of destination, in the case of
radiptelegrams originating with mobile
stations, or in one of the languages of the
country to which the mobile station is
subject, in the case of radiotelegrams ad-
dressed to mobile stations, and when the
radiotelegram contains combinations or
alterations of words contrary to the usage
of that language, the office or mobile
station of destination, as the case may be,
shall have the right to recover from the
addressee the amount of the charge not
collected. In the event of refusal to pay,
the radiotelegram may be withheld.
[69B] § 9. No charge accruing from radio
transmission in the mobile service shall be
collected for radiotekgrams of immediate
general interest falling within the follow-
ing classes:

[59B] (a) distress messages and replies
thereto ;

[69*] (&) notices originating in mobile
stations regarding the presence of icebergs,
derelicts and mines, or reporting cyclones
and storms;

[B98] (c) notices reporting sudden phe-
nomena threatening aerial navigation or
the sudden appearance of obstacles at
airdromes;

[fi99] W notices originating in mobile
stations advising of sudden changes in the
location of buoys, functioning of light-
houses, route-indicating apparatus, etc. ;

[«°°] (e) service notices relating to mo-
bile services.

[6fll] § 10. (i) The land and on-board
charges shall be reduced by 50 percent for
press radiotelegrams originating in an on-
board station and addressed to land.
These radiotelegrams shall be subject to
the conditions of acceptance provided for

[693] 2° des taxes applicables aux reunions
ou alterations de mots non admises, con-
statees par le bureau ou la station mobile
de destination (article 23, § I, du Regie-
ment te!6graphique) ; ces taxes sont per-
gues sur le destinataire.

[694] § 8. Le compte des mots par le
bureau d'origine est d£cisif au sujet des
radiotel6grammes £ destination de sta-
tions mobiles, et celui de la station mobile
d'origine est d6cisif au sujet des radiotele"-
grammes originaires des stations mo-
biles, tant pour la transmission que pour
les comptes internationaux. Toutefois,
quand le radiotel^gramme est r<§dig6 to-
talement ou partiellement soit dans une
des langues du pays de destination, en
cas de radiot616grammes originaires de
stations mobiles, soit dans une des langues
du pays dont depend la station mobile,
s'il s'agit de radiotel ^grammes & destina-
tion de stations mobiles, et que le radio-
tel6gramme contient des reunions ou des
alterations de mots contraires £ 1'usage de
cette langue, le bureau ou la station mo-
bile de destination, suivant le cas, a la
facult6 de recouvrer sur le destinataire le
montant de la taxe non perdue. En cas
de refus de paiement, le radiote!6gramme
peut §tre arr§t£.

[595] § 9- Aucune taxe aff6rente au par-
cours radio&ectrique, dans le service mo-
bile, n'est perdue pour les radiot616-
grammes d'un intent general immediat,
rentrant dans les categories suivantes:
[69B] a) messages de d£tresse et r£ponses
& ces messages;

[597] b) avis originaires des stations mo-
biles sur la presence de glaces, £paves et
mines, ou annongant des cyclones et
temp^tes;

[508] c) avis annongant des ph£nomenes
brusques menac.ant la navigation a6rienne
ou la survenue soudaine d'obstacles dans
les aerodromes ;

I599] d) avis originaires des stations mo-
biles, notifiant des changements soudains
dans la position des bou6es, le fonctionne-
ment des phares, appareils de balisage,
etc.;

[60°] e) avis de service relatifs aux ser-
vices mobiles.

[6°l] § 10. (i) Les taxes terrestres et de
bord sont reduites de 50% pour les radio-
teiegrammes de presse originaires d'une
station de bord et destin6s £ la terre ferme.
Ces radiotelegrammes sont soumis aux
conditions d'admission preVues par le

Dec. 9, 1932

ADDITIONAL RADIO REGULATIONS

189

by the International Telegraph Regula-
tions for press telegrams. For those
which are addressed to a destination in the
country of the land station, the telegraph
charge to be collected shall be one half of
the telegraph charge applicable to an
ordinary radiotelegram.
[602] (2) Press radiotelegrams addressed
to a country other than that of the land
station shall be subject to the press rates
in force between the country of the land
station and the country of destination.
[603] §11. (i) (a) The land and on-
board charges applicable to meteorolog-
ical radiotelegrams shall be reduced by at
least 50 percent in all relations.
[604j (&) For land stations, the date upon
which this provision will be put into effect
shall be fixed by agreement between the
administrations and operating companies
on the one hand, and the interested official
meteorological services on the other hand.
[605] (2) (a) The term " meteorological
radiotelegram" shall denote a radiotele-
gram sent by an official meteorological
service or by a station officially connected
with such a service, and addressed to such
a service or to such a station, and which
contains exclusively meteorological ob-
servations or meteorological forecasts.

[60e] (b) These radiotelegrams must in-
clude before the address, the paid service
instruction =OBS = .
[eor] (3) Upon request, the sender must
state that the text of his radiotelegram
complies with the conditions set forth
above.

[GOB] § 12. Mobile stations must have
knowledge of the rates necessary for de-
termining the charges for radiotelegrams.
They are, however, authorized when nec-
essary, to obtain such information from
land stations; the amounts of the rates
which the latter give shall be expressed
in gold francs.

[609] § 13 (i) Any new rate, and any
change in whole or in part relating to
rates, shall become effective only 15 days
after their notification by the Bureau of
the Union (excluding the day of filing) and
shall be applied only on the first or six-
teenth following the last day of this period,

[51°] (2) For radiotelegrams originating
in mobile stations, however, the changes
in the rates shall become effective only I
month after the periods fixed in sub-
paragraph (i).

R£glement t£l£graphique international
pour les t£Iegrammes de presse. Pour
ceux qui sont adress6s a une destination
dans le pays de la station terrestre, la taxe
t6l6graphique & percevoir est la moiti£ de
la taxe tel£graphique applicable a un
radioteldgramme ordinaire.
[602] (2) Les radiotele'grammes de presse
a destination d'un pays autre que celui
de la station terrestre jouissent du tarif de
presse en vigueur entre le pays de la sta-
tion terrestre et le pays de destination.
[603] § II. (i) a) Les taxes terrestres et
de bord applicables aux radiot616grammes
m6t£orologiques sont r&iuites d'au moins
50% dans toutes les relations.
[604] £) Pour les stations terrestres, la
date & laquelle cette disposition sera mise
en vigueur sera fixde par accord entre les
administrations et compagnies exploi-
tantes, d'une part, et les services mlteo-
rologiques officiels int6ress6s d'autre part.
[605] (2) a) Le terme " radiote!6gramme
mete'orologique" d6signe un radiotel6-
gramme envoy£ par un service * rndte"-
orologique officiel ou par une station en
relation officielle avec un tel service, et
adress6 & un tel service ou i une telle sta-
tion, et qui contient exclusivement des
observations m£t£orologiques ou des pre"-
visions m6t6orologiques.
[606] b) Ces radiotel£grammes compor-
tent, obligatoirement, en t6te de Padresse,
1'indication de service tax£e ^OBS^.
f607] (3) Sur demande, I'exp6diteur doit
declarer que le texte de son radiotel£-
gramme correspond aux conditions fix6es
ci-avant.

[608] § 12. Les stations mobiles doivent
connattre les tarifs n^cessaires pour la
taxation des radiotelegrammes. Toute-
fois, elles sont autoris£es, le cas e"ch6ant,
& se renseigner aupr&s des stations terres-
tres; les montants des tarifs que celles-ci
indiquent sont donnes en francs-or.

[609] §13- (i) Tpute taxe nouvelle,
toutes modifications d'ensemble ou de
detail concernant les tarifs ne sont ex£cu-
toires que 15 jours aprjbs leur notification
par le Bureau de 1' Union (jour de d6p6t
non compris) et ne sont mises en applica-
tion qu'& partir du ier ou du 16 qui suit le
i'our d 'expiration de ce delai.
61°] (2) Toutefois, pour les radiotele-
grammes originates des stations mobiles,
les modifications aux tarifs ne sont ex6-
cutoires qu'un mois apres les delais fixe"s
a 1'alinea (i).

19°

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

[en] (3) The provisions of the above sub-
paragraphs shall admit of no exception.

ARTICLE 3. — Order of Priority of Com-
munications in the Mobile Service

[612] The order of priority for the radio
communications referred to in item 6 of
article 24 of the General Regulations shall,
in principle, be the following:

1 . government radiotelegrams ;

2. radiotelegrams relating to naviga-
tion, to the sailings and the needs of ships,
to the safety and regularity of the aerial
service, and weather-observation mes-
sages intended for an official meteorolog-
ical service;

3. service radiotelegrams relating to
the operation of the radiocommunication
service, or to radiotelegrams previously
exchanged ;

4. public correspondence radiotele-
grams.

ARTICLE 4. — Time of Filing of Radio-
telegrams

[61S] § I. In the transmission of radio-
telegrams originating in a mobile station,
the date and the time of filing in this sta-
tion shall be indicated in the preamble.
[6U] § 2, To indicate the time of filing of
radiotelegrams accepted in mobile sta-
tions, the clerk shall use Greenwich mean
time, and shall use the 24-hour system.
This time shall always be expressed and
sent by means of 4 figures (oooi to 2400).

[61B] § 3. However, the administrations
of the countries situated outside zone
" A" (appendix 5), may authorize stations
on ships sailing along the coasts of their
countries to use zone time to indicate, by
a group of 4 figures, the time of filing, and
in this case, the group must be followed
by the letter F.

ARTICLE 5. — Address of Radiotelegrams
[«16] §i. (i) The address of a radio-
telegram destined to a mobile station
must be as complete as possible; it must
contain the following:

[617] (a) name or designation of the ad-
dressee, with supplementary particulars,
if necessary;

[eis] (p) name of the ship station or, in
the case of another mobile station, the call
signal as shown in the appropriate nomen-
clature ;

No. 318

[81ll (3) Les dispositions des alin£as ci~
avant n'admettent aucune exception.

ARTICLE 3. — Ordre de priorite des com-
munications dans le service mobile

[612] L'ordre de priori t6 des radiocom-
munications vis£es au chiffre 6° de 1 'article
24 du Reglement general est, en principe,
le suivant:

i° radiotelegrammes d'Etat;

2° radiotelegrammes relatifs a la navi-
gation, aux mouvements et aux besoins
des navires, a la securit6 et & la regularity
des services aeiiens, et messages d'obser-
vation du temps destines a un service
m6t6orologique ofEciel ;

3° radiotelegrammes de service rela-
tifs au fonctionnement du service des
radiocommunications ou a des radiot&e"-
grammes pr6c6demment ^changes;

4° radiotelegrarnmes de la correspon-
dance publique.

ARTICLE 4. — Heure de depdt des radio-
telegrammes

[618] § i. Dans la transmission des radio-
telegrammes originaires d'une station
mobile, la date et 1'heure du depdt & cette
station sont indiqu^es dans le pr6arnbule.
[6U] § 2. Pour indiquer 1'heure de d6p6t
des radiotelegrammes acceptes dans les
stations mobiles, le pr6pos6 se base sur le
temps moyen de Greenwich et utilise la
notation suivant le cadran de 24 heures.
Cette heure est toujours exprime'e et
transmise a 1'aide de quatre chiffres
(oooi a 2400).

t615] § 3- Toutefois, les administrations
des pays situ^s en dehors de la zone "A"
(appendice 5) peuvent autoriser les sta-
tions des navires longeant les cdtes de leur
pays a utiliser le temps du fuseau pour
1'indication, en un groupe de quatre
chiffres, de T heure de dep6t, et, dans ce
cas, le groupe doit 6tre suivi de la lettre F.

ARTICLE 5. — Adresse des radiotelegrammes

[616] § i, (i) L'adresse des radiotele-
grammes a destination des stations mo-
biles doit §tre aussi complete que possible ;
elle est obligatoirement Iibell6e comme
suit:

[617] a) nom ou qualit6 du destinataire
avec indication complementaire, s'il y a
lieu;

[sis] &) nom de la station de navire ou,
dans le cas d'une autre station mobile, in-
dicatif d'appel, tels qu'iis figurent dans
la nomenclature appropri6e;

Dec. 9, 1932

ADDITIONAL RADIO REGULATIONS

191

[6i9] (c) name of the land station charged
with the transmission, as it appears in the
nomenclature.

[62°] (2) The name and call signal re-
quired under § I (i) (&) may, however, be
replaced, at the sender's risk, by the indi-
cation of the route followed by the mobile
station, such route being indicated by
means of the names of the ports of de-
parture and of destination, or by any
other equivalent indication.
I621] (3) In tne address, the name of the
mobile station and that of the land sta-
tion, written as they appear in the ap-
propriate nomenclature shall, in all cases
and irrespective of their length, be
counted as one word each.

[622] § 2. (i) Mobile stations not pro-
vided with the official nomenclature of
telegraph offices may add after the name
of the telegraph office of destination the
name of the territorial subdivision and, in
some cases, the name of the country of
destination, if they fear that, without this
addition, the routing might not be made
without delay.

[623] (2) In that case, the name of the
telegraph office and the supplementary
particulars shall be counted and charged
for only as a single word. The land sta-
tion agent receiving the radiotelegram
shall either retain or delete this informa-
tion, or else modify the name of the office
of destination, according as it may be
necessary or sufficient to route the radio-
telegram to its proper destination.

[Articles 6-13 omitted. — Doubtful re-
ception— Transmission by "Ampliation"
— Long-distance Radio Communication.
Retransmission by stations of the mobile
service. Notice of nondelivery. Period of
retention of radiotelegrams at land stations.
Radiotelegrams to be forwarded by ordinary
mail or by air mail. Special rddiotele-
grams. Radio communications for multi-
ple destinations. Effective date of the addi-
tional regulations.]

[61°] c) nom de la station terrestre
charg6 de la transmission, tel qu'il figure
dans la nomenclature.
[620] (2) Toutefois, le nom et 1'indicatif
d'appel pr6vus au § i, (i) b) peuvent 6tre
remplac£s, aux risques et perils de Tex™
p£diteur, par Indication du parcours
effectu6 par la station mobile, ce parcours
6tant d6termin6 par le nom des ports de
depart et d'arriv£e ou par toute autre-
mention 6quivalente.
[621] (3) Dans Tadresse, le nom de la
station mobile et celui de la station
terrestre, Merits tels qu'ils figurant dans
les nomenclatures appropriates, sont, dans
tous les cas et indlpendamment de leur
longueur, compt&s individuellement pour
un mot,

[622] §2. (i) Les stations mobiles non
pourvues de la nomenclature officielle des
bureaux t616graphiques peuvent faire
suivre le nom du bureau t£l£graphique de
destination du nom de la subdivision terri-
toriale et, 6yentuellement, du nom du
pays de destination, si elles doutent que,
sans cette adjonction, ljacheminement
puisse 6tre assur& sans hesitation.
[623] (2) Le nom du bureau t£16graphique
et les indications compl&nentaires ne sont,
dans ce cas, comptds et tax£s que pour un
seul mot. L'agent de la station terrestre
qui regoit le radiot£16gramme maintient
ou supprime ces indications, ou encore
modifie le nom du bureau de destination,
selon qu'il est n£cessaire ou suffisant pour
diriger le radiot616gramme sur sa veritable
destination.

[Articles 6-13 omis. — Reception dou-
teuse — Transmission par "ampliation" —
Radio-communications d grande distance.
Retransmission par les stations du service
mobile. Avis de non remise. Delai de
sejour des radiotelegrammes dans les sta-
tions terrestres. RadiottUgrammes d re-
expedier par voie postale ordinaire ou
afrienne. Radiotelegrammes speciaux.
Radiocommunications & multiples destina-
tions. Mise en vigueur du Reglement ad-
ditionnel.]

[Signatures omitted; the additional regulations were signed on behalf of each of the signa-
tories of the convention (No. 316, ante)f with exceptions of Canada, Ethiopia, Luxemburg,
Mexico, Nicaragua, Persia, and United States of America.]

192

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 319

ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL (European) to the Acts of the Inter-
national Radiotelegraph Conference of Madrid. Signed at
Madrid, December 9, 1932.

PROTOCOLE ADDITIONNEL (Europeen) aux Actes de la Confe-
rence radiotelegraphique Internationale de Madrid. Signe £
Madrid, 9 decembre 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. The conference envisaged by this protocol met at Lucerne, May 15-
June 19, 1933, and drew up the European Broadcasting Convention of June 19, 1933 (No.
330, post).

RATIFICATIONS. This protocol was not subject to ratification.

BIBLIOGRAPHY. (See the bibliographies under No, 316, ante, and No. 330, post.)

Entered into force December 9, i932.x

Text and translation from publication by the General Post Office, London.

[Translation]

The undersigned plenipotentiaries
of the Governments of: Germany;
Austria; Belgium; Vatican City
State; Swiss Confederation ; Den-
mark; Free City of Danzig; Egypt;
Spain and the Spanish zone of Mo-
rocco; Finland; France and Algeria,
Morocco, Tunis; the United King-
dom of Great Britain and Northern
Ireland ; Greece ; Hungary ; Irish Free
State; Iceland; Italy; Cyrenaica and
Tripolitania ; Latvia; Lithuania ; Nor-
way; the Netherlands; Poland; Por-
tugal; Roumania; Sweden; Czecho-
slovakia; Turkey; the Union of
Soviet Socialist Republics; and Jugo-
slavia, in virtue of the provisions of
Article 14 of the International Radio-
telegraph Convention of Washing-
ton,2 have, by common accord,
drawn up the following Additional
Protocol:

Les soussign^s, p!6nipotentiaires
des Gouvernements de I'Allemagne;
de 1'Autriche; de la Belgique; de
1'Etat de la Qt<§ du Vatican; de la
Confederation suisse; du Danemark;
de la Ville libre de Dantzig; de
TEgypte; de TEspagne et de la zone
espagnole du Maroc ; de la Finlande ;
de la France et de TAlg^rie, du Ma-
roc, de la Tunisie ; du Royaume-Uni
de la Grande-Bretagne et de Tlr-
lande du Nord; de la Gr&ce; de la
Hongrie; de 1'Etat libre d'Irlande; de
Tlslande; de 1'Italie; de la Cyr<§-
nai'que et de la Tripolitaine ; de la
Lettonie; de la Lithuanie; de la
Norv&ge; des Pays-Bas; de la Po-
logne ; du Portugal ; de la Roumanie ;
de la SuMe; de la Tch<§coslovaquie ;
de la Turquie; de 1'Union des R<§-
publiques Sovi£tistes Socialistes; de
la Yougoslavie, se basant sur les
dispositions de Farticle 14 de la
Convention radiot616graphique in-
ternationale de Washington,2 ont,
d'un commun accord, arr£t6 le
Protocole additionnel suivant:

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations under No. 3479, August 30.
1934-

2 No. 185, ante. — ED.

Dec. 9, 1932 ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL (EUROPEAN) 193

CHAPTER I CHAPITRE I

COMPOSITION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE
EUROPEAN CONFERENCE

§ I. A Conference of the Govern-
ments of the European region will be
held before the entry into force of the
General Radiocommunication Regu-
lations of Madrid with the object of
concluding an agreement concerning
the allocation of frequencies to the
various broadcasting stations of this
region and the fixing of the methods
of using the frequencies thus as-
signed. This Conference will be
composed of representatives of all
the countries comprised in the region
in question, which have acceded to
the Radiotelegraph Conventions of
Berlin (1906), London (1912), or
Washington (1927).

Any Government of an extra-
European country shall have the
right to be represented at the Euro-
pean Conference by observers who
shall be permitted to assist at all
meetings of this Conference and of its
committees and sub-committees, and
to take part in the discussions on all
questions which they consider affect
the rights of the radioelectric serv-
ices of their countries.

The following international organ-
isations may be admitted to the Euro-
pean Conference, if they so request:

U.I.R. (International Broadcast-
ing Union) ;

C.I.N.A. (International Commis-
sion for Air Navigation) ;

C.I.R. (International Radio-Mari-
time Committee) ;

U.R.S.I. (International Scientific
Radioelectric Union) ;

International Shipping Confer-
ence.

These organisations are consulta-
tive only.

§ 2. The Conference, complying
with the relative provisions of Article
7 of the General Radiocommunica-
tion Regulations of Madrid,1 will

COMPOSITION ET ATTRIBUTIONS DE LA
CONFERENCE EUROPEENNE

§ I. Une conference des gouverne-
ments de la region europeenne,
destinee & conclure un arrangement
concernant I'attribution des fre-
quences aux diverses stations de
radiodiffusion de cette region et la
fixation des modalit<§s de Temploi
des frequences ainsi attributes, sera
tenue avant Tentr6e en vigueur du
Reglement general des radiocom-
munications de Madrid. Cette con-
ference sera compos6e de represen-
tants de tous les pays compris dans la
region int<§ress<§e, adherents aux Con-
ventions radioteiegraphiques de Ber-
lin (1906), Londres (1912) ou Wash-
ington (1927).

Tout gouvernement d'un pays
extra-europeen aura la faculte de se
faire repr£senter & la Conference
europeenne par des observateurs qui
seront admis £ assister & toute re-
union de cette conference et de ses
commissions et sous-commissions et
& y prendre la parole sur toute
question qu'ils estiment toucher aux
droits des services radio61ectriques
de leurs pays.

A la Conference europeenne peu-
vent §tre admis, sur leur demande, les
organismes internationaux suivants:

U.I.R. (Union Internationale de
Radiodiff usion) ;

C.I.N.A. (Commission Interna-
tionale de Navigation A6rienne) ;

C.I.R. (Comite International
Radio-Maritime) ;

U.R.S.I. (Union Radio-Scienti-
fique Internationale) ;

International Shipping Confer-
ence.

Ces organismes ont voix consulta-
tive.

§ 2. La conference, se conformant
aux dispositions respectives de Par-
ticle 7 du Rfeglement general des
radiocommunications de Madrid,1

1 No. 317, ante. — ED.

194

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 319

allocate the frequencies referred to in
the preceding paragraph, either in
the bands authorised for broadcast-
ing services or, by exception, outside
these bands.

It will deal with any connected
questions.

§ 3. In taking its decisions, this
Conference shall have regard to the
needs of all the countries in the
European region.

The Conference will do its utmost
to assign to each country in the
European region waves permitting it
to ensure a national service of reason-
ably satisfactory quality, regard
being had, so far as possible, to the
existing situation.

Where it is not possible to assign a
frequency below 550 kc/s (wave-
length above 545 m), either in the
bands authorised for broadcasting
services, or by exception, outside
these bands, to certain countries of
which the size and orographical
structure may warrant such an allo-
cation, these countries shall, so far as
possible, receive a frequency from
amongst the lowest in the band from
550 to 1,500 kc/s (a wavelength
amongst the longest in the band
from 545 to 200 m).

The undersigned Governments
recognise that in order to attain this
result, it may be necessary for them
to consent to sacrifices in the
common interest.

CHAPTER II

PREPARATION FOR THE EUROPEAN
CONFERENCE

§ 4. The Government of the Swiss
Confederation is charged with con-
voking and preparing the European
Conference.

A plan of allocation of frequencies
to broadcasting stations will be pre-
sented by the International Broad-
casting Union (U.I.R.) to the Man-
aging Government (Government of

attribuera les frequences vis6es au
paragraphe precedent soit dans les
bandes autoris<§es pour les services
de radiodiffusion, soit, en derogation,
en dehors de ces bandes.

Elle traitera toutes questions con-
nexes.

§ 3. Cette conference prendra ses
decisions en tenant compte des be-
soins de tous les pays de la region
europeenne.

Elle s'efforcera d'attribuer £ chaque
pays de la region europeenne les
ondes lui permettant d'assurer un
service national d'une qualite raison-
nablement satisfaisante, en tenant
compte, dans la mesure du possible,
de la situation existante.

Lorsqu'il ne lui sera pas possible
d'attribuer soit dans les bandes
autorisees pour les services de radio-
diffusion, soit, en derogation, en
dehors de ces bandes, & certains pays
dont les dimensions et la structure
orographique justifieraient une telle
allocation, une frequence inferieure
& 550 kc/s (longueur d'onde supe~
rieure & 545 m), ces pays devront,
autant que possible, recevoir une
frequence parmi les plus basses
de la bande de 550 & I 500 kc/s
(une longueur d'onde parmi les
plus longues de la bande de 545 &
200 m),

Les gouvernements soussignes re-
connaissent que, pour arriver £ ce
resultat, il pourra leur §tre necessaire
de consentir des sacrifices dans
Tinter^t commun.

CHAPITRE II

PREPARATION DE LA CONFERENCE
EUROPEENNE

§ 4. Le Gouvernement de la Con-
federation suisse est charge de con-
voquer et de preparer la Conference
europeenne.

Un projet d'attribution des fre-
quences aux stations de radiodiffu-
sion sera presente par 1' Union Inter-
nationale de Radiodiffusion (U.I.R.)
au gouvernement gerant (Gouverne-

Dec. 9, 1932

ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL (EUROPEAN)

195

the Swiss Confederation) by the I5th
of March, 1933, at the latest, and
will be communicated by the latter to
all the Governments of the European
region through the medium of the
International Bureau of the Tele-
graph Union.

After the distribution of the report
of the U.I.R., each Government
concerned shall .have the right to
present its observations, amend-
ments and counter-proposals to the
Managing Government, with a view
to their communication to the other
Governments of the European re-
gion, and also to the U.I.R.

The Managing Government shall
present to the Conference a report on
the question as a whole.

§ 5. The Conference shall meet as
soon as possible and by the 1st of
June, 1933, at the latest.

§ 6. The undersigned Govern-
ments shall furnish to the Managing
Government, either at the request of
the latter or of their own initiative,
during the whole period of the pre-
paratory work, all information ca-
pable of assisting in the preparation
of the European Conference.

CHAPTER III

SPECIAL PROVISIONS

§ 7. In its decisions relative to the
allocation of frequencies to the vari-
ous broadcasting stations, the Euro-
pean Conference shall apply the rules
of the General Radiocommunication
Regulations of Madrid destined to
regulate and to ensure the better
working of broadcasting services.
The Conference shall fix the upper
limit of unmodulated power meas-
ured in the aerial, capable of being
used by each station for the fre-
quency in question, and the upper
limit of the field-strength of the
carrier wave during daylight at the
most remote frontier and also at the
nearest frontier. In its decisions on
this point, it shall take as a guide the
particulars contained in the docu-

ment de la Confederation suisse)
au plus tard le 15 mars 1933 et com-
munique par celui-ci & tous les
gouvernements de la region euro-
peenne par Tintermediaire du Bureau
international de 1'Union t<§16gra-
phique.

Apr6s la distribution du rapport
de ril.I.R., chaque gouvernement
interesse aura la faculte de presenter
ses observations, amendements et
contre-propositions au gouvernement
gerant, en vue de leur communica-
tion aux autres gouvernements de la
region europeenne ainsi qu'a 1'U.I.R.

Le gouvernement g6rant pr£sen-
tera a la conference un rapport sur
Tensemble de la question.

§ 5. La conference se r6unira le
plus t6t possible et, au plus tard, le
ier juin 1933.

§ 6. Les gouvernements soussign6s
donneront au gouvernement g6rant
soit sur la demande de celui-ci, soit
de leur propre initiative, pendant
toute la dur6e des travaux pr6para-
toires, tout renseignement suscepti-
ble d'aider a la preparation de la
Conference europeenne.

CHAPITRE III

DISPOSITIONS PARTICULIERES

§ 7. Dans ses decisions relatives a
Pattribution des frequences aux di-
verses stations de radiodiffusion, la
Conference europeenne appliquera
les regies du R&glement general des
radiocommunications de Madrid des-
tinees a reglementer et a tnieux
assurer les services de la radio-
diffusion. Elle fixera la limite su-
perieure de la puissance non moduiee
mesuree dans Tantenne, susceptible
d'etre utilisee par chaque station
pour la frequence en question, et la
limite superieure de la valeur du
champ efficace de Tonde porteuse
produit de jour a la fronti£re la plus
eloignee ainsi qu'a la fronti&re la plus
proche. Dans ses decisions y rela-
tives elle prendra pour guide les indi-

196

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 319

ment annexed to the present Proto-
col.

The arrangement adopted at the
Conference shall include, amongst
the general rules to be observed in
future, provisions similar to those
mentioned above, and also a clause
corresponding to sub -paragraph (5)
of § 5 of Article 7 of the General
Radiocommunication Regulations of
Madrid.

Subject to plans in course of exe-
cution, the undersigned Govern-
ments undertake not to make, be-
tween now and the end of the work
of the European Conference, any
change in their broadcasting service
which might appreciably affect the
general situation of the radioelectric
services of the European region.

§ 8. If the European Conference
is led to contemplate the use by a
broadcasting station of a frequency
in one of the bands reserved for other
European regional services, the ar-
rangement adopted shall stipulate
that if this use causes interference
which was not foreseen at the time
of the admission of the broadcasting
station, the Administrations con-
cerned shall do their utmost to ob-
tain agreements capable of eliminat-
ing this interference and, in this case,
the authorised services shall have the
preference in relation to the broad-
casting services.

§ 9. If the European Conference is
led to contemplate the use by a
broadcasting station of a frequency
in one of the bands reserved inter-
nationally, in the general table of
allocation of frequencies, for the
mobile services, it shall, before
issuing its recommendation, make an
exhaustive study of the technical
conditions under .which this service
could be carried out without preju-
dice to the authorised international
mobile services and shall do its ut-
most to obtain the agreements neces-
sary to such use. It is recognised that

cations contenues dans le document
annex<§ au present Protocole.

L'arrangement conclu & cette con-
ference comprendra, parmi les regies
g6n£rales a observer a 1'avemr, des
dispositions analogues a celles ci-
avant vis6es, ainsi qu'une clause
correspondant & 1'alinla (5) du § 5
de 1'article 7 du R&glement g6n6ral
des radiocommunications de Madrid.

Sous reserve des pro jets en vole
d'ex£cution, les gouvernernents sous-
sign6s s'engagent, d'ici a la con-
clusion des travaux de la Confe-
rence europ£enne, & n'appprter dans
leur service de radiodiffusion aucun
changement de nature a affecter
sensiblement la situation d'ensemble
des services radio£lectriques de la
r6gion europ£enne.

§8. Si la Conference europ£enne
est amende a envisager 1'utilisation,
par une station de radiodiffusion,
d'une frequence appartenant a une
des bandes r6servles £ d'autres ser-
vices r£gionaux europ6ens, 1'arrange-
ment conclu stipulera qu'au cas oft
cette utilisation provoquerait des
interferences qui n'avaient pas £t6
pr6vues lors de I'admission de ladite
station de radiodiffusion, les admin-
istrations int6ress6es s'efforceront
d'obtenir des accords susceptibles
d'61iminer ces interferences et que,
dans ces cas, les services autoris6s
seront privil£gi£s par rapport au
service de radiodiffusion.

§ 9. Si la Conference europ£enne
est amende & envisager 1'utilisation,
par une station de radiodiffusion,
d'une frequence appartenant a une
des bandes r<§serv£es internationale-
ment, dans le tableau g6n6ral d'at-
tribution des frequences, aux services
mobiles, elle devra, avant d'6mettre
son avis, proc6der, &. une 6tude tech-
nique approfondie des conditions
dans lesquelles ce service pourrait
6tre effectu6 sans g&ne pour les ser-
vices mobiles internationalement au-
toris6s et s'efforcera d'obtenir les
accords n6cessaires & une telle utilisa-

Dec. 9, 1932

ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL (EUROPEAN)

197

these exceptions do not prejudice in
any way the provisions of § I of
Article 7 of the General Radiocom-
munication Regulations of Madrid
which remain entirely applicable.

CHAPTER IV

PROVISIONS RELATING TO THE SPECIAL
POSITION OF THE UNION OF SOVIET
SOCIALIST REPUBLICS (U.S.S.R.)

§ 10. The undersigned Govern-
ments recognise the following reser-
vations of the U.S.S.R. so far as con-
cerns the special use, by its services,
of the following frequencies :

150 to 285 kc/s (2,000 to 1,053 m) broadcast-
ing

285 to 315 kc/s (1,053 to 952 m) radiobea-
cons

315 to 340 kc/s (952 to 882 m) aeronautical
services and direction-finding

340 to 420 kc/s (882 to 714 m) broadcasting

515 to 550 kc/s (583 to 545 m) aeronautical
services

These same Governments declare
that the above-mentioned recogni-
tion has its origin in considerations
of a special character, and cannot
serve as a precedent in any other
case.

During the preparation for the
European Conference and during the
work of that Conference, the under-
signed Governments, including the
U.S.S.R., undertake to collaborate
fully with the object of bringing
about a unified organisation of the
European radioelectric services hav-
ing for its special aim the elimination
of interference between stations.

CHAPTER V

FINAL PROVISIONS

§ ii. The European Conference
shall fix the date of the entry into
force of the agreement concluded.

§ 12. The expenses of the Confer-
ence are borne by the Governments

tion. II est bien entendu que, par
ces derogations, il ne peut £tre porte
atteinte aux dispositions du § I de
Tarticle 7 du R&glement g<§n6ral des
radiocommunications de Madrid, qui
restent entierement applicables.

CHAPITRE IV

DISPOSITIONS RELATIVES AUX CONDI-
TIONS SP&CIALES DE L'UNION DES
R&PUBLIQUES SOVIETISTES SOCIA-
LISTES (U.R.S.S.)

§ 10. Les gouvernements sous-
sign6s reconnaissent les reserves
suivantes de FU.R.S.S. en ce qui re-
garde Tutilisation sp<§ciale, par ses
services, des frequences suivantes :

150^ a 285 kc/s (2 ooo a I 053 m) radiodiffu-

sion
285 a 315 kc/s d 053 & 952 m) radiophares

315 & 340 kc/s (952 a 882 m) services aero-

nautiques et radiogoniometrie
340 a 420 kc/s (882 & 714 m) radiodiffusion
515 a 550 kc/s (583 & 545 m) services aero-

nautiques

Ces m£mes gouvernements d£-
clarent que la reconnaissance sus-
mentionnee, tirant son origine de
considerations d'un caract&re parti-
culier, ne pourra servir de pr£c£dent
dans aucun autre cas.

Dans la preparation de la Confe-
rence europeenne et pendant les
travaux de cette conference, les
gouvernements soussignes, y com-
pris I'U.R.S.S., s'engagent 4 prlter
toute leur collaboration en vue
d'aboutir £ une organisation unifi6e
des services radio^lectriques euro-
p6ens ayant tout sp6cialement pour
but d'eiiminer les interferences entre
les stations.

CHAPITRE V

DISPOSITIONS FINALES

§ ii. La Conference europ6enne
fixera la date de Tentr6e en vigueur
de rarrangement conclu.

§ 12. Les d£penses de la confe-
rence sont & la charge des gouverne-

198

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No, 319

and the international organisations
which take part in it.

§ 13. The present Protocol enters
into force immediately ; it shall cease
to have effect at the date of the clos-
ing of the European Conference.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the respec-
tive plenipotentiaries have signed
the present Additional Protocol in a
single copy which will remain depos-
ited in the archives of the Govern-
ment of Spain and of which a copy
will be delivered to each party.

Done at Madrid the 9th of Decem-
ber 1932.

ments et des organismes interna-
tionaux qui y prennent part.

§ 13. Le present Protocole entre
en vigueur imm£diatement ; il cessera
son effet £ la date de cldture de la
Conference europ6enne.

EN FOI DE QUOI, les ptenipotenti-
aires respectifs ont sign6 le present
Protocole additionnel en un exem-
plaire qui restera d6pos6 aux archives
du Gouvernement de TEspagne et
dont une copie sera remise & chaque
Partie.

Fait & Madrid, le 9 d<§cembre 1932.

[Signed:] For Germany: HERMANN GIESS, Dr. Ing. HANS CARL STEIDLE,
Dr. PAtrL JAGER, Dr. HANS HARBICH, PAUL MUNCH, MARTIN FEUERHAHN,
SIEGFRIED MEY, ERHARD MAERTENS; for Austria: RUDOLPH OESTREICHER,
Ing. H. PFEUFFER; for Belgium: R. CORTEIL; for the Vatican City State:
GUISEPPE GIANFRANCESCHI; for the Swiss Confederation: G. KELLER,
E. METZLER; for Denmark: KAY CHRISTIANSEN, C. LERCHE, GREDSTED; for
Danzig Free City: Ing. HENRYK KOWALSKI, ZANDER; for Egypt: R. MURRAY,
MOHAMED SAID; for Spain and the Spanish Zone of Morocco: MIGUEL
SASTRE, RAM6N MIGUEL NIETO, GABRIEL HOMBRE, FRANCISCO VIDAL,
J. DE ENCIO, TonAs FERNANDEZ QUINTANA, LEOPOLDO CAL, TRINIDAD
MATRES ; for Finland : NIILO ORASMAA, VILJO YL$STALO ; for France, Algeria,
Morocco and Tunis: JULES GAUTIER; for the United Kingdom of Great
Britain and Northern Ireland: F. W. PHILLIPS, J. LOUDEN, F. W. HOME,
C. H. BOYD, J. P. G. WORLLEDGE; for Greece: TH. PENTHEROUDAKIS, STAM
INTicoLis; for Hungary: Ing. JULES ERDOSS; for the Irish Free State: P. S.
OH-£IGEARTAIGH, E. CUISIN; for Iceland: G. HLIDDAL; for Italy, Cyrenaica
and Tripolitania: G. GNEME, D. CRETY; for Latvia: B. EINBERG; for Lithu-
ania: Ing. K. GAIGALIS; for Norway: T. ENGSET, HERMOD PETERSEN,
ANDR. HADLAND ; for the Netherlands : H. J. BOETJE, J. A. BLAND VD BERG;
for Poland: K. KRULISZ; for Portugal: MIGUEL VAZ DUARTE BACELAR,
Josfe DE Liz FERREIRA, JUNIOR, DAVID DE SOUSA PIRES, JOAQUIM RODRIGUES
GONCALVES; for Roumania: Ing. T. TANASESCO; for Sweden: G. WOLD;
for Czechoslovakia: Ing. JAROMIR SVOBODA; for Turkey: FAHRI, I. CEMAL,
MAZHAR; for the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics: EUGENE HIRSCHFELD,
ALEXANDRE KOKADEEV; for Jugoslavia: D. A. ZLATANOVITCH.

DOCUMENT
annexed to the Additional Protocol

DIRECTIVES FOR THE EUROPEAN CONFER-
ENCE ON THE QUESTION OF LIMITATION
OF POWER

(See §7.)

(i) In principle, the power of broad-
casting stations must not exceed the value

DOCUMENT
annexe au Protocole additionnel

DIRECTIVES POUR LA CONFERENCE EURO-
P&ENNE EN MATI&RE DE LIMITATION
DE PUISSANCE

(Voir le § 7.)

t (i) En principe, la puissance des sta-
tions de radiodiffusion ne doit pas d6-

Dec. 9, 1932

ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL (EUROPEAN)

199

permitting the economical provision of an
efficient national service of good quality
within the limits of the country in question.

(2) The unmodulated power, measured
in the aerial, of broadcasting stations
shall not exceed the following values :

1. for frequencies below 300

kc/s (waves above 1,000 m) 150 kW;

2. for frequencies above 300

kc/s (waves below i ,000 m) 100 kW l.

Nevertheless, the power may, excep-
tionally, exceed the figures given above
when: 1st. the geographical situation, the
area of the territory to be served, the con-
ditions of propagation of waves in the
zone to be served or exceptional national
requirements warrant it; 2nd. the techni-
cal devices used permit it without causing
an increase in interference with other
services.

(3) The power of any broadcasting
station must not exceed that necessary to
provide an effective national service with
a field-strength not exceeding 2 mV/m
(carrier wave) by day at the most remote
frontier.

(4) As a general rule, the value of the
effective field-strength produced by day
by broadcasting stations working on fre-
quencies below 300 kc/s (wave-lengths
above 1,000 m) must not exceed 10 mV/m
(carrier wave) beyond the frontiers of the
countries to which these stations belong.
Nevertheless, other provisions permitting
this figure to be exceeded may be adopted
exceptionally.

passer la valeur permettant d'assurer
e'conomiquement un service national
efficace et de bonne qualite dans les limites
du pays consid£re.

(2) La puissance non modu!6e mesuree
dans Fantenne des stations de radio-
diffusion ne depassera pas les valeurs
suivantes :

1. pour les frequences in-
f^rieures a 300 kc/s (ondes
superieures a I ooo m) 150 kW;

2. pour les frequences su-
perieures a 300 kc/s
(ondes inferieures a

1000 m) 100 kW *,

Toutefois, la puissance pourra depasser
exceptionnellement les chiffres donnes
ci-avant lorsque: i° la situation g&>
graphique, l*6tendue du territoire &
desservir, les conditions de propagation
des ondes dans la zone a desservir pu des
besoins nationaux exceptionnels le justifi-
ent; 2° les dispositifs techniques utilises
le permettent sans causer une augmenta-
tion de g§ne aux autres services.

(3) La puissance de toute station de
radiodiffusion ne doit pas depasser celle
qui est n6cessaire pour assurer un service
national effectif avec un champ ne d6-
passant pas 2 mV/m (onde porteuse)
pendant le jour & la frontiere la plus
eloign£e.

(4) En regie gen&rale, la valeur du
champ efficace produit pendant le jour par
les stations de radipdiffusion travaillant
avec des frequences inf^rieures a 300 kc/s
(longueurs d'onde superieures a I ooo m)
ne devra pas depasser 10 mV/m (onde
porteuse) en dehors des fronti&res des pays
auxquels appartiennent ces stations.
Toutefois, des dispositions differentes
permettant de d6passer ce chiffre pourront
§tre preVues, exceptionnellement.

* For the following stations: Prague, Vienna, Budapest, Paris, Toulouse, Rennes and Leipzig at
present in use or in course of construction, the power permitted is 120 kW.

i Pour les stations suivantes: Prague, Vienne, Budapest, Paris, Toulouse, Rennes, Leipzig, actu-
ellement en service ou en cours de construction, la puissance admise est de 120 kW.

2OO

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 320

TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS annexed to the Telecommunication
Convention. Signed at Madrid, December 10, 1932.

BJ2GLEMENT TfiLfiGRAPHIQUE annexe £ let Convention des
telecommunications. Signe & Madrid, 10 decembre 1932.

EDITOR'S NOTE. These regulations supersede the regulations annexed to the Telegraph
Convention of St. Petersburg as revised at Paris in 1925 (No. 146, ante), and modified at
Brussels in 1928 (No. I46ar ante). Several bipartite agreements regulating telegraphic
service have been concluded.

ACCESSIONS. On July i, 1937, these regulations had been approved or acceded to by all
the states which had ratified or acceded to the telecommunication convention (No. 316,
ante), except Afghanistan, Canada, Panama, and United States of America, and by Bolivia,
Greece, and Sweden.

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of these regulations is also published in 151 League of Nations
Treaty Series, p. 50. (See the bibliography under No. 316, ante.)

Entered into force January i, I934-3
Text and translation from publication issued by the General Post Office, London.

[Translation]
CHAPTER I

RELATION TO THE WORKING OF
RADIOCOMMUNICATION

ARTICLE i. — Application of the Telegraph
Regulations to radio communication

I1] 2 So far as the present Regulations do
not provide otherwise, provisions appli-
cable to wire communication are also ap-
plicable to wireless communication.

CHAPTER II

INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM

ARTICLE 2. — Composition of the system

[2] § i. Offices between which the ex-
change of telegrams is continuous or very
active, are, so far as practicable, connected
by direct communication channels, pro-
vided in sufficient number to fulfil all the
requirements of the service. These chan-
nels must reach the necessary mechani-
cal, electrical and technical standards,
regard being had, so far as practicable, to
the recommendations of the Interna-
tional Telegraph Consultative Committee
(C.C.I.T.).

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3479, August 30, 1934.

2 The consecutive numbering of the paragraphs by figures in brackets was decided upon by the
International Telegraph Conference of Madrid (1932), to facilitate reference, — ED.

CHAPITRE I

REPERCUSSION SUR L'EXPLOITATION DES
RAMOCOMMUNICATIONS

ARTICLE i. — Application du K&glement
tttegraphique aux radiocommunications

[l] 2 En tant que le present Reglement n'en
dispose pas autrement, les prescriptions
applicables aux communications par fil le
sont aussi aux communications par sans fil.

CHAPITRE II

ROSEAU INTERNATIONAL

ARTICLE 2. — Constitution du reseau

[*] § i. Les bureaux entre lesquels re-
change des telegrammes est cpntinu pu
tres actif spnt, autant que possible, relies
par des voies de communication directes,
etablies en nombre suffisant pour satisfaire
a tous les besoins du service. Celles-ci
doivent, en outre, presenter les garanties
mecaniques, electriques et techniques
suffisantes, en tenant compte, autant que
possible, des avis du Comit6 consultatif
international telegraphique (C.C.I.T.)

Dec. 10, 1932

TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS

2O I

[3] § 2. If on the whole of the route, or
on certain sections only, trunk cables are
available, these should, so far as prac-
ticable, be used also for the provision of
international channels of telegraph com-
munication. For this purpose the Ad-
ministrations agree together on the pro-
cedure. As regards technical details, the
joint recommendations of the Interna-
tional Telegraph Consultative Committee
(C.C.I.T.) and of the International Tele-
phone Consultative Committee (C.C.I.F.)
are, so far as practicable, taken as a guide.

ARTICLE 3. — Use of communication
channels

[4] § i. The operation of international
communication channels is the subject of
agreement between the Administrations
concerned.

[5] §2. Transmissions by international
communication channels are only effected,
as a general rule, by terminal offices.
Each Administration, so far as it is con-
cerned, arranges, on every important in-
ternational communication channel, for
one or more intermediate offices to take
the place of the terminal office, when di-
rect working between the two terminal
offices becomes impossible.

[6] § 3. International communication
channels, which are interrupted or are not
in use, may, on national sections, be
wholly or partly diverted from their
normal purpose, on condition that the
Administrations concerned restore them
to their normal purpose as soon as the in-
terruption ceases or as soon as they are
asked to do so.

ARTICLE 4. — Maintenance of
communication channels

[7] § I. Administrations make, for each
of the international communication chan-
nels, arrangements adapted to secure the
greatest benefit from it,
[8] § 2. (i) The terminal offices on busy
international wires measure the electrical
conditions (insulation, resistance, etc.),
of these wires as often as they think
necessary. They agree together as to the
day and time of the measurements, com-
municate the results to one another and
proceed as quickly as possible to remove
faults ascertained.

[3] § 2. Si, sur la totality du parcours ou
sur certaines sections seulement, des
cables interurbains sont disponibles,
ceux-ci sont, autant que possible, 6gale-
ment & utiliser pour retablissement de
voies de communication telegraphiques
internationales. A cet effet, les adminis-
trations interess6es s'entendent sur la
maniere de proceder. En ce qui concerne
les details techniques, font regie, autant
que possible, les recommandations com-
munes du Comitd consul tatif international
telegraphique (C.C.I.T.) et du Comit6
consultatif international telephonique
(C.C.I.F.).

ARTICLE 3. — Utilisation des voies de

communication

[4] § i. L'exploitation des voies de com-
munication internationales fait 1'objet
d'un accord entre les administrations
int6ressees.

[5] § 2. Les transmissions par les voies
de communication internationales ne sont
effectu6es, en regie generate, que par les
bureaux t£te de ligne. Les administra-
tions prennent, chacune en ce qui la con-
cerne, des dispositions pour que, sur
chaque voie de communication interna-
tionale importante, un ou plusieurs
bureaux du parcours puissent se substituer
au bureau design^ comme point extreme,
lorsque le travail direct entre les deux
bureaux t§te de ligne devient impossible.
[6] § 3. En cas de derangement ou^ de
non utilisation, les voies de communica-
tion internationales peuvent, sur les sec-
tions nationales, toe d£tournees en tout
ou partie de leur affectation normale, &
la condition que les administrations in-
t6ress6es les ramenent & cette affectation
des que le derangement a cess6 ou que la
demande en a 6t6 faite.

ARTICLE 4. — Entretien des voies de
communication

[7] § i. Les administrations prennent,
pour chacune des voies de communication
internationales, les dispositions qui per-
mettent d'en tirer le meilleur parti.
[*] §2. (i) Les bureaux tlte de ligne des
fils internationaux a grand trafic mesurent
l'£tat £lectrique (isolement, resistance,
etc.) de ces fils chaque fois qu'ils le jugent
utile. Us sfentendent sur le jour et
1'heure de ces mesures, se communiquent
les r6sultats de celles-ci et font prpc6der
le plus promptement possible
tion des d6fauts constates.

2O2

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 320

[9] (2) When trunk cables are used for
the provision of busy international tele-
graph communication channels, the meas-
urements are taken in accordance with
the special -provisions of the Telephone
Regulations.

[10] § 3- I*1 cases of interruption of inter-
national communication channels, the
offices concerned inform one another of
the result of their enquiries with a view to
fixing the place and nature of the inter-
ruption; the Administrations concerned
undertake to repair or, so far as prac-
ticable, to replace the defective section in
the shortest possible time.

CHAPTER III

NATURE AND HOURS OF SERVICE OF
OFFICES

ARTICLE 5. — Opening, duration and closing
of service. Legal time

[n] § I . Each Administration fixes the
hours during which offices shall remain
open to the public.

[12] § 2, Important offices, working di-
rect one with another, remain open, so far
as practicable, day and night without
interruption.

[l8] § 3. In offices open permanently, the
closing of daily sessions takes place at a
time fixed by agreement between the
offices in correspondence.
[l4] §4. Offices which are not perma-
nently open may not close before transmit-
ting all their international telegrams to an
office which is open longer, or before re-
ceiving from the office in correspondence
any international telegrams on hand at the
time of closing.

[16] § 5. Between two offices in different
countries which communicate directly,
close of work is requested by the office
closing to the one which remains open,
and is given by the latter office. When
the two offices close at the same time,
close of work is requested by the office
belonging to the country whose capital is
more to die east, and is given by the other
office,

["] ^ § 6. With the exception of countries
having two or more time zones, the same
time is used in all offices in the same coun-
try. The legal time or times adopted by
an Administration are notified to the
other Administrations through the me-
dium of the Bureau of the Union.

[9] (2) Lorsque des cables interurbains
sont utilises pour l'£tablissement des voies
de communication t£16graphiques interna-
tionales & grand trafic, il est proc6d6 aux
mesures conform6ment aux dispositions
sp6ciales du R&glement t61£phonique.
[10] § 3. En cas de derangement des
voies de communication international,
les bureaux int£ress6s se communiquent
mutuellement les r£sultats de leurs re-
cherches, dans le but de determiner Fen-
droit et la nature de Interruption; les
administrations int6ress£es s'engagent a
r6parer ou a remplacer, dans la mesure
du possible, et dans le plus bref d61ai, la
section d6fectueuse.

CHAPITRE III

NATURE ET &TENDUE DU SERVICE DES
BUREAUX

ARTICLE 5. — Ouverture, duree et cldture du
service, Heure legate

["] § i. Chaque administration fixe les
heures pendant lesquelles les bureaux
doivent rester ouverts au public.
[1Z] § 2. Les bureaux importants, tra-
vaillant directement Tun avec 1'autre,
restent ouverts, autant que possible, le
jour et la nuit, sans interruption.
t18] § 3* Dans les bureaux a service
permanent, la cldture des stances jour-
nalieres est donn£e & une heure 6tablie
d'accord entre les bureaux correspondants.
[14] § 4. Les bureaux dont le service n'est
point permanent ne peuvent prendre
cldture avant d'avoir transmis tous leurs
t616grammes internationaux & un bureau
dont le service est plus prolong6 et avant
d'avoir recju du bureau correspondant les
t616grammes internationaux qui sont en
instance au moment de la cldture.
[16] § 5. Entre deux bureaux de pays
diff£rents communiquant directement,
la cldture est demand6e par celui qui se
ferme a celui qui derneure ouvert, et
donnee par ce dernier. Lorsque les deux
bureaux en relation se ferment au m§me
moment, la cldture est demanded par celui
qui appartient au pays dont la capitale a
la position la plus orientale, et donnde par
1'autre bureau.

[16] § 6. A 1'exception des pays ayant
deux ou plusieurs zones horaires, la m6me
heure est adoptee par tous les bureaux du
me^me pays. L'heure 16gale ou les heures
16gales adopt6es par une administration
sont notifies aux autres administrations
par rinterm6diaire du Bureau de 1'Union.

Dec. 10, 1932

TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS

203

ARTICLE 6. — Symbols describing the kind
and duration of the service of offices

[17] (i) The following symbols are used
to describe the kind of service and the
working hours of offices:

N office permanently open (day and

night) ;
R land station (radiocommunica-

tion);

S semaphore office;
K office at which all kinds of tele-
grams may be handed in and which
delivers only to callers (telegraph
restant) and to persons within the
limits of a railway station ;

VK office at which either all kinds of
telegrams or only those of railway
passengers or station officials may
be handed in but no telegrams are
delivered ;

E office open only during the stay of
the Head of the State or of the
Court;
B office open only during the bathing

season ;
H office open only during the winter

season ;

* office temporarily closed.
[18] (2) The foregoing symbols may be
used in combination with one another.
[19] (3) The symbols B and H are com-
pleted, so far as practicable, by the dates
of opening and closing of the temporary
office in question.

CHAPTER IV

GENERAL PROVISIONS RELATING TO
CORRESPONDENCE

ARTICLE 7. — Establishing the identity of
the sender or addressee

[20] The sender or the addressee of a
private telegram must prove his identity
when requested to do so by the office of
origin or the office of destination respec-
tively.

CHAPTER V

PREPARATION AND HANDING-IN OF
TELEGRAMS

ARTICLE 8. — Plain and secret language.
Acceptance of these languages

[ai] § I. The text of telegrams may be
expressed in plain language or in secret

ARTICLE 6. — Notations indignant la nature
et Vetendue du service des bureaux

[17] (i) Les notations suivantes sont
adopters pour indiquer la nature du service
et les heures d'ouverture des bureaux:
N bureau a service permanent (de

jour et de nuit) ;
R station terrestre (de radiocom-

munication) ;

S bureau s£maphorique;
K bureau qui admet au d6part les
tel^grammes de toute cat£gorie et
qui n'accepte a 1'arrivee que ceux
a remettre "telegraphe restant"
ou a distribuer dans Tenceinte
d'une gare;

VK bureau qui admet au d6part les
t61egramm.es de toute categoric ou
seulement ceux des voyageurs ou
du personnel r6sidant dans la gare,
et qui n'accepte aucun tele"gramme
a Tarrivde;

E bureau ouvert seulement pendant
le sejour du chef de TEtat ou de la
cour;
B bureau ouvert seulement pendant

la saison des bains;
H bureau ouvert seulement pendant

la saison d'hiver;

* bureau temporairement ferm6.
[18] (2) Les notations qui precedent
peuvent se combiner entre elles.
t19] (3) Les notations B et H sont com-
pletes, autant que possible, par Pindica-
tion des dates d'ouverture et de fermeture
des bureaux temporaires dont il s'agit.

CHAPITRE IV

DISPOSITIONS GENERALES RELATIVES A LA
CORRESPOND ANCE

ARTICLE 7. — Constatation de Videntite de
Vexpediteur ou du destinataire

[20] L'expediteur ou le destinataire d'un
telegramme priv6 est tenu d'etablir son
identity lorsqu'il y est invit£ par le bureau
d'origine ou celui de destination, re-
spectivement.

CHAPITRE V

REDACTION ET DEPOT DES TELEGRAMMES

ARTICLE 8. — Langage clair et langage
secret. Acceptation de ces langages

[al] § i. Le texte des t616grammes peut
£tre r6dig£ en langage clair ou en langage

204

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 320

language, the latter being divided into
code language and cypher language.
Each of these languages may be used
alone or together with the others in the
same telegram.

[22] §2. All Administrations accept, in
all their relations, telegrams in plain lan-
guage. They may refuse to admit both
in acceptance and in delivery private tele-
grams wholly or partly in secret language,
but they must allow these telegrams to
pass in transit, except in the case of sus-
pension defined in Article 27 of the Con-
vention.

ARTICLE 9. — Plain language

[28] § i. Plain language is that which
presents an intelligible meaning in one or
more of the languages authorised for in-
ternational telegraph correspondence,
each word and each expression having the
meaning normally assigned to it in the
language to which it belongs.

[24] § 2. By telegrams in plain language
those are meant of which the text is wholly
in plain language. The character of a
telegram in plain language is not, how-
ever, changed by the presence of numbers
expressed either in letters or in figures,
which have not a secret meaning, arbi-
trary addresses, commercial marks, ex-
change quotations, letters representing the
signals of the International Code of Sig-
nals used in semaphore telegrams and
radiotelegrams, abbreviations in current
use in ordinary or commercial correspond-
ence, such as fob, cif, caf, svp or any simi-
lar expression, the admissibility of which
is decided by the country despatching the
telegram, or a check word or check num-
ber placed at the beginning of the text in
bank and similar telegrams.

P5] §3- Each Administration designates,
from among the languages used on the ter-
ritory of the country to which it belongs,
those which it authorises for use in inter-
national telegraph correspondence in
plain language. The use of Latin and
Esperanto is also authorised.

ARTICLE 10. — Code language

[*8] § i. Code language is composed
either of artificial words, or of real words
not used with the meaning normally as-
signed to them in the language to which

secret, ce dernier se distinguant en Ian-
gage convenu et en langage chiffr6.
Chacun de ces langages peut £tre employe
seul ou conjointement avec les autres dans
un m&ne telegramme.
[22] § 2. Toutes les administrations ac-
ceptent, dans toutes leurs relations, les
t616grammes en langage clair. Elles
peuvent n'admettre ni au depart ni a
1' arrived les telegrammes priv6s r6dig6s
totalement ou partiellement en langage
secret, mais elles doivent laisser ces t£16-
grammes circuler en transit, sauf le cas
de suspension de"fini a 1'article 27 de la
Convention.

ARTICLE 9. — Langage clair

[23] § i. Le langage clair est celui qui
off re un sens comprehensible dans une ou
plusieurs des langues autoris6es pour la
correspondance telegraphique interna-
nationale, chaque mot et chaque expres-
sion ayant la signification qui leur est
normalernent attribu6e dans la langue a
laquelle ils appartiennent.
[24] § 2. On en tend par tele" grammes en
langage clair, ceux dont le texte est en-
ti&rernent r£dig6 en langage clair. Toute-
fois, la presence de nombres Merits, soit
en lettres soit en chiffres, qui n'ont aucune
signification secr&te, d'adresses conven-
tionnelles, de marques de commerce, de
cours de bourse, de lettres repr6sentant
les signaux du code international de sig-
naux, employees dans les t616grammes
se"maphoriques et dans les radiotel£-
grammes, d' expressions abr6g£es d'un
usage courant dans la correspondance
usuelle ou commerciale, comme fob, cif,
caf, svp ou toute autre analogue, dont
F appreciation appartient au pays qui
exp6die le tele" gramme, d'un mot ou d'un
nombre de contrdle plac£ en t£te du texte
dans les t£16grammes de banque et ceux
analogues, ne change pas le caract&re
d'un t£l<§gramme en langage clair.
[25] § 3- Chaque administration designe,
parmi les langues usit6es sur le territoire
du pays auquel elle appartient, celles dont
elle autorise 1'emploi dans la correspon-
dance teldgraphique internationale en
langage clair. L' usage du latin et de
Tespeianto est e"galement autoris6.

ARTICLE 10. — Langage convenu

p6]^ § i. Le langage convenu est celui
qui se compose soit de mots artificiels, soit
de mots r£els n' ayant pas la signification
qui leur est normalernent attribute dans

Dec. 10, 1932

TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS

205

they belong and consequently not forming
intelligible phrases in one or more of the
languages authorised for telegraph cor-
respondence in plain language, or lastly of
a mixture of real words as defined and
artificial words.

[Z7] § 2. (i) By telegrams in code lan-
guage those are meant of which the text
contains words belonging to this language.
[28] (2) The code words, whether real or
artificial, must not contain more than five
letters; they may be formed in any way.
They must not contain the accented
letter 6.

[Z9] §3- The officer who accepts a tele-
gram in code language enters on the form
the service instruction =CDE = , which
is transmitted to destination at the be-
ginning of the preamble of the telegram.
[30] § 4. CDE telegrams are charged at
6/ioths of the full rate in the case of the
extra-European system, and at 7/ioths
of the full rate in the case of the European
system.

t31] § 5- (*) Telegrams of which the text
contains words in code language and
words in plain language and/or figures
and groups of figures, are considered, for
the purpose of charging, as belonging to
code language. Nevertheless:

[32] (#) the number of figures or groups
of figures must not exceed one-half of the
number of chargeable words in the text
and signature;

[3JJ] (6) for the purpose of charging, bank
and similar telegrams expressed in plain
language which contain a check word or
check number placed at the beginning of
the text (Art. 9, § 2) are not considered as
code telegrams.

["] (2) Telegrams of which the text
contains words in code language and
groups of figures in excess of one-half of
the chargeable words in the text and sig-
nature, are considered for the purpose of
charging, as telegrams in cypher language.
[35] § 6. The sender of a telegram in code
language or code language mixed with
another language must produce the code
from which the text or part of the text of
the telegram has been compiled, if the
office of origin or the Administration to
which this office is subject requests it.

ARTICLE n. — Cypher language
[38] § i. Cypher language is formed:

la langue £ laquelle ils appartiennent et,
de ce fait, ne forment pas des phrases
compr6hensibles dans une ou plusieurs
des langues autoris6es pour la correspond-
ance telegraphique en langage clair, soit
enfin^ d'un melange de mots r6els ainsi
d6finis et de mots artificiels.
[27] § 2. (i) On en tend par t61egrammes
en langage convenu ceux dont le texte con-
tient des mots appartenant a ce langage.
[28] (2) Les mots convenus, qu'ils soient
reels ou artificiels, ne doivent pas com-
prendre plus de cinq lettres; ils peuvent
£tre construits librement. Ces mots ne
peuvent contenir la lettre accentuee e.
[29] §3. L'agent qui accepte un tele-
gramme en langage convenu inscrit sur
la minute la mention de service "CDE"
qui est transmise en t£te du pr<§ambule du
t£16gramme jusqu'a destination.
[30] §4. Les taegrammes CDE sont
taxes aux 6/10 du tarif plein s'il s'agit
du regime extra-europ6en, et aux 7/10 du
tarif plein s'il s'agit du regime europ6en.

[31] §5- (i) Les tel6gramm.es dont le
texte contient des mots en langage
convenu et des mots en langage clair
et/ou des chiffres et des groupes de chif-
fres, sont considers, pour la taxation,
comme appartenant au langage convenu.
Toutefois:

[32] (a) le nombre des chiffres ou groupes
de chiffres ne doit pas d6passer la moitid
du nombre des mots taxes du texte et de la
signature ;

I33] (&) pour la taxation, ne sont pas con-
sideres comme telegrammes convenus les
telegrammes de banque et ceux analogues
r6diges en langage clair contenant un mot
ou un nombre de contrdle plac6 en t£te
du texte (art. 9, § 2).
[34] (2) Les telegrammes dont le texte
contient des mots en langage convenu et des
groupes de chiffres en nombre sup6rieur &
la moitie des mots tax6s du texte et de la
signature sont consid6res, pour la taxation,
comme des telegrammes en langage chiff re.
[35] § 6. L'exp6diteur d'un t&egramme
en langage convenu ou mixte convenu est
tenu de pr6senter le code d'apr£s lequel le
texte ou par tie du texte du t616gramme a
et6 redigi, si le bureau d'origine ou 1'ad-
ministration dont ce bureau releve lui
en font la demande.

ARTICLE 11. — Langage cUffre

[38] § I. Le langage chiffre est celui qui
est forme:

206

INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

No. 320

[8T] 1st. of Arabic figures, groups or
series of Arabic figures with a secret
meaning;

[88] 2nd. of words, names, expressions
or combinations of letters, with the ex-
ception of the letter £, not fulfilling the
conditions of plain language (Art. 9) or
code language (Art. 10).
[3£l] § 2. The combination, in one group,
of figures and letters with a secret mean-
ing is not allowed.

[40] § 3« The groups indicated in Article
9, §2 are not considered as having a
secret meaning.

ARTICLE 12. — Preparation of telegrams.
Characters which may be used

[41] § I. The original telegram must be

legibly written in characters which have

an equivalent in the table of telegraph

signals given below and which are used in

the country in which the telegram is

presented.

[42] § 2. These characters are as follows:

Letters: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K,
L, M, N, 0, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y,
Z,fi.

Figures: i, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, o.

Signs of punctuation: Full stop (.)>
comma (,), colon (:), note of interrogation
(?), apostrophe ('), hyphen or dash ( — ).

Other signs used in writing: Brackets ( ),

fraction bar (/), underline ( ).

M § 3- Every footnote, insertion, era-
sure, elimination or correction must be
approved by the sender or his representa-
tive.

M §4. (i) Roman figures are ad-
mitted as written, but are transmitted as
Arabic figures.

[45] (2) If, however, the sender of a
telegram desires the addressee to be in-
formed that Roman figures are intended,
he writes the Arabic figure or figures, and
inserts the word " Roman" in front of the
figure or figures.

[46] §5- The multiplication sign (X) is
admitted, although it has no equivalent
in the table in these Regulations. It is
replaced in transmission by the letter X,
which is counted as a separate word.
[*7] §6. (i) Expressions such as 30% 30m%
30™, i°, 2°, <^, i' (minute), i" (second),
etc., cannot be reproduced by the instru-
ments ; senders must substitute an equiva-
lent which can be telegraphed, thus for
example, for the expressions quoted above:
30 power a (or 30 a), trentieme, trentaine,

[37] i° de chiffres arabes, de groupes pu
de series de chiffres arabes ayant une sig-
nification secrete;

[8S] 2° de mots, noms, expressions ou
reunions de lettres, & Texclusion de la let-
tre i, ne remplissant pas les conditions du
langage clair (art. 9) ou du langage con-
venu (art. 10